Icontrol AC Rel 3 4 42-02-2223 B5

Motion Control Engineering, Inc.
11380 White Rock Road

Rancho Cordova, CA 95742
voice 916 463 9200

fax 916 463 9201
www.mceinc.com
User Guide,
iControl for AC Elevators, Release 3, 4
ATTENTION!

Manual # 42-02-2223, Rev B5, July 2015

Copyright
2015, Motion Control Engineering. All Rights Reserved.
This document may not be reproduced, electronically or mechanically, in whole or in part, without
written permission from Motion Control Engineering.
Trademarks
All trademarks or registered product names appearing in this document are the exclusive property
of the respective owners.
Warning and Disclaimer

Although every effort has been made to make this document as complete and accurate as possible,
Motion Control Engineering and the document authors, publishers, distributors, and
representatives have neither liability nor responsibility for any loss or damage arising from
information contained in this document or from informational errors or omissions. Information
contained in this document shall not be deemed to constitute a commitment to provide service,
equipment, or software by Motion Control Engineering or the document authors, publishers,
distributors, or representatives.
Limited Warranty
Motion Control Engineering (manufacturer) warrants its products for a period of 15 months from
the date of shipment from its factory to be free from defects in workmanship and materials. Any
defect appearing more than 15 months from the date of shipment from the factory shall be
deemed to be due to ordinary wear and tear. Manufacturer, however, assumes no risk or liability for
results of the use of the products purchased from it, including, but without limiting the generality
of the forgoing: (1) The use in combination with any electrical or electronic components, circuits,
systems, assemblies or any other material or equipment (2) Unsuitability of this product for use in
any circuit, assembly or environment. Purchasers rights under this warranty shall consist solely of
requiring the manufacturer to repair, or in manufacturer's sole discretion, replace free of charge,
F.O.B. factory, any defective items received at said factory within the said 15 months and
determined by manufacturer to be defective. The giving of or failure to give any advice or
recommendation by manufacturer shall not constitute any warranty by or impose any liability upon
the manufacturer. This warranty constitutes the sole and exclusive remedy of the purchaser and
the exclusive liability of the manufacturer, AND IN LIEU OF ANY AND ALL OTHER WARRANTIES,
EXPRESSED, IMPLIED, OR STATUTORY AS TO MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS, FOR PURPOSE SOLD,
DESCRIPTION, QUALITY PRODUCTIVENESS OR ANY OTHER MATTER. In no event will the
manufacturer be liable for special or consequential damages or for delay in performance of this
warranty.
Products that are not manufactured by MCE (such as drives, CRTs, modems, printers, etc.) are not
covered under the above warranty terms. MCE, however, extends the same warranty terms that
the original manufacturer of such equipment provide with their product (refer to the warranty
terms for such products in their respective manual).
End User License Agreement
This End User License Agreement (Agreement) grants you the right to use the software con-
tained in this product (the Software) subject to the following restrictions: You may not: (i) copy
the Software, except for archive purposes consistent with your standard archive procedures; (ii)
transfer the Software to a third party apart from the entire product; (iii) modify, decompile, disas-
semble, reverse engineer or otherwise attempt to derive the source code of the Software; (iv)
export the Software or underlying technology in contravention of applicable U.S. and foreign
export laws and regulations; and (v) use the Software other than in connection with operation of
the product.
LICENSOR'S SUPPLIERS DO NOT MAKE OR PASS ON TO END USER OR ANY OTHER THIRD PARTY,
ANY EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR STATUTORY WARRANTY OR REPRESENTATION ON BEHALF OF SUCH
SUPPLIERS, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF NON-INFRINGE-
MENT, TITLE, MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
Important Precautions and Useful Information
This preface contains information that will help you understand and safely maintain MCE
equipment. We strongly recommend you review this preface and read this manual before
installing, adjusting, or maintaining Motion Control Engineering equipment. This preface dis-
cusses:
Safety and Other Symbol Meanings
Safety Precautions
Environmental Considerations
Safety and Other Symbol Meanings
Danger
This manual symbol is used to alert you to procedures, instructions, or situations which, if not done
properly, might result in personal injury or substantial equipment damage.
Caution
This manual symbol is used to alert you to procedures, instructions, or situations which, if not done
properly, might result in equipment damage.
Note
This manual symbol is used to alert you to instructions or other immediately helpful information.
Safety Precautions
Danger
This equipment is designed to comply with ASME A17.1, National Electrical Code, CE, and CAN/
CSA-B44.1/ASME-A17.5 and must be installed by a qualified contractor. It is the responsibility of the
contractor to make sure that the final installation complies with all local codes and is installed in a
safe manner.
This equipment is suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more than 10,000 rms sym-
metrical amperes, 600 volts maximum. The three-phase AC power supply to the Drive Isolation
Transformer used with this equipment must originate from a fused disconnect switch or circuit
breaker sized in conformance to all applicable national, state, and local electrical codes in order to
provide the necessary motor branch circuit protection for the Drive Unit and motor. Incorrect motor
branch circuit protection will void the warranty and may create a hazardous condition.
Proper grounding is vitally important to safe and successful operation. Bring your ground wire to the
system subplate. You must choose the proper conductor size and minimize the resistance to ground
by using the shortest possible routing. See National Electrical Code Article 250 or the applicable local
electrical code.
Section 1. iControl Overview
General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Component Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Group Dispatching. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
System Interconnect Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Installation Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Section 2. Construction Mode

In This Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Before You Begin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Overview of Construction Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Machine Room Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Environmental Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Ethernet and Internet Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Cabinet Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5
Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5
Shorts to Ground . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Main Line Power and Wiring the Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7
Initial Controller Power Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
AC Hoist Motor, Brake, and Velocity Encoder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Checking the Hoist Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Wiring the Hoist Motor to the Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Verifying Brake Current Resistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Wiring the Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Velocity Encoder Installation and Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Basic Safety String and Associated Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12
Cartop Safety Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Hoistway Safety Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Temporary CTS Relay Bypass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Access Locks and Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Rope Gripper Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Temporary Cartop Inspection Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Applying Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14
Setting Initial Operating Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14
Connecting the iView PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
iView Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Verifying Initial Parameter Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Learning the Safety Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
AC Drive Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
TORQMAX/KEB F5 Drive Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
TORQMAX/KEB Drive Operation Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
Drive Motor/Encoder Setup Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
The Drive Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
Initial Drive Settings (TORQMAX F5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
Setting the Drive to Run Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
Magnetek AC Drive Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
Digital Operator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
Keypad Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
Clear Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
Magnetek Drive Operation Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
Initial Controller Settings, HPV 900 S2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
Initial Controller Settings, Quattro PM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
Initial Drive Settings, HPV 900 S2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
Initial Drive Settings, Quattro PM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28
Drive Offsets Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
Automated Drive Setup Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
Manual Drive Setup Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30
Auto Tuning and Encoder Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-31
Learning Encoder Data From PM Machines, TORQMAX F5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31
Encoder Alignment HPV 900 S2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31
Auto-tuning the PM motor HPV 900 S2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31
Drive Response HPV 900 S2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31
Auto Tune Encoder Alignment Quattro PM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
Auto Tune Motor Data Quattro PM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33
Adjust for Magnetek Quattro Drive Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33
Brake Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35
Rollback Compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35
Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36
Verify Brake Picking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38
Running on Machine Room Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39
Verifying Car Direction and Motor Control (TORQMAX F5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39
Verifying Car Direction and Encoder Phasing (Magnetek) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40
Verify Pattern Command and Drive Speed Feedback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41
Calibrating Actual Car Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42
Verify Pattern Command and Drive Speed Feedback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43
Auto-tuning for Induction Motors (TORQMAX F5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44
Following Error Margin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45
Tach Error Tripping Threshold Adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46
Verify Electronic Motor Overload Protection (TORQMAX F5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47
Additional Adjustments and Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47
Section 3. Inspection Mode
In This Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Landing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Setting the Position Encoder Resolution parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Calibrating the Floor Offsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Installing iLink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Installing the iLink Enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Installing the Hoistway Limit Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Installing the Load Weigher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-5
Installing Brake Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-5
Installing the Earthquake Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Temporary Bypass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Earthquake Reset. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Installing the Serial Hall Call System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Installing the Serial COP System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Position Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-7
Verifying Cartop Voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-7
Verifying Door Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Verifying the Safety Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Exit Construction Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Running on Machine Room Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Verifying Quadrature Pulse Sequence and Encoder Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Position Encoder Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Quadrature Pulse Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Prepare for Final Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Door Operator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-11
Counterweight Learn Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-11
Counterweight Balancing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Run Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Empty Car Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Section 4. Final Adjustment

In This Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Learning Floor Heights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Floor Height Learn Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Verifying One Floor Run Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Verifying Correction, Run, and Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
If the Car Does Not Stop and Correct Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Initiating a One Floor Run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
If Initiation is not Successful . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Verifying a One Floor Run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Verify Releveling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Reaching Contract Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Final Adjustment Before Running at Contract Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Speed Pick Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Pattern Scaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Learning Normal & Emergency Terminal Limit Switches . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Fine Tuning the TORQMAX F5 Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Up/Down High Speed Difference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Car Does Not Reach High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Fine Tuning the Magnetek Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-11
Motor No-Load Current - Induction Motor only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Motor Flux Saturation Curve - Induction Motor only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Motor Rated RPM - Induction Motor only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
System Inertia (Magnetek HPV900 Series 2 or Quattro) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Shaping the Speed Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-12
Profile Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Setting Pattern Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Controlling Initial Start of Car Motion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-16
Pre-torque Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Load Weigher Sensor Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Pretorque Gain Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Drive Control Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
Brake Parameter Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
Calibrating the Floor Offsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
Floor offset calibration procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
Adjusting Leveling and Final Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
Final Approach and Leveling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
Final Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
Releveling Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
Ride Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
Load Weigher Adjustment for Dispatching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
Load Weigher Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-31
Load Weigher Selection and Threshold Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
Learning Load Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
Load Weigher Learn Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
Pre-Start Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
Allow machine to be energized: After doors are locked. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
Allow machine to be energized:
When door position monitor activated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
While doors are closing with motor only. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
While doors are closing with motor and partially picked brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
While doors are closing with motor and fully picked brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
Calibration and Verification of Safety Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
Tach Error Tripping Threshold Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
Verify Tach Error Does Not Trip on Emergency Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40
Safety Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-41
Running a Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
Car/Counterweight Safety Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43
Electrical Governor Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44
Contract Overspeed Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44
Inspection Overspeed Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44
Car/Counterweight Buffer Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45
Leveling Overspeed Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46
Emergency Brake Test - Unintended Motion - Rope Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46
Emergency Brake Test - Unintended Motion - Machine Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47
Ascending Car Overspeed Test - Rope Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49
Ascending Car Overspeed Test - Machine Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-50
Normal Terminal Switch Overspeed Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-51
Emergency Terminal Switch Overspeed Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52
Normal and Emergency Terminal Switch Position Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52
Terminal Switch Overspeed and Position Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53
Before Release to Passenger Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55
Section 5. System Options

About System Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
iCentral - Central Dispatcher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-2
Cabinet Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Initial Power Up and Bus Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
iControl Ethernet Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-4
Setting iCentral PC LAN NIC (iView) IP Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Setting iCentral PC System NIC IP Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Pinging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
iCue User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Write Permission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
iCue Watchdog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Comm-connect Cabinet - Local/Dispatcher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
Serial Hall Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
Hall Call Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
Pulling Serial Bus Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
Setting Node Board Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
Checking Serial to IP Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
Serial/Ethernet Translation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
SC-HCE Assemblies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
Trouble Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
Hall Call Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31
Flexible I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33
SC-ION Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34
I/O Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35
Serial COP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36
Serial COP Board Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38
Serial COP Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38
Load Weighers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39
Weigher Calibration with iControl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39
Section 6. Troubleshooting
About Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Troubleshooting Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Safety String Bypass Jumper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Message Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
iControl Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-13
iBox Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-71
iBox boot-up sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-71
Updating iBox Firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-72
iBox Removal and Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-72
iBox Configuration > Save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-72
iBox Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-72
iBox Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-73
iBox Configuration > Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-73
Replacing Circuit Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-73
iControl Circuit Board Quick References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-74
ICE-COP-2 Serial Car Operating Panel Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-75
Normal Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-75
Board Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-75
Software Version Query . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-76
ICE-CTP Cartop Processor Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-78
ICE-CTP-2 Cartop Diagnostics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-80
ICE-EB Emergency Brake Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-82
ICE-FML Field Module Logic Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-83
ICE-IEQ Earthquake Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-86
ICE-IMP Main Processor Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-88
ICE-IRB Relay Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-90
Checking TM Triac on ICE-IRB Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-92
ICE-IRD Rear Door Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-93
ICE-LCB Low Current Brake Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-94
ICE-MIAC (-24V) Multiple Input Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-95
ICE-MOR Multiple Output Relay Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-97
Output Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-97
ICE-RG-2 Rope Gripper Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-99
ICE-SAF Safety Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-100
ICE-SF-x Serial Fixtures Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-105
SC-HCDA-ISO Serial Driver Isolation Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-106
SC-HCNT Serial Hall Call Node Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-106
SC-ION: Serial Control I/O Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-107
I/O Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-107
Section 7. iBox Front Panel Controls
About the iBox Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
LCD Display and Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-2
Keypad Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
LCD Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Parameter Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Editing a Controller Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Setting iBox Ethernet Port Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-8
IP Address Verification/Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
System Status Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-10
LED Status Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
LCD Status Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
System Control Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Safety Bypass Jumper and Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
Section 8. Using iView

About iView . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-1
How iView Works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Setting Up an iView PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Installing iView . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Setting the iView PC IP Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Creating a Direct Connection in iView . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
LAN Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
Creating a New LAN Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
Connecting to the iBox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14
Editing an Existing LAN Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
Working Online . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-16
iView Menu Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
iView Button Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
iView Status Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
Viewing and Adjusting Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
Sending Adjustments to the Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
Saving Default Parameters to a Configuration File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
Saving Current Parameters to a Configuration File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21
Save to File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21
Loading Parameters from a Configuration File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22
Working Offline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-23
Accessing Online Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24
iView Windows and Tabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25
Controller - Configuration Tabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25
Controller - Diagnostic Tabs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25
Controller - Setup Tabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25
Additional Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25
Controller - Layouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-30
System View Windows and Tabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-31
System - Configuration Tabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-31
System - Diagnostic Tabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-31
Additional Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-31
Pinning and Unpinning Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-33
Resizing Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-34
Docking and Undocking Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-35
Printing Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-38
Setting the System Date and Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-38
Editing Dynamic Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-39
Updating Controller Firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-41
Upgrade Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-43
FTP File Viewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-44
Using the FTP File Viewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-44
Boot parameter recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-49
Bootrom Recovery via OBD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-50
Section 9. Reference
About this Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
iControl AC Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Software Test Point Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
iBox Field Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
System and LAN Ethernet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-12
MCE Direct-Connect Port (Links one iBox to one Laptop with iView) . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12
Elevator LAN Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13
Summary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16
Summary by Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17
TORQMAX F5 Drive Parameters Quick Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23
PowerBack R6 Regenerative Drive Quick Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-27
Magnetek HPV900 Series 2 Parameters Quick Reference . . . . . . . . . 9-28
Magnetek Quattro AC Quick Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35
iControl Overview
iControl Overview
This section provides:
General description, page 1-2
System interconnect diagrams, page 1-4
Installation Specifications, page 1-7
1-1
iControl Overview
General Description
Figure 1.1 Cabinet Layout (typical)
Resistor cabinet
iBox
AC flux vector drive
iPower box
Standard cabinet dimensions:

Height = 62 inches (157.5 cm)
Width = 42 inches (107 cm)
Depth = 16 inches (41 cm)
Measurements are approximate
Markers: wiring knock-out

locations
Component Assemblies
iControl enclosure containing iBox elevator control, AC or DC drive, and expansion circuit
boards as required for the specific job
Landing system, per job requirements
iLand: Rail face encoder wheel, rail mounted floor magnets, roller guided sensors
iLand slide guide: As above but with slide sensor guides instead of rollers
iLand NEMA: Vane and sensor system, ambient temperature to 125 degrees F, fully
sealed against dirt and moisture
LS-EDGE: Perforated steel tape, door zone and terminal magnets
Cartop-mounted interconnect box
iControl specific traveler and hoistway cable assemblies, optional
1-2 Manual # 42-02-2223

iControl AC General Description
Load weighers (optional)

Rope Tension (LW-EMCO)
Isolated Platform (LW-MCEIP)
Cross Head Deflection (K-Tech International)
Figure 1.2 Single Car Component Assembly Illustrations
iAC Controller
iLink cartop box
iLand Compact landing system
Group Dispatching
For multiple car installations requiring centralized dispatching and parking control:
iCentral: Separate enclosure for complex dispatching requirements, destination based dis-
patching, security system interaction, groups to 15 cars (maximum 8 cars with destination
dispatching)
Local: Groups to 6 cars with one car providing dispatching for the others. A central inter-
connect box is used for hall call risers and inter-car communications.
iCentral backup: A second iCentral unit may be used or dispatching may be assumed by
one of the cars in the elevator group.
Local backup: Dispatching assumed by a different car in the elevator group.
1-3
iControl Overview
System Interconnect Diagrams

It can be helpful to have a general understanding of the way the entire iControl system is inter-
connected.
System Interconnection: Basic car control and dispatcher interconnections.
iControl Interconnection: More detail for car controller interconnections.
Cartop Interconnection: More detail for cartop interconnections.
Dispatcher Interconnection: More detail for dispatcher interconnections.
Figure 1.3 iControl System Interconnection
DISPATCHER
SYSTEM: Hall calls, Parking, Special operating modes

Hall Calls
LAN: iView,
iMonitor,
iReport CAR CONTROL CAR CONTROL CAR CONTROL
iView
Car Car Car
Calls Calls Calls
Cartop Cartop Cartop
Ethernet
LAN: iView, iMonitor, iReport Connectivity
Other
1-4 Manual # 42-02-2223

iControl AC System Interconnect Diagrams
Figure 1.4 Car Control Interconnection

iCONTROL
Field Outputs Outputs

Discrete Hall Calls
(if not Serial Hall Call)
Field Inputs Inputs
Fixture Data Serial Fixtures

Drive
EQ String Earthquake
Safeties iBox
Limits OBD
Cartop
Motor
Module 1
Emergency Brake Rope Gripper
Brake
Rear Door Rear Door Module
Serial Hall Calls

Serial
Driver
Serial Bus
Ethernet
LAN Direct Connect (iView)
Other
SYSTEM
Figure 1.5 Cartop Interconnection
iLAND LANDING SYSTEM
iLINK CARTOP BOX Position Encoder
Field Outputs Outputs Sensor Board Landing Zone

Discrete Car Calls Rear (option) magnet
(if not Serial Car Call) Field Inputs Inputs
Sensor Board Landing Zone
Serial links to iControl Front magnet
Cartop Board
Load Weigher (ICE-CTP)
Signal Board
(LS-IPH)
Serial Car Call Serial Link
1-5
iControl Overview
Figure 1.6 Central Dispatcher (iCentral) Interconnection
iMonitor or iReport
DISPATCHER
Monitor
iView
LAN
Switch
Keyboard To Cars
LAN: iView, iMonitor, iReport
SC- iCue connectivity.
General Field Inputs
to Dispatcher ION
SYSTEM
Hall Calls To Cars

SYSTEM: Hall calls, Parking,
Serial
Driver Special operating modes
Serial to
Ethernet
Serial Bus
Ethernet
Other
Figure 1.7 Local/Dispatcher (Comm-connect) Interconnections
iView iMonitor or iReport

Comm-connect Cabinet
LAN
To Cars
SC- (4 connections per car max.).
to Dispatcher ION
SYSTEM
Hall Calls To Cars

Serial
Serial to
Ethernet
Serial Bus
Ethernet
Other
1-6 Manual # 42-02-2223

iControl AC Installation Specifications
Installation Specifications
This section contains specifications pertinent to installing the controller.
Table 1.1 Installation Specifications
Topic Description
Controller dimensions NEMA 1:
(floor mount) Height = 62 inches (157.5 cm)
Width = 42 inches (107 cm)
iCentral cabinet Height = 72 inches (183 cm)
(floor mount) Width = 28 inches (71 cm)
Depth = 23 inches (58 cm) 1
iComm-Connect cabinet Height = 26 inches (66 cm)
(wall mount) Width = 16 inches (41 cm)
Depth = 10.25 inches (26 cm)
iLINK Cartop box Height = 26 inches (66 cm)
Width = 16.2 inches (41 cm)
iLINK-2 Cartop box Height = 35 inches (89 cm)
iLINK-4 Cartop box Height = 44 inches (112 cm)
Machine room conditions 35 to 104 degrees F (0 to 40 degrees C), non-condensing. No installation on
carpet. No excessive vapors or dust.
Input power +/- 10% of job specification
Ground Direct, solid ground per NEC 250
Mounting Standard controller and iCentral cabinets mount to machine room floor
according to controlling local and national codes. Local dispatching cabinet,
iComm-Connect is wall mounted.
Conduit All connections to/from the controller must be in conduit per controlling local
and national codes. Control/low voltage wiring must be routed in separate
conduit from high voltage wiring. 1.5-inch diameter conduit is recommended
for the encoder cable so that the non-removable end connectors will fit
through.
1-7
iControl Overview
1-8 Manual # 42-02-2223

Construction Mode
In This Section
This section provides the information you need to get the elevator running in Construction
Mode:
Machine Room Preparation (see page 2-3).
Controller Cabinet Installation (see page 2-5).
Equipment Grounding (see page 2-5).
Check for Shorts to Ground (see page 2-6).
AC Voltage Verification and Wiring (see page 2-7).
Motor and Brake Wiring (see page 2-9).
Velocity Encoder Installation (see page 2-10).
Safety String Wiring (see page 2-12).
Applying Power (see page 2-14).
Initial Parameter Settings (see page 2-16).
Drive Parameter Adjustments (see page 2-20).
Brake Calibration (see page 2-35).
Running on Machine Room Inspection (see page 2-39).
Calibration Actual Car Speed (see page 2-45).
2-1
Construction Mode
Before You Begin

Review the following warnings and become familiar with this manual section.
Danger
This equipment contains voltages of up to 1000V, rotating motor parts, and driven machinery. The
combination of high voltage and moving parts can cause serious or fatal injury. Only qualified per-
sonnel who are familiar with this manual and driven machinery should attempt to start up or trou-
bleshoot this equipment. Please observe the following:
USE EXTREME CAUTION Do not touch circuit boards, resistors, or motor electri-
cal connections without ensuring that the unit is properly grounded and no high volt-
age is present. Do not apply AC power before grounding the equipment.
BE CERTAIN that any motion of the motor shaft and driven machinery caused by
unexpected operation will not cause personal injury or damage.
HIGH VOLTAGE may be present on the motor and drive whenever AC power is
applied, even if the motor is not rotating.
Overview of Construction Mode
Required Connections The following connections are necessary to run the car on Con-
struction Mode:
Motor, Brake, and Drive
Velocity Encoder or Tachometer
SAFH, GOV, ESC, Rope Gripper (if enabled)
SAFC (provide temporary Emergency stop switch between SAFH and SAFC if iLink is not
yet installed)
UNTD and DNTD (Up and Down Normal Limit Switches)
GS, DLMS, DLAT, DLAB, DPM (Verify the iView/Safety Configuration screen settings for
these options)
INCT, ICTU, and ICTD
Emergency Power Input
Connections not required for Construction Mode operation include:
Cartop Communication (TX, RX)
Quadrature signal (DP1, DP2)
EQ signal
Terminal Switches (U/DNTx and U/DETS)
Fire Sensor
DZ, ULM, DLM
Please refer to iBox Field Connections on page 9-6 for definitions of iBox inputs and outputs.
Faults In Construction Mode, faults may be generated because of missing equipment:
Invalid Front and/or Rear Doors
Terminal Sync
System Sync
Floor Sync
2-2 Manual # 42-02-2223

iControl AC Machine Room Preparation
Machine Room Preparation

When preparing the machine room, consider:
Machine room environment
Ethernet and internet access
Environmental Considerations
Ambient temperature should remain within 32 to 104 Fahrenheit (0 to 40 Celsius).
Temperatures outside these guidelines may be tolerated, but will shorten equipment life.
Adequate ventilation is required. Air conditioning may be necessary.
The air in the machine room should be free of excessive dust, corrosive elements, and 2
excessive moisture. A NEMA 4 or NEMA 12 enclosure can help meet these requirements if
machine room conditions are inadequate.
Very high levels of radio frequency (RF) radiation from nearby sources should be avoided.
RFI may interfere with controller components, degrading elevator performance. Using
hand-held communication devices close to the controller may also cause interference.
Interference from permanently installed radio transmitting antennas is not common.
Power line voltage fluctuation should not be greater than 10%.
If any areas in the machine room are subject to vibration, they should be avoided or rein-
forced to prevent equipment from being adversely affected.
2-3
Construction Mode
Ethernet and Internet Considerations

The iBox supports three Ethernet connections:
The #3 port is for direct local connection of a laptop or desktop PC for elevator configura-
tion, program uploading, system diagnosis, or parameter adjustment using MCE iView
software. Fixed IP address: 192.168.193.001
For multi-car, centrally dispatched installations, the #2 port provides connection between
iBoxes. The required Ethernet hub is provided by MCE and mounted in the iCentral cabi-
net. See the table below for the factory default.
The #1 port allows the elevator controller to be connected to Local Area Network. This
allows a single PC to be used to administer and monitor multiple elevator controllers using
iView software. See the table below for the factory default address for this port.
Through a net modem, ISDN, DSL or other internet access, this port may provide remote
access to the controller. Elevator parameters are protected from meddling or accidental
change because in order to write data to a controller, permission must be granted in the
machine room.
Table 2.1 System, LAN, & 3=PC TCP/IP Addresses
Group IP, Primary System/Serial

Hub Group Car ID Car IP iView PC
& Backup Hall Call Bus 1 - 4
System all 192.168.192.201-202 1-20 192.168.192.001-020 192.168.192.211-214

LAN A 192.168.191.201-202 1-20 192.168.191.001-020 192.168.192.101-200*
LAN B 192.168.191.203-204 1-20 192.168.191.021-040
LAN C 192.168.191.205-206 1-20 192.168.191.041-060
LAN D 192.168.191.207-208 1-20 192.168.191.061-080
LAN E 192.168.191.209-210 1-20 192.168.191.081-100
Port #3 = PC (iBox ONLY), NO HUB 192.168.193.001
*192.168.191.101 is typically used for the iView PC.
2-4 Manual # 42-02-2223

iControl AC Cabinet Installation
Cabinet Installation
Caution
When drilling or cutting access holes or during other machining, do not allow any metal chips to fall
into the electronics. Keep drive or other covers in place to prevent damage to components.
1. Mount cabinets securely to the machine room floor.

2. Open knock-outs for wire bundles.
Labels inside the cabinet identify suggested wiring hole locations. The controller cabinet does
not require rear access. 2
Field wiring should enter the cabinet from the side at the lower left corner or from the bot-
tom directly under the wiring trough. The wires must be routed through the wiring
trough on the left side of the controller cabinet in a way that allows the power
box door to open fully.
All conductors entering or leaving the controller cabinet must be through conduit. High
voltage, high current conductors, such as power conductors from the fused disconnect or
isolation transformer, must be separated from control wires. It is essential that Tachome-
ter/Velocity Encoder control wires be routed through a separate conduit away from high
current conductors.
The traveling cable must have at least four twisted shielded pairs to be used for the posi-
tion quadrature signal and the iLINK communication link from the Car Top Processor
board (ICE-CTP) to the iBox safety Processor board (ICE-SAF). The shielded cable should
be used all the way to the controller. If there are more shielded pairs still available, route
the ULM, DLM and DZ signals from the iLink Car Top Processor board through a shielded
pair (especially if the building has more than eight floors). The shields must be grounded
at both ends by connecting them to a SHLD terminal.
Grounding
Grounding must conform to all applicable codes. Proper grounding is essential for system safety
and to reduce noise-induced problems.
Ground equipment in accordance with NEC Article 250 and/or the local electrical code.
2-5
Construction Mode
Shorts to Ground
Check for shorts to ground before powering up the system. Power must be OFF at the main
disconnect. If shorts to ground are discovered, they must be corrected before proceeding. A
short to ground is defined as having a resistance of less than 20 ohms between the #1 (Com-
mon) bus and the terminal being tested.
Caution
Typically, the iLink cartop box has not been installed at this point. If the cartop box has been
installed and connected, it MUST be disconnected before checking for shorts in the controller cab-
inet. This is easily done by simply unplugging all field-wired connectors in the cartop box before
checking for shorts to ground.
1. Using a standard screwdriver, temporarily disengage all fuses at the top of the iPower
box by turning them counterclockwise until they pop up. Dont place a cap on a fuse
holder without a fuse in it. The cap can get stuck and be hard to remove.
2. Disengage all fuses at the bottom of the iBox (just below the logo).
3. Release the screws that hold the iPower box
closed and open the enclosure. Disengage all
the fuses from the fuse block inside (towards
the top of) the iPower box by lifting them clear
of their sockets at one end.
4. Measure the resistance between the iBox #1
(Common) bus and terminals that have a field
connection (DZ down to SP4 on the left side of
the iBox).
5. Measure the resistance between the #2
(120VAC) bus terminals and the #1 bus.
6. Measure the resistance between the #3 (110VDC) bus terminals and the #1 bus.
7. Check for shorts to ground on motor power terminals L1, L2, and L3.
8. Check for shorts to ground on brake terminals B1 and B2.
9. If no shorts to ground are discovered, re-engage the fuses. Refer to the job prints for fuse
location if necessary.
2-6 Manual # 42-02-2223

iControl AC Main Line Power and Wiring the Controller
Main Line Power and Wiring the Controller

1. Consult the job prints. Verify that AC supply is as specified.
Note
Proper motor branch circuit protection in the form of a fused disconnect switch or circuit breaker must
be provided for each elevator according to applicable electrical code. Each disconnect or breaker must be
clearly labeled with the elevator number. The electrical contractor must determine the wire size for the
main AC power supply and for the wiring from the disconnect or breaker to the drive isolation trans-
former.
2. If the car is part of a group, the cars in the group must also be wired to provide power to
the group cabinet. If this is the case, refer to the Group Supervisor Field Wiring Print in
2
the job prints. Group power is provided by the car controllers as shown in drawing -2.
The main AC power supply wiring size must be determined by the electrical contractor.
2a. Check the phase-offset of the individual car ST2-bus lines before connecting them
to the Group cabinet. Use a voltmeter set to AC volts to measure between adjacent
car ST2-bus terminals in the Group cabinet. The meter must read less than
10VAC. If the reading is higher, reverse the power leads going to the car T1 trans-
former at L1 and L2 and measure again.
Caution
All 2 bus power from car to Group cabinets must be in phase. Connecting out-of-phase power
WILL cause damage.
2b. A separate conduit or wiring trough must be provided for the System (car-to-car)
Ethernet network. Wiring is fully detailed in the job prints. These details must be
followed exactly.
2c. If applicable, also wire according to the Group Interconnects to Individual Car
Cabinets print. Be sure to ground all cabinets according to instructions.
2d. Refer to the iCentral (Group Supervisor) Field Wiring Print for Group Controller
field wiring instructions.
3. If an isolation transformer is used, connect AC supply wiring to the transformer, and
transformer outputs to the controller, as shown in the job prints. If required, the prints
will detail auxiliary power connections for the brake iField module.
4. If no isolation transformer is used, connect AC supply wiring to the controller as shown
in the job prints.
2-7
Construction Mode
Initial Controller Power Up

After power is connected, you are ready to temporarily power up the controller and check to see
that power buses inside the controller cabinet are providing their proper outputs.
1. On the iBox, verify:
Inspection switch UP (Inspection mode selected)
Controller Stop Switch DOWN (Stop selected)
Test switch ON
All other iBox slide switches DOWN (Off)
These switch settings prevent the elevator from moving when the controller is powered up.
NOT FUNCTIONAL
Note
The controller microprocessor board has battery backup for logic retention. An insulator prevents the
battery from discharging during shipment. Remove the insulator now if has not already been done.
2. Power up the controller. The system will take about sixty seconds to boot.
3. If the controller fails to power up, refer to the job prints and check supply connections
and fuses.
2-8 Manual # 42-02-2223

iControl AC AC Hoist Motor, Brake, and Velocity Encoder
AC Hoist Motor, Brake, and Velocity Encoder

This section contains instructions for:
Checking the hoist motor for insulation breakdown or short to ground
Wiring the hoist motor to the controller
Verifying iField module or low-current brake resistance and wiring the brake
Installing the velocity encoder
Checking the Hoist Motor

If the job reuses existing rotating equipment, the equipment must be checked for insulation
breakdown before proceeding.
1. Disconnect all motor and brake wiring. 2
2. Perform an insulation test between these wires and the frame of the related equipment
using a Megohm meter, or as directed by the manufacturer, to subject the insulation to
the same high voltages that would be present during elevator operation.
3. A minimum insulation resistance of 100k Ohms is required.
4. Correct any insulation problems before proceeding with installation. Insulation prob-
lems may indicate a serious problem in the equipment.
Wiring the Hoist Motor to the Controller

Incoming power to the controller and outgoing power wires to the motor must be in their
respective grounded conduit.
It is very important that AC motor wires be kept separate from control wires both inside and
outside the controller. The encoder or tachometer wiring must use a separate grounded con-
duit. Use a shielded power cable between the motor drive and the AC Motor stator connections
to reduce RFI/EMI noise (Siemens Protoflex - EMV or equivalent). The shield must be termi-
nated to earth ground at both ends.
Verifying Brake Current Resistance

High current brake systems use a brake (iField) module to control the brake.
1. With the brake leads disconnected, measure resistance through the brake coil.
2. Inside the controller cabinet, locate the screws, one at the top and one at the bottom
right corner of the iPower box (the enclosure the iBox is mounted to). Turn the screws
counter-clockwise to their stops and open the enclosure (it is hinged on the left).
3. Refer to job print drawing D2. Toward the right-top of the enclosure, locate the large
ceramic resistor labeled RB.
4. Check the resistance across RB. As an initial working value, RB resistance should be
about three times (3 X) the resistance measured across the brake coil.
Note
During adjustment, the resistance across RB may be further adjusted to achieve smooth brake setting.
Too little resistance causes the brake to remain picked for too long. Refer to your job prints for instruc-
tions.
5. If necessary, adjust RB resistance by loosening and sliding the center-tap up or down.

When the resistance is correct, retighten the center tap.
2-9
Construction Mode
Wiring the Brake

Refer to job print drawing D3. Connect brake wires to terminals B1 and B2 located just
below the iPower box.
Brake wires must not be routed in the same conduit with AC motor wires or velocity encoder
wires.
Velocity Encoder Installation and Wiring

Do not place the encoder or its wiring close to a magnetic field (the motor or brake coils). Mag-
netic fields can induce AC into the encoder signal. This can cause the Drive to miscount, pro-
ducing erratic control at lower speeds.
Note
The encoder wiring must use a separate grounded conduit. Inside the controller cabinet, if control wires
must cross power wires, they must cross at right angles to reduce the possibility of interference. Some
cables, like the EnDat encoder cable, require a one inch or larger conduit due to the size of the connector.
Encoder Wiring
A shielded cable with an appropriate connector at the encoder end is provided. Please refer to
Encoder Cables on page 2-11. The controller end of the cable exposes trimmed and tinned
individual conductors. The encoder cable must be routed into the controller cabinet in a sepa-
rate conduit.
1. Connect the cable to the encoder using the cable/connector provided.
2. Route the cable through a separate conduit to the controller cabinet. Inside the control-
ler cabinet, if the encoder wires must cross power wires, they must cross at right angles
to reduce the possibility of interference.
3. Connect the controller end of the cable to the drive as shown in the job prints.
Caution
Do not coil excess encoder cable near high voltage components noise may be induced. If the cable
must be shortened, trim it at the controller end. Do not cut and re-splice in the middle of the cable or
shorten at the encoder end (see also caution below).
Caution
The cable supplied with the Heidenhain ENC1313 EnDat encoder must not be altered, cut or short-
ened. Therefore, a 1.5 inch conduit is required to accommodate the cable connector.
Caution
Permanent magnet (PM) AC Gearless Machines must by synchronized with the AC Drive. Please
refer to PM Synchronous Motors > Motor Data and Loading motor data from encoder in the Initial
Start Up section of the TORQMAX F5 drive manual.
2-10 Manual # 42-02-2223

iControl AC AC Hoist Motor, Brake, and Velocity Encoder
Encoder Cables The following illustration shows typical encoder wiring. These connec-
tions are shown for illustration purposes only. Follow the job print instructions for your specific
encoder connections they may be different than those shown here.
Induction Machine PM Machine

ENCODER
ENCODER CABLE
CABLE COLOR COLOR
ENCODER CONFIGURATION ENCODER
CONFIGURATION CABLE COLOR
CONNECTOR ENCODER
PIN LABEL TORQMAX F5 CONFIGURATION TORQMAX F5
CONNECTOR 1
1 SHIELD LABEL
HOUSING
A (PIN3) X3A.1 +A US RED X3A-10 +7V
PURPLE WHITE
-A (PIN6) GRAY X3A.2 -A BLACK
GND BLUE X3A-13 COM
B (PIN4)
-B (PIN7)
GREEN
BLUE
X3A.3 +B
X3A.4 -B
REFSIN BROWN
PURPLE
GRAY
X3A-4 REF_SIN 2
IEC HIPERFACE REFCOS BLACK X3A-3 REF_COS
ENCODER ENCODER
X3A.5 +N DATA+ GREY X3A-15 +DATA
2 GREEN
X3A.6 -N DATA- GREEN BLUE X3A-14 -DATA
+V (PIN2) X3B.7 +5 +SIN WHITE X3A-9 SIN+
WHITE YELLOW
BLACK
0V (PIN1) X3B.8 COM +COS PINK ORANGE X3A-8 COS+
ENCODER
ENCODER
CABLE COLOR ENCODER
CABLE PIN CABLE COLOR
ENCODER CONFIGURATION
CONNECTOR CONFIGURATION CONFIGURATION
PIN LABEL TORQMAX F5 ENCODER
1 SHIELD CONNECTOR 1 TORQMAX F5
LABEL
A (A) X3A.1 +A HOUSING
PURPLE
GRAY A(+) 1 X3A-8 A(+)
-A (H) X3A.2 -A GREEN
A(-) 2 YELLOW X3A-3 A(-)
B (B) X3A.3 +B
GREEN
BLUE B(+) 11 X3A-9 B(+)
-B (J) X3A.4 -B BLUE
BEI
B(-) 12 RED X3A-4 B(-)
ENCODER
X3A.5 +N
C(+) 5 X3A-6 C(+)
X3A.6 -N WHITE
C(-) 6 BROWN X3A-1 C(-)
+V (D) X3B.7 +5 SIN/COS
WHITE ENCODER
BLACK D(+) 14 X3A-7 D(+)
COM (F) X3B.8 COM 2 BLACK
D(-) 4 PURPLE X3A-2 D(-)
ENCODER R(+) 3 X3A-15 R(+)

GRAY
CABLE COLOR R(-) 13 PINK X3A-14 R(-)
ENCODER CONFIGURATION
CONNECTOR MAGNETEK +5V 10 X3A-12 +5V
PIN LABEL HPV900 Series 2 GRAY/PINK
1 COM 7 WHITE/GREEN X3A-13 COM
TB1-5 SHIELD
A (A) TB1-1 +A
PURPLE
-A (H) GRAY TB1-2 -A ENCODER MALE DSUB 15 PIN
CABLE COLOR CONNECTOR
ENCODER
B (B) TB1-3 +B CONNECTOR PIN 1 CONFIGURATION TORQMAX F5
GREEN
BLUE CONFIGURATION
-B (J) TB1-4 -B HOUSING SHIELD
BEI
ENCODER COM 10 X3A-13 COMMON
TB1-19 +Z WHITE
BROWN
TB1-20 -Z +5.0V 7 X3A-12 +5.0V
+V (D) TB1-17 +12 B- 13 RED X3A-4 B-

WHITE
BLACK B+ 12 BLUE X3A-9 B+
COM (F) TB1-18 COM EnDat
ENCODER
DATA- 17 X3A-14 DATA-
2 PINK
1 NO CONNECTION FOR SHIELD AT THIS END GRAY
DATA+ 14 X3A-15 DATA+
2 ENCODER IS MOUNTED ON THE MOTOR SHAFT
A- 16 X3A-3 A-
YELLOW
A+ 15 GREEN X3A-8 A+
ICE-SAF CLOCK- 9 X3A-7 CLK-

VIOLET
BLACK
ENCODER CLOCK+ 8 X3A-6 CLK+
TACH
2-11
Construction Mode
Encoder Cables (Cont.)
PM Machine
ENCODER MAGNETEK
CABLE COLOR HPV900 Series 2
ENCODER EnDat Option Card
CONNECTOR PIN 1 CONFIGURATION
CONFIGURATION
TB2-78 SHIELD
COM 10 TB2-73 COMMON
WHITE
BROWN
+5.0V 7 TB2-74 +5.0V
B- 13 RED TB2-67 B-
B+ 12 BLUE TB2-68 B+
EnDat
ENCODER
DATA- 17 TB2-69 DATA-
2 PINK
DATA+ 14 GRAY TB2-70 DATA+
A- 16 TB2-65 A-
YELLOW
A+ 15 GREEN TB2-66 A+
CLOCK- 9 TB2-71 CLK-

VIOLET
BLACK
CLOCK+ 8 TB2-72 CLK+
Basic Safety String and Associated Wiring

The elevator must not be run until the safety string is connected:
Emergency Stop switch
Hoistway safety switches
Cartop safety CTS Relay temporary bypass (for Construction Mode use only)
Cartop Safety Switches

Depending upon the job, cartop safety switches may include:
Safety Clamp Switch
Emergency Exit Contact
Emergency Stop Switch
CTS Relay (iLink)
The wiring instructions for these switches are on the job prints.
1. Refer to the job prints.
2. Wire the cartop safety switches as shown.
Note
The Cartop Safety Relay is located in the cartop interconnect box. If the cartop box is not yet installed, it
will need to be temporarily bypassed to get the car operating in construction mode. For now, using the
switches and terminals available to you, wire as much of the string as you are able.
Hoistway Safety Switches

The wiring instructions for these switches are on the job prints.
2. Wire the hoistway safety string switches as shown.
2-12 Manual # 42-02-2223

iControl AC Basic Safety String and Associated Wiring
Temporary CTS Relay Bypass

Because the iLink cartop interconnect box which contains the Cartop Safety (CTS) Relay is not
yet installed, it is necessary to bypass the CTS relay temporarily (for Construction Mode only).
(If you in fact are installing the iLink cartop box already, please refer to the iLink instructions in
Section 3 of this guide.)
2. Connect the safety string in series between the iBox SAFH and SAFC terminals.
3. You must provide an Emergency Stop switch in series between SAFH and SAFC.
Danger 2
Make sure the Emergency Stop switch is wired in series between SAFH and SAFC to allow emergency
stopping while working on the cartop.
Access Locks and Contacts

2. Connect the switches for front and rear (if present) doors as shown.
Rope Gripper Wiring

An emergency brake may be connected between iControl terminals RG1 and RG2 to stop
unexpected car motion. After it is triggered, press the iBox Fault Reset button or the Rope Grip-
per board reset button to reset the rope gripper.
1. Refer to the job prints (MRW- machine room wiring sheets).
2. Connect the rope gripper to iControl RG1, RG2, RG5, and RG7 terminals as shown.
Temporary Rope Gripper Bypass

If a Rope Gripper will be installed later, you may temporarily bypass the input by installing a
jumper between RG5 and RG7.
Temporary Cartop Inspection Wiring

Four cartop switches control car motion: DOWN
An Inspection Enable switch, a Safe switch,
ICTD
an Up switch, and a Down switch.
UP
1. Refer to job print drawing -CW,
Cartop Inspection Station. INSPECTION
ICTU
2. Connect the (Normally Closed) Car- Insp SAFE
top Inspection Enable switch
INCT 3 3
between the #3 bus and the iCon- Norm
trol INCT terminal as shown. (This
is the switch used to put the controller on cartop inspection. INCT is active low.)
3. Connect a Safe push button switch between the #3 bus and the direction push buttons.
4. Connect a Down push button switch between the Safe switch and the iControl ICTD ter-
minal as shown (active high).
5. Connect an Up push button switch between the Safe switch and the iControl ICTU ter-
minal as shown (active high).
2-13
Construction Mode
Applying Power
1. Set the iBox Inspection switch to the Inspection position.
2. Set the Controller Stop switch to the Stop position.
3. Set the Test switch to On.
4. Turn on power at the main disconnect.
5. Watch the front panel displays of the iBox, the controller will take about 60 seconds to
initialize.
6. Check the iBox Computer, Safety A, and Safety B status LEDs. The LEDs should be
lighted solid green.
Setting Initial Operating Parameters

Once all Construction mode connections are complete, certain iControl parameters must be set
or verified. These settings must be accomplished using a computer running iView software.
The iBox may be accessed using iView or the iBox keypad. However, both are not allowed to
make changes at the same time. By default, the iBox keypad has control but once an iView user
has acquired write privileges (Privilege/Acquire) the keypad is prevented from making changes
until the iView user relinquishes the write privilege.
Connecting the iView PC

If you purchased your iView PC from MCE, iView was installed at the factory. In addition, all of
the network assignments (connections) for your job have been created and stored on the iView
PC. Therefore, once the physical connections (cables) between each iControllers iBox and the
iCentral or Comm-Connect Ethernet Switches have been installed per the job prints, you are set
to go. You can power up the PC and launch the iView.NET application.
There are two ways to connect the iBox to a PC:

Direct Connection: Connect the PC directly to the iBox through the iBox 3=PC port.
Peripheral LAN Connection: Connect the PC to the LAN hub supporting one or more iBox
controllers (iBox #1 port).
Your job prints provide complete Ethernet instructions for your system.
iView Help
The iView application is documented through on line help. On line help is available from any-
where in the iView application.
2-14 Manual # 42-02-2223

iControl AC Setting Initial Operating Parameters
Caution
Before connecting the System ethernet cable to the iBox:
1. Verify the Car ID, in the upper right corner of the display, is correct. Press the iBox
Computer Reset and verify that Car ID is still correct. The Car identifier is set on the
iView > Controller > Configuration > General tab.
2. Verify no other iBox in this group of controllers has the same Car ID.
3. Check Alternate Dispatcher settings on the iView > System > System Configuration >
Building tab. Verify Auto-select Preference Order settings are identical on all cars in
the group.
2
Figure 2.1 Check before connecting the System ethernet cable to the iBox
Check for correct Car ID. Verify that no two Car IDs in the group are the same.
@003 s 015 FG RO L01 @003 s 015 FG RO L02 @003 s 015 FG RO L03

LOCAL DISPATCHER Passenger Passenger
Ofpm Ofpm Ofpm

2:26:22AM 2:26:22AM 2:26:22AM
10/30/2007 10/30/2007 10/30/2007
Car Mgmt Car Mgmt Car Mgmt
On the iView > System > System Configuration > Building tab, verify that the Alternate
Dispatcher Auto-select Preference Order settings are identical for all cars in the group.
Car 01 System Configuration Car 02 System Configuration Car 03 System Configuration
2-15
Construction Mode
Verifying Initial Parameter Settings

Refer to Table 2.3 on page 2 - 37 for recommended initial settings.
1. Launch iView and connect to the iController.
2. Once connected, select Acquire from the Write privilege menu. This is necessary to
allow iView to change parameters on the iController. (Note that, when you initially
request privileges during each connection session, someone in the machine room must
press the yes button on the iBox to grant those privileges.)
3. From the View menu, select Layouts and click Configuration.
4. Select the Pattern tab. If the Pattern tab is not displayed, select Pattern from the View >
Configuration menu.
5. On the Pattern > Modes tab, verify the Common, Standard, and Inspection profile set-
tings. Refer to Table 2.2 on page 2 - 17. Pattern shape preset can be used to enter preset
values for the Standard profile parameters based on the high speed (contract speed) of
the elevator and the selected shape type (Slow, Moderate or Fast). This provides an
excellent starting point.
6. Edit and Send changes to iControl as needed.
7. Select the General tab. If the General tab is not displayed, select General from the View
> Configuration menu.
8. On the General > General tab set the Simplex car selection as appropriate (see
Table 2.2 on page 2 - 17). DO NOT ENABLE Simplex if the car is part of a group.
10. Select the Drive tab. If the Drive tab is not displayed, select Drive from the View > Con-
figuration menu.
11. On the Drive > General tab, verify the Drive type.
12. On the Drive > Safety tab, verify Following error (default 25%, final adjustment proce-
dure in Section 4 of this guide). Refer to Table 2.2 on page 2 - 17 and the Reference sec-
tion of this manual (Section 9) for detailed descriptions.
Note
If you change the drive type, you must press Computer Reset on the iBox so that iControl can detect the
change on power up.
14. Select the Setup > Safety > Configuration tab and verify that Construction Mode is
checked.
2-16 Manual # 42-02-2223

Table 2.2 Recommended iView Starting Values for Initial Operation

iView Screen Settings
Pattern >Common tab
Position Encoder 348 if iLand-x-C Compact Landing system. 256 if iLand-x-H or LS-
Resolution EDGE. Otherwise, consult manufacturer documentation.
Job Contract Speed 200 fpm 350 fpm 400 fpm 500 fpm 600 + fpm Unit
Pattern scaling 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% %
Door pre-opening dis. 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 inches
Leveling speed 005 005 005 005 005 fpm
Releveling speed 008 008 008 008 008 fpm 2
Leveling distance 1.20 0.72 0.60 0.60 0.60 inches
Releveling distance 0.60 0.60 0.60 0.60 0.60 inches
Dead zone distance 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25 inches
Relevel dead zone dis. 0.15 0.15 0.15 0.15 0.15 inches
Pattern > Modes tab Standard Profile

Initial jerk 6.00 6.00 5.00 5.00 6.0 ft/s3
Acceleration 2.40 3.20 3.40 3.60 3.80 ft/s2
High toll jerk 6.00 6.00 5.00 5.00 4.00 ft/s3
High speed 200 350 400 500 600 ft/min
Low roll jerk 6.00 6.00 5.00 5.00 4.00 ft/s3
Deceleration 2.20 2.90 3.20 3.30 3.50 ft/s2
Flare jerk 3.00 3.00 3.00 3.00 3.00 ft/s3
Approach deceleration 1.50 1.50 1.50 1.50 1.50 ft/s2
Approach jerk 2.00 2.00 2.00 2.00 2.00 ft/s3
Pattern > Modes tab Inspection Profile

Initial jerk 6.00 6.00 5.00 5.00 6.0 ft/s3
Acceleration 2.40 3.20 3.40 3.60 3.80 ft/s2
High roll jerk 6.00 6.00 5.00 5.00 4.00 ft/s3
High speed 30 30 30 30 30 ft/min
Low roll jerk 6.00 6.00 5.00 5.00 4.00 ft/s3
Deceleration 2.20 2.90 3.20 3.30 3.50 ft/s2
Flare jerk 3.00 3.00 3.00 3.00 3.00 ft/s3
Approach deceleration 1.50 1.50 1.50 1.50 1.50 ft/s2
Approach jerk 2.00 2.00 2.00 2.00 2.00 ft/s3
Low speed 10 10 10 10 10 ft/min
General >General tab
Simplex car Set to Simplex if the car is NOT in a group to enable dispatch and
parking screens (limited group functionality for a single car).
2-17
Construction Mode
Table 2.2 Recommended iView Starting Values for Initial Operation

iView Screen Settings
Drive >General tab
Drive Type Factory set. Verify drive type selected is correct.
Speed Reference tachometer
Speed ref resolution Velocity Encoder PPR
Rated motor RPM: From motor plate.
Coupling rotational ratio(Brake drum or Sheave Diameter/ Diameter of encoder wheel). If
shaft mounted, set to 1.000
Normal rate limited stop Per job. Default 1 ft/s.
Emerg rate limited stop Per job. Default 7 ft/s.
Drive > Safety tab

Following error 25% (factory shipped default)
Safety > General tab

Pulses Per Foot Display Only
Contract Speed Display Only
Contract Overspeed 107% of Contract Speed
Inspection Overspeed 150 feet per minute
Leveling Overspeed 150 feet per minute
Limit One Margin 8%
Top Access Landing Job specific, check job prints
Top Access Rear Job specific, check job prints
Bottom Access Landing Job specific, check job prints
Bottom Access Rear Job specific, check job prints
No Main String Job specific, check job prints
No Main String Rear Job specific, check job prints
Frnt Door Close Contact Job specific, check job prints
Rear Door Close Cntact Job specific, check job prints
Rear Doors Job specific, check job prints
Freight Door Option 1 Job specific, check job prints
Rope Gripper Check to see if a rope gripper is used
Car Top Exit Check job prints.
Construction Mode Set to ON.
Door Position Monitor Check if used (see job prints)
In Car Panel Inspection Check if used (see job prints)
Caution
Permanent magnet (PM) AC Gearless Machines must by synchronized with the AC Drive. Please
refer to the appropriate section in your drive manual.
2-18 Manual # 42-02-2223

Learning the Safety Configuration

The controller is set to match the job safety configuration, according to the job survey, before
being shipped. By default, Construction Mode is enabled before the controller is shipped. You
should not have to make changes to the Safety screen until you exit Construction
Mode.
The safety configuration for the job is stored in two locations (FLASH and EEPROM on the SAF
board). iControl constantly checks current safety information against stored data and also com-
pares the data in the two stored locations to make certain they continue to match. If you make a
change on the Safety screen, you will need to do a learn operation to write the new data to
iControl:
1. From the View menu select Setup and click Safety. 2
2. On the Setup > Safety > Configuration tab, make necessary changes.
3. Select Acquire from the Write privilege menu (if you have not yet acquired write privi-
leges to the iBox), then click Send to save the changes to iControl.
The controller will generate a safety mismatch fault because the settings you have just sent do
not match its stored information.
4. Verify that the iBox is in Inspection mode (Inspection switch set to INSP). Set the Learn
switch to ON.
5. The Learn section of the Setup > Safety > Configuration tab should indicate that the
controller is ready to learn.
6. Click on the Learn button. The controller will take a few seconds to learn the new infor-
mation and will then confirm that the safety configurations again match.
7. Set the iBox Learn switch back to the OFF position.
The message window on the Safety> Configuration tab should report Safety Configura-
tions OK.
While iControl is in Construction Mode, specific safety and operational features are automati-
cally bypassed. These are:
All cartop signals, including DP1 and DP2 (position encoder pulse streams).
Normal and Emergency limit switches, NTS and ETS velocity and position logic. Except
Normal Limit Switches DNTD and UNTD.
Only Machine Room and Cartop Inspection are allowed. Will not allow Hoistway Access or
COP Inspection.
EQ signals, both seismic and counterweight derailment, are absent.
Fire sensor signals are absent.
No cartop comm.
2-19
Construction Mode
AC Drive Parameters
Each controller is shipped with completed drive parameter sheets and a drive manual. Based on
the field survey information, all drive unit, field-adjustable parameters are set and noted on the
parameter sheets. However, it is essential to verify all drive parameter settings before
startup.
Danger
Remove AC power and wait for 5 to 10 minutes before removing the drive cover to allow capacitors to
discharge.
TORQMAX/KEB F5 Drive Introduction

The TORQMAX F5 drive is a KEB F5 with custom MCE software. Take time to study the drive
manual. It has very important startup and other information beyond the scope of this manual.
Digital Operator The keypad and LED display are mounted on the digital operator. The
operator must be plugged into the drive or the drive will not function. If the operator is removed
while the drive is operating, the drive will shut down immediately. If you must remove the oper-
ator, do so while the elevator is standing still.
Parameter group
(LF, LP, US, etc.)
Parameter number
Blinking point means

that segment (group or
number) is ready to
accept an entry
ON when drive ON = Normal

is transmitting BLINKING = Error
Keypad Operation Please refer to KEB Keypad Overview on page 2-21.
Clear Error If an error is displayed (E. UP, etc.), the drive will shut down. To clear the
error:
Press ENTER
The E.ENCC error is an exception and must be cleared using parameter LF.26.
2-20 Manual # 42-02-2223

Figure 2.2 KEB Keypad Overview

Display Parameter
Group
Display Parameter Number
Parameter Display
The blinking point determines

the active (changeable) part of
2
the parameter
change between
parameter group and
parameter number
ENTER
START F/R START
ENTER FUNC. ENTER FUNC.
F/R SPEED F/R SPEED
STOP STOP
Parameter Selection
With the keys With the keys
select the select the respective

parameter group parameter number
US, LF, LP, Ld, 1,2,3,4...99
ru, do
START
Display Parameter Display Parameter

Value Parameter Change
FUNC. Increase/Decrease
SPEED Parameter Value
START START
ENTER FUNC. ENTER FUNC.
F/R SPEED F/R SPEED
STOP STOP
STOP
Changes are accepted and saved only after ENTER is pressed.

Some parameters cannot be changed while the elevator is operating.
2-21
Construction Mode
TORQMAX/KEB Drive Operation Overview

The LF.3 parameter determines the mode the drive is in. The drive default mode is run.
Generally:
Set LF.3 to Stop to adjust parameter values
Press Enter to save the adjusted value
Set LF.3 to run and press Enter to run the elevator using the controller Inspection con-
trols or for normal operation
Drive Motor/Encoder Setup Overview

Figure 2.3 F5 Motor/Encoder Setup Overview
Determine Motor Type SErSP
Enter motor data -

LF.20 ... LF.25
Go to US.10, press FUNCTION
until correct selection displayed
then press ENTER
Enter encoder data -

LF.26 ... LF.29
Go to US.4, set the display

to LOAD, then press ENTER
indicates successful load.

If does not appear,
refer to drive manual.
Learn or Enter Motor or Encoder Data In order to enter motor nameplate data
into the drive, learn motor information, or learn encoder information, you must activate param-
eter LF.3 appropriately:
conF (configuration): Operation troubleshooting (90 second time-out)
S Lrn: Auto tuning drive to motor
run: Sets drive to run mode
I Lrn (inertia learn): Learns system inertial / activates FFTC.
P Lrn (pole learn): Learns motor pole positions (see drive manual).
StoP: Motor cannot run. Parameter changes allowed with serial control.
Note: When StoP is active, the drive will not respond to the direction inputs and therefore, the
motor will not run.
2-22 Manual # 42-02-2223

The Drive Manual

The information included above is very basic. If you are not familiar with the TORQMAX F5
drive, take time to look through the drive manual to learn how to proceed, what to expect, and
what adjustments are available through the drive.
Initial Drive Settings (TORQMAX F5)

Verify TORQMAX parameters below before startup using drive documentation or the Quick
Reference shipped with the controller. If drive documentation is not available, a list of parame-
ters is included in the Reference Section of this manual.
Caution
Do not change drive parameters while the elevator is running. Incorrect settings can cause erratic
2
elevator operation. Please refer to the drive parameters sheet provided with the controller or see
TORQMAX F5 Drive Parameters Quick Reference on page 9-23.
LF.02 Operating Mode = A Spd
LF.04 Motor-Selection = ICLSd or PgLDD (See Quick Reference in Section 11.)
LF.05 Fault Reset = 5
LF.10 Rated Motor Power (HP)
LF.11 Rated Motor Speed (RPM)
LF.12 Rated Motor Current (Amp)
LF.13 Rated Motor Frequency (Hz)
LF.14 Rated Motor Voltage
LF.20 Contract Speed (FPM)
LF.21 Traction Sheave Diameter (inches)
LF.22 Gear Reduction Ratio
LF.23 Roping Ratio
LF.24 Load Weight
LF.27 Encoder Pulse / Rev (PPR)
LF.30 Control Method
LF.31 Kp speed accel / decel (proportional gain)
LF.32 Ki speed accel / decel (integral gain)
o.LF.36 Maximum Torque (LB / ft)
LF.42 High Speed (FPM)
LF.78 Brake Engage Time
LF.79 Current Hold Time
Setting the Drive to Run Mode

Parameter LF.3 allows the drive to be configured, to learn, or to be placed in run mode. To set
the drive to run mode:
1. Set LF.3 to run.
2. Press ENTER.
2-23
Construction Mode
Magnetek AC Drive Introduction

Study the drive manual. It has very important startup and other information beyond the scope
of this manual.
Digital Operator
The keypad and display integral to the digital operator.
Figure 2.4 Magnetek AC Drive
Digital Operator
Keypad Operation
Please refer to Magnetek Keypad Overview on page 2-25.
Clear Fault
Most faults clear automatically. If a persistent (serious) fault is displayed, the drive will shut
down. To clear the fault after correcting the cause:
Access the drive Faults F0 menu, submenu Active Faults, F1.
Go to Reset Active Faults. Press Enter.
2-24 Manual # 42-02-2223

Figure 2.5 Magnetek Keypad Overview

Select Digit
Select Menu
Enter Submenus ENTER

Change Value
Select Parameter Move Up a Level ESCAPE
Magnetek Menus & Submenus
Display 1 D0 Adjust A0 Configure C0 Utility U0 Faults F0
Elevator Drive A1 User Switches C1 Password U1 Active Faults F1

Data D1
S-Curves A2 Logic Inputs C2 Hidden Items U2 Fault History F2
2
Power
Multistep Ref A3 Logic Outputs C3 Units U3 Sorted History F3
Data D2
Power Convert A4 Analog Outputs C4 Ovrspeed Test U4 Reset Faults F4
LS Power (MS power for Quattro)
Data D3 Restore Dflts U5
(quattro) LS Power Convert A5
(quattro only) Drive Info U6 (MS info for quattro)
Motor A5 (A6 for Hex Monitor (LS info for quattro) U7

quattro) Language Sel U8 (Hex Montitor for quattro)
Basics U9 (not for quattro)
Rotor Align U10 (quattro only)
Time (Auto Tune for quattro) U11
Changes are saved only after ENTER is pressed.

Some parameters cannot be changed while the elevator is operating.
Magnetek Drive Operation Overview

Menus, sub menus, and parameters may be accessed while the drive is running. Some parame-
ters may not be changed while the drive is running. For these parameters, the word LOCK-
OUT appears.
Operator LEDs indicate the status of the drive, generally including:

Ready: Ready but not actually providing current to the motor.
Run: Providing current to the motor.
User: Selected via Logic Outputs C3 submenu.
Fault: Drive has declared a fault.
Torque Limit: The drive has reached its torque limit. See drive manual.
Sub Menu: A sub menu has been accessed.
Data Entry: A parameter value has been accessed.
2-25
Construction Mode
Initial Controller Settings, HPV 900 S2

Configuration > Brake > Timer tab
Pick delay = job specific - initially set to 1.0
Speed pick delay 1 = job specific - initially set to 1.75
Speed pick delay 2 = job specific - initially set to 0.75
Contactor drop delay = 1.1
Configuration > Pattern > Common
Lag delay = drive tuning specific - initially set to 0.3
Leveling distance = drive tuning specific - initially set to 2.0
Configuration > Drive > General
Normal rate limited stop = drive tuning specific - initially set to 7.0
Drive type = HPV900
Initial Controller Settings, Quattro PM

Configuration => Drive => General => Options
Drive type: Quattro
Drive interface: Analog
Configuration => Drive => General => System
Normal rate limited stop<drive tuning specific initially set to 2.0>
Configuration => Drive => General => Speed Reference
Reference type: Tachometer
Configuration => Brake => Control => Timer
Pick delay<job specific initially set to 1.5>
Speed pick delay 1<job specific initially set to 2.25>
Speed pick delay 2<job specific initially set to 0.75>
Configuration => Pattern => Common => General
Lag delay<drive tuning specific initially set to 0.3>
Configuration => Pattern => Common => Leveling
Level distance<drive tuning specific initially set to 2.0>
Initial Drive Settings, HPV 900 S2

Verify the following Magnetek parameters are set as indicated before startup. With the excep-
tion of the parameters listed below, verify that the drive parameters are set to drive default Eng-
lish values. A list of parameters is included in the Reference Section of this user guide.
Note
Verify/Modify A5 Motor ID before changing any other parameters. This parameter determines
the items visible in the menus.
A1 Drive Menu
Contract Car Spd = job specific
Contract Mtr Spd = job specific
2-26 Manual # 42-02-2223

Encoder Pulses = job specific

Serial Cnts/Rev = job specific (PM only)
Contact Flt Time = 0.75
A2 S-Curves Menu
Accel Rate 0 = 7.99
Decel Rate 0 = 7.99
Accel Jerk In 0 = 0.00
Accel Jerk Out 0 = 0.00
Decel Jerk In 0 = 0.00
Decel Jerk Out 0 = 0.00
2
A4 Power Convert Menu
Input L-L Volts = job specific
A5 Motor Menu
Motor Id = Select 4 Pole, 6 Pole, or PM
Rated Mtr Power = job specific
Rated Mtr Volts = job specific
Rated Excit Freq = job specific
Rated Motor Curr = job specific
Motor Poles = job specific
Rated Mtr Speed = job specific
D Axis Induct = 5 to 40 mH
Q Axis Induct = 5 to 40 mH
C1 User Switches Menu
Spd Command Src = Analog
Run Command Src = Analog
Encoder Select = job specific (PM only)
Cont Confirm Src = External TB
Ramped Stop Sel = Ramp On Stop
Ramp Down En Src = Run Logic
Motor Ovrld Sel = Fault At Stop
Pre-Torque Source = Analog
C2 Logic Inputs Menu
Logic Input 4 (TB1-9) = NC Ctct Cfirm
Logic Input 5 (TB1-10) = No Function
2-27
Construction Mode
C3 Logic Outputs Menu

Logic Output 3 (TB1-15 = Speed Reg Rls
Logic Output 4 (TB1-16 = Ramp Down Ena
Relay Coil 1 (TB2-27/28/29) = Ready to Run
C4 Analog Outputs Menu
Logic Output 1 (TB2-8 = Speed Command
Initial Drive Settings, Quattro PM

A1 Drive Menu
Contract Car Spd <job specific>
Contract Mtr Spd <job specific>
Encoder Pulses <job specific>
Serial Cnt / Rev <job specific>
A5 LS Pwr Convert Menu
Input L-L Volts <job specific>
A6 Motor Menu
Rated Mtr Power <job specific>
Rated Mtr Volts <job specific>
Rated Motor Curr <job specific>
Motor Poles <job specific>
Rated Mtr Speed <job specific>
Verify D Axis Induct and Q Axis Induct are between 5 and 40 mH.
C1 User Switches Menu
Spd Command Src: Analog Input
Cont Confirm Src: External TB
Motor Ovrld Sel: Fault at Stop
Pre-Torque Source: Analog Input
Ramped Stop Sel: Ramp On Stop
Ramp Down En Src: Run Logic
C2 Logic Inputs Menu
Logic Input 6 (TB1-6): No Function
C3 Logic Outputs Menu
Relay Coil 1 (TB2-1/3/5): No Fault
Relay Coil 2 (TB2-8/10/12): Speed Reg Rls
2-28 Manual # 42-02-2223

iControl AC Drive Offsets Calibration
Drive Offsets Calibration

The iBox processes drive control voltages digitally. The digital signal is converted to its analog
equivalent for output to the drive (DAC). Analog input control voltages are likewise converted
from analog to digital for use by the iBox (ADC). Both of these conversions should be checked
and any conversion offset corrected using the Output DAC and Input ADC parameters on the
Configuration > Drive > Calibration tab.
This section describes both automated and manual procedures that can be used to calibrate
drive analog circuitry. MCE recommends using the automated procedure first and then verify-
ing the most critical offsets using the manual procedure.
Automated Drive Setup Procedure 2

Before adjusting the drive, verify that:
the CONTROLLER STOP switch is in the RUN position
the iBox Safety OK LED is ON
the iBox Door Locked LED is ON
the iBox Fault LED is OFF
1. Display the Drive setup layout (View > Layouts > Drive)
2-29
Construction Mode
2. Follow the on-screen instructions, To perform the drive offsets calibration... (cali-
brates Input ADC and Output DAC offset).
3. Once calibration is Done, the offset values shown on the Setup > Drive tab should match
those shown on the Drive Configuration tab (Configuration > Drive > Calibration tab).
Manual Drive Setup Procedure

MCE recommends first performing the Automated Drive Setup Procedure previously described
and then verifying the most critical offsets (Output DAC and Input ADC - Tachometer)
using the manual procedure. If the automated procedure is unsuccessful, the manual procedure
must be used.
Before adjusting the drive, verify that:
the CONTROLLER STOP switch is in the RUN position
the iBox Safety OK LED is ON
the iBox Door Locked LED is ON
the iBox Fault LED is OFF
iView is connected, write privilege has been obtained (Write Privilege > Acquire
selected and Yes softkey on iBox pressed in response)
1. Verify Pattern scaling is set to 100% (Configuration > Pattern > Common tab).
2. On iView, display the Drive - Offsets tab (Configuration > Drive > Calibration tab).
3. Output DAC: With zero speed commanded (car idle):
TORQMAX F5: verify that pattern voltage applied to the AC drive unit reads 0.0 volts
between F5 drive terminals X2A-1 (+) and X2A-2 ().
Magnetek: verify that the D1 Speed Command value is zero). If not, adjust Output DAC
on the Drive/Calibration screen by entering and sending small negative or positive val-
ues until the reading is as close to 0.0 volts as possible (less than 1mV). The DAC
adjustment range is from 0.25 to +0.25 units.
4. On iView, display the Drive - Offsets tab (Configuration > Drive > Calibration tab). Also
display the Virtual Oscilloscope (View > Virtual Oscilloscope) and set Test point 1 =
Tachometer Signal.
5. Input ADC - Tachometer: Adjust the
Input ADC - Tachometer parameter by
entering and sending small negative or
positive values until the Test point 1
value is as close to 0.0 as possible
(20mV). The ADC adjustment range is
from 0.5 to +0.5.
6. Input ADC - Brake current: Set Virtual Oscilloscope Test Point 1 = Brake Current Feed-
back and adjust the Input ADC - Brake current parameter by entering and sending small
negative or positive values until the Test point 1 value is as close to 0.0 as possible.
7. Input ADC - Brake voltage: Set Virtual Oscilloscope Test Point 1 = Brake Voltage Feed-
back and adjust the Input ADC - Brake voltage parameter by entering and sending small
negative or positive values until the Test point 1 value is as close to 0.0 as possible.
2-30 Manual # 42-02-2223

iControl AC Auto Tuning and Encoder Alignment
Auto Tuning and Encoder Alignment

Drives used in iControl applications provide auto tuning procedures that allow the drive to
directly learn motor characteristics. Tuning improves performance and automatically calculates
some motor values you would otherwise have to enter manually.
Learning Encoder Data From PM Machines, TORQMAX F5

Please refer to PM Synchronous Motors > Machine Data and Loading motor data from
encoder in the Initial Start Up section of the TORQMAX F5 drive manual.
Encoder Alignment HPV 900 S2

This instruction is for permanent magnet (PM) motors only. Refer to the PM Start-Up Proce- 2
dure in the Magnetek drive manual.
Auto-tuning the PM motor HPV 900 S2

This instruction is for permanent magnet (PM) motors only. Refer to the PM Start-Up Proce-
dure and Auto-Tune Procedure in the Magnetek Drive Technical Manual.
Drive Response HPV 900 S2

1. For initial setup, set the Pick delay, Speed pick delay 1, and Speed pick delay 2 via the
iView Configuration > Brake > Timer tab to a sufficiently long value to allow enough
time for the drive to respond to a run request.
If Pick delay is too short, a DRO fault will occur.
Once the elevator is moving under control in the correct direction and at the com-
manded speed, these delays can be adjusted to a more optimum value.
Set Pick delay to 1.0 second.
Set Speed pick delay 1 to 1.75 seconds.
2. Depending on drive tuning, the amount of lag between commanded speed and drive
response can vary. As a result, as the drive is adjusted, the Lag delay parameter on Con-
figuration > Pattern > Common > General will need to change as well.
If lag delay is insufficient, the elevator will plow into a landing. The acceleration and
jerk rate during deceleration to a landing will be greater than profile values indicate.
If lag delay is excessive, the elevator will drag into a landing. Acceleration and jerk
rate during deceleration to a landing will be less than profile values indicate. In
addition, a discontinuity in the profile will occur during the transition from acceler-
ation to deceleration for movement between floors where a stabilized speed is not
reached. Under normal operation, this would occur when contract speed is not
reached.
To adjust Lag delay, observe Acceleration (Raw) on the virtual oscilloscope via
Diagnostics > Virtual Oscilloscope. Perform one-floor-run movement and observe
the transition through zero (peak acceleration transitioning to peak deceleration as
the elevator reaches its peak speed that is less than contract speed). This transition
should have no vertical (too much Lag delay) or horizontal (too little Lag delay) dis-
continuity. This transition adjustment is only valid when the elevator is unable to
2-31
Construction Mode
reach the maximum speed for a particular profile (unable to reach contract speed
under normal operation). A physical oscilloscope may be required to see this transi-
tion properly. Adjust the Lag delay until the vertical discontinuity is eliminated (see
Figure 2.14).
For initial setup, set Lag delay parameter to 0.3 seconds on Configuration > Pattern
> Common > General.
Figure 2.6 Velocity and acceleration
Velocity and acceleration: (a) profile at contract speed; (b) insufficient lag compensation
with profile at less than contract speed; (c) excessive lag compensation with profile at
less than contract speed; (d) optimum lag compensation with profile at less than con-
tract speed
3. Depending on the tuning of the drive, the leveling distance may have to be generous to
allow the elevators speed to completely transition to the requested leveling speed.
For initial setup, set the Leveling distance parameter to 2.0 inches on the control-
lers Configuration > Pattern > Common > Leveling. Once the drive is tuned, this
parameter may be adjusted to a more optimum value.
4. Depending on the tuning of the drive, the transition from leveling speed to zero speed
may be sluggish.
For initial setup, set the Normal rate limited stop parameter to 7.0 ft/s2 on the con-
trollers Configuration > Drive > General > System tab. Once the drive is tuned, this
parameter may be adjusted to a more optimum value.
5. Please see the Magnetek Drive Technical Manual for tuning/adjustment procedures.
Auto Tune Encoder Alignment Quattro PM

1. Place controller on Inspection.
2. Disable contactor confirmation by setting C1, Cont Confirm Src to NONE.
3. Set Logic Output 1 (TB1-25), C3 Logic Outputs Menu, to READY TO RUN.
2-32 Manual # 42-02-2223

iControl AC Auto Tuning and Encoder Alignment
4. Temporarily jumper terminals TB4-1 to F2 and TB4-4 to F1 (located in the Quattro

Drive Cabinet on the top). These terminals should also be available on the terminal
block in the Controller cabinet on the bottom (please see prints). This will bypass the
PM1 contacts and allow the Quattro DC Drive to pick its ME contactor (motor contac-
tor). Care must be taken not to short the secondary of the transformer that is the source
of power for these terminals.
5. Verify the machine brake is set, will hold the car, and cannot be picked.
6. Follow the Absolute Encoder Alignment Procedure: Auto Alignment Procedure in the
Quattro PM Elevator Drive manual. Follow the enable through the operator rather
than through the drive run command. (At the Begin Alignment prompt, select YES
rather than ON RUN.)
7. Proceed to the following Auto Tune Motor Data section. 2
Auto Tune Motor Data Quattro PM
1. Follow the Auto Tune Procedure in the Appendix of the Quattro PM Elevator Drive
manual. Follow the enable through the operator rather than through the drive run
command. (At the Autotune Select prompt, select YES rather than ON RUN.)
2. When auto tune is successfully completed, remove the temporary jumpers from termi-
nals TB4-1/F2 and TB4-4/F1.
3. Set Logic Output 1 (TB1-25), C3 Logic Outputs Menu, to CLOSE CONTACT.
4. Enable Contactor Confirmation by setting C1, Cont Confirm Src to EXTERNAL TB.
5. Verify the machine brake is able to pick and drop on command.
Adjust for Magnetek Quattro Drive Response

1. For the initial setup, set the Pick delay, Speed pick delay 1, and Speed pick delay 2 (Con-
figuration => Brake => Timer) to a sufficiently long value to allow enough time for the
drive to respond to a run request.
If the Pick delay is too short, a DRO fault will occur.
Once the elevator is moving under control in the appropriate direction and at the com-
manded speed, these delays can be adjusted to a more optimum value.
Set Pick delay to 1.5 seconds.
2. Depending on the tuning of the Quattro drive, the amount of lag between the com-
manded speed and drive response can vary. As a result, as the drive is adjusted, the Lag
delay parameter on Configuration => Pattern => Common => General will need to
change as well.
If the lag delay is insufficient, the elevator will plow into a landing. The acceleration
and jerk rate during deceleration to a landing will be greater than profile values indi-
cate.
If the lag delay is excessive, the elevator will drag into a landing. The acceleration and
jerk rate during deceleration to a landing will be less than profile values indicate. In
addition, a discontinuity in the profile will occur during the transition from accelera-
tion to deceleration for movement between floors where a stabilized speed is not
reached. Under normal operation, this would occur when contract speed is not
reached.
2-33
Construction Mode
To adjust the Lag delay, observe Acceleration (Raw) on the virtual oscilloscope via
Diagnostics => Virtual Oscilloscope. Perform one-floor-run movement and observe
the transition through zero (peak acceleration transitioning to peak deceleration as the
elevator reaches its peak speed that is less than contract speed). This transition should
have no vertical (too much Lag delay) or horizontal (too little Lag delay) discontinuity.
This transition adjustment is only valid when the elevator is unable to reach the maxi-
mum speed for a particular profile (unable to reach contract speed under normal oper-
ation). A physical oscilloscope may be required to see this transition properly. Adjust
the Lag delay until the vertical discontinuity is eliminated.
For initial setup, set the Lag delay parameter to 0.3 seconds on Configuration => Pat-
tern => Common => General.
Velocity and acceleration: (a) profile at contract speed; (b) insufficient lag
compensation with profile at less than contract speed; (c) excessive lag com-
pensation with profile at less than contract speed; (d) optimum lag compen-
sation with profile at less than contact speed.
3. Depending on the tuning of the Quattro drive, the leveling distance may have to be gen-
erous to allow the elevator speed to completely transition to the requested leveling
speed.
For initial setup, set the Leveling distance parameter to 2.0 inches on Configuration
=> Pattern => Common => Leveling. Once the drive is tuned, this parameter may be
adjusted to a more optimum value.
4. Depending on the tuning of the Quattro drive, the transition from leveling speed to zero
speed may be sluggish.
For initial setup, set the Normal rate limited stop parameter to 2.0 ft/s2 or more on
Configuration => Drive => General => System. Once the drive is tuned, this parameter
may be adjusted to a more optimum value.
Please see the Magnetek Quattro PM Drive Technical Manual for tuning/adjustment proce-
dures.
2-34 Manual # 42-02-2223

iControl AC Brake Calibration
Brake Calibration
This section describes brake calibration for systems using the iField Module advanced braking
system. The iField module electronically controls brake voltage output.
Rollback Compensation
In later adjustments, drive and motor settings will be adjusted to control rollback. Since that
has not yet been done, we need to control rollback by adjusting Brake Pick delay and offsetting
Speed pick delay 1 so that the brake remains set until the motor builds sufficient torque.
1. From the View menu select Layouts and click Brake.
2. Set Pick delay to 0.600 seconds.

3. Set Speed pick delay 1 to 0.700 seconds.
4. Select Acquire from the Write privilege menu. Then press the yes button on the iBox
to grant the privilege.
5. Click Send to send the changed values to the controller.
2-35
Construction Mode
Calibration
Calibration allows iControl to learn the characteristics of the machine brake.
1. Verify that the iBox Safety OK LED is solidly on.
2. Set the iBox Learn switch to ON.
3. Place the iBox Inspection switch in the INSP position. Verify that the iBox displays
Machine Room Insp.
Note
If the iBox does not indicate that you are in Machine Room Inspection even though the Inspection switch
is in the INSP position, another inspection mode (i.e., cartop inspection) is probably active. Other inspec-
tion modes must be OFF before Machine Room Inspection can be activated.
CONTROLLER FAULT/FUNCTION
INSPECTION STOP BYPASS
INSP RUN ON
NORM STOP OFF
UP CAPTURE WRITE ENABLE

ON ON
COMPUTER UP SAFETY OK OFF OFF
SAFETY A DRIVE ON DOOR LOCKED

ENABLE TEST LEARN
SAFETY B DOWN INSPECTION ON ON
CARTOP RUN IN GROUP OFF OFF
SYS COMM RELEVEL FAULT CAR DOOR HOISTWAY

DOWN BYPASS DOOR BYPASS
BYPASS BYPASS
OFF OFF
4. Display the Brake > Control tab (Con-

figuration > Brake > Control tab).
5. Set Pick voltage and Hold voltage as
shown on your job prints.
6. For now, set Releveling voltage and
Weakening voltage to the same value
as Pick voltage. (This parameter can
be fine tuned during final adjust-
ment.)
2-36 Manual # 42-02-2223

iControl AC Brake Calibration
7. On the Setup > Brake tab the Ready indicator should be On. The text box will show any
steps that need to be performed.
8. With the Ready indicator lighted, click the Calibrate button. As calibration begins,
watch the display on the tab. The display will report calibration progress and will also
display instructions if you need to complete additional steps along the way. The Waiting
LED will light while waiting for an instruction to be completed. If necessary, click Con-
tinue to continue calibration after performing an instruction.
9. When iControl is ready to begin learning, the screen will display The controller is wait-
ing for a direction command in order to proceed. You may command either the Up or
the Down direction. When it does, press and hold the iBox Enable and Up (or Down)
buttons. (The car will not be moved during this procedure.)
10. The Calibrating LED will light as calibration begins. Continue to hold the Enable and Up
(or Down) buttons pressed. The progress indicators to the left of the display will keep
you informed as calibration progresses.
11. When the Done indicator lights, release the Enable and Up (or Down) buttons. Calibra-
tion is complete.
12. Set the iBox Learn switch to OFF.
The following messages may be displayed during brake calibration.
Table 2.3 Brake Calibration Status Messages
Message/Meaning
The controller is not ready for Brake Calibration. Please place the elevator on Machine Room Inspec-
tion and place the LEARN switch in the ON position.
The system is waiting for the CONTINUE button to be pushed.
The system is ready to start the calibration process. Push the START button if you wish to start cali-
brating the brake or push the DEFAULT button if you wish to load the default calibration values.
The controller is waiting for a Direction command in order to proceed. You may command either the
UP or the DOWN direction.
The controller is done with brake calibration. Please drop direction and turn the LEARN switch OFF.
2-37
Construction Mode
Verify Brake Picking

To verify that the brake is picking properly:
1. Verify that the iBox Safety OK LED is solidly on. Display the Pattern > Common tab
(View > Configuration > Pattern > Common tab).
2. Set Pattern Scaling to 0% and click Send to send the changed parameter to iControl.
3. Display the Operational Status tab. Note that Brake voltage is charted in the Machine
section of the Operational Status tab.
4. With a digital volt meter set to DC volts,
measure brake output voltage across termi-
nals B1 and B2 (located just below the iBox
panel). (A typical terminal block is shown to
the right. B1 and B2 will be labeled.)
5. Press the Enable and Up (or Down) buttons
to lift the brake. Verify that the voltages on
the volt meter are the same as the com-
manded voltage (Pick voltage / Hold voltage
parameters on the Brake > Voltages tab) and
Brake voltage on the Operational Status tab.
The brake should lift but the car should not move
since Pattern scaling is set to command zero speed.
6. Change the Pick and Hold voltages to one half the current value of the Pick voltage
parameter and save the new values.
7. Press and hold Enable and Up (or Down) and verify brake voltage again. (The brake will
probably not lift since we are outputting only half the Pick voltage.)
8. Change the Pick and Hold voltages back to their job print settings and save them.
9. Change Pattern scaling (Pattern > Common tab) to 100%. Send that value to the control-
ler.
2-38 Manual # 42-02-2223

iControl AC Running on Machine Room Inspection
Running on Machine Room Inspection

Once you are satisfied that the brake is picking properly, then do the following
1. Verify car movement (direction) and motor control and troubleshoot if not correct (see
Verifying Car Direction and Motor Control (TORQMAX F5) on page 2-39) or see Ver-
ifying Car Direction and Encoder Phasing (Magnetek) on page 2-40.
2. Verify pattern command vs. drive speed feedback tracking (see Verify Pattern Com-
mand and Drive Speed Feedback on page 2-41).
3. Calibrate the actual car speed (see Calibrating Actual Car Speed on page 2-42).
4. Perform auto-tuning procedure for induction motors (TORQMAX F5) (see Auto-tuning
for Induction Motors (TORQMAX F5) on page 2-44).
5. Set the following error margin (see Following Error Margin on page 2-45). 2
6. Set the following error and tach error tripping thresholds (see Following Error Margin
on page 2-45 and see Tach Error Tripping Threshold Adjustment on page 2-46).
7. Verify electronic motor overload protection (see Verify Electronic Motor Overload Pro-
tection (TORQMAX F5) on page 2-47).
8. Perform additional adjustments and checks (see Additional Adjustments and Checks
on page 2-47).
Verifying Car Direction and Motor Control (TORQMAX F5)

1. If the brake picks but the car does not move, oscillates, or trips an E.ENC fault, change
the F5 drive LF.28 parameter setting. This swaps encoder channels or reverses motor
rotation internally in the drive. Physically changing external encoder connections is not
necessary and is not recommended. The F5 drive LF.28 options are as follows:
0 = nothing reversed
1 = encoder A<->B swapped
2 = motor rotation reversed
3 = motor rotation reversed and encoder A<->B swapped
2. If the car moves in the opposite of the intended direction while drawing normal current,
turn power off and wait until there is no voltage present at the DC bus, then proceed
with step 3. Motor current can be verified by displaying the F5 drive parameter LF.93.
Danger
Turn power off and wait five minutes for DC bus voltage to bleed off before taking the drive cover off.
Do not touch any terminals without ensuring that high voltage is not present.
3. Interchange two of the motor leads. Turn power on.
4. Try to run the car on Inspection. If the drive still trips an E.ENC fault, again change the
F5 drive parameter LF.28. (Refer to LF.28 parameter options in step 1). The car should
now move in the correct direction and draw normal current.
2-39
Construction Mode
Verifying Car Direction and Encoder Phasing (Magnetek)

Move the elevator on Inspection and verify that the motor is under control and rotating in the
proper direction. If it is, skip to the next section.
If the motor runs away in the proper direction, change the drives C1 Encoder Connect
direction.
If the motor runs away in the opposite direction, change the drives C1 Motor Rotation
direction.
If the motor runs under control in the opposite direction, change the drives C1 Encoder
Connect direction and C1 Motor Rotation direction.
For proper operation, motor phasing must match encoder feedback phasing. If the phasing is
not correct, the motor will not accelerate up to speed. It will typically oscillate back and forth at
zero speed and the current will be at the torque limit.
If the motor operates as described above, swap any two motor phases (U<->V, V<->W or
U<->W.
Danger
Turn power off and wait five minutes for DC bus voltage to bleed off before taking the drive cover off.
Do not touch any terminals without ensuring that high voltage is not present.
2-40 Manual # 42-02-2223

Verify Pattern Command and Drive Speed Feedback

1. Verify/set the following iView Drive parameters (Configure > Drive > General tab >
Speed Reference section):
Reference type = Tachometer
Scaling = 1.000
2. If you change any values, send them to the controller.
3. Display the Virtual Oscilloscope (View > Virtual Oscilloscope).
4. Set Test point 1 = Pattern (Command) and Test point 2 - Speed Feedback.
5. Run the car and verify the polarity (Test point 1 and 2 traces are both moving in the
same direction). If they not, change the Speed Reference Direction parameter (Forward
/ Reverse) on the Configuration > Drive > General tab. 2
6. Run the car and verify that the Pattern (Command) and
Speed Feedback (Test point 1 and 2 traces) are the same TACH ADJ. trimpot
amplitude. On the iView oscilloscope (or a DVM connected
between STP1 and STP2), compare the Pattern Command TACH
and Speed Feedback readouts. They must match within ADJ.
MODEM
0.050 VDC while the car is running at steady state speed. If
not, adjust the TACH ADJ trimpot (upper right corner of
iBox). The iPower Box door can be opened slightly to
RS 232
improve access to the TACH ADJ trimpot. Turn the pot
slowly. This is a 15 turn trimpot, but the adjustment from
maximum to minimum on the virtual oscilloscope is less
than 1/2 turn.
If the trimpot adjustment is insufficient, adjust the Scaling param-
eter (Configuration > Drive > General tab > Speed Reference sec-
tion) up or down in o.1 increments. Remember to Send the value to the controller, and then re-
adjust the trimpot.
2-41
Construction Mode
Calibrating Actual Car Speed

If iLand and iLink are already installed, use the landing system speed (Speed/Actual on the
Operational Status tab) as the speed reference for calibration. If not, use a hand-held tachome-
ter to obtain the value.
If you are using a hand-held tachometer, hold it against the hoist or governor rope on the
machine. The car must run at the commanded inspection speed in both directions (see Cau-
tion). If measured inspection speed does not match the commanded value, verify the following:
1. Verify the Inspection - High Speed parameter (iView: Configuration > Pattern > Modes
tab or iBox: Car/Pattern Profile/Inspection high velocity).
2. Verify that Pattern scaling is set to 100% (Configuration > Pattern > Common tab).
3. Verify drive parameters set earlier:
TORQMAX F5: see Initial Drive Settings (TORQMAX F5) on page 2-23.
Magnetek: see Initial Drive Settings, HPV 900 S2 on page 2-26.
4. Additional drive specific instruction:
Magnetek: Adjust drive parameter A1 Contract Mtr Spd if the speed is not correct
(higher RPM for increased speed.
TORQMAX F5: Adjust motor parameter LF.22 Gear Reduction Ratio in small incre-
ments to obtain the correct Inspection speed (see Note).
Note
Gear Reduction Ratio: If the gear reduction ratio is not available from the machine name plate, calculate
the value by first measuring the motor revolutions using a marker on the motor shaft or brake drum.
Reduce the inspection speed by decreasing the Inspection High speed setting, then determine the num-
ber of motor shaft revolutions required to complete one revolution of the sheave. Calculate the gear
reduction ratio using the formula: Gear reduction ratio = Motor RPM / Sheave RPM. Enter the calculated
value in parameter LF.22.
The drive has the capability of estimating the gear reduction ratio. Run the car on inspection and read the
value of parameter LF.25, the gear ratio estimated by the drive. The value of LF.25 can be temporarily
used for LF.22.
Caution
Up vs. down speed variance: If the car runs at commanded speed in one direction but less then
commanded speed in the other direction, this can indicate insufficient voltage available to generate
the required torque. At inspection speed this may be as little as 1 or 2 fpm, but at contract speed this
variance will be much greater. On a small percentage of jobs it is necessary to increase the value of
TORQMAX F5 parameter LF.14 Rated Motor Voltage. For example, for a motor rated for 480 volts it
may be necessary to increase LF.14 to 500 volts.
2-42 Manual # 42-02-2223

Verify Pattern Command and Drive Speed Feedback

1. Verify/set the following iView Drive parameters (Configure > Drive > General tab >
Speed Reference section):
Reference type = Tachometer
Scaling = 1.000
2. If you change any values, send them to the controller.
3. Display the Virtual Oscilloscope (View > Virtual Oscilloscope).
4. Set Test point 1 = Pattern (Command) and Test point 2 - Speed Feedback.
5. Run the car and verify the polarity (Test point 1 and 2 traces are both moving in the
same direction). If they not, change the Speed Reference Direction parameter (Forward
/ Reverse) on the Configuration > Drive > General tab. 2
6. Run the car and verify that the Pattern (Command) and
Speed Feedback (Test point 1 and 2 traces) are the same TACH ADJ. trimpot
amplitude. On the iView oscilloscope (or a DVM connected
between STP1 and STP2), compare the Pattern Command TACH
and Speed Feedback readouts. They must match within ADJ.
MODEM
0.050 VDC while the car is running at steady state speed. If
not, adjust the TACH ADJ trimpot (upper right corner of
iBox). The iPower Box door can be opened slightly to
RS 232
improve access to the TACH ADJ trimpot. Turn the pot
slowly. This is a 15 turn trimpot, but the adjustment from
maximum to minimum on the virtual oscilloscope is less
than 1/2 turn.
If the trimpot adjustment is insufficient, adjust the Scaling param-
eter (Configuration > Drive > General tab > Speed Reference sec-
tion) up or down in o.1 increments. Remember to Send the value to the controller, and then re-
adjust the trimpot.
2-43
Construction Mode
Auto-tuning for Induction Motors (TORQMAX F5)

For best performance with induction motors, perform the auto-tuning procedure as follows:
1. Make sure rated motor power (LF.10), rated motor speed (LF.11), rated motor current
(LF.12), rated motor frequency (LF.13), rated motor voltage (LF.14) and rated power
factor (LF.15) are entered into the drive before you begin. If the power factor is not on
the name plate, use 0.90 as the value.
2. On the Controller > Configuration > Brake > Control tab, record the value of Pick volt-
age, Hold voltage and Relevel voltage. Then set all three voltages = 15.000 to prevent the
brake from picking.
3. On the Controller > Configuration > Pattern tab, set Pattern scaling = 0.000.
4. On the TORQMAX F5 drive keypad, set Drive configuration (LF.03) = S Lrn. This will
start the learn process. The display will change to StArt.
5. With the iBox INSPECTION switch in the INSP position, press and hold the UP and
ENABLE buttons. The motor contactor should pull in and the brake should not pick.
Motor current will begin to flow, an audible noise in the motor will be heard, and the
drive display will change to LS.103.
The drive will measure various parameters in the motor as well as in the drives own
power stage. During each measurement the display will change to signify what is being
measured. In the event of problems during the measurement phase, the factory can use
the codes to determine what is happening. Continue to press and hold the ENABLE and
ON switches in until the drive displays done.
6. In the event that the drive cannot complete the measurements, two error messages may
occur:
FAILd - the drive was not able to begin measurements due to a configuration error.
Consult the factory to resolve.
FAIL - the measurement sequence was interrupted, e.g., the inspection ENABLE or UP
switch was released prematurely, electrically the motor was not properly connected.
Try the measurement again.
7. When done is displayed, release the ENABLE and UP switches. The drive will finish
making calculations, display CALC, and update parameter values with measured values.
8. Return Pick voltage, Hold voltage and Relevel voltage to their previous values and set
Pattern scaling = 100.000 percent.
2-44 Manual # 42-02-2223

Following Error Margin

Following error is used for fault detection purposes only. The Following error parameter (Con-
figuration > Drive > Safety tab) sets the allowed margin of deviation from commanded speed as
a percentage. A Tach Error fault is generated when the difference between intended pattern
speed and speed feedback exceeds the Following error margin.
1. Verify that the Pattern (Command) and Speed Feedback signals are tracking properly.
Please refer to Following Error Margin on page 2-45.
2. On the Configuration > Pattern > Modes tab, verify that Standard Profile/High Speed
and Inspection Profile/High Speed parameters are set correctly for this job.
3. Verify that actual car speed on Inspection is equal to the Inspection High speed setting.
Please refer to Following Error Margin on page 2-45. 2
4. Set the Following error parameter (Configuration > Drive > Safety tab). It is recom-
mended to perform the Tach Error Tripping Threshold Adjustment procedure at this
time. Please refer to Tach Error Tripping Threshold Adjustment on page 2-46.
Default setting
Caution
The default setting for the Following error parameter is 25%. For a car that has been prop-
erly adjusted as described in steps 1 through 3 above, after performing the Tach Error Tripping
Threshold Adjustment, a Following Error setting of 10% is fairly typical. You may choose to leave the
Following error parameter at the default setting or higher, but keep in mind that Following error is a
percentage of speed. On a 500fpm job a 25% Following Error allows a 125fpm contract speed devia-
tion before a fault is generated.
2-45
Construction Mode
Tach Error Tripping Threshold Adjustment

This test compares the pattern signal with the velocity feedback signal and sets the point at
which the Tach Error fault trips as a result of excessive error between the Actual and intended
car speed.
1. On the iView Virtual Oscilloscope, set Test point 1 to Speed Feedback and Test point 2 to
Tach Error Upper Limit.
2. On Inspection, run the car several times between floors in both directions. Monitor the
traces and verify that the Speed Feedback and Tach Error Upper Limit traces track but
remain comfortably separated.
3. Set Testpoint 2 to Tach Error Lower Limit.
4. On Inspection, run the car several times between floors in both directions. Monitor the
traces and verify that the Speed Feedback and Tach Error Lower Limit traces track but
remain comfortably separated.
5. Estimate the smallest percentage of Following Error that would allow the Feedback and
Limit traces to remain separated.
6. Increase the calcu-
lated value by 1/2
and set Following
error to this value.
For example, if the
calculated percent-
age is 6%, add that to
1/2 of 6 (3) and set
Following error to 9%. Remember to send the change to iControl.
7. Repeat steps 1 through 4, verifying that Feedback and Limit traces remain separated. If
they do not, recalculate and reset Following error.
Note
A Following Error setting of 10% is fairly typical. Keep in mind that Following Error is a percentage of
speed. On a 500fpm job a 10% Following Error allows a 50fpm contract speed deviation before a fault is
generated.
2-46 Manual # 42-02-2223

Verify Electronic Motor Overload Protection (TORQMAX F5)

Provided the car is running normally on Inspection operation and is drawing normal current,
perform the following test to verify the drive electronic motor overload protection is correctly
set to protect the motor from overload conditions:
1. Verify LF.08 (Electronic Motor Protection) is set to ON.
2. Note (write down) the value of LF.09 (Electronic motor protection current). This value
must be equal to LF.12.
3. Lower the value of LF.09 to 20% of the noted setting (LF.09 x 0.20).
4. Run the car on Inspection. After one minute the drive should trip an E.0H2 fault and
shut down the car.
5. After five seconds, the fault will automatically clear and the car will be ready to run on 2
Inspection again.
6. Set the value of LF.09 back to the noted setting (Motor FLA or LF.12).
Additional Adjustments and Checks

1. On the Configuration > Pattern > Common tab, set Pattern scaling to 100%.
2. On the Configuration > Pattern > Modes tab, set Inspection/High Speed to the desired
value (maximum Inspection speed is 150 fpm). Set Inspection/Low Speed to 25 fpm.
Note
If the Terminal Switches (UNT5/DNT5) have been installed, and you wish to use the reduced inspection
speed option, you may enable it by checking Reduced inspection speed on the Configuration > Pattern >
Modes tab. If not, you may enable Reduced Inspection speed after the Terminal Switches are installed.
(Enabling it now, without switches, would cause the car to run at 25 fpm.)
3. Stop the car so that the car top can be accessed from the top hall door.
Note
NOTE: Car Top Inspection operation automatically overrides Car Panel Inspection operation.
4. Run the car from the Car Top Inspection station, checking the up and down buttons and
the stop switch.
5. While running the car, check clearances and door locks. When all doors are locked,
remove any jumpers from door lock terminals.
6. Verify directional limit switch and final limit switch operation and position according to
page MRW1 or MRW2 of the job prints. The distance between the two switches should
ideally be greater than the distance required to stop the car after the direction command
is removed with the car on Inspection operation.
7. Verify the brake has sufficient tension to hold the car under all conditions likely to be
encountered during the installation phase.
2-47
Construction Mode
2-48 Manual # 42-02-2223

Inspection Mode
In This Section
This section provides the information you need to complete field wiring and prepare the eleva-
tor to operate in Inspection Mode:
Landing System Installation (see page 3-2).
iLink Interconnect Installation (see page 3-3).
Hoistway Limit Switches (see page 3-4).
Load Weigher Installation (see page 3-5).
Brake Monitoring (see page 3-5).
Earthquake Sensor (see page 3-6).
Serial Hall Call (see page 3-6).
Serial COP (see page 3-6).
Cartop Voltage Verification (see page 3-7).
Door Operation (see page 3-8).
Running on Machine Room Inspection Mode (see page 3-9).
Preparing for Final Adjustments (see page 3-11).
Caution
Instructions in this section assume you have completed all Construction Mode instructions in the
previous section and that the elevator car is running safely and reliably in Construction Mode. Note
that, in the course of installing the iLink cartop box, YOU MUST UNDO the temporary cartop CTS
bypass used to run the car on Construction Mode (with no iLink cartop box installed).
3-1
Inspection Mode
Landing System
Please see the instruction shipped with the landing system equipment. See the job prints for
wiring instructions. Depending on job requirements, one of the following landing systems will
be used:
iLand: Wheel encoder system. Instruction 42-IS-0173.
LS-EDGE: Steel tape encoder system. Instruction 42-IS-0214.
Setting the Position Encoder Resolution parameter

Set position encoder resolution as directed for the system on (iView Controller > View > Config-
uration > Pattern > Common tab).
Calibrating the Floor Offsets

See Calibrating the floor offsets in Section 4. If this is a new installation, wait until the car has
been fully adjusted so that it stops consistently and accurately at the floors.
3-2 Manual # 42-02-2223

iControl AC Installing iLink
Installing iLink
iLink is the cartop interconnect box used with iControl systems. The illustration below shows a
view of iLink circuitry with the cover removed. Make connections to the interconnect box as
shown in your job prints.
Figure 3.1 iLink Circuitry and Wiring
Installing the iLink Enclosure

The iLink enclosure is typically mounted on the left side (as you face the car) of the cartop,
opposite the iLand system. The enclosure has several partially-punched knockouts to accom-
modate two-inch conduit connections. Mount the iLink enclosure on or between the crosshead
beams.
Vertical mounting, as shown, is preferred. Mounting the iLink horizontally is acceptable only if
it is well protected from metal filings or other debris that might accumulate and damage electri-
cal components. The dimensions of the iLink enclosure depend upon how many input and/or
output boards are required for a particular job.
3-3
Inspection Mode
Installing the Hoistway Limit Switches

In general (for cam-operated switches):
Be sure that the cam operating the limit switches keeps the slowdown limit switches open
until the normal direction limit switch is broken.
Be sure that both the normal and final limit switches are held open for the entire run-by
travel of the elevator.
For faster elevators, the surface of the cam that operates the limit switches must be suffi-
ciently gradual so that the impact of the switch rollers striking the cam is relatively silent.
Note
After Terminal Switches (UNT5/DNT5) are installed, verify Inspection Low Speed (iView/Pattern/
Inspection) is set to 25 fpm and is enabled. UNT and DNT 5 switches are always used in iControl installa-
tions.
3-4 Manual # 42-02-2223

iControl AC Installing the Load Weigher
Installing the Load Weigher

Install and adjust the provided load weigher as directed in the instructions accompanying the
load weigher. Information regarding load weigher selection and threshold settings is provided
in Section 4. Please refer to Load Weigher Adjustment for Dispatching on page 4-29.
Installing Brake Monitoring

A spare iBox input (SP2D), or a programmable input (Brake Switch) on an ICE-MIAC board,
may be used for the brake contact. The brake monitoring contact may be provided as part of the
brake assembly. If not, a micro-switch (rated for at least 1/4 Amp, 125VDC) must be provided
by the installer and mounted such that when the brake picks, the switch activates (see note
below). Refer to job prints for electrical connection information. 3
The brake monitoring contact provides a path between the iBox 110VDC (#3) bus and the SP2D
or Brake Switch input. If the brake fails to pick (or drop) at the proper time, this signal will
cause the controller to generate a Brake Pick Fault (see Brake Pick Fault, BRAKE PICK
FAULT on page 6-15) or Brake Drop Fault (see Brake Drop Fault, BRAKE DROP FAULT on
page 6-14). The fault message is shown on the iBox LCD display, on the iView Operational Sta-
tus tab and in the iView Event Log.
Note
On the iView > Controller > Configuration >

Brake > Control tab, switch parameters are pro-
vided to specify the polarity of the SP2D/Brake
Switch input (active high or low). In addition,
parameters direct the system to monitor for a
brake pick and/or brake drop fault. If neither
pick or drop monitoring are checked, the con-
troller will ignore the SP2D/Brake Switch
input.
Danger
When installing the switch, take all necessary precautions not to interfere with normal brake design
or operation.
3-5
Inspection Mode
Installing the Earthquake Sensor

Connect the counterweight derailment detector and seismic sensor as shown in your job prints.
The EQ board provides a seismic sensor input (ESS), a spare sensor input (EQSP 1), and a coun-
terweight derailment detector (CW1/CW2). The ESS input is normally at 120VAC (no earth-
quake detected). A low (0.0V) at the ESS input will cause the elevator to go into Earthquake
Mode.
The counterweight derailment detector operates using a 24VDC ring and string circuit which
will be grounded if excessive counterweight motion occurs. iControl also monitors the continu-
ity of the string and will trigger a fault if the string breaks. The illustration below shows how
the circuit operates.
Temporary Bypass
If the earthquake devices will be installed later, you may temporarily bypass the ESS input
using a jumper from the ESS input to a #2 Bus (120V AC) connection. Bypass the counterweight
derailment detector by placing a jumper between CW1 and CW2.
Earthquake Reset
Earthquake Operation latches when activated by the seismic sensor or the derailment detector.
Press the reset button on the EQ board in iControl to reset EQ.Installing the
Installing the Serial Hall Call System

For simplex cars the hall call driver is located in the car controller cabinet. For cars operating as
part of a Group, the hall call driver is located in the Group cabinet. Please refer to Serial Hall
Call on page 5-17.
1. Refer to job print drawings -Serial Hall Call Details (-SH).
2. Set jumpers and install hall call nodes as shown in the drawings.
3. Serial hall call inputs and outputs are programmed on the iView System > Configuration
Tabs > System I/O > System tab.
4. Troubleshoot serial hall call fixtures using the iView Configuration > Serial I/O > Bus
tab.
Installing the Serial COP System

With the Serial Car Operating Panel system, car call buttons connect directly to a serializing
board located in the car station enclosure. Multiple Serial COP boards daisy-chain together to
accommodate installations with a lot of call buttons. Wiring from the Serial COP board(s) to the
iLink cartop box is just a short length of shielded cable with a telephone-style RJ-11 connector
at each end. The iLink cartop box supports up to four serial control panel connections. Commu-
nication between iLink and the controller is also serial.
Instructions for installing the Serial COP system can be found in Section 5. Please refer to
Serial COP on page 5-36.
1. Refer to job print drawings - Cartop Details (-CTx).
2. Serial COP inputs and outputs are programmed on the iView Configuration > I/O Board
> Configuration tab.
3-6 Manual # 42-02-2223

iControl AC Position Indicators
Position Indicators
Connect position indicators as shown in the prints.
Verifying Cartop Voltages

1. Set the iBox Inspection switch to the INSP position.
2. Set the Controller Stop switch to the Stop position.
3. Turn on power at the main disconnect.
4. Watch the front panel displays of the iBox, the controller will take about 60 seconds to
initialize.
5. Check the Computer, Safety A, Safety B, and Cartop status LEDs. The LEDs should be 3
lighted solid green.
6. Refer to the -CT drawings for power connections. On the cartop, verify all voltages
shown are present and within acceptable levels.
+5V, +/-15V, +/-26V, +3.3V test points are on the right edge of the ICE-CTP board
The GND test point is in the middle of the ICE-CTP board
Verify 2 and 3 bus power with respect to the 1 (common) bus
7. Verify the eight diagnostic LEDs on the CTP board. (On power up or reset, these LEDs
will light sequentially, first in one direction, then the other, after which they will briefly
clear. See the illustration below for normal operating indications.)
Figure 3.2 iLink CTP Board Diagnostic LEDs
LED 1: iBox to cartop input.

Blinks approx. every 40mS.
Remains OFF if input lost.
LED 2: Unintended motion
indication. Normally OFF.
LED 3: Unintended motion
indication. Normally OFF.
LED 4: Cartop to iBox output.
Blinks approx. every 40mS.
Remains OFF if output lost.
LED 5: Blinks every 40mS.
LED 6: ON for Inspection
mode. OFF otherwise.
LED 7: Not used.
LED 8: Not used.
CTP Board Diagnostic LEDs.

Located near D-connection to MIAC and
MOR boards.
8. Install the cover on the iLink cartop box.

9. Verify the iBox CARTOP LED is ON indicting that the iLink CTP board is communicat-
ing with the iBox. If not, verify that the CARTOP LINK wiring is connected as specified
on the job prints. Additional troubleshooting information is available in Section 6.
Please refer to iControl Circuit Board Quick References on page 6-74.
3-7
Inspection Mode
Verifying Door Operation

1. Verify that door related options required for this job are checked on the iView Safety
screen.
Top Access Landing
Top Access Rear
Bottom Access Landing
Bottom Access Rear
No Main String
No Main String Rear
Front Door Close Contact
Rear Door Close Contact
Rear Doors
Freight Door Option 1
Door Position Monitor
2. Simulate opening the front car gate by removing the wire from the GS terminal on the
iBox.
The iBox status LED Doors Locked will turn Off.
3. Reconnect the GS terminal.
4. Run the elevator up or down at inspection speed. Remove the DLAT (Door Lock Access
Top) input.
The elevator should immediately stop.
The Door Locked status LED will turn Off.
5. Reconnect the DLAT input. Repeat Step 4 for the DLAB input.
6. Reconnect the DLAB input. Repeat Step 4 for the DLMS input.
7. Reconnect the DLMS input.
8. Run the elevator at inspection speed. Move the Car Door Bypass switch to BYPASS.
The elevator should immediately stop since the door lock cannot be bypassed while on
Machine Room Inspection.
9. Move the Car Door Bypass switch back to Off.
Verifying the Safety Configuration

Verify that safety options required for this job are checked on the iView Safety screen. Any
options that are checked, but not operational, will require a jumper to allow the car to operate
on Inspection (inputs must be high).
3-8 Manual # 42-02-2223

iControl AC Exit Construction Mode
Exit Construction Mode

Perform the following checks before exiting construction mode:
1. On the iBox, verify that the green CARTOP LED is lighted indicating that the controller
is communicating with the cartop processor board. If not, check the CARTOP LINK wir-
ing. The terminals must be connected as follows: (iBox TX+ and TX- terminals to CTP
board RX+ and RX- terminals. iBox RX+ and RX- terminals to CTP board TX+ and TX-
terminals.)
2. In iView, display the Operational Status tab. Run the car and monitor the Position - Log-
ical and Position - Cartop values. Verify that values increase when the car is moving in
the up direction. The value(s) could be negative, in which case they must become less
negative when the car moves in the up direction.
3
3. As the car moves, monitor the Leveling Sensor indicators on the Operational Status tab.
Verify that the sequence is correct. When the car is traveling in the up direction, the
sequence should be, Front/Rear Up leveling marker, followed by Front/Rear Door zone,
followed by Front/Rear Down leveling marker.
To exit construction mode:
1. From the iView Write privilege menu, select Acquire. The iBox LCD will display a mes-
sage requesting write privileges for iView.
2. On the iBox, press the Yes (1) softkey to assign write privileges to iView.
3. Open the Safety screen.
4. Click the Construction Mode check box (remove check mark).
5. Click the Send button.
6. You must then re-learn the Safety Configuration. Please refer to Learning the Safety
Configuration on page 2-19.
Running on Machine Room Inspection

When ready to run the elevator on Inspection:
1. Verify iBox Computer, Safety A, Safety B, and Cartop status LEDs are lighted solidly
green.
2. Move the Inspection switch to the INSP position.
3. Move the Controller Stop switch to the RUN position.
Within 5 seconds, the Safety OK and Doors Locked LEDs should be on and the Fault LED
should be off.
4. Verify Car Door Bypass and Hall Door Bypass switches are set to the OFF position.
5. Verify that the car is in Machine Room Inspection on the iBox or in iView. If the car is in
another inspection mode (i.e., Cartop Inspection, In-car Inspection, or Hoistway
Access), turn them off. The INCT, INA, and INCP inputs on the left edge of the iBox
should be high (110VDC).
6. Press and hold the Enable button, then press the Up or Down button to run the car. Run
the car away from the terminal landing.
7. On the iBox or on the iView Hoistway screen, verify car speed (Actual Speed). Use the
iBox or iView Actual Speed as the speed reference.
3-9
Inspection Mode
TORQMAX F5: Use drive parameter LF22 to calibrate speed if required. Please
refer to Following Error Margin" on 2-45.
Magnetek HPV900 S2: Use parameter A1 Contract Mtr Spd to calibrate speed if
required.
Verifying Quadrature Pulse Sequence and Encoder Resolution

Position Encoder Resolution
Verify that Position Encoder Resolution (Pattern Configuration/Common tab) is correct as
instructed on the entry screen.
Quadrature Pulse Sequence

Quadrature pulse sequence must be verified before the hoistway can be learned.
1. Connect to the controller using iView.
2. Open the Hoistway screen. Display the Faults tab.
3. Move the car up the hoistway. Verify that Actual Position and Cartop Position increase.
4. Move the car down the hoistway. Verify that Actual Position and Cartop Position
decrease.
If quadrature pulses are reversed, the Position Quadrature Reversed fault will appear in the
Faults display after the elevator moves about two feet. (The Actual position may decrease as the
car moves up and increase as the car moves down.) If indications are not correct:
Check the DP1+/DP1- and DP2+/DP2- connections to the iBox and iLink (refer to the
job prints).
If the connections are correct, use a multi-meter to test that the positive- and negative-
going pulses are arriving at the terminals. The streams should pulse between -15 and
+15 volts.
If the signals are not arriving properly, check the cartop connection between the iLand
landing system and the iLink interconnect box. (Note that the Front Door/Front Mag-
nets cable must be present between the interconnect box and the landing system
regardless of your door/magnet configuration because it provides power to the landing
system.)
5. If iLand to iLink cabling is correct, first test the continuity of the cables, then check the
traveler connection between the iLink and the iBox for correct connections and continu-
ity.
3-10 Manual # 42-02-2223

iControl AC Prepare for Final Adjustments
Prepare for Final Adjustments

This section describes preparing for final adjustment.
Door Operator
The door operator must be working properly.
1. Verify door fuses are properly installed.
2. Verify iBox Car Door Bypass and Hoistway Door Bypass switches are OFF.
3. Check that all door equipment clutches, rollers, etc. are properly adjusted to correct run-
ning clearances.
4. Check controller prints to make sure any door operator diode installation instructions
have been followed (especially for G.A.L. door operators). 3
5. Verify that all hoistway and car doors are closed and locked.
6. Run the car through the hoistway on inspection mode to make sure the hoistway is clear.
Counterweight Learn Procedure

This procedure allows the controller to learn the position at which the car and counterweight
are at the same height. It must be performed if the controller will be using Earthquake opera-
tion and is helpful for counterweight balancing and pre-torque gain adjustment.
1. Move the car until the car and the counterweight are at the same height in the hoistway.
2. Place the iBox Inspection switch in the INSP position.
3. Place the iBox Learn switch in the ON position.
4. Display the Counterweight setup tab (View > Setup > Counterweight).
5. If Not ready is lighted, follow instructions in the message window until Ready is lighted.
6. With Ready lighted, click the Learn button.
The controller will learn the car/counterweight position and the Done indicator will light. The
learned Counterweight position is displayed on the Setup > Counterweight tab.
7. Set the iBox Learn switch to OFF and the iBox Inspection switch to NORM.
3-11
Inspection Mode
Counterweight Balancing
On modernizations, the weight of the car is often changed but compensating adjustments to the
counterweight are sometimes overlooked. This adjustment is important for achieving desired
performance and ride characteristics.
1. Place a balanced load in the car (specified percentage of full load; typically 40%).
2. On Inspection, run car to the middle of the hoistway to the position learned by perform-
ing the Counterweight Learn Procedure (see Counterweight Learn Procedure on
page 3-11). Verify position using the Actual Position displayed on the Operational Status
tab.
3. Turn controller power OFF.
4. Use a portable supply to inject sufficient DC voltage at controller terminals B1 and B2 to
lift the brake. (Or, manually lift the brake.)
5. Watch the car to see if it drifts. If not, the car and counterweight are balanced.
If the car drifts up, remove weight from the counterweight or add weight to the car and
repeat the balancing procedure.
If the car drifts down, add weight to the counterweight or remove weight from the car
and repeat the balancing procedure.
For a drum machine, follow the manufacturer counterweighting recommendations
and test the drum machine limit switches.
6. When car and counterweight are balanced, record the actual weight in the car for future
reference. Balanced load = _____________lbs. Restore controller power.
Run Testing
1. Verify all landing system magnets are installed according to job prints and instructions.
2. On inspection mode, run the car to the midpoint of the hoistway.
3. Set the iBox Test switch to the ON position.
4. Place the car on Machine Room Inspection, with Cartop Inspection OFF.
At this point, the car should be on Inspection operation and running without oscillation. There
may be substantial rollback when the car first starts.
5. On the iView Virtual Oscilloscope, set Test point 1 to Pattern (Command).
6. Use a digital voltmeter to check the pattern voltage on iBox test point STP1 with respect
to the Common terminal.
7. Verify Pattern scaling is at 100% (Configuration > Pattern > Common tab) and the
Inspection - High speed parameter is at 10% of contract speed (Configuration > Pattern
> Modes tab). Maximum value for Inspection - High speed is 150fpm. Verify Reduced
inspection speed option is enabled and that Inspection - Low speed is set to 25 fpm.
8. Run the car on Inspection and check the voltage at iBox test point STP1. If 8.0VDC is
equal to contract speed, then the reading at 10% should be 0.8VDC (+/- 5%).
9. Set Inspection - High speed to 50fpm.
10. On Inspection, run car to, or near, the bottom landing. Use test weights to load the car to
125% of full load in preparation for checking the ability of the brake to hold this weight.
Danger
If the brake does not hold, the car may slide into the pit. Use extreme caution.
3-12 Manual # 42-02-2223

iControl AC Prepare for Final Adjustments
11. On Machine Room Inspection, run the car up the hoistway sufficiently to allow a down
direction run.
12. On Machine Room Inspection, run the car down the hoistway. While the car is moving,
set the iBox Controller Stop switch to STOP to force the brake to apply while the car is
moving. If necessary, adjust the brake to hold the load.
13. Remove the weights from the car.
Empty Car Tests

With the car on Machine Room Inspection and test weights removed (empty car), the following
steps allow you to adjust the response of the car to reduce empty car rollback while avoiding the
oscillations that can occur if too much gain is adjusted into the system. For these tests you may
use a storage oscilloscope capable of a 1.0 centimeter per second sweep rate or you may use the
3
iView Virtual Oscilloscope
1. On the iView Virtual Oscilloscope, set Test point 1 to Speed Feedback. Adjust the Virtual
Oscilloscope for greater sensitivity and shorter timer period. If you are using a storage
oscilloscope, monitor iBox test point STP1 (lower right side of the iBox) with respect to
Common.
The empty car will probably drift up due to the counterweight, even when an attempt is made to
move it down. Perform the following:
TORQMAX F5 Drive: Verify the drive gain parameters:
- A.LF.31 - Kp speed accel (proportional gain) = 3000
- d.LF.31 - Kp speed decel (proportional gain) = 3000
- A.LF.32 - Ki speed accel (integral gain) = 350
- d.LF.32 - Ki speed decel (integral gain) = 250
2. Adjust brake Pick delay and Speed pick delay 1 (iView Configuration > Brake > Timers
tab) to coordinate the application of the speed pattern with the picking of the brake to
avoid movement of the car under the brake or rollback of the car. A DRO fault may occur
if brake Pick delay is reduced to a value lower than 0.30. Generally, brake Pick delay is
set to 0.40 and Speed pick delay 1 is set to 0.50 or slightly higher. (For TORQMAX
drives, verify that LF.70 = 0.300 (Delay to turn on DRO).
3. Experiment with improving response. A little rollback at this point is not critical as later
adjustments will compensate for it.
4. Verify that Pattern scaling is 100% (Configuration > Pattern > Common tab).
5. Using the iView Operational Status tab (Speed/Actual) or a hand held tachometer, verify
that Machine Room Inspection car speed is 10% of Standard - High speed (contract
speed) and matches the Inspection - High speed setting. Please refer to Following Error
Margin on page 2-45 if necessary.
Danger
At this point, the Fault/Function Bypass switch on the iBox should be in the OFF position. Fix all
faults so that no fault is bypassed before proceeding. If this is not possible, exercise EXTREME CAU-
TION while making final adjustments.
3-13
Inspection Mode
3-14 Manual # 42-02-2223

Final Adjustment
In This Section
This section describes final adjustment inspection of the elevator. At this point, all steps in Sec-
tions 2 and 3 should have been completed.
Learning the Floor Heights (see page 4-2).
Verifying One-Floor Run Operation (see page 4-3).
Reaching Contract Speed (see page 4-6).
Learning Normal & Emergency Terminal Limit Switches (see page 4-8).
Shaping the Speed Profile (see page 4-12).
Controlling the Start of Car Motion (see page 4-16).
Calibrating the Floor Offsets (see page 4-22).
Adjusting Leveling and Final Stop (see page 4-25).
Load Weigher Adjustment for Dispatching (see page 4-29).
Pre-Start Sequence (see page 4-34).
Calibration and Verification of Safety Functions (see page 4-39).
Safety Tests (see page 4-41).
Terminal Switch Faults (see page 4-53).
4-1
Final Adjustment
Learning Floor Heights
Note
This procedure must be successfully completed before running the elevator on Test or Normal operation.
Before proceeding, be certain you have verified the landing system quadrature pulse sequence. Please
refer to Verifying Quadrature Pulse Sequence and Encoder Resolution on page 3-10.
Floor Height Learn Procedure

The speed at which the car learns the hoistway is determined by the Inspection /High Speed
parameter (Configuration > Pattern > Modes tab). We recommend setting Inspection/High
Speed between 50 and 125 fpm for this process.
1. Place the car on Inspection.
2. On Machine Room Inspection, run the car down until the car is stopped by the normal
limit switch (DNTD). For floor height learning to begin, the ULM signal must be on,
DLM must be off, DNTD must be off, and UNTD must be on.
3. Place the Learn switch in the ON position.
4. In iView, display the Floor Heights Learn layout by selecting Floor Heights from the
View > Layouts menu and clicking the Learn tab on the Setup > Floor Heights tab.
5. On the Setup > Floor Heights > Learn tab, select Manual or Auto learn. (On Manual, you
run the car through the hoistway using the iBox Enable and Up/Down buttons. On Auto,
iControl will run the car through the hoistway automatically.)
6. If Not Ready is lighted, perform the instructions shown in the message window.
The Ready indicator lights when the car is placed in Inspection mode (with the
Learn switch ON and the ULM sensor is ON without DLM).
7. When Ready is lighted, click Learn. The In Progress indicator lights when the Learn
button is clicked.
If Manual learn was selected, you are prompted to press and hold the iBox Enable
and Up buttons.
Click Abort at any time to abort the procedure. If the learn process is aborted, the
last saved complete set of values is retained.
8. The procedure is complete when the up normal limit switch (UNTD) is activated (if
Manual learn type, you are prompted to release the Enable and Up buttons) and Done
is lighted.
4-2 Manual # 42-02-2223

iControl AC Verifying One Floor Run Operation
9. Set the iBox Learn switch to the OFF position.
10. Click the screen refresh button ( ) to update the learned floor height information.
11. On the Hoistway pane, verify that learned floor heights appear accurate. Also check the
iBox Safety OK status. (Occasionally, the Final Limit Switch may open at the end of a
Learn run.)
Verifying One Floor Run Operation

The first step in verifying one-floor run operation is to verify proper correction, run, and stop.
Verifying Correction, Run, and Stop 4

1. Arrange the elevator for empty car conditions.
2. On the Configuration > Pattern > Common tab, set Pattern scaling to 50%. This directs
the car to run at 50% of the commanded speed.
3. Move the car on Inspection to a location between floors, more than one foot away from a
landing so that no leveling sensors are engaged.
4. Place the car in Test mode (iBox Test switch ON). Set the iBox Fault Bypass switch to
ON.
5. Set the terminal limit switches to their default settings (View > Setup > Terminal
Switches) to allow the car to run.
6. Take the car out of Inspection operation (iBox Inspection switch in the NORM position).
The car will perform a Terminal Synchronization, using the learned position of the sen-
sor to update the current position reported by the position encoder.
Note
If a Limits Switches Checksum Fault is generated when the car is removed from Inspection operation, it
will be necessary to set the terminal switches to default values before proceeding (View > Setup > Termi-
nal Switches tab). Perform the procedure shown in the Terminal Learn message window titled To
default terminal switches, please do the following:.
7. If the car corrects and stops properly, proceed to Initiating a One Floor Run later in this
section.
If the Car Does Not Stop and Correct Properly

Check the iBox status display. Verify:
ULM, DLM, and DZ signals are working properly
Safety OK = ON - safety string is made up.
Doors Locked = ON - all doors are locked.
Inspection = OFF - not on Inspection operation.
Fault = OFF - no faults are active.
4-3
Final Adjustment
Initiating a One Floor Run

Because we have not yet learned Normal and Emergency Terminal Limit switches, stay away
from the terminals to avoid tripping faults. Remember that Fault Bypasses are on a 15-minute
limit. If you need more time, set Fault Bypass to OFF, then back to ON (within two seconds).
The car should now be at a floor. Avoid running the car close to a terminal landing. To initiate a
one-floor run:
1. Register a car call one floor above or below the current
car position:
Click the Car Call Registration button .
Select Car Calls, then Front or Rear panel.
Click a floor selection button.
If Initiation is not Successful

If the car does not move, check the iBox status display. Verify:
Safety OK = ON - safety string is made up.
Doors Locked = ON - all doors are locked.
Inspection = OFF - the car is not on Inspection operation.
Faults = OFF - there are no active faults.
Verifying a One Floor Run

During a one-floor run, observe the following:
When the car starts, note that on the Hoistway display,
the position indicator changes to the next floor just before
reaching the desired floor.
The car will decelerate to a point 6" (152.4 mm) before the
destination floor where the Level Up or Level Down sen-
sor will activate the associated indicator. This can be
observed on the Setup > Floor Heights > Learn tab.
The car will continue until it reaches a point 3" (76.2 mm) before the floor, then the Door
Zone input will activate. The Door Zone Rear input will be active if the floor has rear doors.
The elevator will continue to level into the floor and stop. The final leveling speed should
be set from 2 to 8 fpm (0.01 to 0.04 m/s). Your actual speed will be a fraction of that since
Pattern scaling is set to 50% at this time.
4-4 Manual # 42-02-2223

iControl AC Verifying One Floor Run Operation
1. On the iView Virtual Oscilloscope:

Set Test point 1 to Pattern Command
Set Test point 2 to Speed Feedback
(8-volts equals contract speed)
2. Run the car between floors to any intermediate landings (avoid activating terminal
switches).
3. Observe the car starts, accelerates, then decelerates into the floor and stops. If the car
overruns a floor, the relevel function will be activated. The Leveling Speed on the first
approach to a floor and the Releveling Speed (if releveling is necessary) are two sepa-
rately programmable values set on the Configuration > Pattern > Common tab.
Verify Releveling 4
1. When the car is at a floor, simulate overrunning by temporarily changing the floor
height Offset (Configuration > Floor Heights > Floor Offsets tab) to 0.50 and pressing
the Send button.
2. Observe the releveling operation. (Return Offset to the proper setting and press Send.)
3. Monitor the brake voltage on terminals B1 to B2 (located just below the iBox). Make
sure that a relevel brake voltage exists to avert stalling or excessive current draw by the
AC Drive during a relevel operation. Gearless machines are intended to drag the brake
during a relevel, so a partial pick is appropriate. Note, however, that if the brake did not
drop fully before the relevel, the reduced brake voltage may still hold the brake fully
picked.
4. Note that the relevel brake voltage is the same as pick voltage if you are using a low cur-
rent brake.
Do not spend a lot of time here working on the brake, just be sure the brake does not stall the
motor on a relevel. Final brake adjustment is a later topic in this section. (Please refer to Brake
Parameter Adjustments on page 4-19.)
4-5
Final Adjustment
Reaching Contract Speed
Note
Be sure to read this entire section before performing the following procedure. The car must be on Test
operation (iBox Test switch to ON) throughout the setup procedure. This prevents the doors from operat-
ing during adjustment.
Final Adjustment Before Running at Contract Speed

The following adjustments must be made in preparation for contract speed operation.
Speed Pick Delay

To achieve proper starting, without rollback or snapping away from the floor, a variable delay in
the application of the pattern signal is provided. Speed pick delay 1, on the Configuration >
Brake > Control tab, determines the amount of delay from the time the drive processor activates
the Run Enable signal to the time the pattern generator sends out the pattern signal.
1. The brake should just clear the brake
drum as the car is beginning to accelerate.
The recommended initial setting for
(Brake) Pick delay = 0.400 and for Speed
Pick Delay 1 = 0.500. The correct settings
can be determined by watching the drive
sheave. Some rollback may be tolerated
for now, but will be corrected later.
2. If the Drive On Fault (DRO) appears on
the iBox LCD display when direction is
picked, first increase Pick delay and then
increase Speed pick delay 1 to coordinate
the application of the pattern signal with
the picking of the brake.
Figure 4.1 Timer Diagram
Doors Locked High Pattern

Pattern
Door Open Motor Brake Applied
Limit High Contactor/ Contactor
Drive Enable
Brake Pick Voltage
80% of Pick
Voltage Hold Voltage
Pick Delay
Hold Delay
Speed Pick Delay 1 Timer
4-6 Manual # 42-02-2223

iControl AC Reaching Contract Speed
Pattern Scaling
1. Using Pattern scaling on the
Configuration > Pattern >
Common tab, increase con-
tract speed in 10% increments
until the car is running at
80% of contract speed. Moni-
tor performance on the iView
Virtual Oscilloscope. Set:
Test point 1 to Pattern Command (8V equals contract speed at 100% scaling)
Test point 2 to Speed Feedback (8V equals contract speed at 100% scaling)
2. Check for severe overshoot by monitoring Speed/Actual 4
on the Operational Status tab. Excessive overshoot can
trip the governor. If severe overshoot does not occur, con-
tinue to increase car speed in 10% increments by increas-
ing Pattern scaling incrementally up to a maximum of
100%. Verify that car speed is peaking at no more than 3%
over contract speed (10 fpm @ 350 fpm, 15 fpm @ 500
fpm, etc.).
3. If overshoot occurs, reducing Standard/Low roll jerk (Configuration > Pattern > Modes
tab) may help, however, a Safety A (or B) Contract Overspeed Fault will occur if Stan-
dard/Low roll jerk is reduced too much. Increasing the following TORQMAX drive
parameters will help to reduce overshoot:
A.LF.31 Kp speed accel: Proportional gain
d.LF.31 Kp speed decel: Proportional gain
4. Verify car speed by monitoring Speed/Actual on the Operational Status tab, or use a
hand-held tachometer. If car speed is still not correct, verify the following:
TORQMAX F5: LF.11, LF.20, LF.21, LF.22, LF.23, and LF.42 are set correctly.
Pattern scaling is 100%.
If the car is running faster than contract speed parameter:
TORQMAX F5: Decrease the value of high speed parameter LF.42.
Magnetek: Decrease the value of A1 Contract Mtr Spd.
If the car is running slower than contract speed parameter:
TORQMAX F5: Provided LF.42 is set to the same value as LF.20, then verify that
Gear Ratio Reduction Parameter LF.22 is set correctly. If the gear ratio is not cor-
rect, it is possible to increase the value of LF.22 in small (0.10) increments to reach
contract speed.
Magnetek: Increase the value of the A1 Contract Mtr Spd parameter.
Once the car is running at or near contract speed, you must learn the terminal landings in order
to safely run the car to the terminal landings (required before performing drive fine tuning).
(Please refer to Learning Normal & Emergency Terminal Limit Switches on page 4-8.)
Caution! Before learning the terminal switches, you can trip on terminal position and/or
velocity faults when the terminal switches (UNT1, DNT1, etc.) are activated. Avoid activating
the terminal switches until they have been learned.
4-7
Final Adjustment
Learning Normal & Emergency Terminal Limit Switches

The Normal Terminal Slowdown Limit (NT) and Emergency Terminal Limit (ETS) switch
Learn operation records car speed and position at the time each terminal switch is activated on
a normal approach to either terminal landing. This Learn operation should be performed again
after all parameters have been fully adjusted.
Note
The Terminal Switches Learn procedure must be repeated whenever Pattern profile parameters are mod-
ified, since the speed at which the car passes these switches will be different.
To Learn the speeds and positions associated with each NTS and ETS switch:
1. Place the iBox Test switch in the ON position.
2. Place the iBox Inspection switch in the INSP position.
3. In iView, display the Terminal Switches layout (View > Layout > Terminal Switches)
4-8 Manual # 42-02-2223

iControl AC Learning Normal & Emergency Terminal Limit
4. Refer to the job prints to determine which Normal Terminal Limit switches (UNTn and
DNTn) are required for this installation and where they should be positioned in the
hoistway. Verify that the Learned position on the Diagnostics > Terminal Switches Sta-
tus tab corresponds to the job prints. If not, refer to the Setup > Terminal Switches tab
and perform the procedure titled To default terminal switches, please do the follow-
ing:.
5. Move the car to the bottom landing (on Inspection).
6. Place the iBox Inspection switch in the NORM position to allow the car to synchronize to
a floor.
7. Place the iBox Learn switch in the ON position.
8. If the Not Ready indicator is lighted (Setup > Terminal Switches tab), perform any
instructions shown in the message window. 4
9. When the Ready indicator is lighted, click Learn. The In Progress indicator will light.
10. You may click Abort at any time to abort the procedure. If the learn process is aborted,
the last saved complete set of values is retained.
11. Place a call to the top terminal landing using the Call Registration panel.
12. When the car stops at the top landing, place a call to the bottom terminal landing.
13. When the procedure is complete, the Done indicator lights and you are prompted to
return the Learn switch to the OFF position. The new NT and ETS switch speeds and
positions are automatically saved to the controller.
14. The learned NT and ETS values are displayed on the Diagnostics > Terminal Switches
Status tab. Verify that all of the switches required for this job have reasonable values dis-
played. If only UNT1 and DNT1 switches are used in addition to UNT5 and DNT5
(always present), the UNT1 and DNT1 values must be 95% of contract speed or less. If
more NT switches are used, UNT1 and DNT1 may have learned speeds equal to contract
speed, but all other NT switches must have learned speeds 95% of contract speed or less.
If some limit switches have learn speeds in excess of their maximum, those switches must be
moved closer to the terminal landings. Alternately, if reduced performance can be tolerated, the
Standard/Deceleration parameter can be reduced.
15. Make several full hatch runs. After each run, on the Diagnostics > Terminal Switches
Status tab, verify that there is a comfortable margin between the last pass speeds and
the Over speed 1 tripping thresholds for the terminal switches used on this job. Also ver-
ify that there is a comfortable margin between the last pass positions and the Upper and
Lower limit position thresholds.
Danger
This procedure must be successfully performed before any passengers are allowed to use the elevator.
4-9
Final Adjustment
Fine Tuning the TORQMAX F5 Drive

This section describes fine adjustments to the TORQMAX drive.
Up/Down High Speed Difference

1. Verify that Pattern Scaling is set to 100%.
2. If car speed, at high speed, is not the same in the up and down directions, verify the fol-
lowing:
Drive gain parameters LF.31 and LF.32 are set properly. (If set too high, there may be
oscillation in the car.)
Pattern voltage between (F4 terminals) X2-14 (Analog IN +) and X2-15 (Analog IN -)
or (F5 terminals) X2A-1 and X2A-2 on the TORQMAX drive equals -10.00 VDC in the
UP direction and + 10 VDC in the DOWN direction. If the UP/DN pattern voltage is
different, perform the adjustments described in Section 2. (Please refer to Following
Error Margin on page 2-45.)
3. Use the Actual Speed indication or a hand held tachometer to verify car speed. The ele-
vator should now be running at or near contract speed in both up and down directions.
If the elevator is running at a higher speed than parameter LF.20 Contract Speed,
decrease the value of parameter LF.42 High Speed.
If the elevator is running at a slower speed than parameter LF.20 Contract Speed, provided
LF.42 is set at the same value as LF.20, increase or decrease the value of LF.22 in small incre-
ments (0.10) to reach contract speed.
Car Does Not Reach High Speed

1. Verify that there is +10 VDC between (F4 terminals) X2-14 (Analog IN +) and X2-15
(Analog IN -) or (F5 terminals) X2A-1 and X2A-2 on the TORQMAX drive. If the voltage
is not correct, refer to Up/Down High Speed Difference above.
2. Verify that the following drive parameters are set correctly:
LF.11 Rated Motor Speed (RPM)
LF.20 Contract Speed (FPM)
LF.21 Traction Sheave Diameter (inches)
LF.22 Gear Reduction Ratio
LF.23 Roping Ratio
LF.42 High Speed (FPM)
Once tuning is complete, relearn the terminal switches. (Please refer to Learning Normal &
Emergency Terminal Limit Switches on page 4-8.) Then perform the Shaping the Speed Profile
procedure. (Please refer to Shaping the Speed Profile on page 4-12.)
4-10 Manual # 42-02-2223

iControl AC Learning Normal & Emergency Terminal Limit
Fine Tuning the Magnetek Drive

This section describes fine adjustments to the Magnetek HPV900 Series 2 drive.
Motor No-Load Current - Induction Motor only

Please see Tuning Motor No-Load Current in the appendix of the Magnetek Drive Technical
Manual for the specific steps of this procedure.
Running the car at reduced speed with a balanced load is used to perform this procedure.
Motor torque should be below 15%.
Motor Torque, Flux Reference, and Est No Load Curr can be viewed via drive's D2
Power Data menu.
No Load Curr can be changed on the drive A5 Motor menu (900 series 2). 4
The car speed can be temporarily changed via Pattern Scaling on the controller Config-
uration > Pattern > Common tab.
Motor Flux Saturation Curve - Induction Motor only

Please see Tuning Motor's Flux Saturation Curve in the appendix of the Magnetek HPV900
Series 2 AC/PM Drive Technical Manual for the specific steps of this procedure.
Running the car at full contract speed with a balanced load is used to perform this proce-
dure.
Est No Load Curr can be viewed via the drive's D2 Power Data menu.
No Load Curr and Flux Sat Slope 2 can be changed on the drive's A5 Motor menu.
Motor Rated RPM - Induction Motor only

Please see Tuning Rated Motor RPM in the appendix of the Magnetek HPV900 Series 2 AC/PM
Drive Technical Manual for the specific steps of this procedure.
Running the car fully loaded at contract speed is used to perform this procedure.
Est Rated RPM can be viewed on the drive's D2 Power Data menu.
Rated Mtr Speed can be changed on the drive's A5 Motor menu.
System Inertia (Magnetek HPV900 Series 2 or Quattro)

In order to properly tune the speed regulator of the drive, a valid inertia value must be deter-
mined. Please see Using the Software to Estimate the System's Inertia in the appendix of the
Magnetek AC Drive Technical Manual for the specific steps of this procedure.
Running the car at full contract speed with a balanced load is used to perform this proce-
dure.
Est Inertia can be viewed on the drive's D1 Elevator Data menu.
Inertia can be changed on the drive's A1 Drive menu.
With the system inertia properly adjusted, final tuning of the speed regulator can be performed.
The Response parameter on the drive's A1 Drive menu is one parameter that can be used to
adjust the speed regulator.
Once tuning is complete, relearn the terminal switches. (Please refer to Learning Normal &
Emergency Terminal Limit Switches on page 4-8). Then perform the Shaping the Speed Profile
procedure. (Please refer to Shaping the Speed Profile on page 4-12).
4-11
Final Adjustment
Shaping the Speed Profile

The pattern graph below charts calls out the parameters that define profile shape. The value of
pattern parameters is very important in determining the ride quality and overall elevator per-
formance. The most critical parameters are Deceleration, Flare Jerk, Approach Deceleration,
Approach Jerk and Leveling Speed. They define final stop and greatly affect floor to floor time.
Figure 4.2 Pattern Graph
Velocity Pattern
High Velocity
Low Roll Jerk Low Roll Jerk

Acceleration
Deceleration
Deceleration
High Roll Flare Jerk Flare Jerk
Jerk Approach Jerk Approach Jerk
Leveling Leveling
Initial Approach Velocity Approach Velocity
Jerk Deceleration Deceleration
Leveling Leveling
Time Distance Distance
Profile Parameters
Initial jerk - transition from zero speed to full acceleration. As Initial Jerk increases, the
profile transitions more quickly from starting to maximum acceleration. Values typically
range from 4.0 to 8.0 ft/s3 (1.219 to 2.438 m/s3) with higher values resulting in a sharper
start.
Acceleration - maximum acceleration for the profile. Determines maximum current
delivered by the AC Drive during acceleration. The maximum value is typically 4.0 ft/s2
(1.219 m/s2) and the minimum is usually not less than 2.5 ft/s2 (0.762 m/s2). Values
higher than 4.0 ft/s2 (1.219 m/s2) are possible but do not yield significant improvements
in performance.
High roll jerk - is used on short runs where the car is not able to reach High Speed
before deceleration must begin. High Roll Jerk determines how quickly the profile transi-
tions from maximum to zero acceleration and zero to maximum deceleration. As High Roll
Jerk increases, the profile transitions more quickly. Lower values provide greater comfort
but are harder to fit into the shortest one-floor-runs. We recommend that you identify the
shortest full height floor and use it when testing parameter values. Typical values range
from a minimum of 4.0 ft/s3 to a maximum of 8.0 ft/s3.
Low roll jerk - is used on runs where the car is able to reach High Speed before decelera-
tion must begin. Low Roll Jerk determines how quickly the profile transitions from maxi-
mum to zero acceleration (High Speed) and zero to maximum deceleration. As Low Roll
Jerk increases, the profile transitions more quickly. Lower values provide greater comfort.
Typical values range from a minimum of 4.0 ft/s3 to a maximum of 8.0 ft/s3.
4-12 Manual # 42-02-2223

iControl AC Shaping the Speed Profile
High speed - determines the maximum speed for this profile. For the Standard Profile
this is usually contract speed (ft/min).
Deceleration - determines the maximum deceleration for this profile. The maximum
value is typically 4.0 ft/s2 and the minimum is usually not less than 2.0 ft/s2 with more
common values ranging from 2.75 ft/s2 to 3.75 ft/s2 (0.838 to 1.143 m/s2). The value of
Deceleration is usually slightly less than the value of Acceleration (by 0.25 to 0.5).
Flare jerk - defines the transition from maximum deceleration to near zero Speed or to
Approach Deceleration. As Flare Jerk increases, the profile transitions more quickly from
maximum deceleration to Approach Deceleration. Reduction of this parameter is often
used to reduce the tendency to spot or stall near the end of deceleration, and/or to reduce
any tendency for the deceleration rate, as experienced in the car, to bunch up (increase as
the car approaches the floor). The limiting factor in reducing the value of Flare Jerk is the 4
inability to fit the profile into the shortest normal one-floor-run.
Approach deceleration - determines the deceleration rate for the transition from Flare
Jerk to Approach Jerk.
Approach jerk - defines the transition from approach deceleration to Leveling Speed. As
Approach Jerk increases, the profile transitions more quickly from Approach Deceleration
to Leveling Speed.
Leveling speed - determines the Speed at which the elevator will level into the floor.
Leveling distance - determines the stabilized distance the elevator will travel before
arriving at the destination floor.
Profiles
There are eight programmable profiles addressed on the Pattern Screen:
Standard Profile - used under normal operating conditions. Unless otherwise specified,
suggested profile parameter adjustments are assumed to be referring to Standard Profile
parameters.
Earthquake Profile - used if an earthquake is sensed by the elevator system during nor-
mal operation (EQI input activated). If you have earthquake operation, you will verify
proper operation during testing.
Emergency Power Profile - used when the Emergency Power input (EPI) is activated,
indicating a loss of commercial power and that the car is running on generator power.
Emergency Slowdown Profile - used when the system requires faster than normal
deceleration. It is used in response to situations such as the normal terminal stopping
device being activated or loss of the quadrature signal (positioning signal). Note that the
Emergency rate limited stop parameter (Configuration > Drive > General tab) will limit
how fast this profile can slow down the car. Increasing this parameter will allow higher
deceleration rates to be used for the Emergency Slowdown Profile.
Correction Profile - used when the system is not confident of the car position in the
hoistway. The car proceeds to a known position using the Correction Profile parameters in
order to synchronize its position information.
Inspection Profile - used when the system is placed on Inspection/Access operation.
The Inspection Profile is also used when the system is learning the building floor heights.
Alternate 1 - used when the Alternate Speed Profile One input (ASP1) is activated.
Alternate 2 - used when the Alternate Speed Profile Two input (ASP2) is activated.
4-13
Final Adjustment
Setting Pattern Parameters

By viewing the commanded pattern and car speed feedback on the iView Virtual Oscilloscope
screen as the car is running, any discontinuity in the idealized speed profile can be observed.
On the iView Virtual Oscilloscope screen:
Set Test point 1 = Pattern (Command)
Set Test point 2 = Speed Feedback
Note
Unless otherwise specified, suggested parameter adjustments are assumed to be referring to Standard
Profile parameters.
Initial Values for Pattern Parameters - Pattern shape preset can be used to enter
preset values for the Standard profile parameters based on the high speed (contract speed)
of the elevator and the selected shape type (Slow, Moderate or Fast). This provides an
excellent starting point.
Contract Speed Overshoot and Current Limiting -To prevent contract speed over-
shoot and/or current limiting from the AC Drive, the Acceleration and Low Roll Jerk
parameters can be reduced. The Low Roll Jerk rate has a slightly greater effect on over-
shoot at high speed than does Acceleration. The Acceleration parameter has the most
effect on current limiting. Observe actual car response on iBox test point STP2 and GND
(with Virtual Oscilloscope Test point 2 set to Speed Feedback) to verify that there is no
overshoot.
Motor Current Limiting - If running out of motor current near the end of Acceleration
becomes a problem, as is evidenced by the AC motor current on the Drive keypad during a
full load UP operation:
TORQMAX F5 drive - set parameter LF.36 Maximum Torque = 300 (3x LF.17). This
will automatically adjust the current limit.
Magnetek - Increase A1 > Mtr Torque Limit.
If this does not help, reduce the value of Acceleration. Another possibility is to
decrease the value of Low Roll Jerk so that there is a smooth transition from maximum
acceleration to contract speed.
Slope of Acceleration / Deceleration - Ideally, the slope of acceleration in volts
per second should be equal to or slightly greater than the slope of deceleration as
viewed on an oscilloscope connected to iBox test point STP1 and COM (with Virtual
Oscilloscope Test point 1 set to Speed Feedback Filtered). To get approximately equal
acceleration and deceleration speeds in a system where tracking accuracy is very good,
Acceleration can be equal to Deceleration. If tracking is less accurate, set Acceleration
greater than Deceleration to get the same effective rate of deceleration as acceleration.
4-14 Manual # 42-02-2223

iControl AC Shaping the Speed Profile
Final Approach to the Floor -

Final approach to the floor can be
customized in many different ways.
If tracking accuracy is very good, you
can probably program as follows on
the iView Pattern > Common tab:
Leveling speed = Your desired
leveling speed. A typical number
is from 2 to 4.
Leveling Distance = your choice. A typical number is from 0.12 to 0.25.
If tracking is not perfect, you can begin to introduce values in Leveling Speed and Distance that
allow you to mold the shape of the last few inches of approach. 4
Excessive Motor Noise - If there is excessive motor noise or if acceleration or decelera-
tion feels rough, reduce Acceleration and/or Deceleration to provide the desired results.
Also, verify that:
TORQMAX Drive - At lower speeds the drive automatically selects a lower carrier fre-
quency to produce more current from the drive. If required, adjust LF.38 Switching
Frequency = 0. This will set the carrier frequency to 8 KHz. In addition, reduce drive
gain value, LF.31 and LF.32. DO NOT reduce LF.31 below 1200 or LF.32 below 800 as
a loss of control will result.
Bunching up of Deceleration Rate - If you are observing a bunching up of decelera-
tion rate (an increase in the deceleration rate as you reach the last few feet of approach to
the floor), it is generally due to inaccurate tracking.
Increase lag compensation via Lag Delay on the controllers Configuration > Pattern >
Common tab.
Improve tracking or lower the value of the Flare Jerk and/or Approach Jerk parame-
ters. Remember that there are very real limits to how low you can set these parameters
(1.75 ft/s3 is often as low as you can go).
4-15
Final Adjustment
Controlling Initial Start of Car Motion

Some gearless machines may exhibit rollback at the start of car motion. Geared machines
rarely exhibit rollback. To control rollback at the start of car motion:
Pre-torque implementation for systems with analog load weighers
Adjust drive control parameters specifically designed for the start of motion
Perform a sophisticated brake adjustment (iField Brake Module only)
Pre-torque Adjustments
For installations using an analog load weigher, load information can be used to provide pre-
torquing of the hoist motor as necessary to accommodate load changes at a floor and prevent
sagging or rollback.
Note
Performing safety and buffer tests described later in this section will probably require that you repeat the
pre-torque adjustment described here.
Pre-torque adjustment includes:

Load weigher sensor adjustment
Balanced load determination
Pre-torque gain control adjustments
Load Weigher Sensor Adjustment

Review the installation and adjustment instructions for the load weigher and verify that all
steps have been completed, including:
Rope Tension Sensing Load Weigher - perform the procedures described in the EMCO
Load Weigher instruction.
Crosshead Deflection Load Weigher - perform the procedures described in the Adjust-
ments section of the K-Weigh Instruction Manual.
Isolated Platform Load Weigher - perform the adjustment procedures described in the
MCE Load Weigher instruction.
Next, verify that the iBox is receiving the load weigher signals properly.
1. On Independent service, move the car to the landing where the test weights are stored.
2. On the iView Virtual Oscilloscope screen, select Load Weigher (Raw) on Test point 1.
3. With the car empty, verify Test point 1 reading is at least 0.5 but not greater than 1.5.
4-16 Manual # 42-02-2223

iControl AC Controlling Initial Start of Car Motion
4. Place a full load in the car. Verify

that the Test point 1 value is now
between 5.5 and 8.0. If necessary,
adjust trimpot LW ADJ on the CTP
(cartop) board in the iLink enclo-
sure to achieve the correct reading.
Pretorque Gain Adjustments

1. Place a balanced load in the car (the
balanced load weight recorded
when performing the Counter-
weight Balancing procedure).
Please refer to Counterweight Bal-
4
ancing on page 3-12.
2. With the car in Test mode (iBox
TEST switch ON) move the car to
the top floor.
3. On the Configuration > Drive >
Pre-Torque tab, enable the Pre-
torque option and send the new
selection to iControl.
4. On the Virtual Oscilloscope, select
Load Weigher Balanced on Test
point 1. If necessary, adjust the win-
dows so that you can see the oscilloscope and the Pre-Torque parameters at the same
time.
5. On the Configuration > Drive > Pre-Torque tab, adjust the Pretorque balance adjust-
ment parameter until the digital readout for Test point 1, Load Weigher Balanced, is
equal to or as close to zero (0.0) as possible.
6. If Error compensation, on the Configuration > Drive > Control tab, was increased to
compensate for rollback, you may lower the value now.
7. Verify that Pretorque position compensation, on the Drive > Pre-torque tab is set to 0.0.
If necessary, set it to 0.0 and Send it to the controller.
8. Verify that Pretorque gain, on the Drive > Pre-torque tab, is 0.0. If necessary, set it to
0.0 and Send it to the controller.
9. On the Configuration > Brake > Control tab, increase the value of Speed Pick Delay 1 to
2.0 seconds so that any rollback is easily detected.
10. Remove the weights from the car and move the car to one floor below the top landing.
11. Make a one-floor-run down. Check for rollback by either watching the motor or by mon-
itoring the Speed Feedback signal on the Virtual Oscilloscope.
12. If rollback is detected, adjust the Pretorque gain parameter on the Drive > Pre-Torque
tab, and again make a one-floor run down from one floor below the top landing. Repeat
until rollback is no longer noticeable. Then verify that there is no rollback on a one-floor
run going up from one floor below the top landing.
13. Run the car to the bottom landing. Make one-floor runs up and then down, checking for
rollback.
4-17
Final Adjustment
14. If rollback is detected, decrease the value (less positive or more negative) of Pretorque
position compensation, on the Drive > Pre-Torque tab. Repeat until no rollback is
detected on one-floor runs up or down in the lower hoistway. If pull-though is detected,
increase the value (more positive or less negative). Pretorque position compensation has
a range of -5.00o to +5.000.
15. With the car empty, check throughout the hoistway and verify that rollback is not
detected.
16. Place full load weights in the car and check for rollback throughout the hoistway. Verify
that rollback is not detected. Adjust Pretorque gain, on the Drive Pre-Torque tab, if nec-
essary.
17. Again remove all weights from the car. Check for rollback throughout the hoistway and
verify that no rollback is detected. If some rollback has been introduced by adjusting the
Pretorque gain for a full load, optimize the setting for an empty car, since this is the
most frequent condition.
18. Reduce Speed Pick Delay 1, on the Configuration > Brake > Control tab, to the mini-
mum value which still allows the brake to lift fully before motion starts. You should not
feel the car pulling out from under the brake. The brake should lift fully before motion
starts, but avoid unnecessary delay in starting movement.
Note
If this car will be using the load weigher for dispatching functions, e.g. Light load anti-nuisance, etc., you
may want to set the parameters and learn the load values at this time. Please refer to Load Weigher
Adjustment for Dispatching on page 4-29.
Drive Control Adjustments

In AC Flux Vector drive applications, when Run Enable (RE) is active, the control system picks
the main power contactor (PM Contactor) and enables the drive unit. The drive applies voltage
to the AC motor to build up magnetic flux. The amount of time it takes to build up flux in the AC
motor (from 200 to 500 ms) depends upon motor characteristics and temperature. AC drive
logic detects the build up of flux in the motor and generates the Drive ON output. At this time,
the motor may have developed enough torque to hold the load.
The motor no load current value is not high enough to hold the car at zero speed when the drive
is enabled. The normal setting for no load current is 30% to 40% of full load current. Pick delay
(Configuration > Brake > Control tab) is used to coordinate the picking of the brake with the
build up of flux. If the delay is not sufficient, the flux will not build up fully and a DRO fault will
occur. Speed pick delay 1 is used to delay the application of the pattern signal to the drive to pre-
vent the car from moving under the brake.
Pick delay must be adjusted to achieve a smooth start, prevent rollback, and prevent DRO
faults.
Speed pick delay 1 must be adjusted to prevent movement of the car under the brake.
4-18 Manual # 42-02-2223

Brake Parameter Adjustments

The iField braking module allows you to make some very refined brake adjustments for smooth
picking to control rollback.
First, find the level of brake excitation that results in a very gradual but complete picking
of the brake:
1. Place the car on Inspection (iBox Inspection switch in the INSP position). Set Pattern
Scaling (Pattern/Common tab) to 10% to provide an inspection speed of about 5 to 10
fpm.
Figure 4.3 Brake timing diagram for smooth picking
Doors Locked High

Pattern Pattern 4
Door Open Motor Brake Applied
Limit High Contactor/ Contactor Smooth Pick
Drive Enable
Brake Pick Voltage
80% of Pick
Weakening Voltage
Pick Delay
Delay
Weakening
Repick
Time Hold Delay
2. Display the Configuration > Brake > Control tab and record the original parameters
before making any changes. Verify the following settings:
Weakening delay = 0.00
Repick time = 0.00
3. Set the Pick voltage and the Hold voltage to of the original value of Pick voltage.
4. Slowly increase both Pick and Hold voltages until the brake picks completely. The idea is
to increase or decrease both Pick voltage and Hold voltage identically until the brake
just barely picks all the way. Then, add 5 or 10 volts and verify that the brake still has a
very slow, smooth picking motion (taking 1 to 1.5 seconds to pick). The goal is to find a
brake voltage that allows the brake to transition slowly through the pressure-releasing
part of the movement.
5. Set the Weakening voltage to the same value as Pick Voltage and Hold Voltage. For
geared applications, if the brake holding voltage is not specified, set Weakening voltage
and Hold voltage = Pick voltage.
4-19
Final Adjustment
6. Apply a maximum value of brake voltage, very briefly, at the start of movement. This
gets the brake quickly to the point in the lifting process where a substantial amount of
tension is released. This is done as follows:
Set Pick voltage back to the original value to allow a high initial value of brake voltage.
Set Repick time to 1.00 second to allow a slow transition through the pressure-releas-
ing part of movement, after which the brake voltage briefly returns to a high value to
ensure that the brake fully picks. (See the following note.)
Increase the value of Weakening delay in 0.05 second increments until you see the
brake move more quickly in the first part of its movement so it can reach the stage
where the pressure is starting to be released. Typical values are between 0.10 to 0.45
seconds. The final result will often look as if the brake is lifting at a fairly constant rate,
even though the initial voltage is high. This overcomes the natural tendency for a gear-
less brake to start lifting slowly and then faster the further it lifts.
Note
It is important to realize that full brake Pick voltage is automatically applied for about a second at the
end of the brake Weakening delay, just after the brake has cleared the braking surface, thereby guaran-
teeing full lifting after a smooth transition through the zone of pressure release. After the brief return to
full brake voltage, the brake voltage will automatically drop to the Hold voltage, but must not allow the
brake to sag back onto the braking surface.
Verify the manufacturers recommended value for brake holding voltage and set Hold
voltage to that value. If this information is not available, experiment with Hold voltage
to determine the voltage necessary to hold the brake up, and then add a little extra
margin.
7. At this point, a storage oscilloscope is suggested to get the best results from adjustment.
Connect the scope to iBox test points STP2 and GND (with the iView Virtual Oscillo-
scope Test point 2 set to Speed Feedback) to view car speed response.
8. Set the horizontal sweep to about 0.5 to 0.2 second per division and increase vertical
gain until you see a microscopic view of the breakaway at the start of movement. A
rough start is characterized by jaggedness at the beginning of the curve; a smooth start
by a smooth transition from the horizontal line to the acceleration curve. Using this
method, you can touch up parameters such as Speed pick delay 1 in the next step.
9. On the Configuration > Pattern > Common tab, set Pattern scaling to 100%.
10. Coordinate the start of the car with brake operation by increasing Speed pick delay 1
(Configuration > Brake > Control tab) until you begin to see rollback at the start of an
empty car DOWN run at the top floor. Then, decrease Speed pick delay 1 until rollback
just disappears.
It may be helpful to reduce the Initial jerk parameter to 5.00 or 4.00 to help provide a smooth
start. Remember that any change in the brake parameters, Initial jerk, or any of the gain
parameters relating to the speed loop will probably affect the coordination of the starts. There-
fore, you must readjust Speed pick delay 1 after any such changes.
4-20 Manual # 42-02-2223

Figure 4.4 Effect of Speed Pick Delay on the Start of Car Motion
Volts
Speed Pick Delay just right
Not enough
Speed Pick Delay
Time
4
Too much Speed Pick Delay
Brake Lifts
Become familiar with the correlation between what is seen on the scope and what is felt in the
car at the start of motion. Use the scope to adjust brake parameters to provide smooth starts. If
the car has sleeve bearings, be sure to evaluate starts without letting too much time pass
between runs to get accurate rollback information. Once you see the effect of the various param-
eter adjustments on car operation, you will see how important it is to have the brake properly
adjusted.
The value of Repick time (Configuration > Brake > Control tab) can be reduced but doing so will
reduce the time that the brake spends accomplishing a slow lift with Weakening voltage
applied. This will eventually cause the brake to start lifting rapidly. Typically, Repick delay
should not be less than 0.50 seconds.
4-21
Final Adjustment
Calibrating the Floor Offsets

iControl provides an easy and precise method of setting the parameters required to stop the car
accurately at every floor. Stopping spot on at every floor requires three things:
1. The control system must know the exact position of the car in the hoistway and the exact
position of each landing target (magnet). Without requiring any user adjustment, the
extremely accurate iLand landing system allows iControl to know the cars position in
the hoistway to within 1/20 inch. And the Floor Height Learn procedure, see Learning
Floor Heights on page 4-2, allows iControl to know the exact position of the landing
target to the same accuracy.
2. The control system must know the exact position in the hoistway of each landing sill.
Calibrating the floor offsets allows iControl to know this position to an accuracy limited
only by the accuracy of your measurement.
3. The car must be adjusted to stop smoothly and consistently, given the limitations of con-
trolling the machine and brake and the inevitable trade off between stopping accuracy
and ride quality. These adjustments will be performed after the floor offsets are cali-
brated. Please refer to Adjusting Leveling and Final Stop on page 4-25.
Floor offset calibration procedure

This procedure requires IMP software version 002.001.001 or greater and iView software ver-
sion 003.000.001 or greater.
Floor offset calibration can be performed by one or two persons. You will move the car to each
floor that you want to calibrate, and the distance between the car sill and landing sill must be
measured. You can use the form provided to record your measurements (See Floor Offset Cali-
bration Record on page 4-24). You need not perform the calibration for all floors each time the
procedure is performed.
The measured values, in decimal inches, will be entered into iView on the Setup > Floor Heights
> Floor Offsets tab). You can make the measurement using a fractional inch square and then
use the conversion table provided to determine the decimal value. But the better way is to use a
machinist square which is marked in decimal inches.
Once the floor offsets have been entered, iControl is able to calculate the exact location of each
hoistway landing sill using the known exact position of the car, known exact position of the tar-
get magnet and the measured distance from the car sill to the hoistway sill. Then, once the car is
adjusted to stop smoothly and consistently, iControl can stop the car spot on at every landing.
4-22 Manual # 42-02-2223

To calibrate the floor offsets:

1. Display the Floor Offsets Setup tab by selecting Floor Heights from the View > Layouts
menu and then clicking the Setup > Floor Offsets tab.
2. Move the car to the desired starting landing (e.g. top or bottom terminal landing). The
Ready indicator should light. Follow the instructions provided in the text box.
3. Verify that the machine room INSPECTION switch is in the NORM position. It is recom-
mended to place the car on Independent service while performing this calibration.
4. Click Calibrate to begin making offset measurements. The In progress indicator lights.
5. Run the car to each floor where you want to calibrate the floor offset and perform step
#6. It is not necessary to calibrate all floors each time this procedure is performed.
6. Upon arrival at each floor, wait about 10 seconds to allow the car to settle and for iCon-
trol to acquire the cars exact position (Acquired light turns on). Measure and record the
distance the car sill is above or below the hoistway landing sill, and record the direction
(car sill above or below). If the sills are not parallel, record the average measurement.
7. Return to the starting floor and measure its offset last. The Done indicator lights indi-
cating that the measurement portion of the offset calibration procedure is completed.
8. Enter the measured value (decimal inches) in the Measured in column (Offsets table on
the Setup> Floor Heights > Floor Offsets tab). If the car sill was above the landing sill,
enter a plus (+) value. If the car sill was below the landing sill, enter a minus (-) value.
9. Click Send to send the new offset values to the iController
4-23
Final Adjustment
Table 4.1 Floor Offset Calibration Record
Car Above/ Fractional Decimal Car Above/ Fractional Decimal

Floor Floor
below landing inch inch below landing inch inch
30 60
29 59
28 58
27 57
26 56
25 55
24 54
23 53
22 52
21 51
20 50
19 49
18 48
17 47
16 46
15 45
14 44
13 43
12 42
11 41
10 40
9 39
8 38
7 37
6 36
5 35
4 34
3 33
2 32
1 31
Table 4.2 Fractional to decimal inch conversion
Fractional in. Decimal in. Fractional in. Decimal in.

1/32 .031 9/32 .281
1/16 .063 5/16 .313
3/32 .094 11/32 .344
1/8 .125 3/8 .375
5/32 .156 13/32 .406
3/16 .188 7/16 .438
7/32 .219 15/32 .469
1/4 .250 1/2 .500
4-24 Manual # 42-02-2223

iControl AC Adjusting Leveling and Final Stop
Adjusting Leveling and Final Stop

This section describes adjusting leveling into the floor and bringing the car to a final stop.
Final Approach and Leveling

Observe elevator operation by watching the hoist motor and observing car response on iBox test
point STP1 to GND (with the Virtual Oscilloscope Test point 1 parameter = Speed Feedback).
If tracking accuracy is very good, increase Leveling speed and decrease Leveling distance
to reduce floor-to-floor time. You can also increase the value of Approach jerk, Decelera-
tion, and Flare jerk.
If tracking is not perfect, begin to reduce Deceleration, Approach jerk, and Flare jerk
parameters to mold the shape of the last few inches of approach. Some experimentation 4
will be necessary in order to see the effect of changing parameter values. A digital storage
oscilloscope is essential.
The goal is for the speed pattern shape to flare out and blend the deceleration into the lev-
eling speed. It is possible to modify the pattern to obtain a lot of stabilized leveling or to
decelerate the elevator all the way into the floor to obtain the best brake-to-brake times. It
is here that most of the performance and perceived ride quality is determined. Try the full
load range to be sure the stops are consistent.
Final Stop
There are many items to consider in establishing a smooth and accurate stop. Each contributes
to the final result:
Brake drop delay - First adjust Brake drop delay on the Configuration > Brake > Con-
trol tab to provide too much delay in dropping the brake so you can clearly see the com-
plete electrical stopping characteristics of the hoist motor. Keep these characteristics in
mind as adjustments are made. It may be necessary to change Brake drop delay more than
once to clearly see the results. It is most important to never drop the brake on a moving
motor.
Normal rate limited stop - Adjusting Normal rate limited stop (Configuration > Drive
> General tab) will also determine how harshly the stop is felt (higher values yield harsher
stops). Lower values may require a larger dead zone. To prevent the car from pulling
through under the brake, do NOT set this parameter to 0.0.
Voltage decay time - Adjusting Voltage decay time (Configuration > Brake > Voltages
tab) determines how softly the brake drops (higher values yield softer drop). If Voltage
decay time is set too high, there will be loss of control during the time between the drive
disconnecting and the brake setting firmly.
Brake Release Time - The TORQMAX drive has an adjustable parameter (LF.70 Speed
Pick Delay) that determines how long the drive will keep current flowing to the motor
when the car reaches zero speed and the direction input is removed. This allows the motor
to hold the load while the brake engages. The normal setting for LF.70 is 0.300 second,
but it should always be kept below 0.800 second.
4-25
Final Adjustment
Leveling Speed - If this speed is too high, a quick transition to zero speed will occur. This
results in a bump at the stop or possible overshoot at the floor resulting in a releveling
operation. If the leveling speed is too slow, the car will stop very close to the edge of the
dead zone, which will cause the system to relevel frequently. Reasonable values of Leveling
speed (Configuration > Pattern > Common tab) range from 3 to 6 fpm. Before setting the
Dead zone distance, the selection of Leveling speed must be completed so that you are sat-
isfied with the complete final approach to the floor. If overshoot occurs frequently, adjust
Dead zone distance.
Dead zone - The purpose of the dead zone is to ensure that the elevator stops at the same
point whether approaching a particular floor from above or below. The dead zone is a soft-
ware-defined area at a floor, typically 0.25 inches (6 mm) to 0.75 inches (18 mm) in
height. Ideally, the elevator stops in the center of the dead zone.
Because of the mass of the elevator system, it will not stop as soon as it is commanded to
stop. It will slide slightly before stopping. The Dead zone distance should be adjusted so
that the elevator stops consistently at the same position relative to the floor level from
both directions. Dead zone adjustment need only be adjusted for one floor. All other floors
will react in the same way.
Note
Dead zone distance should be adjusted before fine tuning floor height offset.
1. Choose a floor in the middle of the hoistway so that the car can reach contract speed
when approaching the floor from either direction.
2. Start with the default Dead zone distance (Configuration > Pattern > General tab).
3. Put the car on Test operation. Verify that the iBox Inspection switch is in the NORM
position. Verify that the iBox Test switch is in the ON position.
4. Run the car to the chosen floor from the top and make sure the car achieves contract
speed. Note the position of the car when it stops at the floor (i.e., 1/4 above the floor or
1/8 below the floor, etc.).
5. Run the car to the chosen floor from the bottom and make sure the car achieves contract
speed. Note the position of the car when it stops at the floor.
6. If the car consistently stops at the same position, (for example, 1/8 above the floor
approaching from above or below), then Dead zone distance is properly adjusted. (Floor
Offset can be adjusted later so that the car stops perfectly level with the floor.)
7. If the car overshoots and relevels, the Dead zone distance is too tight. Increase Dead
zone distance and repeat steps 4 and 5.
8. Otherwise, the Dead zone distance is too wide. Decrease Dead zone distance until the
car stops consistently at the same position relative to the floor, repeating steps 4 and 5.
4-26 Manual # 42-02-2223

iControl AC Adjusting Leveling and Final Stop
Brake Coordination for Smooth Stops - Proper operation and setting of the brake is
very important to achieve a smooth stop:
1. Before starting, the brake must be operating properly. Geared machine brakes are usu-
ally very simple, however, the brake on a gearless machine requires detailed adjustment
to obtain proper operation. For now, be sure to adjust brake tension to hold 125% of a
rated load (or the value required by your local code authorities). To establish a holding
voltage for a brake in a geared installation, refer to the manufacturers recommended
value. If this information is not available, experiment with the Hold Voltage (Brake Con-
figuration/Voltage tab) to find the voltage necessary to hold the brake and then add a lit-
tle extra margin.
2. If you have already adjusted the brake to the correct mechanical clearances and the
brake is still clunking down too hard when the car stops, increase Voltage Decay Time 4
(Configuration > Brake > Control tab (iField module, high current braking only). For
low current brakes, decrease the RB resistance inside the iPower Box.
3. Next, adjust Drop Delay (Configuration > Brake > Control tab) so that the brake drops
the instant hoist motor motion stops. The primary means of coordinating brake drop
with motion stop is adjusting Brake Drop Delay. The initial setting should be 0.00 sec-
onds. Increase Drop Delay in increments of 0.10 second until the motor is clearly at zero
speed when the brake drops. The goal is to avoid dropping the brake on a moving motor,
but also to avoid holding the brake up longer than necessary.
TORQMAX drive - Adjust LF.78 Delay in turning off the drive (delay to turn off the
motor current after direction is dropped), which can hold the car electrically until the
brake is dropped.
4. Adjust Voltage Decay Time to determine how softly the brake drops (higher values yield
softer drop). If Voltage Decay Time is set too high, there will be loss of control during the
time between the drive disconnecting and the brake setting firmly.
Figure 4.5 Effect of Brake Drop Delay on Stopping
Speed Feedback
Drop Delay just right
Not enough Drop Delay Too much Drop Delay

Time
4-27
Final Adjustment
Releveling Operation
Relevel Dead Zone Distance The Relevel dead zone distance is similar to Dead zone
distance except that the Relevel dead zone distance applies only while the car is releveling.
During releveling, the brake is partially set and the speed is very slow (usually 4 to 8 feet
per minute). Therefore, the car does not slide as much. As a result, Relevel dead zone dis-
tance should be tighter than Dead zone distance. Relevel Dead Zone adjustment need only
be adjusted for one floor. All other floors will react in the same way. Brake Relevel Voltage
(Brake Configuration/Voltages tab) should be adjusted properly before adjusting the
Relevel dead zone distance. In general, Relevel Dead Zone must be less than Relevel Dis-
tance.
1. Put the car on Test operation. Verify that the iBox Inspection switch is in the NORM
position. Verify that the iBox Test switch is in the ON position.
2. Move the car to a floor away from the terminal landing to allow releveling to the floor
from both directions.
3. Put the car on Inspection Access.
4. On Inspection Access, move the car up about 3 above the floor. Turn off Inspection
Access to allow the car to relevel down to the floor. Note the position of the car when it
stops at the floor (i.e., 1/4 above the floor or 1/8 below the floor, etc.).
5. On Inspection Access, move the car down about 3 below the floor. Turn off Inspection
Access to allow the car to relevel up to the floor. Note the position of the car when it
stops at the floor (i.e., 1/4 above the floor or 1/8 below the floor, etc.).
6. If the car consistently stops at the same position, (for example, 1/8 above the floor
approaching from above or below), then Relevel dead zone distance is properly
adjusted. (Floor Offset can be adjusted later so that the car stops perfectly level with the
floor.)
7. If the car overshoots the floor during releveling, the Relevel dead zone distance is too
tight. Increase Relevel dead zone distance and repeat steps 4 and 5.
8. Otherwise, the Relevel dead zone distance is too wide. Decrease Relevel dead zone dis-
tance until the car stops consistently at the same position relative to the floor, repeating
steps 4 and 5.
Rope Stretch Releveling On high-rise applications, when the car is very low in the
building with hundreds of feet of cable between the machine and the elevator, substantial
movement can occur when the elevator load changes, thereby causing releveling. To make
the system more tolerant of this movement, the Releveling distance parameter adjusts the
amount by which the elevator must be away from the floor before the releveling operation
is engaged. The range of adjustment is from 0.00 to 1.00 inch, with a typical value being
0.72 inches.
4-28 Manual # 42-02-2223

iControl AC Load Weigher Adjustment for Dispatching
Ride Quality
If you are experiencing a ride sensation that is not exactly an oscillation, but might be described
as a rough texture, it might be due to:
TORQMAX drive parameter A.LF.33 - Ki speed offset accel and d.LF.33 Ki speed offset
decel provide a smoother transfer of load from brake to motor, especially with high effi-
ciency gears. Default is 3000 accel and 1000 decel. Increase in increments of 1000.
The speed control loop gains may not be adjusted properly. Please refer to the Magnetek
Elevator Drive Technical Manual.
Motor shaft encoder may not be mounted securely, causing bouncing or slight variation in
speed feedback once every revolution. On a geared machine, the coupling used between
the tach or encoder and the motor can also be a source of vibration. In both cases, the
problem is visible by looking at the AC-coupled encoder speed signal on iBox test point 4
STP2 (with the Virtual Oscilloscope Test point 2 set to Speed Feedback). You may see the
vibration frequency increase and decrease with car speed. This is absolute proof of a
mechanical problem with the speed transducer. Electrically induced oscillations will be
characterized by a frequency that is constant (does not change significantly with speed).
If the above steps do not resolve the vibration, the motor may not have been trimmed to
the machine properly. Use a dial indicator to check alignment of motor and machine.
Load Weigher Adjustment for Dispatching

Analog load weighers (isolated platform or crosshead deflection) provide a signal (analog volt-
age) corresponding to measured load. The signal is conditioned and digitized by the control sys-
tem. The resulting value is used to calculate actual load inside the elevator, which is used for
logical operations including:
Overloaded car detection
Heavy load (hall call bypass)
Light load anti-nuisance
Empty load detection
Each threshold is user-programmable (Load Weigher Configuration screen) to determine the
load level at which each operation should be initiated.
The car is weighed only when it is stopped at a landing with doors open. If the car were weighed
when running, acceleration and deceleration would be interpreted as weight change.
Rope Tension Load Weigher - Load cells sense the tension of the wire ropes. The load
weigher provides a calibrated analog signal that accurately tracks the loading of the car. Due to
the dynamics of the elevator system, the load represented by the traveling cable and compensa-
tion cables will vary with the position of the car in the hoistway. iControl must learn the empty
and full car load value at each floor. The load in the car can then be determined by reading the
value at a given floor and subtracting the learned empty value for that floor.
Crosshead Deflection Load Weigher - The signal generated by the load sensor represents
the perceived load at the crosshead, which includes the weight of the car, the load inside the
car, the traveling cable, and any compensation cables that might be attached to the car. Due to
the dynamics of the elevator system, the load represented by the traveling cable and compensa-
tion cables will vary with the position of the car in the hoistway. iControl must learn the empty
and full car load value at each floor. The load in the car can then be determined by reading the
value at a given floor and subtracting the learned empty value for that floor.
4-29
Final Adjustment
Isolated Platform Load Weigher - The isolated platform load weigher measures only the
weight within the car. The value is not affected by hoistway position so empty and full values
can be learned without moving the car from floor to floor.
Note: If you are preparing to do safety testing, including governor and buffer tests, you might
want to do them first, then adjust the load weigher because re-calibrating the load weigher is
recommended following buffer safety tests.
Load Thresholds The load thresholds used in logical operations are:

Over load threshold (% of full load): Used to define the load at which it is unsafe to
move the elevator (iView Configuration > Load Weigher tab). If this threshold is exceeded,
the car will remain at the floor with doors open. Typically some type of visual and/or audi-
ble indicator is used to alert passengers that the car is overloaded. (This operation is over-
ridden during Fire Service operation.)
Heavy load threshold (% of full load): Used to define the load value at which hall
calls will be bypassed or reassigned (iView Configuration > Load Weigher tab).
Light load threshold (% of full load): Used to define the load at which a limited num-
ber of car calls may be registered. If the programmed number of car calls is exceeded, all
car calls will be canceled.
Example: Light Load Threshold=20%. If the measured load in the car is less than 20%, the
controller will only allow a certain number of car calls to be registered (number of calls is
set on the iView Configuration > Car Operation > Passenger tab/Anti-Nuisance controls
shown below). If the allowed car value is set to three, only three calls may be registered if
the load is less than 20%. If a fourth call is entered, all car calls will be canceled.
Empty load threshold (% of full load): Used to determine when the car is empty. If
the load falls below the threshold the car is considered to be empty. This can be used for
CFSS (Commandeer for Special Services) calls where it is desired that the commandeered
car be empty.
Note: Setting a threshold value to 00% will disable the corresponding function (anti-nuisance,
hall call bypass or overload). Example: setting the Heavy Load Threshold to 00% will disable
the hall call bypass function.
Load weighing logical functions such as Anti-Nuisance, Heavy Load, and Overload will be inac-
tive until both the full and empty load values have been learned and saved.
4-30 Manual # 42-02-2223

iControl AC Load Weigher Configuration
Load Weigher Configuration

Once the load weigher is installed, you need to tell iControl what kind of load weigher you are
using and set up some basic load threshold values and learn the load values. You do this using
iView.
Load Weigher Selection and Threshold Settings

1. Connect to iControl using the iView application.
2. Go to the Configuration > Load
Weigher tab.
Device configuration 4
3. Select the load weigher device type:
No load weigher: Select if no load
weigher is used.
Discrete contact closure: Select if a
discrete contact closure weigher is
used
Analog Signal: Select if an analog
signal load weigher is used (rope
tension, isolated platform or cross-
head deflection load weigher).
Analog device configuration

4. Sensing type: Select the analog device
sensing type:
Cross head deflect6ion or rope ten-
sion sensing.
Isolated platform displacement
sensing.
Setting the load thresholds

5. Load thresholds are preset by MCE based on the job specification. However, thresholds
are user-adjustable and may be changed at any time. All threshold values are expressed
as a percentage of full load. To adjust these thresholds:
Over load threshold (% of full load): Enter the percentage of full load weight above
which the controller should consider the car to be in an over load condition. Typically
110% to 115% of the elevators full load capacity. A setting of 00% = OFF. See Load
Thresholds on page 4-30.
Heavy load threshold (% of full load): Enter the percentage of full load weight above
which the controller should consider the car to be in a heavy load condition. Typically
80% to 90% of full load. A setting of 00% = OFF. See Load Thresholds on page 4-30.
4-31
Final Adjustment
Light load threshold (% of full load): Enter the percentage of full load weight below
which the controller should consider the car to be in a light load condition. Typically
set below 20% of full load. A setting of 00% = OFF. See Load Thresholds on page 4-
30.
Empty load threshold (% of full load): Enter the percentage of full load weight below
which the controller should consider the car to be empty. See Load Thresholds on
page 4-30.
When ready, press the SEND button to send the changed values to the controller.
Learning Load Values

Learning the empty and fully loaded car values is an automated process requiring that the
appropriate load be present in the car before beginning each stage. It is best to have two people
available, one in the machine room at the elevator controller or iView PC and one at a floor to
handle test weights and ensure there are no passengers in the elevator.
The test weights must be equal to full load value. The learn process must be performed twice,
once for empty car load and once for full car load. In order to learn load weigher values, the ele-
vator must be in normal Passenger operation. The car will not be moved from the starting floor
if the load weigher is an isolated platform displacement sensing type. However, if the load
weigher is the rope tensions sensing or cross-head deflection sensing type, the car must
travel the hoistway, stopping to learn the load values at each floor.
Caution
The load weigher sensor must be calibrated prior learning the load values. Please refer to Load
Weigher Sensor Adjustment on page 4-16. If you are preparing to do safety testing, including gover-
nor and buffer tests, you might want to do them first and then adjust the load weigher sensor and
learn the load values, because re-calibrating the load weigher is recommended following buffer tests.
4-32 Manual # 42-02-2223

iControl AC Load Weigher Configuration
Load Weigher Learn Procedure

1. Display the Load Weigher layout (View > Layouts > Load Weigher).
2. Enter the Start floor (floor at which the test weights are located) on the Setup > Load
weigher tab.
3. Acquire Write privilege (Write privilege > Acquire) and place the iBox Learn switch in
the ON position.
4. With the car operating in normal Passenger operation, follow the step-by-step instruc-
tions that appear on the Setup > Load weigher tab.
Abort Calibration If necessary during a learning process, click on Abort to immediately

stop the learning process. (For example, you started a Full Load learn and realized the test
weights were not in the elevator.) The car will return to the start floor where you may restart the
learn procedure.
Clear Learned Values Lighted Empty and Full Learn indicators mean that the pro-
cesses have been successfully run and values stored. Clicking on the Clear button will immedi-
ately erase the stored values. You must then repeat the learning process to learn and store new
values.
4-33
Final Adjustment
Pre-Start Sequence
If the car is properly adjusted and running well but the floor to floor times are not as quick as
you would like, the Pre-Start Sequence parameters (Configuration > Drive > General tab) can
be used to allow the brake and/or motor to be energized while the doors are closing, thereby
allowing the elevator to leave the floor as soon after the doors are locked as possible.
The Pre-Start Sequence options

include:
Allow machine to be energized

After doors are locked
After door position monitor is
activated
While doors are closing:
with motor only
with motor and partially
picked brake
with motor and fully picked
brake
Regardless of the option chosen, the elevator is not allowed to move before the doors are locked
and the Speed pick delay 1 timer has elapsed.
The parameters that affect the Pre-Start Sequence options are found on the Configuration >
Brake > Control tab.
The following pages include descriptions of each Pre-Start Sequence option and diagrams
showing the parameters that affect each option and the resulting sequence of operation.
Caution
Do not use Pre-Start Sequence options until drive control parameters have been
adjusted for no rollback and good control at zero speed.
4-34 Manual # 42-02-2223

iControl AC Pre-Start Sequence
Allow machine to be energized: After doors are locked

This is the default Pre-Start Sequence option. It specifies that the doors must be locked before
energizing the motor and brake. The diagram below shows the parameters that affect this
option and the resulting sequence of operation.
No Prestart Sequence with or without Smooth Pick
Doors Locked High

Motor
Door Open Contactor/ Brake Pattern
Limit High Drive Enable Contactor Applied Pattern
Smooth Pick
Brake
4
Pick Voltage
80% of Pick
Weakening Voltage
Pick Delay
Delay
Weakening
Repick
Time
Hold Delay
For a detailed description of the brake parameters associated with smooth picking and
instructions for adjusting them, see Brake Parameter Adjustments on page 4-19.
4-35
Final Adjustment

When door position monitor activated
This Pre-Start Sequence option is much the same as the After doors are locked option except
that Door Position Monitor status is used to determine when the machine may be energized
rather than the Doors Locked sensors. The following diagram shows the parameters that affect
this option and the resulting sequence of operation.
Allow machine to be energized after door position monitor is activated

Door Position
Monitor High Doors Locked
Motor High
Door Open Contactor/ Brake Pattern
Limit High Drive Enable Contactor Applied Pattern
Smooth Pick
Brake Pick Voltage
80% of Pick
Weakening Voltage
Pick Delay
Delay
Weakening
Repick
Time
Hold Delay
4-36 Manual # 42-02-2223

iControl AC Pre-Start Sequence

While doors are closing with motor only
This Pre-Start Sequence option allows the motor to be energized while the doors are closing so
that when the doors are locked, the brake picking sequence can be started immediately. The
diagram below shows the parameters that affect this option and the resulting sequence of oper-
ation.
Prestart Sequence with Motor and No (Brake) Pick
Motor
Door Open Contactor/ Doors Brake Pattern
Limit High Drive Enable Locked High Contactor Applied Pattern
Smooth Pick
4
Brake Pick Voltage
80%
of Pick Volgage Hold Voltage
Weakening
Voltage
Prestart
Sequence
Delay Pick Delay
Delay
Weakening
Repick
Time
Hold Delay
For a DC control, Pick Delay can be set to zero so long as the Pre-Start Sequence Delay is
adjusted so that the motor is energized and able to hold the car at zero speed when the doors
become locked.
For an AC control, some Pick delay may be required because it takes time for the drive to mag-
netize the motor once the contactor is picked and the drive enabled. A Drive Ready On Fault is
generated if Pick delay is too short.
4-37
Final Adjustment

While doors are closing with motor and partially picked brake
This Pre-Start Sequence option allows the motor to be fully energized and the brake to be par-
tially energized while the doors are closing, so that when the doors become locked, the car can
begin moving as soon as the brake is fully picked. The diagram below shows the parameters that
affect this option and the resulting sequence of operation.
Prestart Sequence with Motor and Partially Picked Brake
Motor
Door Open Contactor/ Brake Doors Pattern
Limit High Drive Enable Contactor Locked High Applied Pattern
Brake Pick Voltage

80% of
Pick Voltage Hold Voltage
Partial Pick
Voltage
Prestart Sequence
Delay
Pick Delay Hold Delay
Speed Pick Delay 1
Speed Pick
Delay 2
4-38 Manual # 42-02-2223

iControl AC Calibration and Verification of Safety Functions

While doors are closing with motor and fully picked brake
This Pre-Start Sequence option allows the motor and brake to be fully energize while the doors
are closing, so that the car can begin moving when the doors become locked and the Speed pick
delay 1 timer expires. The diagram below shows the parameters that affect this option and the
resulting sequence of operation.
Prestart Sequence with Motor and Fully Picked Brake
Motor
Door Open Contactor/ Brake
Limit High Drive Enable Contactor Doors Locked High Pattern
Smooth Pick
4
Brake Pick Voltage
80% of Pick Hold Voltage
Voltage
Weakening
Voltage
Pattern
Applied
Prestart Sequence
Delay
Pick Delay
Delay
Weakening
Repick
Time
Hold Delay
Calibration and Verification of Safety Functions

Before performing the calibration and verification of safety function please do the following:
1. Verify that the car performs the releveling operation properly. Please refer to Verify
Releveling on page 4-5 and see Releveling Operation on page 4-28.
2. Perform the Normal and Emergency Terminal Limit Switches learn procedure. This is
necessary if any pattern parameters have been changed since the last time the learn pro-
cedure was performed. Please refer to Learning Normal & Emergency Terminal Limit
Switches on page 4-8.
Tach Error Tripping Threshold Adjustment

This test compares the pattern signal with the velocity feedback signal and sets the point at
which the Tach Error fault trips as a result of excessive error between the Actual and intended
car speed.
1. Verify that the Tach Adj. trimpot has been properly adjusted. Please refer to Following
Error Margin on page 2-45.
2. Arrange the car for full load condition.
4-39
Final Adjustment
3. Verify that the iBox Test switch is in the ON position.

4. On the Virtual Oscilloscope, set Test point 1 to Speed Feedback and Test point 2 to Tach
Error Upper Limit. (Tach Error Upper Limit determines the upper threshold below
which velocity feedback is allowed to deviate from the pattern.)
5. Start with Following error set to 1.0% (Configuration > Drive > Safety tab).
6. Set the iBox Fault/Function Bypass switch to the ON position. (Note that fault bypass is
automatically disabled after a fifteen minute timer expires.)
7. On the Diagnostics > Fault Bypass tab, click Tach error (bypasses Tach Error fault).
8. Run the car up and down the hoistway. If the Speed Feedback trace on the Virtual Oscil-
loscope crosses the Tach Error Upper Limit trace, a Tach Error fault will normally be
generated (we have it bypassed).
9. If the two traces on the oscilloscope cross, increase Following error in 5% increments,
running the car with each change, until the two traces no longer cross.
10. When the two traces no longer cross, add 5% to the Following error setting as a margin.
11. Set Test point 2 to Tach Error Lower Limit. This is the lower threshold below which
velocity feedback is allowed to deviate from the pattern.
12. Repeat steps 7 through 9 for Tach Error Lower Limit.
Tach Error Upper Lmt

Speed Feedback
Verify Tach Error Does Not Trip on Emergency Stop

1. Set the iBox Fault/Function Bypass switch to the OFF position.
2. Make sure the Tach Error fault is no longer bypassed (Diagnostics > Fault Bypass tab).
3. With a full load in the car, run the car up and down the hoistway to verify that the Tach
Error fault is not generated.
4. Enter a car call several floors below the car (so it can reach contract speed).
5. While the car is running at contract speed (Operational Status / Speed - Actual), discon-
nect the GS terminal from the iBox.
6. The car should trip a Door Lock Fault and make an Emergency Stop.
7. Observe that a Tach Error fault is not generated.
4-40 Manual # 42-02-2223

iControl AC Safety Tests
Safety Tests
iControl provides highly automated safety testing. Before running any tests, the car must be
properly balanced and adjusted. From the iView Safety Tests screen (View > Safety Tests), the
following tests may be run:
Car/Counterweight Safety Test, page 4-43
Electrical Governor Test, page 4-44
Contract Overspeed Test, page 4-44
Inspection Overspeed Test, page 4-44
Car/Counterweight Buffer Test, page 4-45
Leveling Overspeed Test, page 4-46 4
Emergency Brake Test, Unintended Motion, page 4-46
Ascending Car Overspeed Test, page 4-49
Normal Terminal Switch Overspeed Tests - Level 1, page 4-51
Emergency Terminal Switch Overspeed Tests, page 4-52
Normal Terminal Switch Position Tests, page 4-52
Emergency Terminal Switch Overspeed Test, page 4-53
4-41
Final Adjustment
Running a Test
1. Put the iBox in Test mode.
2. Select the desired test on the iView > View > Safety Tests > Test Configuration.
3. Set the speed which the car must attain to trigger the condition being tested. (All tests
except Emergency Brake Test/Unintended Motion require a speed input.)
For tests that require the car to overspeed it is necessary to set up the AC drive for the
overspeed test (see step 7 of the Car/Counterweight Safety test on page 4-43). To cal-
culate the Test speed as a percentage of Contract speed, divide Test speed by Contract
speed and multiply by 100, e.g. if Test speed = 375 and Contract speed = 350, 375 /350
x 100 = 107% overspeed as a percentage of Contract speed.
4. Click the Select button. (Sends data to the controller and sets test conditions, including
operating mode and active fault bypasses. Updates instructional display for specific
test.)
5. Visually check on-screen operating mode and fault bypass status displays.
6. Perform instructions displayed on test screen.
7. Press Arm Test.
8. Place a car call as required to run the car up or down the hoistway (Call Registration
panel).
9. Check Operational Status tab and Event Log (Diagnostics > Event Log) for fault verifica-
tion.
10. Use the iBox Stop switch to stop the test and bring the elevator to an emergency stop if
necessary.
Note
When running a test, you are allowed only one motion cycle of the car. If the test is not satisfactory, you
will have to re-select that test to begin again. Remember that fault bypasses set for the test will time-out
after 15 minutes. If you are delayed in completing a test, you may have to cycle the Fault Bypass switch to
reset the fault bypasses.
Results Faults triggered by the tests are reported on the Operational Status tab and the
Event Log. Non-latching (self-clearing) faults will only appear on the Operational Status tab for
a few moments. Check the Event Log if the triggered faults have already disappeared from the
Operational Status tab.
The following test descriptions provide information specific to each test.
Danger
During testing, normal system safeties are disabled. Exercise extreme caution. Be prepared to take
control and stop the elevator if necessary. Only QUALIFIED PERSONNEL, with adequate experience
and knowledge of elevator equipment should attempt elevator adjustment and testing.
4-42 Manual # 42-02-2223

Car/Counterweight Safety Test

This is a two-part test. Car safety testing verifies operation of the car safeties. The objective of
the test is to set the safeties, causing the hoist motor to break traction. The over-speed must be
sufficient in magnitude to cause the governor to trip mechanically and to set the car safeties.
The electrical governor switch must not prevent the cars continued acceleration to the mechan-
ical trip speed and the safety-operated switch (plank switch) must not open the safety string. To
perform the Car Safety test:
1. Place a full load in the car.
2. Position the car some distance away from the bottom landing (about 10-feet per 100-
feet-per-minute of contract speed).
3. On the iView, Configuration > Pattern > Modes tab, verify that Deceleration and
Approach deceleration are set no higher than 2ft/s2 to avoid tripping the drive.
4
4. Place a jumper between the #3 bus and the GOV terminal on the iBox to bypass tripping
the governor overspeed.
5. Place a jumper between SAFH and SAFC on the iBox to bypass the safety plank (SOS).
6. On the View > Safety Tests > Test Configuration, enter a speed sufficient to trip the
mechanical governor (trip speed from the governor name plate plus 5 to 10%).
7. Calculate the overspeed as a percentage of Contract speed (see Running a Test on
page 4-42) and set up the AC drive for an Overspeed test.
For TORQMAX F5 software v1.71 of later, on the drive keypad:
Set LF.49 Over Speed Function Test = overspeed as a % of Contract speed.
Set LF.3 = OStSt Over Speed Test Function. With LF.3 displayed, press FUNC to dis-
play the present value. Press UP/DOWN until OStSt is displayed, and then press
ENTER to load the value. The car will over speed for one run only, after which
parameters are automatically reset.
For Magnetek:
Set A1 > Overspeed Mult = overspeed as a % of Contract Speed.
Set U4 > Overspeed Test = Yes. The car will over speed for one run only.
8. On the iView > Controller > View > Safety Tests tab, select the Car/Counterweight
Safety Test and click Select. Complete on-screen instructions.
9. Place a car call distant enough to allow the car to reach the necessary speed. If neces-
sary, you may end the test and bring the car to an emergency stop using the iBox Stop
switch.
10. Remove jumpers placed for the test in steps 4 and 5 above.
11. Check the hoistway ropes to make sure they are still in their proper grooves before
attempting to move the car.
12. Use whatever method is required to reset the safeties. For flexible quick-clamp safeties,
move the car on Inspection (UP and ENABLE buttons) to release the safety and restore
the safety string.
Counterweight Safety Test - The counterweight safety test verifies operation of the counter-
weight safeties. For this test, position the empty car near the bottom landing and arrange to
over-speed in the up direction. The test is comparable to the car safety test but performed in the
opposite direction. If the counterweight has a governor, remember to jumper it out. Also,
remember to remove jumpers when tests are complete.
4-43
Final Adjustment
Electrical Governor Test

This test verifies that the calibration of the electrical governor switch is appropriate (typically
about 110% of contract speed) and that the car will execute an emergency stop once the electri-
cal governor switch is activated. When the car trips the electrical governor switch in the down
direction, it will execute an emergency stop.
1. Bring the car to the middle of the hoistway.
2. Check your mechanical governor nameplate for its tripping speed. Check the Contract
Overspeed setting (Controller > View > Setup > Safety > Configuration tab). Set a test
speed sufficient to trigger the Contract Overspeed but not high enough to trip the
mechanical governor.
3. Calculate the percentage of Contract speed represented by the Test speed and set up the
AC drive for an overspeed test as in step 7 of the Car/Counterweight Buffer Test.
4. Select the Electrical Governor test and click Select. Complete on-screen instructions.
5. Place a car call that will allow the car to reach the necessary speed.
Contract Overspeed Test

This test verifies that moving the elevator at a speed greater than the programmed contract
overspeed value will result in an emergency stop.
1. Position the car in the middle of the hoistway.
2. The test Speed must exceed the programmed Contract Overspeed value shown on the
Controller > View > Setup > Safety tab (typically 107% of contract speed), but not high
enough to cause the electrical or mechanical governor to activate. Contract Overspeed
plus 15 fpm should be sufficient. You may have to physically bypass the electrical Gover-
nor switch.
3. Calculate the percentage of Contract speed represented by the test Speed and set up the
AC drive for an overspeed test as in step 7 of the Car/Counterweight Buffer Test.
4. On the Controller > View > Safety Tests tab, select the Contract Overspeed test.
5. Enter the desired test Speed determined in step 2 and then click Select.
6. Follow the on-screen instructions.
7. When the car exceeds the programmed contract overspeed value, the car must perform
an emergency stop.
Inspection Overspeed Test

This test verifies that moving the elevator on Inspection Operation at a speed greater than 150
fpm will result in an emergency stop.
1. Place the car on machine room inspection.
2. Verify that Inspection Overspeed (Controller > View > Setup > Safety > Configuration
tab) is set to 150 fpm.
3. Position the car in the middle of the hoistway.
4. On the View > Safety Tests screen, set test Speed = 200 fpm.
5. Select the Inspection Overspeed test and click Select. Follow on-screen instructions.
6. Use the inspection buttons to move the car when ready.
When the car exceeds 150 fpm, the overspeed condition must stop it.
4-44 Manual # 42-02-2223

Car/Counterweight Buffer Test

This is a two-part test. The car buffer test verifies that the car striking the buffer will cause the
hoist motor to break traction and that the car buffer will automatically return to its fully-
extended state after having been fully compressed. The car is arranged to run into the terminal
landing without initiating any form of slowdown. Neither the final limit switch nor the buffer
switch must stop the car.
1. Be certain that the pit is prepared, buffers ready, etc.
2. Place a full load in the car.
3. Position the car in the hoistway high enough to reach contract speed before reaching the
bottom landing.
4. Place a jumper between the #3 bus and the SAFH terminal on the iBox to bypass the
safety string. 4
5. On the View > Safety Test tab, select the Car/Counterweight Buffer test. Follow on-
screen instructions.
6. Set the test Speed to Contract Speed.
Caution
If reduced stroke buffers are in use, set the test Speed less than or equal to the rated
buffer speed.
7. Use the Inspection switches to run the car. If necessary, you may end the test and bring
the car to an emergency stop using the iBox Stop switch. The car must strike the buffer,
compress it fully, and cause the hoist motor to break traction.
8. For 2010 code compliance, verify that a manual reset is required before putting the car
back into service.
9. Check the hoistway ropes to make sure they are still in their proper grooves before
attempting to move the car.
10. Lift the car off the buffer at inspection speed. (Normally accomplished after the inspec-
tor enters the pit to observe.) The buffer must return to full extension.
Counterweight Buffer Test - The counterweight buffer test verifies that the counterweight
striking the buffer will cause the hoist motor to break traction and that the counterweight buffer
will automatically return to its fully-extended state after having been fully compressed. The
empty car is positioned near the bottom landing and arranged to reach contract speed in the up
direction. The test is comparable to the car buffer test but performed in the opposite direction.
If the counterweight has a governor, remember to jumper it out.
N0te: These tests may cause the load weigher to go out of calibration. Please refer to Learning
Load Values on page 4-32.
4-45
Final Adjustment
Leveling Overspeed Test

This test verifies that the leveling zone does not exceed the maximum allowable distance and
that the leveling speed does not exceed 150 ft/min (0.75 m/s). (NOTE: Be sure to make note of
the original parameter values so they can be restored after the test):
1. On the Configuration > Drive > General tab, set Emergency rate limited stop = 25 ft/s2.
2. On the Setup > Safety > Configuration tab, set Leveling overspeed = 7 fpm and click
Send. Then perform the Learn operation.
3. On the Configuration > Pattern > Common tab, set Leveling distance = 4 in, set Level-
ing speed = 9 fpm, and click Send.
4. Place a call to any landing. Verify that when the car enters the leveling zone, the system
detects a Safety A (or B) Inspection Leveling Overspeed Fault and performs an emer-
gency stop. Following the emergency stop the car should level into the floor, if neces-
sary. (NOTE: If the car is unable to relevel into the floor and the fault is generated 5
times, the fault will become persistent and the iBox Fault Reset button must be pressed
to reset the fault. It may be necessary to restore the parameters that were changed in
steps 1 through 3 in order for the car to relevel to the floor.)
5. Restore the parameters that were changed in steps 1 through 3 to their original values.
Emergency Brake Test - Unintended Motion - Rope Brake
Danger
The Emergency Brake test allows the car to leave the floor with doors open. Station personnel or use
a positive means to make certain there is NO ONE in the car.
This test is to be used for installations using a rope brake for the emergency brake. This test ver-
ifies that moving the car away from a landing with both the car and hoistway doors open
(termed Unintended Motion) will cause the Emergency Brake (Rope Brake) to be deployed
and that such deployment will stop the elevator. This test also demonstrates that the emergency
brake will stop the car within 48 from the floor level if it drifts. No Test speed entry is
required for this test.
1. Load the car as required, empty car going up or 125% of full load going down.
2. Move the car to the landing where the test is to be performed.
3. For safety, station a mechanic at the landing where the test is to be performed.
4. On the iView Safety Tests tab, select the Emergency Brake Test - Unintended Motion
(View > Safety Tests > Test Name parameter).
5. Follow on-screen instructions To perform an unintended motion test-.
6. Once the test has been armed and the car doors have been opened, place a car call to the
top or bottom terminal landing. The car will start to move with its door open and trip an
Unintended Motion Fault.
7. The emergency brake must activate and stop the car within 48 (1220 mm). Power is
removed from the driving machine and brake. Place the car on Inspection and press the
iBox Fault Reset button to reset the fault.
4-46 Manual # 42-02-2223

Emergency Brake Test - Unintended Motion - Machine Brake
Danger
The Emergency Brake test allows the car to leave the floor with doors open. Station personnel or use
a positive means to make certain there is NO ONE in the car.
This test is to be use for installations where one or more machine brakes are used for (desig-
nated as) the emergency brake. This test verifies that moving the car away from a landing with
both the car and hoistway doors open (termed Unintended Motion) will cause the Emergency
Brake (Machine Brake(s)) to be deployed and that such deployment will stop the elevator. This
test also demonstrates that the emergency brake will stop the car within 48 from the floor level 4
if it drifts. Please refer to Typical Brake Test Circuit: Machine Brake Emergency Brake on
page 4-48.
1. Load the car as required, empty car going up or 125% of full load going down.
2. Move the car to the landing where the test is to be performed.
3. To enable the brake test, place jumpers from terminal FB1 to FB1X and from FB2 to
FB2X (see Figure 4.6).
4. To test the emergency brake, remove the brake coil wires of the main brake from their
normal terminals, e.g., B1 & B2, and connect them to terminals BT1 & BT2. Note: If the
machine has a set of two or more brakes designated as the emergency brake, move the
brake coil wires for all brakes not being tested to terminals BT1 and BT2.
5. For safety, station a mechanic at the landing where the test is to be performed.
6. On the iView Safety Tests tab, select the Emergency Brake Test - Unintended Motion
(View > Safety Tests > Test Name parameter).
7. Follow on-screen instructions To perform an unintended motion test-.
8. Click the Arm Test button. The car doors will open.
9. Press and hold the BRAKE TEST BUTTON to lift the brake(s) not being tested, and then
place a car call to the top or bottom terminal landing. The car will start to move with its
door open and trip an Unintended Motion Fault.
10. The brake(s) being tested must activate and stop the car within 48 (1220 mm). Power is
removed from the driving machine and brake. Release the BRAKE TEST BUTTON once
the car has fully stopped. Place the car on Inspection and press the iBox Fault Reset
button to reset the fault.
11. Return the brake coil wires connected to terminals BT1 and BT2 to their normal termi-
nals.
12. Repeat the test for the main brake(s), leaving the brake coil wires for the main brake
connected to their normal terminals and moving the brake coil wires for the brake(s)
designated as the emergency brake to terminals BT1 and BT2. Repeat steps 5 through 11.
13. When the tests have been completed, return all brake coil wires to their normal termi-
nals and remove the jumpers from terminal FB1 to FB1X and FB2 to FB2X.
4-47
Final Adjustment
Figure 4.6 Typical Brake Test Circuit: Machine Brake Emergency Brake
4-48 Manual # 42-02-2223

Ascending Car Overspeed Test - Rope Brake

This test is to be used for installations using a rope brake for the emergency brake. It verifies
that the emergency brake (rope brake) will stop an empty car that is over-speeding in the up
direction.
1. Move the empty car to the bottom of the hoistway.
2. Check the mechanical governor nameplate for its tripping speed. Check the Contract
Overspeed setting (Controller > View > Setup > Safety > Configuration tab).
3. On the iView Safety Tests tab, select the Electrical Governor Test (View > Safety Tests >
Test Name parameter).
4. Enter a Speed sufficient to trigger the Contract Overspeed but not high enough to trip
the mechanical governor. 4
AC drive for an overspeed test as in step 7 of the Car/Counterweight Safety Test.
6. Acquire Write privilege and then click the Select button.
7. Follow on-screen instructions ELECTRICAL GOVERNOR TEST SETUP and To per-
form and Electrical Governor test-.
8. Once the test is Armed, place a car call distant enough to allow the car to reach the
necessary speed.
9. When the electrical governor is activated the rope brake will be deployed. Power is
removed from the driving machine and brake. Place the car on Inspection and press the
4-49
Final Adjustment
Ascending Car Overspeed Test - Machine Brake

This test is to be use for installations where one or more machine brakes are used for (desig-
nated as) the emergency brake. This test verifies that the emergency brake (machine brake) will
stop an empty car that is over-speeding in the up direction. Please refer to Typical Brake Test
Circuit: Machine Brake Emergency Brake on page 4-48.
1. Move the empty car to the bottom of the hoistway.

2. To enable the brake test, place jumpers from terminal FB1 to FB1X and from FB2 to
FB2X (see Figure 4.6).
3. To test the emergency brake, remove the brake coil wires of the main brake from their
normal terminals, e.g., B1 & B2, and connect them to terminals BT1 & BT2. Note: If the
machine has a set of two or more brakes designated as the main brake, move the brake
coil wires for all brakes not being tested to terminals BT1 and BT2.
4. Check the mechanical governor nameplate for its tripping speed. Check the Contract
Overspeed setting (Controller > View > Setup > Safety > Configuration tab).
5. On the iView Safety Tests tab, select the Electrical Governor Test (View > Safety Tests >
Test Name parameter).
6. Enter a Speed sufficient to trigger the Contract Overspeed but not high enough to trip
the mechanical governor.
AC drive for an overspeed test as in step 7 of the Car/Counterweight Safety Test.
8. Acquire Write privilege and then click the Select button.
9. Follow the on-screen instructions ELECTRICAL GOVERNOR TEST SETUP and To
perform and Electrical Governor test-.
10. Once the test is Armed, press and hold the BRAKE TEST BUTTON to lift the brake(s)
not being tested, and then place a car call distant enough to allow the car to reach the
necessary speed.
11. When the electrical governor is activated the machine emergency brake will be
deployed. Power is removed from the driving machine and brake. Release the BRAKE
TEST BUTTON once the car has fully stopped. Place the car on Inspection and press the
12. Return the brake coil wires connected to terminals BT1 and BT2 to their normal termi-
nals.
13. Repeat the test for the main brake(s), leaving the brake coil wires for the main brake
connected to their normal terminals and moving the brake coil wires for the brake(s)
designated as the emergency brake to terminals BT1 and BT2. Repeat steps 5 through 11.
14. When the tests have been completed, return all brake coil wires to their normal termi-
nals and remove the jumpers from terminal FB1 to FB1X and FB2 to FB2X.
4-50 Manual # 42-02-2223

Normal Terminal Switch Overspeed Tests

Per switch, this test verifies that either an emergency slowdown or emergency stop will be initi-
ated if an elevator encounters an NTS switch and is moving at a speed greater than the pro-
grammed overspeed value for that switch. The car is arranged to run toward the target NTS
switch without initiating any form of slowdown. When the car activates the NTS switch, it will
execute either an emergency slowdown or an emergency stop, depending upon the overspeed
margin detected. The car will then finish the run to a landing at leveling or correction speed.
1. It is imperative that deceleration and jerk rates for the Emergency slowdown profile be
set to greater values than Standard profile deceleration and jerk rates so that initiation
of an emergency slowdown will stop the elevator quickly and safely. Check the Standard
and Emergency slowdown profiles to see that this is the case. For a typical, 500 fpm car,
Standard jerk and deceleration settings might be 4.0 and 3.0 respectively; for the Emer- 4
gency slowdown profile, jerk and deceleration might be 15.0 and 6.0 respectively. Adjust
the Emergency slowdown profile parameters as necessary to ensure a rapid, aggressive
stop sufficient to avoid running the car into the buffer.
2. Go to the Configuration > Pattern > Modes tab/Emergency slowdown profile and verify
that Deceleration is set correctly. It is generally set to 5.0, and must be greater than the
Standard profile - Deceleration parameter.
3. Go to the Configuration > Drive > General tab and verify that Emergency rate limited
stop is set correctly. It is generally set to 7.0, and must be greater than the Emergency
slowdown profile - Deceleration parameter.
4. Position the empty car far enough away from the target NTS switch to allow a speed to
be reached that exceeds the learned overspeed value for that switch for the Overspeed
Level 1 or Level 2 (whichever is being tested).
5. Go to the Diagnostics > Terminal Switches Status tab. Note the Overspeed 1 and 2
speeds learned for the terminal switch to be tested.
6. On the Safety Test window, select Normal Terminal Switch n Overspeed Test - Level n
for the switch and level to be tested.
7. Set the test Speed to the Overspeed 1 (Level 1) or Overspeed 2 (Level 2) speed, plus 10
fpm, for the switch/test. Caution! If the speed is set below the overspeed threshold, no
slowdown will be initiated and the elevator/counterweight will strike the buffer.
8. Follow on-screen instructions and perform the test. The car should perform either an
emergency slowdown or emergency stop. For additional information see Terminal
Switch Overspeed and Position Faults on page 4-53.
9. On the Operational Status tab, verify that the appropriate fault is shown in the Faults
window.
10. Continue testing remaining normal terminal switches by repeating steps 4 through 9.
4-51
Final Adjustment
Emergency Terminal Switch Overspeed Tests

Per switch, this test verifies that an emergency stop will be initiated if:
an elevator moving at a speed greater than 95% of programmed contract speed encounters
the ETS switch in the direction of travel (DETS moving down; UETS moving up)
an elevator using reduced stroke buffers is moving at a speed greater than the Overspeed 2
speed (95% of rated buffer speed) at the ETSL switch in the direction of travel.
Move the empty car far enough away from the terminal to achieve test speed by the time it
reaches the ETS/ETSL switch. While testing, the car will run toward the terminal without initi-
ating any form of slowdown. When the car activates the ETS/ETSL switch, it will execute an
emergency stop. The car will then finish the run to a landing at leveling or correction speed.
1. Go to the Configuration > Drive > General tab and verify that Emergency rate limited
stop is set correctly. It is generally set to 7.0, and must be greater than the Emergency
slowdown profile - Deceleration parameter.
2. Position the empty car far enough away from the target ETS/ETSL switch to allow a
speed to be reached that exceeds the Over Speed 2 value for that switch.
3. Go to the Diagnostics > Terminal Switches Status tab. Note the Overspeed 2 value for
the emergency terminal switch to be tested.
4. Select Emergency Terminal Switch Overspeed Test on the Safety screen.
Set the test Speed to the overspeed speed for the switch plus 10 fpm.
Danger
If the speed is set below the overspeed threshold, no slowdown will be initiated and the elevator/
counterweight will strike the buffer.
5. Follow on-screen instructions and perform the test. For additional information see Ter-
minal Switch Overspeed and Position Faults on page 4-53.
window.
7. Continue testing remaining emergency terminal switch by repeating steps 1 through 7.
Normal and Emergency Terminal Switch Position Tests

1. On the Configuration > Terminal Switches tab, for the switch you wish to test, set the
position margin to a negative value (place a minus sign in front of the value).
2. If you are testing an up terminal switch, run the car past the switch in the up direction at
contract speed (if possible). If you are testing a down terminal switch, run the car past
the switch in the down direction at contract speed (if possible). The car should stop
using the Emergency slowdown profile parameters.
window.
4. On the Configuration > Terminal Switches tab, set the position margin for the tested
switch back to the original positive value
5. Continue testing the remaining switches using steps 1 through 4.
4-52 Manual # 42-02-2223

Terminal Switch Overspeed and Position Faults

The Overspeed Level 1, Level 2 and Position margins are calculated based on the speed and
position values learned during the terminal learn procedure (see Learning Normal & Emer-
gency Terminal Limit Switches on page 4-8)
Overspeed level 1 - During passenger (NORM) operation, if car speed exceeds the Overspeed
Level 1 threshold at the time a Normal Terminal switch is activated, an Up (or Down) Normal
Terminal Switch (1-5) Level 1 Speed Fault is detected and an immediate slowdown is initiated
using Emergency slowdown profile parameters. For each Normal Terminal switch, the Over-
speed Level 1 threshold is calculated by increasing the learned speed by a percentage of the
learned speed, e.g. learned speed plus 10% of learned speed. The percentage used in the calcula-
tion is determined by the Overspeed 1 margin parameter. You may adjust the Overspeed Level 1
threshold by changing the Overspeed 1 margin parameter (Configuration > Terminal Switches
4
tab). The default setting is 8%. Normally, you should not have to adjust this setting.
Note
Sometimes short runs to a terminal, especially one-floor runs, will exceed tightly set overspeed margins.
After you learn terminal switches, it is a good practice to try a few short runs to each terminal and check
the Last pass speeds against the Learned speeds for each switch (Diagnostics > Terminal Switches Status
tab). If necessary, you can then adjust the Overspeed 1 margin to accommodate (possibly) higher short
run switch speeds. (Overspeed level 1 faults cause an emergency slowdown into the terminal landing but
the fault is automatically cleared so it is possible to miss the fact that this is occurring.)
Overspeed level 2 - During passenger (NORM) operation, if car speed exceeds the Overspeed
Level 2 threshold at the time a Normal Terminal switch is activated, an Up (or Down) Normal
Terminal Switch (1-5) Level 2 Speed Fault is detected and an emergency stop is initiated (motor
and brake contactors immediately dropped). The Overspeed Level 2 threshold is calculated as
105% of the Overspeed Level 1 threshold
Position - During passenger (NORM) operation, if car position varies from the learned posi-
tion by more than the Position Margin at the time a Normal Terminal or Emergency Terminal
switch is activated, an Up (or Down) Normal Terminal Switch (1-5) Position Fault or an Up (or
Down) Emergency Terminal Switch Position Fault is detected and an immediate slowdown is
initiated using the Emergency slowdown profile parameters. The Position Margin for each Nor-
mal Terminal or Emergency Terminal switch is displayed and may be adjusted on the Configu-
ration > Terminal Switches tab. The default value is 2.0 feet.
Caution
Emergency Terminal (switches) Overspeed is hard-coded at 95% of Contract Speed. Be certain that
the car is traveling well below this speed when an Emergency Terminal switch is opened to avoid an
emergency stop. In some instances, it may be necessary to re-position an Emergency Terminal switch
to achieve this. This value is NOT affected by the Overspeed 1 margin setting.
4-53
Final Adjustment
The following illustration shows the car reaction to overspeed conditions at Normal and Emer-
gency Terminal switches in the down direction.
Figure 4.7 Emergency and Normal Terminal Overspeed Reaction
95% of contract speed

Contract speed
Overspeed 1
Overspeed 2
Hoistway
Normal Terminal Switch

Car trips Terminal Switch
Car
Emergency Terminal Switch
Car trips Emergency Switch
Level/Overspeed 2 Emergency Stop

Over 95% of Contract Speed E Stop
Level/Overspeed 1 Emergency Slowdown
Normal Stop
Normal Deceleration Parameter
Matching Learned Speeds
Speed
Speed Definitions
95% of Contract Speed: Hard-coded value for Emergency Terminal Switch
Level 1 Overspeed threshold: Learned speed value at switch plus the Limit
One Margin (set on the iView Safety Screen)
Level 2 Overspeed threshold: 105% of Level 1 Overspeed.
4-54 Manual # 42-02-2223

iControl AC Before Release to Passenger Operation
Before Release to Passenger Operation
Danger
Before the elevator can be turned over to normal passenger use, it is important that no
safety function or circuit remains bypassed. Items to check include, but are not limited to:
All safety switches set to the OFF position
No jumper between SB and 3 (iBox)
No jumper between SAFH and 3 (iBox)
Learn and Fault/Function switches set to OFF (iBox)
No jumper between Gov and 3 (iBox)
4
Pattern Scaling set to 100% (Pattern screen/Common tab)
Note
If this is a local car (part of a group), the Car identifier parameter, on the Configuration > General >
General tab, must be set so that the Group controller can identify the car to which it is communicating.
Initially the Car identifier is defaulted to 1. The Car Identifier range is from 1 to 20. The Car identifier for
each car in a Group must be unique (no duplicates).
4-55
Final Adjustment
4-56 Manual # 42-02-2223

System Options
About System Options

This section contains supporting information for optional iControl system components, includ-
ing:
iCentral - Central Dispatcher: Description, installation and setup instructions for the Cen-
tral Dispatcher (see page 5-2).
Comm-Connect Cabinet - Local/Dispatcher: Description of the cabinet used for the Local
Dispatcher system interconnections (see page 5-15).
Serial Hall Call: Description, installation and troubleshooting instructions for the Serial
Hall Call system (see page 5-17).
Flexible I/O: Description of the SC-ION Serial Input/Output board (see page 5-33).
Serial COP (Car Operating Panel): Description and installation instructions for the Serial
COP system and boards (see page 5-36).
EMCO Load Weigher: Refer to the EMCO Load Weigher instruction.
MCE Load Weigher: Refer to the MCE load weigher instruction.
5-1
System Options
iCentral - Central Dispatcher

iCentral coordinates dispatching, parking, special operating modes, emergency power
response, security, and interaction with existing (legacy) controls. The Windows PC in iCentral
has two Network Interface Cards (NIC); one for iCue elevator dispatching software, the other
for iView configuration software both software applications are installed on this one PC. You
configure and interact with iCue through the iView graphical user interface.
If you also have an iView PC separate from the iCentral PC, you must request and be granted
write privilege before you can make configuration changes. From the iView installation in the
single iView/iCue PC, write privilege is granted automatically upon request.
Cabinet Installation
Installation of the iCentral cabinet is similar to the installation of an iController cabinet. Please
refer to Machine Room Preparation on page 2-3.
Check for shorts to ground before powering up the system. Power must be OFF at the main
disconnect(s). A short to ground is defined as having a resistance of less than 20 ohms
between the #1 (Common) bus and the terminal being tested. Shorts to ground must be cor-
rected before proceeding.
Danger
Be certain that power is OFF at the main disconnect(s) before proceeding.
1. Using a standard screwdriver, temporarily disengage all twist-socketed fuses by turning
them counterclockwise until they pop up.
2. Measure the resistance between the #2 (120VAC) bus terminals and the #1 bus.
3. If no shorts to ground are discovered, re-engage the fuses.
The AC wiring instructions in this section describe connecting power wiring between the iCon-
trol elevator cabinets and the iCue cabinet. The majority of technical information is contained
in the MCE job prints package and referenced here as necessary. AC voltage verification and
wiring instructions include:
Verifying main line power
Wiring iCue
Initial power up and test for bus voltage presence
1. Consult the job prints. Verify that AC supply is as specified.

2. Refer to the Group Supervisor Field Wiring Print in the job prints and to the following
illustration. iCentral power is provided by the car controllers as shown in drawing -2.
The main AC power supply wiring size must be determined by the electrical contractor.
2a. Check the phase-offset of the individual car ST2-bus lines before connecting them
to the Group cabinet. Use a voltmeter set to AC volts to measure between adjacent
car 2-bus terminals in the Group cabinet. The meter must read less than 10VAC. If
the reading is higher, reverse the power leads going to the car T1 transformer at L1
and L2 and measure again.
5-2 Manual # 42-02-2223

iControl AC iCentral - Central Dispatcher
Caution
All 2 bus power from cars to the iCue cabinet must be in phase. Connecting out-of-phase
power WILL cause damage.
2b. A separate conduit or trough must be provided for the System (group-to-car)
Ethernet network. Wiring details in the job prints must be followed exactly.
2c. If applicable, also wire according to the Group Interconnects to Individual Car
Cabinets print. Be sure to ground all cabinets according to instructions.
2d. Refer to the Group Supervisor Field Wiring Print for iCentral field wiring instruc-
tions.
5
Figure 5.1 Elevator Controller to iCue Cabinet Wiring
iController 1 iController 2 iController 3 iController 4

MF1
MF2
MF1
MF2
MF1
MF2
MF1
MF2
L1P
L2P
L3P
L1P
L2P
L3P
L1P
L2P
L3P
L1P
L2P
L3P
B1
B2
B1
B2
B1
B2
B1
B2
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
1
1
1
2
2
2
3
3
3
1
1
1
2
2
2
3
3
3
1
1
1
2
2
2
3
3
3
1
1
1
2
2
2
3
3
3
1 ST2 1 ST2 1 ST2 1 ST2
1
MF1
MF2
L1P
L2P
L3P
B1
B2
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
1
1
1
2
2
2
3
3
3
ST2A, ST2B, ST2C, ST2D, etc. iCue
Initial Power Up and Bus Verification

After AC power is connected, you are ready to temporarily power up and check that power buses
inside the cabinet are providing their proper outputs.
Caution
This procedure assumes that no field wiring has yet been connected. If field wiring has been con-
nected, it must be disconnected before beginning this procedure. Before applying power, physically
check all components in the cabinet. Components loosened during shipment may cause damage.
1. Power up the elevator controllers.

2. Power up the group controller.
3. If a controller fails to power up, refer to the job prints and check supply connections and
fuses.
4. Measure from each iCue ST2 bus terminal to a Common (#1) terminal. Verify 120VAC.
5. If any bus voltage is missing, check the associated fuse. The fuses are labeled with the
bus numbers and are located at the top of the cabinet.
6. Power the controllers down (in preparation to continue wiring equipment).
5-3
System Options
iControl Ethernet Overview

iControl uses two distinct Ethernet networks:
The System switch connects the iCentral SYSTEM NIC to other MCE equipment like the
elevator controllers, Serial Hall Call systems, and input/output expansion boards (SC-ION
boards). iCue controls dispatching through this network.
The LAN switch connects the iCentral LAN NIC used by iView to configure both iCentral
and iControls. Through the LAN hub/switch, the elevator group may also be connected to
an external network or building LAN.
Figure 5.2 iCentral Ethernet Connections
SC-ION: Field Input/Output Connection, Data conversion to/from serial protocol
16 Inputs
LAN Remote iView

System Hub (Peripheral) Internet Remote iMonitor
iCENTRAL PC Hub
ICue 192.168.192.xxx
IvIew 192.168.191.xxx
192.168.192.xxx
SYSTEM NIC
Serial to TCP/IP
#2
LAN NIC
#1
16 Outputs
Serial
Driver
192.168.192.xxx
192.168.191.xxx
iBox, Car 1
#2 #1
Serial Bus
192.168.192.xxx
iBox, Car 2
192.168.191.xxx
Serial Hall Calls
#2 #1
5-4 Manual # 42-02-2223

iControl AC iControl Ethernet Overview
Setting iCentral PC LAN NIC (iView) IP Address
Note
When you open your iCue PC Network Connections, you will see two local area connections. The LAN
Ethernet controls the iCue LAN connection (iView); the System Ethernet controls the iCue System
connection to iBoxes, Serial Hall Calls, and I/O boards and SHOULD NOT BE CHANGED WITH-
OUT CONSULTING MCE.
If you received your iCentral PC from MCE, the NIC addresses for LAN and SYSTEM connec-
tions are already set as shown in the job prints. You DO NOT need to set them.
If you are replacing the LAN NIC card in the iCentral PC with an NIC provided by MCE, follow
the instruction included with the NIC. 5
If you are replacing the LAN NIC card in the iCentral PC with an NIC not provided by MCE, use
the instructions below. These instructions assume you have not changed the factory-default set-
tings for the LAN ports. When setting IP Addresses on a PC, do not enter leading zeros (i.e.,
.020 is entered as.20).
The following example is for the Windows 7 operating system.
1. Start the PC.
2. From the Start menu, click Control
Panel. When the control panel opens,
select View by: Small Icons (upper
right corner).
3. Double click Network and Sharing

Center to open the Network and Inter-
net Connections dialog. Click Change
Adapter Settings.
4. You will see two connections; one for
the System Ethernet and one for the LAN Ethernet.
5. Double-click the LAN Ethernet Connection icon to open the Local Area Connection Sta-
tus dialog.
5-5
System Options
6. Click Properties to open the Local

Area Connection Properties dialog.
7. In the Local Area Connection

Properties dialog, select Internet
Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4).
8. Click Properties to open the

Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)
Properties dialog
5-6 Manual # 42-02-2223

9. Set the IP Address to 192.168.191.201.

10. Set the Subnet Mask
to 255.255.255.0.
11. Leave the Default
gateway blank.
12. Click OK and follow
any instructions to
save the changes you
made.
5-7
System Options
Setting iCentral PC System NIC IP Address
Note
When you open your iCue PC Network Connections, you will see two local area connections. The LAN
Ethernet controls the iCue LAN connection (iView); the System Ethernet controls the iCue System
connection to iBoxes, Serial Hall Calls, and I/O boards and SHOULD NOT BE CHANGED WITH-
OUT CONSULTING MCE.
If you received your iCentral PC from MCE, the NIC addresses for LAN and SYSTEM connec-
tions are already set as shown in the job prints. You DO NOT need to set them.
If you are replacing the SYSTEM NIC card in the iCentral PC with an NIC provided by MCE, fol-
low the instruction included with the NIC.
If you are replacing the SYSTEM NIC card in the iCentral PC with an NIC not provided by MCE,
use the instructions below. These instructions assume you have not changed the factory-default
settings for the network ports. When setting IP Addresses on a PC, do not enter leading zeros
(i.e., .020 is entered as .20).
The following example is for the Windows 7 operating system.
1. Start the PC.
right corner).

Adapter Settings.
4. You will see two connections; one for
the System Ethernet and one for the LAN Ethernet.
5. Double-click the SYSTEM Ethernet Connection icon to open the Local Area Connection
Status dialog.
5-8 Manual # 42-02-2223




Properties dialog.
5-9
System Options
9. Set the IP Address to 192.168.192.001.

to 255.255.255.0.
11. Leave the Default
gateway blank.
any instructions to
made.
5-10 Manual # 42-02-2223

Pinging
If you suspect that one or more of the devices is still not communicating, you can ping them
from the iView PC. Pinging just lets you send a message manually that just asks for a reply if the
other device can hear you.
To ping:
1. Select Start/Programs/Accessories/Command Prompt from the Windows Start menu.
2. Type in ping and the IP address of the device you want to check. For example:
ping 192.168.191.201
3. If the device is visible and responding, you will see four messages saying Reply from...
4. If not, the IP address for the PC or for the device may not be correctly set.
5-11
System Options
iCue User Interface

The iCue GUI provides an overview of group operation and status.
Group Info
Group ID: The Group ID (1) cannot be changed. All other IDs are reserved for future
use. If you need advanced System addressing information please contact MCE.
5-12 Manual # 42-02-2223

Mode of Operation: The current group operating mode is displayed here:

Automatic: The group assigns operating modes automatically depending upon build-
ing traffic conditions.
Balanced: The group is operating in balanced mode, favoring neither up, down, nor
lobby traffic.
Lobby Peak: The group is operating in lobby peak mode, favoring traffic from the
building lobby or lobbies.
Demand Up Peak: The group is optimizing car assignment to favor up direction traffic.
Demand Down Peak: The group is optimizing car assignment to favor down direction
traffic.
Network Info (LAN and System): The LAN is the ethernet network used by iView, iMoni- 5
tor, and iReport to communicate with groups and cars. The System is the ethernet network
used by the group and individual car controls to communicate with one another.
IP Address: The TCP/IP address of the group on this network
Subnet Mask: The subnet mask limits the number of valid addresses in the group. For
iControl, this should always be 255.255.255.0
Gateway LAN: 192.168.191.254
Gateway System: 000.000.000.000 (o.o.o.o)
Connection Status: Displays the active car connections.
Bus Status: For each serial I/O bus (1, 2, 3, 4), displays operational status:
Connected: Lights green if the bus is connected.
Bus Voltage: Lights green if the bus voltage levels are adequate.
Driver VDC: Lights green if the DC voltage provided by the driver is adequate.
Node Control: The driver polls the nodes (addresses) of connected devices (hall calls,
other I/Os). This LED lights green when all nodes are responding correctly.
Bus Enabled: Lights green when there is activity on the bus.
High Current: Lights red if current demand is excessive. Occasional flashing is normal.
Near continuous flashing or steady on state means that the serial driver is unable to
provide enough current to meet demand. Continued high demand can damage the bus
driver. Contact MCE Technical Support.
Emergency Power:
Generator 1: Commercial power has been interrupted. Generator 1 is functioning.
Generator 2: Commercial power has been interrupted. Generator 2 is functioning.
Write privilege timeout: Allows you to set the amount of time for which write privilege is
granted. The default is 15 minutes. A value of zero = no time out.
Write Permission
When some one working in iView wants to change an iCue setting, they have to request permis-
sion by selecting Acquire from the Write Privileges menu. When they do, a pop-up dialog will
appear on the iCue screen in which you can approve or deny the request. This prevents remote
iView connections from making changes without the permission of machine room personnel.
Write requests from the iView/iCue PC in iCentral are granted automatically.
5-13
System Options
iCue Watchdog
When iCue is running, there is a utility called iCue Watchdog running in the background. The
watchdog monitors iCue and makes certain that it continues to run as it should.
The watchdog is a Windows Service, which means that it will not show up on the task bar or
icon tray. It runs under the name iCueWatchdogService.exe. Some attributes of the watchdog
include:
The watchdog's purpose is to make sure iCue is running. If iCue is closed through the task
manager, crashes, or locks up, the watchdog will restart it.
The watchdog will also monitor the iCue GUI. It will restart the GUI if it crashes for some
reason. This should have no effect on iCue or system dispatching.
The watchdog should always be running whether iCue is running or not. It gets started in a
batch file that is put into the startup directory.
If you close the iCue GUI (by right-clicking it in the icon bar and selecting exit) the watch-
dog assumes that is done intentionally and will not restart icue.
Starting the iCue GUI after it has been closed will trigger the watchdog to start monitoring
the applications again.
The watchdog has a config file for setting the directory paths of iCue and iCue GUI and
timers (in msec) that it uses to monitor the applications.
Caution
Watchdog information is provided to help you understand how iCue works. Never attempt to modify
Watchdog configuration. Incorrect settings can corrupt the functionality of the iCue group control
software.
5-14 Manual # 42-02-2223

iControl AC Comm-connect Cabinet - Local/Dispatcher
Comm-connect Cabinet - Local/Dispatcher

The Comm-connect cabinet is used to house the system communication components when the
Local/Dispatcher option is used. This cabinet houses the Serial Hall Call Driver(s), Ethernet
Switches, SC-ION Serial Control I/O Node board and AC power connections.
Figure 5.3 Typical Comm-connect Cabinet
Fuses
SC-ION Serial Control

I/O Node Board
Ethernet Switches
SC-HCE-ME Serial to
Ethernet Adapter
SC-HCDA Serial Hall Call

Driver Assembly
5-15
System Options
Figure 5.4 Comm-Connect Interconnection
iView iMonitor or iReport

Comm-connect Cabinet
LAN
To Cars
SC- (4 connections per car max.).
to Dispatcher ION
SYSTEM
Hall Calls To Cars

Serial
Serial to
Ethernet
Serial Bus
Ethernet
Other
For systems that use the Local/Dispatcher option, the Comm-Connect Cabinet is where the
serial and Ethernet communication equipment is housed and where the connections are made.
Ethernet Switches: The Ethernet switches are the main connection / distribution point for
the Local Area Network (LAN) and System Ethernet networks.
SC-HC-ME Serial to Ethernet Adapter: This component converts the serial signals from
the SC-HCDA Serial Hall Call Driver Assembly to the Ethernet protocol for transmission
on the System Ethernet network.
SC-HCDA Serial Hall Call Driver Assembly: This assembly provides power and communi-
cation to the Serial Hall Call Node boards located in each hall fixture box. Power and com-
munication is transmitted on the two wire Serial Bus. Two SC-HCDA assemblies may be
housed in the Comm-connect cabinet. For more information about the Serial Hall Call
option see Serial Hall Call on page 5-17.
SC-ION Serial Control I/O Board: This board is used for serial communication of signals
other than hall call signal (see Checking Serial to IP Connections on page 5-22).
5-16 Manual # 42-02-2223

iControl AC Serial Hall Call
Serial Hall Call

Serial I/O allows hall call buttons/indicators to be connected to iControl using a single 2-wire
bus per riser. The serial bus uses a +/- 15-volt square wave, sampled for both amplitude and
duty cycle, for communication between devices. The positive-going signal actually reaches +40-
volts and is regulated to +24-volts to drive hall call lamps or other loads.
A bus driver is required for each riser (up to 4 risers) to provide the capacity to carry the load
of multiple, simultaneously lighted lamps. A single controller can have up to four drivers/serial
buses with each bus addressing as many as 980 devices. The photograph below shows a serial
hall call bus driver installed in an iCentral Controller cabinet.
Figure 5.5 Serial Hall Call Bus Driver 5
Serial to TCP/IP conversion

for connection to System
switch. The board in your
system may be physically
different than this example.
Serial Bus connection
117 VAC power to driver
Serial output
from driver
5-17
System Options
Figure 5.6 Typical iCentral Serial Hall Call Connections
Figure 5.7 Typical Serial Hall Call Connections for a Simplex or Swing Car
iController
I"OX
V'.$
Open power box
3ERIAL(ALL
3ERIAL(ALL
#ALL0ORT
7IRING6ENT
3# (#$! )3/
(ALL#ALL$RIVER
2IBBONCABLETO )SOLATION"OARD
3# (#$! )3/BOARD
CONNECTSHERE 3# (#$!
3# (#$!3ERIAL(ALL#ALL$RIVER!SSEMBLY
USUALLYMOUNTEDINSIDETHEI0OWER
"OXON3IMPLEXAND3WING#ARS 3ERIAL(ALL#ALL"US
(ALL#ALL&IXTURES3# (#.3ERIAL(ALL#ALL.ODE"OARDS
5-18 Manual # 42-02-2223

Hall Call Installation

Installing a serial hall call system includes:
Pulling the serial bus wiring
Setting the node board addresses
Installing the hall call enclosures (refer to the job prints)
Pulling Serial Bus Wiring

The serial bus is the physical, twisted pair of 14 AWG or 16AWG wires along which all the hall
calls are connected. Install the serial bus wiring in accordance with applicable codes. The best
practice is to initiate each separate vertical bus wire run from the controller location. If neces-
sary, multiple serial bus runs can be paralleled at a driver to make them a single serial bus.
Refer to the drawing Serial Hall Call Suggested Wiring Methods in the job prints for specific 5
instructions for each job. The illustration below shows a single serial bus connected to serve two
vertical runs of hall call boxes.
Figure 5.8 Single Bus, Two Vertical Runs of Hall Call Boxes
5-19
System Options
Setting Node Board Addresses

Each hall call enclosure contains a node board. The node board provides two outputs to power
hall call lamps or LEDs, two inputs for the hall call buttons, and jumpers to set floor ID and hall
call type.
In a typical installation, a node (HCNT) board is mounted in each hall call receptacle. The blue
and orange wires of the serial bus connect to one end of the board, the hall call buttons and
lamps or LEDs connect to the other end (as shown in the job prints depending upon lamp or
LED connection). During installation, it is easiest to set jumpers on each node board so that it is
uniquely identified for floor ID and call type before you mount the board in the enclosure.
Node board jumper examples are illustrated below.
FLOOR ADDRESS X10 FLOOR ADDRESS X1

A JP4 B 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
DN
UP
Unused
Floor/PI Address,
10's place Floor/PI Address, Subaddress,
1's place Hall Call Type
Floor number or first digits of serial address* Call type or last digit
of serial address*
* This example sets the Down (DN) input/output to address 124 and the UP address to 126.
The first two digits represent the floor number, in this example, 12.
Floor Number/Address Jumpers

Jumpers 2 and 3 set the Floor number (or the first two digits of the serial address) for
the node board.
FLOOR ADDRESS X10 FLOOR ADDRESS X1

9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
JP3 JP2
Jumper 3 sets the first digit for the floor (or serial address).
Jumper 2 sets the second digit for the floor (or serial address).
The example shown above would set the Floor number to 12.
Because building floors are not consistently numbered and because a riser may not
serve all floors in a building, MCE creates a table of values for these jumpers according
to the building survey for the job. Refer to your job prints for precise information
about setting these jumpers for your installation.
5-20 Manual # 42-02-2223

Call Type Jumper

Jumper JP1 sets the call type for the two switch/lamp combinations serviced by the
node board (or the individual jumpers can be thought of as setting the last digits of the
boards two unique serial addresses). You set one jumper for each of the boards two I/
Os. The most common setting for JP1 jumpers, Down Front and Up Front hall calls, is
shown in the following illustration. The table after the illustration lists all call types.
9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
DN
UP
JP1
5
Table 5.1 Floor Sub-Addresses (Call Type) Jumper Settings
Sub-Address Default Definition Sub-Address Default Definition

0 Front Auxiliary Down Call 5 Standard Rear Down Call
1 Rear Auxiliary Down Call 6 Standard Front Up Call (shown)
2 Front Auxiliary Up Call 7 Standard Rear Up Call
3 Rear Auxiliary Up Call 8 Commandeer Front Call
4 Standard Front Down Call (shown) 9 Commandeer Rear Call
Note
Only the Sub-address jumper, JP1, can have more than one jumper inserted. (It can have a maximum of
two one to complete the DN address, the other to complete the UP address.) All other node board
jumpers can have ONLY ONE jumper inserted. If more than one jumper is inserted in JP2 or JP3, the
system will not work.
Wiring the Nodes Each serial bus consists of a twisted pair of wires, one orange and
one blue. Each node on the bus (i.e., a hall call button/lantern pair), has a connection to the
orange wire and a connection to the blue wire in addition to button and indicator lamp connec-
tions. See the job prints and instructions accompanying the hall call kits for details.
5-21
System Options
Checking Serial to IP Connections

Each Serial Hall Call bus originates from a Serial Hall Call Driver. Each Serial Hall Call Driver
communicates with iCue through the System Ethernet switch.
Figure 5.9 Serial to TCP/IP Connection

Ethernet port for connection
to System hub/switch
Serial-to-Ethernet converter
(physically different model
may be used)
Serial communication to
serial-to-Ethernet converter
(In some applications, the
serial-to-Ethernet converter
is plugged directly into the
serial hall call driver and no
ribbon cable is used.)
1. Verify an orange Ethernet cable from the Serial-to-Ethernet converter to the System
hub/switch.
The Serial-to-Ethernet converters each have their own IP address. The IP address is preset at
the factory and should not need to be changed.
Caution
Always power down the serial hall call driver and wait at least one minute before installing, replacing,
disconnecting, or connecting an SC-HCE serial to Ethernet board to avoid potential damage from a
high voltage spike.
5-22 Manual # 42-02-2223

Troubleshooting
This section describes some basic troubleshooting techniques for the serial/Ethernet transla-
tion units and the Serial Hall Call Driver Assembly (SC-HCDA).
Serial/Ethernet Translation
The serial I/O protocol used for MCE serial hall call and serial I/O board connections is trans-
lated to and from Ethernet bus protocol for system level communication over the iControl Sys-
tem network by the SC-HCE board. (System hub/switch in iCentral dispatcher. Orange TCP/IP
cables.)
SC-HCE Assemblies
The SC-HCE-2 is the newest release assembly. Older systems may use the SC-HCE-ME board 5
(not pictured). The SC-HCE-2 assembly is shown in the illustration below.
After making changes to SC-HCE-2 settings, reset the iCue computer so that it can rebuild
internal tables.
Figure 5.10 SC-HCE-2 Serial/Ethernet Translation Assembly
5-23
System Options
Mechanical Configuration
Ethernet Port: Standard Ethernet port. Used to connect this assembly to the System
Ethernet hub/switch using an orange Ethernet cable.
Figure 5.11 Ethernet Ports
Link status
Network activity
Table 5.2 Ethernet Port LEDs
LED Color Description

Link Status/Integrity yellow Network link is operational: On continuously indicates that an Ether-
net connection is made.
Network Activity/Diagnostic orange Network Activity: Blinks when network traffic detected.
Table 5.3 SC-HCE-2 Indicators
Indicator Description
Bus Error ON = Communication problem. Blinking Rapidly = Bootloader running.
DS3 ON = Isolated CAN power supply OK
Link Status Yellow indicator, ON = Network link is operational. (located on the ethernet connector)
Network Activity Orange indicator, Blinks = Network traffic detected. (located on the ethernet connector)
ON ON = Board processor operating. Blinking Rapidly = another board at same address.
When board is first powered up or reset, this LED blinks the first digit, second digit, and
third digit of the software version number with a very short blink between each group for
separation.
V OK ON = Power to the board OK.
Table 5.4 SC-HCE-ME Indicators
LED Color Description

Bus Error ON = Communication problem. Blinking Rapidly = Bootloader running.
Link Status/Integrity yellow Network link is operational: On continuously indicates that an Ethernet
connection is made or an access point is engaged.
Network Activity/Diagnostic green Network Activity: On when network traffic detected; off when no traffic
detected.
Diagnostic: Flashes three times in even duration during power up or
reset, indicating successful startup.
FHCE OK ON = Power to the board OK.
5-24 Manual # 42-02-2223

Table 5.5 SC-HCE-2 DIP Switch SW1
Switch Run State Function

1 OFF Not used.
2 OFF When ON, enables in-circuit programming through serial port.
3 OFF When ON, enables in-circuit programming through serial port.
4 OFF When ON, runs the ethernet bootloader instead of main application (on board startup).
5 Sets high bit of board ID. See following table.
6 Sets low bit of board ID. See following table.
Table 5.6 SCE-HCE-2 Board ID, Switches 5 and 6 of SW1 5

5 6 Riser ID Board TCP/IP Address
0 0 0 192.168.192.211
0 1 1 192.168.192.212
1 0 2 192.168.192.213
1 1 3 192.168.192.214
Table 5.7 SC-HCE-ME Board Switch Schedule
JP3 JP2 JP1 Result

Off Off Off 115.2 kHz serial port baud rate (default setting)
Off Off On 460.8 kHz serial port baud rate
Off On Off 230.4 kHz serial port baud rate
Off On On 921.6 kHz serial port baud rate
For board programming
On Off Off Board may be programmed
Table 5.8 SC-HCE-ME Board Switch Schedule for FPGA software V6.5.0 1DB38F
Jumper Position Description

Off 115.2 kHz baud rate (default setting)
JP1
On 230.4 kHz baud rate
Off Over clocking enabled (default setting)
JP2
On Over clocking disabled
Off Self resetting of (Digi) data converter enabled (default setting)
JP3
On Self resetting of (Digi) data converter disabled
Caution
Always power down the serial hall call driver and wait one minute before installing, replacing, dis-
connecting, or connecting an SC-HCE to avoid damaging the board.
5-25
System Options
Trouble Indications
Hall Call buttons do not work
Building Hall Call buttons do not light when pressed
Building Hall Call buttons do not stay on until elevator arrives
Elevator reports Wild Operation (stopping at every floor)
iBox LCD displays Emergency Dispatch
LEDs not lighted on the base board of the serial/Ethernet assembly
Both Network Link and Network Activity LEDs OFF
Hall Call LEDs or lamps flashing or not operating normally
If you are seeing any of the above problems, evaluate using the Check procedures below.
Quick Check
During power up, -2 Boards:
Two red SC-HCE board LEDs (V OK and Bus Error) should remain on for 30-40 sec-
onds after the Hall Call Driver is powered-up.
After solid-on, LEDs will cycle through a period of start up activity then indicate nor-
mal operation as described below.
During power up, -ME Boards:
Two red SC-HCE board LEDs (FHCE and Bus Error) should remain on for 30-40 sec-
onds after the Hall Call Driver is powered-up.
After solid-on, LEDs will cycle through a period of start up activity then indicate nor-
mal operation as described below.
Normal operation indication, -2 Boards:
Network Link Status LED on solidly (right, yellow).
Network/Serial Port Activity LED flashes once every five seconds or more (left,
orange) when communicating with iCue.
Network/Serial Port Activity LED should flash once when a Hall Call button is pressed.
DS3 (red) LED on SC-HCE board solidly on.
Bus Error (red) LED on SC-HCE board off. DIP switches 5 and 6 determine IP address;
the other switches should be OFF.
Normal operation indication, -ME Boards:
Network Link Status LED on solidly (left, yellow).
Network/Serial Port Activity LED flashes once every five seconds (right, green) when
communicating with iCue.
Network/Serial Port Activity LED should flash once when a Hall Call button is pressed.
FHCE (red) LED on SC-HCE board solidly on.
Bus Error (red) LED on SC-HCE board off.
Auto Reset
Check that the iCue software is running properly on the PC. If not, restart iCue by
clicking the Windows Start button and selecting Start/Programs/Startup/iCue.
5-26 Manual # 42-02-2223

General Check
1. Check all power and data cable connections.
Port status LED on System hub/switch should light when the Ethernet cable is plugged
in between the hub/switch and the serial/Ethernet board.
Ribbon cable (if used) seated properly on the hall call driver and the serial/Ethernet
board.
Use a voltmeter to measure between each of the three DC voltages (3.3V, 5V, 9V) on
the serial/Ethernet (SC-HCE) board to ground. Voltages should read the provided
level, +/- 10%.
iView Check Use the iView System I/O Configuration screen, Bus tab to see if trouble is
indicated and to check that hall calls are addressed as specified in your job prints. 5
1. Launch iView and connect to the group.
2. Open the System I/O Configuration screen and select the Bus tab.
3. Verify the state of the indicator LEDs and that the addresses are as defined in the group
job prints (inputs as expected per serial address and Labels mapped to correct floor).
5-27
System Options
Serial Connection Check, -2 Board The Hyperterminal utility may be used to check
or default internal settings on SC-HCE boards. Contact MCE for information.
5-28 Manual # 42-02-2223

TCP Address Check, -ME Board The Digi Device Discovery utility may be used to
check and/or reset the TCP/IP address of the serial/Ethernet assembly (SC-HCE-ME). This
utility is available from MCE.
1. Start the Digi Device Discovery utility. The utility will launch, and check the System net-
work for any connected SC-HCE-ME.
2. Select the device. Click on Configure Network Settings.
Note that, to change Digi configuration, you will need to provide USN Name and Password:
Default USN Name: root
Default USN Password: dbps
5-29
System Options
3. In the Configure Network Settings dialog that appears, select Manually configure net-
work settings.
4. Check the drawing package for the dispatcher or the Ethernet Address examples draw-
ing in the manual.
5. If the IP address of the device is incorrect, set it appropriately.
Note
When entering the IP address, do not enter leading zeros. For example, in the address 192.168.192.056,
056 is entered as 56, with no leading zero.
6. Click Save. A Reboot Device dialog will appear:
7. Wait for ten to fifteen seconds (until the Diagnostic LED on the serial/Ethernet assem-
bly blinks for eight to ten seconds and then goes off), then click OK.
8. Restart the iCue PC.
5-30 Manual # 42-02-2223

Hall Call Driver
Serial cable to serial/

ethernet translator
board
Serial Bus connection
AC power 5
Quick Test You can do a basic functionality test on the hall call driver.
With power applied:
1. Verify 120VAC power to the driver.
2. Unplug the Serial Bus connection (orange/blue wires).
3. Use a voltmeter to check the voltage between SHCS and SHCC. You should see approxi-
mately 30V, + or - 10%. (This voltage will only be present if the SC-HCE-ME or EM is
working properly as verified in preceding troubleshooting steps.)
If this voltage is present, the driver is probably operating properly.
5-31
System Options
Driver Voltages Test The hall call driver can be more thoroughly tested if necessary.
The test is relatively simple on iCentral units shipped after July, 2005 because a female, test
connector has been installed in the middle of the ribbon cable connecting the driver to the SC-
HCE (Digi board) assembly. Earlier units do not have the test connector.
Note
Note: Digi-board connector ground pins are 2,3,4,6,9,11,12,13,14,15, and 17.
1. Cut three pieces of 22 AWG solid wire 2 in length. Strip insulation off each end.
These will be used as jumpers and test probes during the test.
2. At the SC-HCE board end, disconnect the
ribbon cable connected to the hall call
driver. Note the test connector in the middle
of the cable. Its pinout is as shown.
Note
Alternatively, if the cable does not have a test connector,

insert a 20 conductor ribbon cable, with a female connec-
tor at each end, into the SCHCD J2 socket.
3. Remove orange and blue bus wires from the

hall call driver bus terminal connector.
4. Connect 120 VAC power to Serial Hall Call
Driver power input terminals.
5. Insert the negative DC voltmeter lead to the
Hall Call Bus SHCC Terminal connector.
Driver DC power supply test

1. Insert a wire test probe into pin 19. Connect
the positive voltmeter lead.
2. You should see 42-volts (+/- 10%). Remove the wire probe.
Digi-board DC power supply test

1. Connect the positive voltmeter probe/lead to pin 8.
2. You should see 10-volts (+/- 10%).
5-32 Manual # 42-02-2223

iControl AC Flexible I/O
Node Response test

1. Insert a probe wire into pin 20, connect the positive voltmeter lead.
2. You should see 5-volts, +/- 10%. Leave the probe wire in place.
3. Bend the wire/jumper and short pin 20 to pin 17.
4. Insert a probe at pin 5 and connect the positive voltmeter lead.
5. You should see something under 1-volt.
6. Leave the pin 20 to pin 17 jumper in place and the positive voltmeter lead connected to
pin 5.
7. Use a second jumper to short pin 10 to pin 12.
8. You should see something over 20 volts.
9. Leave the pin 20 to pin 17 jumper in place. Remove the lead from pin 5.
5
Driver output voltage test
1. Place the positive DC voltmeter lead on the Hall Call Bus SHCS Terminal.
2. You should see something over 35-volts.
3. Insert a probe wire at pin 16 and connect the positive voltmeter lead
4. You should see something over 25-volts.
5. Leave the pin 20 to pin 17 jumper in place. Remove the lead from pin 16.
Node control flag test

1. Insert a probe wire at pin 18 and connect the positive voltmeter lead.
2. Bend the wire probe and temporarily short pin 18 to pin 17 or pin 15.
3. Watch the voltmeter as you unplug the wire from pin 17 (or 15), it should read less than
1-volt when the short is released.
Node control flag test preferred alternate method
1. Install a Watt 10K Ohm (brown, black, red) resistor between pin 15 and pin 18 and
connect voltmeter to pin 18.
2. Release pin 20 from the ground (pin 17). The voltmeter should read something over 20-
volts.
If the preferred alternate method is used you will see a short positive pulse on your voltme-
ter.
1. Place the positive DC voltmeter lead on the Hall Call Bus SHCS Terminal. The voltmeter
should indicate less than 1-volt.
2. Remove all test connections. If the driver passed all of the above tests it will likely oper-
ate OK.
Flexible I/O
iCue makes extensive use of a serial bus to handle a range of communication and control needs.
The serial bus is used to service the MCE Serial Hall Call System and to control I/O through one
or more SC-ION boards (input/output expansion boards). Each SC-ION board provides 16
user-configurable inputs and 16 user-configurable outputs. Input and output configuration,
using the MCE iView graphical user interface, is described in Section 6 of this guide. This sec-
tion describes physical I/O connections.
5-33
System Options
SC-ION Boards
The number of SC-ION boards in an iCue system will vary depending upon system configura-
tion and the number of additional inputs and outputs required for the job. A typical job might
have one SC-ION board, providing 16 additional inputs and 16 additional outputs.
Figure 5.12 SC-ION Board in iCue Cabinet

Factory programming serial port. Input/Output wires
Used to configure the board. to terminal strip
Inputs Board Reset

MCE Serial Bus Connection
Outputs High/Low (Current
Source/Current Sink)
Output Selection (J4)
In this configuration, inputs and

outputs have been routed to clearly
labeled terminal strips for easy user
identification and connection.
Terminal strips are located behind

the hinged panel inside the iCentral
cabinet, mounted for convenient
user access.
5-34 Manual # 42-02-2223

iControl AC Flexible I/O
I/O Connections
Connect inputs and outputs as shown in your job prints. SC-ION board inputs are always
117VAC. Outputs may be configured (in specific groups) to provide either a path to ground or
current to drive indicator lamps/LEDs.
Output State Selection The outputs are divided into three groups. Each group shares
a common. The common may be wired to provide a current source or a path to ground. The
groups are:
Relays 1 4
Relays 5 8
Relays 9 16
5
The commons for the groups are determined by the connections made to board connector J4.
The appropriate connections are determined during the job survey. Each system is configured
before shipment. You need only connect the inputs and outputs as shown on the job prints.
Board Addresses Each of the 16 inputs and 16 outputs on the board has an address on
the system bus. The addresses are assigned as indicated by the job survey before the system is
shipped. A software tool, accessed through iView, System I/O screen, is used to set individual
addresses and also to set the address range (10-488 or 10-988) used for the job. To configure
the board, the iView PC must be connected through a serial cable to the board serial port.
5-35
System Options
Serial COP
With the Serial Car Operating Panel system, car call buttons connect directly to a serializing
board located in the car station enclosure. Multiple Serial COP boards daisy-chain together to
accommodate high-rise installations with a lot of call buttons.
Figure 5.13 Serial COP board - typical installation
CAR CALL
BUTTON
+24V
Caution COM
This system is designed for 24 VDC cir-
+24V SIGNAL
cuits maximum. Connecting 120VAC or
DC will open the input fuses.
Connection Example:
Universal 4-pin inputs COM
5-36 Manual # 42-02-2223

iControl AC Serial COP
Wiring from the Serial COP board(s) to the iLink cartop box is a short length of shielded cable
with a telephone-style RJ-11 connector at each end. The iLink cartop box supports up to four
serial control panel connections. Communication between iLink and the controller is also serial,
thereby reducing the traveler and hoistway cabling.
Figure 5.14 iLink Cartop Box
Cables (4) from Serial

COP boards
5-37
System Options
Serial COP Board Specifications

Each Serial COP board handles up to 24 call buttons or switches. If more inputs are required,
Serial COP boards are daisy-chained together.
Each of the Serial COP boards 24 I/O connections can be used as an input, an output or a
combined call input and output.
Plugable connections are provided for COP buttons and switches.
Inputs can be 12 - 24 VDC (24V preferred).
Outputs: 24V, 6W (maximum) lamps or 250mA LEDs recommended.
Socketed, easily replaceable drivers protect the board from damage due to out-of-range
inputs.
The initial Serial COP board (ICE-COP) communicates with the iLink ICE-CTP board
using an RJ-11 cable.
Additional Serial COP boards (ICE-COP-X) are daisy-chained using RJ-11/RJ-45 cables.
All Serial COP board I/O assignments are field configurable using the iView Configuration
> I/O Boards > Configuration tab. The signal types include:
Car calls
Car call enables (security)
Enable overrides (security)
Door controls
Car status
Position indicators
Alarm I/O
Load indicators
Operating mode I/O including: Fire service, Attendant service, Independent service,
Flood operation, Inspection operation, Swing operation, Earthquake operation, Sab-
bath operation, Recall operation and CFSS (Commandeer for Special Service) opera-
tion.
Serial COP Installation

1. Mount the Serial COP boards in the car operating panel.
2. Connect the COP switches and lamps to the Serial COP board(s) using the plugable con-
nectors. Refer to job print drawings - Cartop Details (-CTx).
3. Verify the COP board I/O assignments using the iView Configuration > I/O Boards >
Configuration tab.
ICE-COP Board Diagnostics The DIP switches and LEDs in the upper right corner of
the ICE-COP board provide diagnostic information. Please refer to ICE-COP-2 Serial Car
Operating Panel Board on page 6-75.
5-38 Manual # 42-02-2223

iControl AC Load Weighers
Load Weighers
Please see the installation instructions shipped with the selected load weigher.
Weigher Calibration with iControl

1. Connect a multimeter to test points TP_LW and GND on the ICE-CTP board in the
cartop Box. Adjust trimpot LW ADJ until the meter reads the same value noted in step
6 in the calibration procedure.
Figure 6. ICE-CTP Cartop Processor Board
TP_LW test point
LW ADJ trim pot
GND test point
2. To view load weigher voltages using the iView Virtual Oscilloscope:

Connect to the controller; display the Virtual Oscilloscope (View > Virtual Oscillo-
scope)
Select Load Weigher (Raw) for Test point 1
Observe Load Weigher voltage values on the digital display.
3. To verify the linearity of the load weigher, place weights in the car that represent the fol-
lowing and observe the voltage values:
Empty car - about 0.0 volts
25% of overload weight - about 2.5 volts
50% of overload weight - about 5.0 volts
75% of overload - about 7.5 volts
Full load weight - about 8 volts
Overload weight - about 10 volts
4. On the iView Controller > Configuration > Load Weigher tab:
Set Load weighing device type to Analog signal.
Set Sensing type to Cross head deflection or rope tension sensing.
5-39
System Options
5. If the load weigher will be used to implement dispatching options, the parameters asso-
ciated with these options must be set (see Load Weigher Adjustment for Dispatching in
Section 4.
6. iControl needs to learn the empty and full load weights at every landing available to this
car. This is a semi-automated process (see Learning Load Values in Section 4.
5-40 Manual # 42-02-2223

Troubleshooting
About Troubleshooting
This section contains general troubleshooting information. If you are viewing this on a com-
puter, click the page number to jump to the appropriate section.
Troubleshooting Topics Description See

Troubleshooting Tools Lists the troubleshooting tools available. page 6-2
Safety String Bypass Jumper Temporarily bypasses an open safety string. page 6-3
Fault and status messages table - includes a description, car
iControl Messages page 6-13
reaction and troubleshooting tips for each message.
A description of the iBox boot process, procedure for
iBox Troubleshooting page 6-71
upgrading iBox firmware and for replacing an iBox.
Replacing Circuit Boards Instructions for removing and replacing circuit boards. page 6-73
Descriptions of circuit board connections, indicators, jump-
Circuit Board Quick References page 6-74
ers and test points.
COP Board Diagnostics Use to diagnose problems with Serial COP boards. page 6-77
iLink Cartop Diagnostics Use to diagnose problems with iLink. page 6-80
6-1
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Tools
The iBox provides status and trouble shooting information:
The status line of the iBox display scrolls messages about system operation. Please refer to
LCD Display and Keypad on page 7-2.
The iBox Event Log captures a FIFO file of the last 50 system events by event number and
name and provides additional data for each event captured. Press softkey (1) beneath the
Car label, scroll down to View Event Log and press Enter. To view event details, scroll to
the desired event and press Enter. Scroll down to see all of the data, including the event
name. A description and troubleshooting suggestions for each event can be found in iView
online Help (Help > iView Help > Messages Reference) and in the iControl Messages table
in this user guide. Please refer to iControl Messages on page 6-13.
iView provides an extensive toolset to help you diagnose problems:
Hoistway: The Hoistway window (Controller > View > Hoistway) shows the current posi-
tion of the car, registered calls, car speed and current operating mode.
Operational Status tab: The Operational Status tab shows the current speed, position, pat-
tern, and motion of the car. Also, Safety and Cartop processor status, safety circuits, level-
ing sensors and door locks. The Faults and Car status text boxes show general and car
operation faults and car status so that you can monitor them easily while viewing hoistway
information and running the car. A description and troubleshooting suggestions for each
fault or status message can be found in iView online Help (Help > iView Help > Messages
Reference) and in the iControl Messages table in this guide. Please refer to iControl Mes-
sages on page 6-13.
Event Log: The Event Log tab (View > Diagnostics > Event Log) monitors and records sys-
tem events. You can easily save event log information to a file on your iView PC for archi-
val and future reference. A description and troubleshooting suggestions for each event can
be found in iView online Help (Help > iView Help > Messages Reference) and in the iCon-
trol Messages table in this guide. Please refer to iControl Messages on page 6-13.
Fault Bypass: The Fault Bypass tab (View > Diagnostics > Fault Bypass) allows you to
bypass over 50 system faults. The Fault Bypass switch on the iBox must be ON and each
fault bypass times out after fifteen minutes to prevent the possibility of unintended, long
term bypassing of critical faults. To bypass faults, the car must be on Machine Room
Inspection or Test Operation.
Diagnostic Flags: The Diagnostic Flags tab (View > Diagnostics > Diagnostic Flags) allows
you to view system diagnostic flags and car status in four classifications (Operation,
Motion, Safety, Drive).
Terminal Switches Status: The Terminal Switches Status tab (View > Diagnostics > Termi-
nal Switches Status) shows information about the speed and position of the car when each
Normal and Emergency Terminal Switch opened.
Diagnostic Outputs: Diagnostic Outputs (View > Diagnostics > Diagnostic Outputs win-
dow) allows you to choose and simultaneously monitor up to 16 system outputs.
Virtual Oscilloscope: The oscilloscope (View > Diagnostics > Virtual Oscilloscope) allows
you to select and view two system outputs simultaneously on a virtual oscilloscope.
6-2 Manual # 42-02-2223

iControl AC Safety String Bypass Jumper
Safety String Bypass Jumper

If any switch or relay in the safety string opens, the car immediately loses power and stops. In
some situations, you may need to temporarily bypass an open safety string. For example, if the
car has tripped a final limit, you will need to bypass the safety string and move the car up (or
down) the hoistway past the limit switch so that the safety string can again be made. Once the
safety string is complete again, you must immediately remove the bypass jumper.
The safety string bypass location for iControl is accessed through ports on the front cover of the
iBox. The ports are sized so that a jumper wire (16AWG minimum) with insulated clips on each
end can be used to short the SB and 3 terminals to bypass the safety string.
6
Danger
You are jumpering 110VDC. Place the jumper with caution, being certain that you are insu-
lated from the possibility of electrical shock.
The safety bypass is intelligent. The jumper will have no effect if it is put in place with the safety
string intact (other than to generate a time out after 15 minutes pass). The jumper will bypass
the string and allow the car to be moved only if it is placed after the safety string has opened. If
the jumper is in place when the string opens, you must remove the jumper, then
replace it before it will bypass the string.
The jumper is monitored by a timer. If the jumper is in place for longer than 15 minutes, the
timer will expire, drop the brake and motor contactors and generate a Safety Bypass Jumper
Time Out. To clear the fault and restart the car, you must remove the bypass jumper. If more
time is needed, re-install the jumper and the fifteen-minute timer will restart.
The table below specifies what is and is not bypassed by the jumper.
Table 6.1 Safety String Bypass Jumper

Bypasses Does not bypass
Cartop exit input Rope Gripper OK from Rope Gripper board
Emergency Stop switch on car Unintended motion fault already tripped
Governor switch input Rope brake fault already tripped
Hoistway safety string Machine Room Emergency Stop switch
Car safety string Any Safety Processor A or B fault
6-3
Troubleshooting
Message Tables
System outputs are displayed alternating with other messages on the iBox LCD. Status, Fault,
and Event messages are displayed by iView. (iBox maintains an Event Log as well.) This section
contains two tables. Table 6.2 provides a cross-reference from iBox ID numbers to associated
iControl message names. Table 6.3 lists system messages in alphabetical order and describes
the cause and recommended troubleshooting procedures if appropriate.
Table 6.2 Cross Reference: iBox Event Log ID Numbers to iControl Messages
ID # iControl Message (iBox Event Log and iView Controller Event Log)
1 Drive On Fault (was Drive Ready On Fault)
2 Brake Enable Fault
4 Insufficient Brake Feedback Fault
5 Brake Voltage Not On Fault
6 Excessive Brake Feedback Fault
7 Brake Pick Fault
8 Brake Module Over Temperature Fault
9 Heat Sensor Fault 2
12 Power Supply Fault 1
16 Drive At-Speed Fault
17 Drive Fault
18 Drive Ready Fault
19 Front Door Close Time-out
20 Front Door Close Fault
21 Front Door Open Time-out
22 Front Door Open Fault
23 Rear Door Close Time-out
24 Rear Door Close Fault
25 Rear Door Open Time-out
26 Rear Door Open Fault
27 Earthquake Operation (Seismic Switch)
28 Earthquake Operation (Counterweight)
29 Earthquake Run
30 Earthquake Operation Activated
31 Earthquake Operation Deactivated
32 Earthquake Emergency Stop
33 Fire Service Recall Main
34 Fire Service Recall Alternate
35 Fire Service In-car Activated
36 Elevator Recall Operation (Switch 1)
42 Emergency Power Recall
43 Emergency Power Shutdown
44 Emergency Power Run
45 Front Door Contact Fault
46 Rear Door Contact Fault
47 Front Photo Eye Failure
48 Front Safe Edge Failure
6-4 Manual # 42-02-2223

49 Rear Photo Eye Failure
50 Rear Safe Edge Failure
51 Cartop Inspection Operation
53 Hoistway Access Operation
54 Machine Room Inspection Operation
55 Test Mode
56 Capture Mode
57 Independent Service
60 Attendant Service
61 Passenger Operation
62 Up Normal Terminal Switch 1 Position Fault
64
65
Up Normal Terminal Switch 3 Position Fault
Up Normal Terminal Switch 4 Position Fault
6
67 Up Emergency Terminal Switch Position Fault
68 Down Normal Terminal Switch 1 Position Fault
73 Down Emergency Terminal Switch Position Fault
74 Position Quadrature Fault
75 Position Speed Threshold Fault
76 Position Speed Deviation Fault
77 Motion Start Fault
78 User code accessing an invalid logical indicator (internal event)
79 Car shut down due to emergency power operation with no supervisor (Activated)
80 Car shut down due to emergency power operation with no supervisor (Deactivated)
81 Car delayed with doors open
82 Car delayed with doors closed
83 Car out of service with doors open
84 Car out of service with doors closed
85 Earthquake board power supply ON
86 Earthquake board power supply OFF
87 Earthquake reset button stuck ON
88 Earthquake reset button OK
89 Fire Service In-car Hold Operation
90 Fire Service In-car Recall Operation
91 Load learn process activated
92 Load learn process deactivated
93 Car Heavy Load Activated - Hall Calls Bypassed
94 Car Over Load Activated
95 Fire Service Recall Deactivated
96 Fire Service In-car Deactivated
97 Emergency Power Activated
98 Emergency Power Deactivated
100 Car Dispatch Load
102 Car Heavy Load - Deactivated
104 Car Over Load Deactivated
105 Photo Eye Antinuisance
106 Light Load Antinuisance
107 Nudging Operation
108 Front Photo Eye Bypassed
109 Rear Photo Eye Bypassed
110 Front Safe Edge Bypassed
111 Rear Safe Edge Bypassed
6-5
Troubleshooting
118 Inspection Overspeed Fault
119 Tach Error Fault
120 Drive Enable Feedback Fault
121 Safety A Inspection Overspeed Fault
122 IO Map Compare Fault
123 IO Map Toggle Compare Fault
124 Fault Bypass Switch Timed Out
125 Safety Bypass Jumper Timed Out
126 Learn Switch Timed Out Fault
127 Safety A SIB Device Fault
128 Safety B SIB Device Fault
129 QPRAM Device Error
130 EEPROM Device Error
131 Front Door Open Button Bypassed
132 Rear Door Open Button Bypassed
135 Door Lock Clipped Greater than 200fpm
136 Safety String Open
137 Motion stopped due to IO toggle test
138 Safety Configuration Mismatch
139 Safety Configuration Learn Fault
140 IO Map Compare Alert
141 Safety A Contract Overspeed Fault
142 Safety A Inspection Leveling Overspeed Fault
143 Safety Inventory Checksum Fault
144 Safety Configuration Checksum Fault
145 Limit Switches Checksum Fault
146 Safety Configuration Inventory Cross Check Fault
147 Safety Inventory Learn Fault
148 Limit Switches Learn Fault
149 Dual Channel QUAD Fault
150 Single Channel QUAD Fault
151 Loss of Position or Speed Indicators
152 Safety Inventory Comparison Fault
153 Safety Inventory Creation Fault
154 Position Quadrature Reversed Fault
155 Down Normal Terminal Switch 1 Level 1 Speed Fault
165 Up Normal Terminal Switch 1 Level 1 Speed Fault
175 Safety A DETS Level 2 Speed Fault
176 Safety A UETS Level 2 Speed Fault
6-6 Manual # 42-02-2223

177 Excessive Faults Shutdown
178 Safety A Unintended Motion Fault
179 Ascending Car Overspeed Fault
180 Position Synchronization Required at Terminal
181 Position Synchronized at Terminal
182 Position Synchronization Required at Floor
183 Position Synchronized at Floor
184 Cartop Communication Fault
185 Cartop Inspection Unintended Motion Fault
186 Cartop Automatic Unintended Motion Fault
187 Motor Limit Timed Out
188 Safety B Fault Bypass Switch Timed Out
189
190
Safety B Safety Bypass Jumper Timed Out
IO Map Compare Long Term Alert
6
191 IO Map Compare Long Term Fault
192 Position Location Error Fault
193 Position Cartop Offset Fault
194 Motor Contactor Driver Proofing Fault
195 Motor Contactor Proofing Fault
196 Brake Contactor Driver Proofing Fault
197 Brake Contactor Proofing Fault
198 Safety B UETS Level 2 Speed Fault
199 Safety B DETS Level 2 Speed Fault
200 Safety B Inspection Overspeed Fault
201 Safety B Inspection Leveling Overspeed Fault
202 Safety B Contract Overspeed Fault
203 Excessive Relevels Fault
204 Excessive Restarts Fault
205 Cartop Emergency Stop
206 Cartop Power Loss
207 Up Direction Limit Open
208 Down Direction Limit Open
209 Floor Location Fault
210 Floor Sensor Fault
211 Power Transfer Input Activated
212 Power Transfer Input Deactivated
213 Invalid Front Door Position
214 Invalid Rear Door Position
215 Earthquake Reduce Speed
216 Cartop Inspection Operation
217 Car Panel Inspection Operation
218 Hoistway Access Inspection Operation
219 Machine Room Inspection Operation
220 Inspection Operation
221 Construction Cartop Inspection Operation
222 Construction Car Panel Inspection Operation
223 Construction Hoistway Access Inspection Operation
224 Construction Machine Room Inspection Operation
225 Construction Inspection Operation
226 Door Lock Clipped Less than 200fpm
227 Invalid Configuration Input (was Invalid Input)
228 Emergency Medical Service Recall Activated (Switch 1)
229 Emergency Medical Service In-Car Activated (Switch 1)
230 Emergency Medical Service Deactivated
231 Emergency Medical Service Bypassed
232 SCR Power Supply Fault
233 SCR AC Phase Fault
6-7
Troubleshooting
234 SCR Contactor Fuse Fault
235 SCR Phase Lock Loop Fault
236 SCR Phase Lock Loop Warning
237 SCR Dynamic Brake Fault
238 SCR Instantaneous Over Current
239 SCR Armature Voltage On
240 SCR High Temperature Fault
241 SCR Loop Over Current
243 SCR Insufficient Armature Current
244 SCR Excessive Armature Current
245 SCR Excessive Current Command, Drive Enabled
246 SCR Excessive Current Command, Drive Disabled
247 Insufficient Motor Field Forcing Feedback Fault
248 Insufficient Motor Field Feedback Fault
249 Swing Operation Activated
250 Swing Operation Deactivated
251 Field Module Over Temperature Fault
252 Speed Limit, MF Forcing
253 Tach Failure
254 Sabbath Operation Activated
255 Sabbath Operation Deactivated
256 Emergency Brake Tripped
257 Landing System Sensor Fault
258 Emergency Brake Leg 1 Short Fault
259 Emergency Brake Leg 2 Short Fault
260 Alternate Speed Profile 1 Activated
261 Alternate Speed Profile 1 Deactivated
262 Alternate Speed Profile 2 Activated
263 Alternate Speed Profile 2 Deactivated
264 Motor Field Forcing Timed Out
265 iView Logged On
266 iView Logged Off
267 iView Timed Out
268 iView Lost Connection
269 Balanced Mode
270 Lobby Peak Mode
271 Demand Up Peak Mode
272 Demand Down Peak Mode
273 CFSS Mode 1 Recall Activated
274 CFSS Mode 1 at Floor Activated
275 CFSS Mode 1 In-car Activated
276 CFSS Mode 2 Recall Activated
277 CFSS Mode 2 at Floor Activated
278 CFSS Mode 2 In-car Activated
279 Emergency Alarm Acknowledged
280 Emergency Alarm Activated (Safety opened)
281 Emergency Alarm Activated (Car delayed with doors closed)
282 Emergency Alarm Activated (Alarm button)
283 Emergency Alarm Activated (In-car stop switch)
284 Emergency Brake OK open
285 Cartop Exit Open
286 Governor open
287 Safety H String Open
288 Safety C String Open
289 Machine Room Stop Switch Open
290 Car Stop Switch Open
291 Controller Main Computer Startup
6-8 Manual # 42-02-2223

292 Floor Synchronization Fault
293 Terminal Synchronization Fault
294 Position Synchronization Fault
296 Up Emergency Terminal Switch Shutdown
297 Down Emergency Terminal Switch Shutdown
298 Power Up Position Synchronization Required at Terminal
299 Learn U/DNT1-5 and U/DETS Speeds
300 Learn U/DNT1-5 and U/DETS Positions
301 Excessive Motor Field Feedback Fault
302 Brake Output Circuit Failure
303 Group Communication Lost
304 Group Communication Established
305
306
Flood Operation Activated
Flood Operation Deactivated
6
307 Emergency Brake UIM Reset Button Stuck
308 Exercise Operation Activated
309 Exercise Operation Deactivated
310 SCR Low Line Fault
311 SCR Low Line Caution Activated
312 SCR Low Line Caution Deactivated
313 SCR Low Line Test Fault
314 Excessive Restarts Warning
315 Governor Speed Reduction Switch Fault
316 Software Recall Switch Activated
317 SCR Drive Ready Fault
318 Retiring Cam Door Lock Fault Activated
319 Retiring Cam Door Lock Fault Deactivated
320 Retiring Cam Protection Fault Activated
321 Retiring Cam Protection Fault Deactivated
322 Watchdog Ordered Control Stop Before Reset
323 Front Hall Door Open Button Bypassed
324 Rear Hall Door Open Button Bypassed
327 Bus 2 Fuse Open
328 Bus 2D Fuse Open
329 Bus 2MC Fuse Open
330 Bus 2PI Fuse Open
331 Bus 3 Fuse Open
332 Bus 3HA Fuse Open
333 Watchdog Ordered Emergency Stop Before Reset
334 Local Dispatcher Activated
335 Local Dispatcher Deactivated
336 Drive Start Failure
337 Emergency Medical Service Recall Activated (Switch 2)
338 Emergency Medical Service In-Car Activated (Switch 2)
339 Pre-start Door Lock Fault
340 Emergency Alarm Deactivated without Acknowledgement
341 Cartop Exit no Counterweight Configuration Error
342 Front Door Close Fault Recovery Failure
343 Rear Door Close Fault Recovery Failure
344 Sheave Brake Pick Fault
345 Sheave Brake Drop Fault
346 Serial COP Buss 1 Comm Fault
350 Serial COP Bus 1 Inventory Fault
6-9
Troubleshooting
354 User Defined Event 1 On
355 User Defined Event 1 Off
374 Drive Communication Fault
375 Drive Communication Warning
376 Motor Limit Protection Timer Elapsed
377 Shuttle Service Activated
378 Shuttle Service Deactivated
379 Event Log Cleared
380 Front Auxiliary Door Open Button Bypassed
381 Rear Auxiliary Door Open Button Bypassed
382 Backup Power Unit Failure Activated
383 Backup Power Unit Failure Deactivated
384 Backup Power Direction Reversal
385 Backup Power Recall ON
386 Backup Power Recall OFF
387 Machine Room Heat Detectors Activated
388 Machine Room Heat Detectors Deactivated
389 Hoistway Heat Detectors Activated
390 Hoistway Heat Detectors Deactivated
391 Floor Heat Detectors Activated
392 Floor Heat Detectors Deactivated
393 Heat Detectors Recall Activated
394 Heat Detectors Recall Deactivated
395 Heat Detectors Recall Complete
396 Brake Drop Fault
397 Cartop Communication Established
398 Hall Call Service Disabled
399 Hall Call Service Enabled
400 Nudging Front
401 Nudging Rear
402 Emergency Dispatch On
403 Emergency Dispatch Off
404 Safety B Unintended Motion Fault
405 SPA Spare Event 1
6-10 Manual # 42-02-2223

413 LCD Fault
414 Battery Voltage Low-IMP
415 Emergency Brake OK open Off
416 Safety H String Open Off
417 Safety C String Open Off
418 Cartop Exit Open Off
419 Brake Pick Fault Off
420 IO Map Compare Fault Off
421
422
IO map Toggle Compare Fault Off
Safety A SIB Device Fault Off
6
423 Safety B SIB Device Fault Off
424 Invalid Configuration Input Off
425 Invalid Configuration Input DLMS
426 Invalid Configuration Input DLAT
427 Invalid Configuration Input DLAB
428 Invalid Configuration Input DCMS
429 Invalid Configuration Input DCAT
430 Invalid Configuration Input DCAB
431 Invalid Configuration Input DPM
432 Invalid Configuration Input CTEX
433 Invalid Configuration Input DLMSR
434 Invalid Configuration Input DCMSR
435 Invalid Configuration Input DPMR
436 Safety String Closed
437 IMP Switch Fault - Emergency Stop
438 IMP Switch Fault - Fault Bypass
439 IMP Switch Fault - Inspection DOWN
440 IMP Switch Fault - Inspection UP
441 IMP Switch Fault - Inspection Enable
442 IMP Switch Fault - Inspection
443 IMP Switch Fault - Learn
444 IMP Switch Fault - Test
445 IMP Switch Fault - Write Enable
446 IMP Switch Fault - Hoistway Door Bypass
447 IMP Switch Fault - Car Door Bypass
448 IMP Switch Fault - None
451 Excessive Faults Warning
452 Stuck Cartop Inspection Input
453 Cartop Inspection Inputs OK
454 Stuck Car Panel Inspection Input
455 Car Panel Inspection Inputs OK
456 Cartop Inspection Disabled
457 Cartop Inspection Enabled
458 Hoistway Access Disabled
459 Hoistway Access Enabled
460 Car Panel Inspection Disabled
461 Car Panel Inspection Enabled
462 Machine Room Inspection Disabled
463 Machine Room Inspection Enabled
464 Stuck Inspection Input Fault
465 DBD Mode Activated
466 ETA Mode Activated
467 Hall Call Bypass Input ON
6-11
Troubleshooting
468 Hall Call Bypass Input OFF
469 Capture Input ON
470 Capture Input OFF
471 Brake Voltage Not Off Fault
474 Emergency Power Recall (In Service)
475 Emergency Stop Input Activated
476 Emergency Stop Input Deactivated
477 Silent Mode Activated
478 Silent Mode Deactivated
479 Safety B Fault Activated
480 Safety B Fault Deactivated
481 Jail Master Mode
482 Jail Secure Mode
495 DBD PHE Antinuisance
496 DBD Empty Car Antinuisance
498 Load Weigher Zero Calibration: Manual
501 Load Weigher Zero Calibration: Complete
508 ESTOP due to disabled direction of travel
6-12 Manual # 42-02-2223

iControl AC iControl Messages
iControl Messages
Table 6.3 iControl Messages
iControl Messages
Alternate Floor Smoke Sensor Recall, ALTERNATE FLOOR SMOKE
Description: Recall to main fire floor due to active smoke input(s) from floors other than main recall floor.
Car Reaction: Car proceeds to user-defined main fire recall floor. Once at recall floor, door operation is
according to user-defined door operation under fire recall operation.
Troubleshooting:
1. If in error, inspect the sensor input and connections.
2. Related Inputs:
Smoke and fire sensors as indicated in job prints.
Alternate Speed Profile 1 Activated, Alternate Speed Profile 1, ALT SPEED PROFILE 1 6
Description: Alternate Speed Profile enabled via keyed or switched input. When so configured, Alternate
Speed Profiles 1 and 2 use Alternate 1 and Alternate 2 performance patterns respectively. (Pattern Configu-
ration/Alternate n.)
Car Reaction: Car uses assigned pattern (Alternate 1 or 2).
Alternate Speed Profile 1 Deactivated
Alternate Speed Profile 2 Activated. Alternate Speed Profile 2, ALT SPEED PROFILE 2. See Alternate
Speed Profile 1 Activated.
Alternate Speed Profile 2 Deactivated
Ascending Car Overspeed Fault, ASCND CAR OVR SPD FLT
Description: Fault tripped if the elevator is traveling up, the Governor contact opens, and the Rope Gripper
option is selected on the Safety Configuration screen. You will also see a Governor Open fault.
Car Reaction: Emergency stop: Motor and brake contactors immediately dropped. Rope brake drops if
installed. If no RG (Rope Gripper) or EB (Emergency Brake) board in controller, fault will not appear.
Troubleshooting:
1. Check the iView event log for related events.
2. Identify and correct any operational problems. Check for proper governor operation.
3. Resetting the Governor switch will automatically clear this fault.
Attendant Service, Attendant Svc
Description: Elevator in Attendant Service. Generally initiated via input (switch or button) at car panel.
Car Reaction: Car operates under attendant mode.
Troubleshooting:
1. Related input: Attendant service as indicated on the job prints.
Automatic Stop
Description: Automatic Stop feature has been enabled.
Car Reaction: The car will stop at a user-defined floor whenever it passes that floor in a user-defined direc-
tion. Doors will open and remain open for a user-defined time.
Troubleshooting:
1. Check parameters on the Configuration > Car Operation > Auto Stop tab for proper configuration.
Backup Power Direction Reversal
Description: Backup power reverse direction input activated (TAPS Traction Auxiliary Power Supply).
Car Reaction: Direction of travel reversed unless car is on Earthquake operation and CW1/CW2 inputs (Coun-
terweight movement sensor) are active and reversal would move the car towards counter weight.
Backup Power Recall OFF
Description: The Backup power recall input has been deactivated.
Backup Power Recall ON, BACKUP POWER RECALL
Description: Backup power recall input activated (signal from the TAPS Traction Auxiliary Power Supply).
Car Reaction: If not currently at a floor, car will move to a floor and cycle doors. If no load weigher used, car
will move to closest floor. If load weigher used, direction dependent on car load and Counterweight percent-
age. If load weight greater than Counterweight percentage, car moves down; if not, up.
6-13
Troubleshooting

iControl Messages
Backup Power Unit Failure Activated, Backup power unit failure, BACKUP POWER FAILURE
Description: Backup power unit failure input is low.
Car Reaction: None. The event is displayed and logged.
Troubleshooting:
1. Check UPS unit for faults.
2. Check connection to the Backup power unit failure input.
3. It may be necessary to replace batteries.
Backup Power Unit Failure Deactivated
Description: Backup power unit failure input has changed back to its normally high state.
Balanced Mode
Description: Passenger operation. Up and Down traffic treated equally. Assigned by group controller.
Battery Voltage Low-IMP, BATTERY VLTG LOW-IMP
Description: IMP board battery B1 below 2.22 VDC and must be replaced. Otherwise BBRAM will be unable to
retain the data stored during a power loss or shut down.
Blocking New Remote Connections, BLOCKING REMOTE UIS
Description: When car switches from Local to Local Dispatcher, parameters and connections to other cars
must stabilize. During this time new Local Dispatcher will reject new remote connections for 30 seconds.
Car Reaction: iView will remain connected if it was already connected. Any new iMonitor, iReport, Liftnet,
BMS, etc. connections will be denied for 30 seconds while the car is syncing up and stabilizing data.
Troubleshooting:
1. If this message persists for more than 30 seconds or if it seems to come and go for extended periods of
time, the car may be confused as if it should be the Local Dispatcher. Check the Alternate Dispatcher set-
tings (System Configuration > Building tab), and Car ID (Controller > General > General tab) parame-
ters. This has been an issue when upgrading a car designated as Alternate Dispatcher with a Car ID not
= 1. A reboot was necessary to fix it, but is also necessary after an upgrade anyway.
Brake Contactor Driver Proofing Fault, BRAKE CNT DRV PRF FLT
Description: Fault signal for brake contactor driver proofing.
Car Reaction: None
Troubleshooting:
1. Verify brake contactor driver proofing circuits.
Brake Contactor Proofing Fault, BRAKE CONT PRF FAULT
Description: Fault signal for brake contactor proofing.
Car Reaction: None
Troubleshooting:
1. Verify brake contactor proofing circuits.
Brake Drop Fault, BRAKE DROP FAULT
Description: Brake contact input (SP2D or Brake Switch) not in the state required by Brake is picked when
SP2D or Brake Switch terminal is high (low) parameter, indicating brake was not fully dropped for more than
one second after the car had stopped. This fault may be bypassed on the Controller > Diagnostics > Fault
Bypass tab by setting Brake Switch.
Car Reaction: Car removed from service.
Troubleshooting:
1. On the Controller > Configuration > Brake > Control tab, check Brake is picked when SP2D or Brake
Switch terminal is high (low) to determine proper state of terminal SP2D or Brake Switch when the
brake is dropped.
2. Verify operation of brake and brake switch (open or closed, see step 1) when brake is fully dropped.
3. With brake dropped, verify state of input SP2D or Brake Switch (low or high, see step 1). Please refer to
Installing Brake Monitoring on page 3-5.
4. Use the iBox Fault Reset button to reset the fault.
6-14 Manual # 42-02-2223


iControl Messages
Brake Enable Fault
Description: When the brake module is enabled, a feedback signal is generated for the iBox. If the feedback
signal is not detected, this fault is generated.
Car Reaction: Emergency stop: Motor and brake contactors immediately dropped.
Troubleshooting:
1. Check the Brake Voltage Feedback test point on the iView Oscilloscope screen.
2. Check the iField Brake Module connections.
3. Check the brake and brake connections.
4. If brake feedback voltage is actually present, the iBox Safety board may be defective.
Brake Module Over Temperature Fault, BRAKE OVER TEMP FAULT
Description: Temperature sensor in the brake module detected an overheat condition. 6
Car Reaction: If running, car will continue to answer current call. After car is stopped at a floor, it will not be
allowed to run until the overheat condition clears.
Troubleshooting:
1. Check machine room temperature. (Should not exceed 104 degrees F or 40C.)
2. Verify that air enters through the bottom of the power box and is only expelled via the fan at the top of
the power box.
3. Check running temperature inside the power box (should not exceed 105 degrees F).
4. Check for insufficient air circulation through the power box.
5. Check for improperly picking brake.
6. Check for faulty brake module.
7. Check for faulty connection between brake module and iBox.
Brake Output Circuit Failure, BRAKE OUTPUT FAILURE
Description: The flywheel brake IGBT has failed or the fuse has opened.
Car Reaction: Normal stop.
Troubleshooting:
1. Verify proper operation of brake module while running on machine room inspection:
Does brake pick voltage match setting on the Configuration > Brake tab?
Does brake hold voltage match setting on the Configuration > Brake tab?
2. Verify proper operation of brake module while performing Brake Calibration:
Does voltage max out and then slowly ramp down to about 10% of maximum supply voltage?
Does current max out and then slowly ramp down to about 10% of maximum supply current?
If brake module is constantly outputting maximum voltage and current based on testing in steps 1 and 2,
main IGBT on module is most likely damaged. The module must be replaced.
CAUTION: An open or damaged RB resistor can cause IGBT failure. Remove the resistor center tap. Measure
value of entire resistor. Do this before replacing brake module.
Brake Pick Fault, BRAKE PICK FAULT
Description: Brake contact input (SP2D on Brake Switch) not in the state required by Brake is picked when
SP2D or Brake Switch terminal is high (low) parameter, indicating that brake was not fully picked during one
entire run or was late going low (or high) indicating a slow picking brake during three consecutive runs. This
fault may be bypassed on the Controller > Diagnostics > Fault Bypass tab.
Car Reaction: Car completes nearest run and is removed from service.
Troubleshooting:
1. See Controller > Configuration > Brake > Control tab, check Brake is picked when SP2D or Brake Switch
terminal is high (low) to determine the proper state of terminal SP2D or Brake Switch when the brake is
picked.
2. Verify operation of brake and brake pick switch (open or closed, see step 1) when brake is fully picked.
3. With brake picked, verify state of input SP2D or Brake Switch (low or high, see step 1). Please refer to
Installing Brake Monitoring on page 3-5.
4. Use the iBox Fault Reset button to reset the fault.
Brake Pick Fault Off (See: Brake Pick Fault)
6-15
Troubleshooting

iControl Messages
Brake Voltage Not Off Fault, BRAKE V NOT OFF FAULT
Description: After the brake contactor picked and before the brake was enabled, brake output voltage
exceeded 70% of picking voltage. The likely cause is a shorted IGBT in the brake module.
Car Reaction: Emergency stop. Fault will self clear and car will attempt to run again.
Troubleshooting: Check resistance between TP5 (+ lead) and FMSO (- lead) on brake module. Less than 500
ohms indicates brake IGBT is shorted.
Brake Voltage Not On Fault, BRAKE V NOT ON FAULT
Description: After brake contactors are picked and controller did not receive more than 30% of the picking
voltage after 1 second, this fault is generated. May be bypassed on the iView Fault Bypass screen.
Car Reaction: Emergency stop: Motor contactor and brake contactor immediately dropped. Fault will self
clear and car will attempt to run again.
Troubleshooting:
1. Verify Brake AC input voltage at FB1 and FB2.
2. Verify FB1 and FB2 fuses are good.
3. Verify J2 connector on right side of iBox is seated properly.
4. Verify brake output voltage with multimeter on terminals B1 and B2.
5. Recalibrate brake module if applicable.
Bus 2 Fuse Open, BUS 2 FUSE OPEN
Description: The bus 2 fuse is open.
Car Reaction: Emergency stop. Cancel demand and open doors. No further movement is allowed.
Troubleshooting: Check bus 2 fuse located at bottom of iBox.
Bus 2D Fuse Open, BUS 2D FUSE OPEN
Description: The bus 2D fuse is open.
Troubleshooting: Check bus 2D fuse located at bottom of iBox.
Bus 2MC Fuse Open, BUS 2MC FUSE OPEN
Description: The bus 2MC fuse is open.
Troubleshooting: Check bus 2MC fuse located at bottom of iBox.
Bus 2PI Fuse Open, BUS 2PI FUSE OPEN
Description: The bus 2PI fuse is open.
Car Reaction: None. The PI signals will not be active.
Troubleshooting: Check bus 2PI fuse located at bottom of iBox.
Bus 3 Fuse Open, BUS 3 FUSE OPEN
Description: The bus 3 fuse is open.
Troubleshooting: Check bus 3 fuse located at bottom of iBox.
Bus 3HA Fuse Open, BUS 3HA FUSE OPEN
Description: The bus 3HA fuse is open.
Car Reaction: None. No further movement is allowed when on Access operation.
Troubleshooting: Check bus 3HA fuse located at bottom of iBox.
Capture Input OFF (see Capture Input ON)
Capture Input ON
Description: Discrete input used to capture the car. This input will activate Capture mode, similar to the iBox
Capture switch (see also: Capture Mode).
Car Reaction: Car takes itself out of hall call service. Hall calls are canceled if no other car is available for hall
call service. The car is also not eligible for parking.
Troubleshooting: Check the related discrete inputs.
6-16 Manual # 42-02-2223


iControl Messages
Capture Mode, Capture
Description: Capture mode switch on the iBox has been placed in ON position.
Car Reaction: Car enters capture mode, removing itself from group operation (hall calls assigned to it will be
reassigned to another elevator if possible). The car answers registered car calls but does not respond to hall
call demand. Intended to allow maintenance personnel access to the car.
Car delayed with doors closed, CAR DEL DOORS CLOSED
Description: Indicates that a car, with doors fully closed, has been delayed in reaching an assigned destina-
tion.
Car Reaction: Assigned hall calls will be reassigned to other available cars.
Troubleshooting:
1. Determine what is inhibiting the car from reaching its destination.
6
2. Check the event log for any faults that may have prevented the car from moving.
Car delayed with doors closing, CAR DEL DOORS CLOSING
Description: A car, with doors closing, has been delayed in reaching an assigned destination.
Troubleshooting:
Car delayed with doors open, CAR DEL DOORS OPEN
Description: A car with doors fully open, has been delayed in reaching an assigned destination.
Troubleshooting:
1. Determine what is keeping the doors open or inhibiting them from closing.
2. Check the event log for any faults that may have prevented the doors from closing.
Car delayed with doors opening, CAR DEL DOORS OPENING
Description: A car, with doors opening, has been delayed in reaching an assigned destination.
Troubleshooting:
1. Determine what is inhibiting the doors from opening.
2. Check the event log for any faults that may have prevented the doors from opening.
Car delayed with doors stalled, CAR DEL DOORS STALLED
Description: A car, with doors stalled, has been delayed in reaching an assigned destination.
Troubleshooting:
1. Determine what is inhibiting the doors from closing.
2. Check the event log for any faults that may have prevented the doors from closing.
Car delayed with unknown door position, CAR DEL DOORS UNKNOWN
Description: A car, with unknown door position, has been delayed in reaching an assigned destination.
Troubleshooting:
1. Determine what is causing the doors to be reported in an invalid condition.
Car Dispatch Load. Not currently used.
Car Door Bypass, CAR DOOR BYPASS
Description: Car Door Bypass switch on iBox is in Bypass position. (View-only on iView Safety screen,
enabled/disabled by MCE according to safety jurisdiction.)
Car Reaction: Car is placed in Inspection mode. To move the car, you must place it in either cartop or car
panel inspection mode. No other modes of operation are allowed.
6-17
Troubleshooting

iControl Messages
Car Heavy Load Activated - Hall Calls Bypassed, CAR HEAVY LOAD
Description: Load in the car has exceeded the Heavy Load Threshold setting.
Car Reaction: Hall calls are bypassed until the heavy load condition is cleared. Hall calls assigned to this car
are reassigned to other cars if possible.
Troubleshooting: (If displayed in error)
1. Verify programmed Heavy Load Threshold; adjust if needed (Load Weigher Configuration screen).
2. Determine if load in car exceeds Heavy Load Threshold. Calibrate load weigher if needed.
3. For discrete input load weighers, check Heavy Load Input shown on job prints.
Car Heavy Load - Deactivated
Car out of service with doors closed, CAR OS DOORS CLOSED
Description: Delayed car with closed doors has remained so for excessive period of time (determined by
user-programmed timer, Car Operation Screen/Passenger tab.
Car Reaction: Car removes itself from car and hall call service (car calls are canceled and hall calls are can-
celed or reassigned).
Troubleshooting:
Car out of service with doors closing, CAR OS DOORS CLOSING
Description: Delayed car with closing doors has remained so for excessive period of time (determined by a
Troubleshooting:
Car out of service with unknown door position, CAR OS DOORS UNKNOWN
Description: Delayed car with invalid doors has remained so for excessive period of time (determined by a
Troubleshooting:
Car out of service with doors open, CAR OS DOORS OPEN
Description: Delayed car with open doors has remained so for excessive period of time (determined by a
Troubleshooting:
Car out of service with doors opening, CAR OS DOORS OPENING
Description: Delayed car with opening doors has remained so for excessive period of time (determined by a
Troubleshooting:
6-18 Manual # 42-02-2223


iControl Messages
Car out of service with doors stalled, CAR OS DOORS STALLED
Description: Delayed car with stalled doors for excessive period of time (determined by user-programmed
timer, Car Operation Screen/Passenger tab.
Car Reaction: Car removes itself from car/hall call service (car calls canceled, hall calls canceled/reassigned).
Troubleshooting:
Car Over Load Activated, CAR OVERLOAD
Description: Load in the car has exceeded the Overload Threshold setting.
Car Reaction: The car is held at the floor with doors open. Over load indicators, if present, will be activated.
Troubleshooting:
6
1. If in error, verify/adjust Over Load Threshold.
2. Determine if load in car exceeds Over Load Threshold. Calibrate load weigher if necessary.
3. For discrete input load weighers, check the Over Load input shown on the job prints.
Car Over Load Deactivated
Car Panel Inspection Disabled, CP INSP. DISABLED
Description: Car Panel inspection operation has been disabled.
Car Reaction: Car cannot be run on car panel inspection operation.
Troubleshooting:
1. Check for any car status that might prevent car panel inspection operation, e.g. earthquake.
2. Check for the Stuck Inspection Input Fault.
3. Check all inspection buttons (Enable, Up, Down) and verify that none are stuck in the ON position.
Car Panel Inspection Enabled
Description: Car Panel inspection operation which was previously disabled is now enabled.
Car Panel Inspection Inputs OK
Description: One or more previously stuck cartop inspection inputs (Enable, Up, Down) have been deacti-
vated (see Stuck Car Panel Inspection Input message).
Car Panel Inspection Operation, Car Panel Inspection, Car Panel Insp.
Description: Car placed in inspection mode using switch on car operation panel.
Car Reaction: If running, car makes emergency stop removed from passenger service. Car uses inspection
pattern settings and can only be moved using car panel inspection switches.
Troubleshooting:
1. Check the car panel inspection switch and related inputs.
2. The Car Panel Inspection input is Normally High.
Car shut down due to emergency power operation with no supervisor (Activated)
Description: iControl detected an emergency power condition and has not established communication with
emergency power supervisor (typically a group controller).
Car Reaction: Car not allowed to move to prevent overloading emergency generator. If car moving when
event occurs, car makes emergency stop. motor and brake contactors immediately dropped. Car is also shut
down (calls and all other demands are canceled).
Troubleshooting:
1. If condition exists and system is NOT on emergency power, see job prints to verify wiring to controller
Emergency Power status input.
2. Verify correct input state (high/low) on iView/Car Operation/Emergency Power/EPI Input setting.
3. Check group to car communication.
Car shut down due to emergency power operation with no supervisor (Deactivated)
Description: Emergency power with no communication to dispatcher resolved. Communication established or
emergency power ended.
Car Reaction: Emergency power on: Movement determined by group controller. Recall, emergency power
operation user-determined (iView/Car Operation/Emergency Power, iCue Emergency Power Configuration).
6-19
Troubleshooting

iControl Messages
Car Stop Switch Open, CAR STOP SWITCH OPEN
Description: Car panel stop switch input has dropped (in-car stop switch has been activated). This switch
may be bypassed during special modes of operation such as fire, CFSS, or EMS.
Car Reaction: Emergency stop if running. Car is not allowed to run again until car panel stop switch is moved
to RUN position.
Troubleshooting:
1. Check the in-car stop switch and switch connections.
2. Check current mode of operation and verify that the stop switch operation is as expected.
Cartop Automatic Unintended Motion Fault, CARTOP AUTO UIM FLT
Description: Unintended motion fault detected while car was running under Passenger operation.
Car Reaction: Emergency Stop. Cancel all calls. This fault will self reset.
Troubleshooting:
1. Check iView Event Log for preceding activity.
2. Correct initiating problem.
Cartop Communication Established
Description: Communication between iControl (iBox) and iLink ICE-CTP board established. This communica-
tion is through twisted-pair, shielded cabling in the traveler cable.
Cartop Communication Fault, CARTOP COMM FAULT
Description: Communication between iControl and iLink failed. This communication is through twisted-pair,
shielded cabling in the traveler cable.
Car Reaction: Emergency Stop. Cancel all calls.
Troubleshooting:
1. Check connections at iBox and iLink ends. Refer to -CW job prints.
2. If connections are clean and tight, use an oscilloscope to check TX and RX signals. Or, if practical, con-
nect iBox end of connection to another iControl and see if that controller can communicate with iLink.
3. If required, replace iLink Cartop board or iBox as appropriate.
Cartop Emergency Stop
Description: Cartop processor detected a fault and initiated emergency stop. Cartop Safety relay has opened
in response to unsafe condition.
Car Reaction: Emergency stop: Motor contactor and brake contactor immediately dropped. Cancel all calls.
Troubleshooting:
1. Check the iView Event Log for related preceding events.
2. Troubleshoot and correct any initiating problem.
3. Restore safety string and test.
Cartop Exit Open, CARTOP EXIT OPEN
Description: Cartop Exit Switch input dropped. Input normally on when configuration states switch is
installed. Input may be bypassed by: 1) car on car top or car panel inspection while on earthquake, and 2)
safety bypass jumper installed.
Car Reaction: Emergency stop if running. The car is not allowed to run until the problem is corrected.
Troubleshooting:
1. Check the switch status and configuration (Safety screen).
2. Check elements related to bypassing.
Cartop Exit Open Off (see: Cartop Exit Open)
Cartop Exit no Counterweight Configuration Error, CTEX NO CWI CFG ERROR
Description: Car Top Exit, on Safety tab, has been checked but Counter weight displacement detection, on
the Car Operation - Earthquake tab, has not been checked. A car equipped with both Earthquake Operation
and Cartop Exit must have a counterweight derailment device.
Car Reaction: The car is not allowed to run until the problem is corrected.
Troubleshooting:
1. Verify status of Car Top Exit parameter (Safety tab).
2. Verify status of Counter weight displacement detection parameter (Car Operation - Earthquake tab).
6-20 Manual # 42-02-2223


iControl Messages
Cartop Firmware Update Mode, CARTOP FW UPDATE MODE
Description: Cartop processor waiting for or processing firmware update (iView > File > Firmware update).
Car Reaction: The car is not allowed to run until the procedure is completed.
Cartop Inspection Disabled, CT INSP. DISABLED
Description: Cartop inspection operation has been disabled.
Car Reaction: The car cannot be run on cartop inspection operation.
Troubleshooting:
1. Check for any car status that might prevent cartop inspection operation, e.g. earthquake.
Cartop Inspection Enabled
6
Description: Cartop inspection operation which was previously disabled is now enabled.
Cartop Inspection Inputs OK
Description: One or more previously stuck cartop inspection inputs (Enable, Up, Down) now OK.
Cartop Inspection Operation, Cartop Inspection, Cartop Insp
Description: The car has been placed in Inspection mode using the cartop inspection switch.
Car Reaction: The car enters inspection mode and uses the Inspection pattern settings.
Cartop Inspection Unintended Motion Fault, CARTOP INSP UIM FLT
Description: Unintended motion fault detected while car was on Cartop Inspection.
Car Reaction: Car motion stopped after 24 inches of travel. The safety circuit is opened.
Troubleshooting:
1. Check iView Event Log for related events.
2. Troubleshoot and correct any initiating problems.
3. Press iBox Fault Reset.Test.
Cartop Power Loss
Description: Loss of power detected by iLink processor.
Car Reaction: Emergency stop: Motor contactor and brake contactor immediately dropped.
Troubleshooting:
1. Check 1, 2, and 3 bus terminal voltages from iControl, through traveler, to car terminal strip.
2. Refer to job print drawing CT, check strip to iLink connections.
3. Check iLink fuses F1 and FCT1.
CFSS Mode 1 at Floor Activated, CFSS 1 at Floor. See CFSS Mode 1 In-car Activated.
CFSS Mode 1 In-car Activated, CFSS 1 In-car.
Description: Commandeer For Special Services is a special operating mode. When activated, car recalls to
that floor. Two CFSS modes may be configured on Car Operations screen/CFSS tab (Mode 1, Mode 2). Typi-
cally, one of the two used for Hospital Operation, second as user determines. Once recall activated, car dis-
poses of existing calls per CFSS tab, then moves to recall floor. At recall floor, In-Car CFSS activated by in-car
switch or as configured on CFSS tab (In-Car).
Car Reaction: As configured on the Car Operations screen/CFSS tab.
CFSS Mode 1 Recall Activated, CFSS 1 Recall. See CFSS Mode 1 In-car Activated.
CFSS Mode 2 at Floor Activated, CFSS 2 at Floor. See CFSS Mode 1 In-car Activated.
CFSS Mode 2 In-car Activated, CFSS 2 In-car. See CFSS Mode 1 In-car Activated.
CFSS Mode 2 Recall Activated, CFSS 2 Recall. See CFSS Mode 1 In-car Activated.
Construction Car Panel Inspection Operation, Cnstr Car Panel Insp, Cnstr CP Insp
Description: The car is on Construction mode and car panel inspection.
Car Reaction: Car is out of service and cannot be moved using the car panel inspection key switches.
Troubleshooting: When Construction mode active, car panel operation switches are ignored. Car can only be
moved using Machine Room or Cartop Inspection. Place car on Machine Room or Cartop Inspection and use
switches to move car.
6-21
Troubleshooting

iControl Messages
Construction Cartop Inspection Operation, Cnstr Cartop Insp, Cnstr CT Insp
Description: Car on Construction mode/Cartop Inspection. When iBox in construction mode, it is always on
inspection. It will only operate in Cartop or Machine Room inspection. Cartop has precedence. If neither
modes is selected, controller enters non-specific inspection mode, will not run for any inspection input.
Car Reaction: The car can be moved using the cartop inspection key switches.
Troubleshooting:
1. If it appears that the car is on Cartop Inspection operation in error, verify wiring to the iBox INCT input.
If no voltage exists on this input, the car will operate under Cartop Inspection operation.
Construction Hoistway Access Inspection Operation, Cnstr HA Inspection, Cnstr HA Insp
Description: Car is on construction mode and hoistway access.
Car Reaction: Car is out of service and cannot be moved using the hoistway access Up or Down switches.
Troubleshooting: When on Construction mode, hoistway access switches ignored. Car can only move on
Machine Room, Cartop Inspection. Place car on inspection and use switches to move.
Construction Inspection Operation, Cnstr Inspection
Description: Car in Inspection mode and Construction setting selected on Safety Configuration screen.
Car Reaction: Car will operate using Inspection pattern on Cartop or machine room inspection only.
Construction Machine Room Inspection Operation, Cnstr Mach Room Insp, Cnstr MR Insp
Description: Car is on inspection mode using the iBox inspection switch while on construction mode.
Car Reaction: Car begins operating in Inspection mode. If running, car will make an emergency stop and is
taken out of normal service. In this mode, car can be moved using iBox Inspection Up and Down switches.
Troubleshooting:
1. Related inputs: MachineRoomInspection: Normally high
Controller Main Computer Startup
Description: iBox main processor booting up.
DBD Mode Activated
Description: Destination Based Dispatching active.
DBD PHE Antinuisance
Description: DBD Photo Eye Antinuisance option set and although a call had been assigned to car per source
floor entry, photo eye has registered no passenger entry and calls assigned to the car have been cancelled.
Car Reaction: Car is available for new assignment.
Troubleshooting: If in error, check photo eye. If functionality not desired, turn OFF DBD Antinuisance.
Demand Down Peak Mode, DEMAND DOWN PEAK MODE
Description: Car is running in Demand Down Peak mode, favoring traffic in down direction as configured on
group control screens.
Demand Up Peak Mode, DEMAND UP PEAK MODE
Description: Car is running in Demand Up Peak mode, favoring traffic in up direction as configured on group
control screens.
Dispatcher = Car n, DISPATCHER = CARn (n = 1 to 15)
Description: Communication with main iCue dispatcher lost or not established. Car is communicating with
Car 'n' (n = 1 to 15) which is acting as backup dispatcher.
Troubleshooting: Check the group to car communication related connections and parameters.
Door Lock Clipped Greater than 200fpm, DOOR LK CLIPPED G200
Description: Door lock signal (DLAT, DLMS, DLAB, or GS) low for over 300mS while car moving over 200 fpm.
Troubleshooting:
1. Use Event Log to determine where fault occurred. Examine locks in that area of hoistway first.
2. Usual cause: misadjusted door, pickup rollers do not have adequate running clearance from door clutch.
3. Because fault must persist for over 300mS, slight bumping of door lock will not set it. If door clutch/
pickup roller clearance adequate, ensure contacts clean; door lock drops without friction or binding.
6-22 Manual # 42-02-2223


iControl Messages
Door Lock Clipped Less than 200fpm, DOOR LK CLIPPED L200
Description: Door lock signal (DLAT, DLMS, DLAB, or GS) went low while car was moving at under 200 fpm.
Car Reaction: ASAP stop.
Troubleshooting:
1. If caused by misadjusted or damaged door, because it only occurs at under 200 fpm, usually seen when
car leaves floor where problem door is located.
DOOR LOCK OPENED
Description: Safety processor detected door lock open. A fault is generated if car is moving or attempts to
move with door lock open.
Down Direction Limit Open, DOWN DIR LIMIT OPEN
Description: Down normal terminal direction limit switch is open.
6
Car Reaction: Initiate an immediate stop if moving. Further down direction movement is prevented.
Troubleshooting:
1. Verify switch is operating properly.
2. Verify correct state of iBox DNTD input.
3. Verify DNTD activating/deactivating at correct location (normally 2 below bottom terminal landing).
Down Emergency Terminal Switch Position Fault, DN ETS POSITION FAULT
Description: Reported position upon encountering Terminal Switch differed from learned position by more
than set position margin. This fault may be bypassed on the Diagnostics > Fault Bypass tab.
Car Reaction: Emergency Stop: Motor and brake contactors immediately drop. Calls cancelled. After car is
stopped, it will run at Correction speed to next available floor and cycle doors. Door Open button remains
active. If fault generated when car is moving, it will latch and Fault Reset button must be pushed to clear. If
generated when car not moving, fault will self clear when condition clears.
Troubleshooting:
1. Physically check the integrity of the switch and wiring. Check the iBox input for the switch.
2. On Diagnostics > Terminal Switches Status tab, compare last pass position against learned position for
switch. Verify Position Margin within reasonable range. Relearn NTS and ETS switches. Please refer to
Learning Normal & Emergency Terminal Limit Switches on page 4-8.
Down Emergency Terminal Switch Shutdown, DOWN ETS SHUTDOWN
Description: Down Emergency Terminal switch opened at speed/position exceeding threshold. Fault stays
latched. Press Fault Reset to clear. If generated when car stopped, fault self clears when condition ends.
Troubleshooting:
1. Logged in conjunction with either speed or position fault at DETS. Check Event Log and follow trouble-
shooting for Down Emergency Terminal Switch Position or Safety A (or B) DETS Level 2 Speed Fault.
2. Press iBox Fault Reset to reset the fault.
Down Normal Terminal n Level 1 Speed Fault, DN NTSn L1 SPEED FLT (n = 1 to 5)
Description: Level 1 Overspeed fault at Down Normal Terminal switch n (1 to 5). When switch opened, car
traveling faster than defined by level 1 overspeed settings (sum of learned speed plus Overspeed 1 Margin
percentage on Configuration > Terminal Switches tab) but not fast enough to trigger Level 2 overspeed fault.
This fault may be bypassed on the Diagnostics > Fault Bypass tab.
Car Reaction: Controlled stop using Emergency Slowdown pattern parameters.
Troubleshooting:
1. On Diagnostics > Terminal Switches Status tab, compare last pass and Learned speeds for switch. If
appropriate, increase Overspeed 1 Margin on Configuration > Terminal Switches tab.
2. May be caused by change in Pattern parameters. Re-learn terminal switches after pattern changes.
3. Short runs can come in hotter than multi-floor runs. (Switches are learned making full hatch runs.) If
short runs cause this, increase Overspeed 1 Margin or lower Standard profile - High Roll Jerk parameter.
4. If caused by poor pattern following due to heavy load or poor speed loop performance, adjust speed loop
to follow pattern as well as possible and/or alter pattern for gentler deceleration and approach to floor
(re-learn switches). Please refer to Terminal Switch Overspeed and Position Faults on page 4-53.
6-23
Troubleshooting

iControl Messages
Down Normal Terminal n Level 2 Speed Fault, DN NTSn L2 SPEED FLT (n = 1 to 5)
Description: Level 2 Overspeed fault at Down Normal Terminal switch n (1 to 5). When switch opened, car
traveling faster than defined by Level 2 overspeed settings (105% of sum of learned speed plus Overspeed 1
Margin percentage setting on Configuration > Terminal Switches tab). Fault may be bypassed on Diagnostics
> Fault Bypass tab.
Troubleshooting:
1. On Diagnostics > Terminal Switches Status tab, compare Last pass and Learn speeds for switch. If
2. If caused by pattern parameter change, re-learn terminal switches.
3. Short runs can come in hotter than multi-floor runs. (Switches learned making full hatch runs.) If short
runs cause this, increase Overspeed 1 Margin or lower Standard profile - High Roll Jerk parameter.
4. If caused by poor pattern following due to heavy load or poor speed loop performance, adjust speed loop
to follow better and/or alter pattern parameters for gentler deceleration and approach. Re-learn
switches. Please refer to Terminal Switch Overspeed and Position Faults on page 4-53.
Down Normal Terminal n Position Fault, DN NTSn POSITION FLT (n = 1 to 5)
Description: When switch opened or closed, car reported position different from learned position by amount
exceeding margin on Configuration > Terminal Switches tab. May mean switch opened early, late or not at all
on approach. May mean switch closed early, late, or not at all on departure. Switch can go open while stand-
ing at a floor where learned position is closed, or go closed at a floor where learned position is open. May
bypass fault on the Diagnostics > Fault Bypass tab.
Car Reaction: If traveling down, car executes emergency slowdown, then continues at low speed until it
encounters a floor. Car stops at floor, opens doors, and performs a floor sync. If fault persists, car goes out of
service. If traveling up, car continues normally to first stop, opens doors and performs floor sync. If fault
persists, car goes out of service. If stopped at floor, car opens doors, does a floor sync, and, if fault persists,
takes itself out of service.
Troubleshooting:
1. On Diagnostics > Terminal Switches Status tab, compare Last pass position to Learned position.
2. If mechanical (switch movement, magnet movement), will tend to repeat at same position every time.
3. Spot a stuck switch by running car on inspection and observing input LEDs on iBox.
4. Perform a Terminal Sync operation (Terminal button on the Configuration > Pattern > Common tab).
Drive At-Speed Fault, DRIVE AT-SPEED FAULT
Description: Detected by drive, motor speed outside threshold limits defined by drive parameter.
Troubleshooting:
1. Should not occur with AC Drive. Fault wired physically OFF. If fault occurs, it is a hardware problem.
Drive Communication Fault, DRIVE COMM FAULT
Description: Generated if serial drive interface selected (Controller > Configuration > Drive tab) and serial
port cannot be opened or there is a communication problem with drive.
Drive Communication Warning, DRIVE COMM WARNING
Description: Not currently used.
Drive Enable Feedback Fault, DRIVE ENABLE FDBK FLT
Description: iControl failed to send Drive Enable signal or drive failed to respond.
Car Reaction: Emergency stop: Motor and brake contactors immediately dropped. Followed by normal run.
Fault will self clear and car is able to run again.
Troubleshooting:
1. May indicate problem with Gate Switch or door lock opening during initial start. Verify inputs (GS, DLAT,
DLAB, DLMS) remain high.
2. Verify Safety Processors A and B are looping (iBox status LEDs).
3. Verify no faults active on Safety Processors A and B that would prevent motion.
4. Check iBox power supply. Verify drive connections.
6-24 Manual # 42-02-2223


iControl Messages
Drive Fault, DRIVE FAULT
Description: Detected by drive, motor speed outside threshold defined by drive parameter. (AC drive only.)
Troubleshooting:
1. Verify encoder wiring and polarities.
TORQMAX F5 AC Drive
1. Check terminals X2A-29 (Drive Fault) to X2A-26 (Common). Normal operation=high. Fault=low.
2. Verify brake is working correctly.
3. Verify drive gains, Proportional Gain (LF.31) and Integral Gain (LF.32).
4. Check drive parameters, Speed Following Error (LF.57), Speed Difference (LF.58), and Following Error
Timer (LF.59). Refer to TORQMAX manual. 6
Magnetek HPV900 Series 2 AC/PM Drive
1. Check terminals TB1-32 (Drive Fault) to TB1-29 (Common). Normal operation=high. Fault=low.
2. Check F1 > Active Faults and F2 > Fault History. Refer to Troubleshooting in Magnetek Manual.
Drive Inspection Overspeed Fault, DRIVE IOS FAULT
Description: Inspection Overspeed fault.
Car Reaction: Emergency stop.
Troubleshooting:
1. Check Inspection speed. Check safety configuration.
2. Calibrate car speed with a hand-held tachometer.
Drive On Fault, DRIVE ON FAULT (was Drive Ready On Fault)
Description: Drive failed to activate DRO signal when sent command to run (AC drive only).
Car Reaction: Emergency stop: Motor and brake contactors immediately dropped.
Troubleshooting: TORQMAX F5 AC Drive
1. Check drive faults. Refer to Error Messages and Their Causes in TORQMAX manual.
2. Check state of drive inputs via parameter LF.82. See LF.82 input state table in drive manual.
3. Check PM contactor main contacts. Verify cable from drive to PowerBox (46 pin D-sub) properly seated.
4. Verify cable that extends to iBox (AC/DC Drive jack) seated. If cable inside PowerBox is suspect, tempo-
rarily connect directly from drive into iBox.
5. Verify Brake Pick Delay set correctly (0.3 or higher) to allow motor to build up torque.
6. Verify drive parameter LF.70 = 0.3.
7. If DRO and Tach Error Fault, adjust TACH ADJ pot (see Following Error Margin on page 2-45).
8. On Controller > Diagnostics > Diagnostic Outputs > Drive screen verify commands from iBox to drive.
Troubleshooting: Magnetek Drive

1. Check D1 > Logic Outputs to verify control signals:
Relay Coil 1 (TB1-27/28/29: Ready to Run) should go high.
Relay Coil 2 (TB1-30/31/32: Speed Reg R1s) should go high.
2. Check D1 > Logic Inputs to verify control signals:
Logic Input 1 (TB1-6: Drive Enable) should go high.
Logic Input 2 (TB1-7: Run) should go high.
Logic Input 3 (TB1-9: Contact Confirm) should go low.
3. Check D1 > Start Logic to verify signals.
4. Check terminals TB1-27 (Drive Ready) and TB1-30 (Drive On) to TB1-29 (Common). Value should be low
during normal operation and high during a fault.
5. Verify Brake Pick Delay is set correctly to allow motor to build up torque. Temporarily increase Brake Pick
Delay to 1.0 and Speed Pick Delay 1 to 1.5 to determine if fault goes away.
6. Verify cable from drive to iPowerBox (46 pin D-sub) is seated.
7. Verify cable that extends to iBox (AC/DC Drive jack) is seated. If cable inside iPowerBox suspect, tempo-
rarily connect directly from Magnetek drive into iBox.
8. Check drive F1 > Active Faults and F2 > Fault History. See Troubleshooting in Magnetek Manual.
6-25
Troubleshooting

iControl Messages
Drive Ready Fault, DRIVE READY FAULT
Description: AC drive ready signal is low. (AC drive only.)
Troubleshooting:
1. Check TORQMAX F5 drive terminal X2A-24 to X2A-26 (Common). X2A-24 should be low during normal
operation and high during fault.
2. Check connection from AC drive to iPower Box and J46 connector on ICE-SAF board.
Drive Start Failure
Description: The drive control logic has not responded to a movement request from the motion control logic
for more than ten seconds.
Car Reaction: The motion control logic will continue to request movement from the drive logic for up to ten
seconds before declaring a Motion Start Failure fault.
Troubleshooting: Verify that no drive or motor faults exist.
Dual Channel QUAD Fault, DUAL CHANNEL QUAD FLT
Description: Safety system did not detect car movement even though iBox processor reported car move-
ment, or Safety system reported car movement while processor did not.
Troubleshooting:
1. Press Fault Reset button.
2. Check wiring for DP1 and DP2 encoder signals from landing system to iBox.
3. Check motor encoder or tachometer (whichever is present).
4. Compare Pattern Command and Speed Feedback on iView oscilloscope to make certain they track one
another.
5. Check reported speed accuracy using a hand-held tachometer.
Earthquake board power supply OFF
Description: Controller has detected a failure of the earthquake board power supply.
Car Reaction: Car behaves as if the counterweight derailment detector has been triggered (car generally
makes an emergency stop, and is removed from service at the next available landing).
Troubleshooting:
1. Check board connections.
2. Replace the EQ board.
Earthquake board power supply ON
Description: The earthquake board (ICE-EQ) power supply is operational.
Car Reaction: Car is no longer prevented from operating due to a loss of earthquake board power supply.
Earthquake Emergency Stop
Description: Earthquake operation activated by seismic or counterweight displacement switches and car has
performed emergency stop as specified by earthquake settings.
Car Reaction: Car will perform an emergency stop. After a pause, car will react as directed by user settings
on Car Operation screen Earthquake tab.
Troubleshooting:
1. Check the wiring for the seismic and counterweight displacement inputs.
2. Check the earthquake user settings on the Car Operation screen Earthquake tab.
Earthquake Operation Activated
Description: The car is on earthquake operation.
Car Reaction: Car behavior is according to user settings on Car Operation screen Earthquake tab. This oper-
ation is latched until EQ reset button is pressed.
Troubleshooting: NA. See also Earthquake Operation (Seismic Switch) and Earthquake Operation (Coun-
terweight).
Earthquake Operation Deactivated
6-26 Manual # 42-02-2223


iControl Messages
Earthquake Operation (Counterweight)
Description: Counterweight Derailment Detector activated, indicating earthquake condition.
Car Reaction: Car will typically make an emergency stop, then move slowly to next available floor away from
counterweight. Fault is latched until EQ reset button (ICE-EQ board) pressed.
Troubleshooting:
1. If in error, check counterweight derailment detector operation and associated wiring to ICE-EQ board.
Earthquake Operation (Seismic Switch)
Description: Seismic Switch activated (input has gone low), indicating earthquake condition.
Car Reaction: Car will react per user configuration. (iView/Car Operation/Earthquake) Car will either make an
emergency stop and move slowly to next available floor or will stop normally at next available floor in direc-
tion of travel. The fault is latched until the EQ reset button (ICE-EQ board) is pressed.
6
Troubleshooting:
1. If in error check seismic switch input and associated wiring to ICE-EQ board. Seismic input normally on.
Earthquake Reduce Speed
Description: An earthquake event (seismic switch) has initiated a car speed reduction (150 fpm or less) as
required by some code jurisdictions.
Car Reaction: Control stop.
Earthquake reset button OK
Description: A previously declared failure of the earthquake reset button has been resolved.
Car Reaction: Previous failure is no longer a reason to keep the car out of service.
Earthquake reset button stuck ON
Description: Controller detected earthquake reset button (on ICE-EQ board) has failed in on state.
Car Reaction: If moving, car will complete run. Once stopped, car is removed from service.
Troubleshooting:
1. Verify if reset button (or related circuitry) on the ICE-EQ board is faulty.
2. Replace ICE-EQ board.
Earthquake Run, EARTHQUAKE RUN
Description: Some code jurisdictions allow car to run normally (at a speed no greater than 150 fpm) under
earthquake conditions. This event indicates car is being allowed to run in this manner.
Car Reaction: Car operates normally at reduced speed.
Troubleshooting:
1. Check the wiring for the seismic and counterweight displacement inputs.
2. Check the earthquake user settings on the Car Operation screen Earthquake tab.
Earthquake Shutdown, EARTHQUAKE SHUTDOWN. See Earthquake Operation Activated.
EEPROM Device Error, EEPROM DEVICE ERROR
Description: Safety Processor A EEPROM fault.
Troubleshooting:
1. Verify Safety Processor A EEPROM - board test. Contact MCE.
Elevator Recall Operation (Switch n), ELEVATOR RECALL SWn (n = 1 to 6)
Description: Elevator Recall Operation has been initiated by the switch identified.
Car Reaction: In most usages, car immediately removes itself from hall call service, answers remaining car
calls, then proceeds to recall floor and cycles doors. (Disposition of car calls, recall floor, and door operation
user-programmable. iView/Car Operation/Elevator Recall.)
Emergency Alarm Acknowledged
Description: Indicates emergency alarm has been acknowledged and reset by Emergency Alarm Reset input.
Car Reaction: The Distress Light and the Distress Buzzer outputs will be extinguished.
Troubleshooting: NA
6-27
Troubleshooting

iControl Messages
Emergency Alarm Activated (Alarm button), Emergency Alarm Activated, EMERG ALARM ACTI-
VATED
Description: Emergency Alarm input activated. Used to sound alarm and/or light indicator.
Car Reaction: Distress Light on until acknowledged by Emergency Alarm Reset input. Distress Buzzer pulsat-
ing or continuous as long as car remains in this condition.
Troubleshooting:
1. Attend to car and verify distress signal.
2. To reset alarm, verify alarm button is restored to normal condition, activate Emergency Alarm Reset.
Emergency Alarm Activated (Car delayed with doors closed)
Description: Indicates emergency alarm activated due to car being delayed with doors closed. This is an
optional emergency alarm monitor specified by user.
Car Reaction: Distress Light will be illuminated until acknowledged by Emergency Alarm Reset input. Distress
Buzzer output active as long as car remains in this condition.
Troubleshooting:
2. To reset alarm, verify car condition is restored to normal and activate the Emergency Alarm Reset.
Emergency Alarm Activated (In-car stop switch)
Description: Indicates emergency alarm activated due to in-car emergency stop switch pulled.
Car Reaction: Distress Light will be illuminated until acknowledged by Emergency Alarm Reset. Distress
Buzzer active as long as switch remains active.
Troubleshooting:
2. To reset, verify car emergency stop switch restored to normal position. Activate Emergency Alarm Reset.
Emergency Alarm Activated (Safety opened)
Description: Emergency alarm activated due to safety circuit open (excluding in-car emergency stop switch).
Optional emergency alarm monitor specified by the user.
Car Reaction: Distress Light on until acknowledged by Emergency Alarm Reset. Distress Buzzer active as
long as car remains in this condition.
Troubleshooting:
1. Attend to the car and verify the distress signal.
2. To reset, verify that car condition is restored to normal and activate the Emergency Alarm Reset input.
Emergency Alarm Deactivated without Acknowledgment
Description: Indicates emergency alarm deactivated because all signals that would activate it are now off
and Require Acknowledgment parameter is not checked.
Car Reaction: The Distress Light and Distress Buzzer outputs are deactivated.
Emergency Brake Leg 1 Short Fault, EMERG BRK LEG 1 SHORT
Description: Emergency brake board (ICE RB or ICE EB) verification failed after stop or as result of fault
reset. Emergency brake circuitry verified by transition between leg 1 and leg 2. One must be active to pre-
vent emergency brake deploying.
Troubleshooting:
1. Verify configured for emergency brake board (ICE-RG or ICE EB) and correct board installation.
Emergency Brake Leg 2 Short Fault, EMERG BRK LEG 2 SHORT. See above.
Emergency Brake OK open, EMERG BRAKE OK OPEN
Description: Emergency Brake OK input dropped (off) when configuration indicates brake installed, input
should be picked (on).
Troubleshooting:
1. Verify Rope Gripper board is properly installed, connected, and powered.
2. If this job has a sheave brake, verify that associated circuitry is per job prints.
6-28 Manual # 42-02-2223


iControl Messages
Emergency Brake OK open Off (See: Emergency Brake OK open)
Emergency Brake Tripped, EMERG BRAKE TRIPPED
Description: Emergency brake output (ICE RG or ICE-EB board) has gone low, setting emergency brake.
Troubleshooting:
1. Check that the output did not go low in error and is properly connected.
2. Check the elevator for underlying causes.
Emergency Brake UIM Reset Button Stuck, EM BK UIM RESET STUCK
Description: Reset button on Rope Gripper (ICE-RG) or Emergency Brake board (ICE-EB) activated for more
than 15 seconds.
Car Reaction: The car is not allowed to move. If in motion, the car is allowed to finish the run.
6
Troubleshooting: Check the reset button on the ICE-RG or ICE-EB board.
Emergency Dispatch On, Emergency Dispatch, EMERGENCY DISPATCH
Description: Car is automatically servicing building in pre-defined pattern. Invoked when a failure of hall call
bus or group communication detected. May also be activated using a key switch input.
Car Reaction: Car automatically moves to every floor in building in predefined pattern and cycles doors.
Troubleshooting:
1. Check group/car communications.
2. Check the hall call bus drivers.
3. Check the Emergency Dispatch input.
Emergency Dispatch Off (see Emergency Dispatch On)
Emergency Medical Service Bypassed
Description: EMS is active but has been bypassed by another mode of operation.
Car Reaction: EMS service is bypassed and the car operates under the new mode of operation.
Troubleshooting:
1. Check the current mode of operation and the EMS user settings.
Emergency Medical Service Deactivated
Description: EMS has been deactivated.
Car Reaction: Car is returned to prevailing mode of operation.
Troubleshooting: NA
Emergency Medical Service In-Car Activated (Switch n), EMS In-car (Switch n) (n = 1 or 2)
Description: EMS In-Car service activated via in-car EMS key-switch. Also referred to as EMS Phase II.
Car Reaction: Car out of hall call service. Car calls enabled again, car can be dispatched with car calls only.
After answering car call, doors open automatically, close with constant pressure on Door Close Button only.
Troubleshooting:
1. Terminate EMS In-Car by taking car to EMS recall floor by registering a car call then deactivating in-car
EMS switch.
2. In-Car operation can also be terminated by removing in-car EMS switch from pre-programmed IO.
3. Related inputs: EMSCarSwitch0: Normally low, EMSCarSwitch1: Normally low
Emergency Medical Service Recall Activated (Switch n), EMS Recall (Switch n) (n = 1 or 2)
Description: EMS recall activated via one of EMS recall key-switches located next to EMS elevator. This is also
referred to as the EMS Phase I operation.
Car Reaction: Momentary activation of EMS recall switch initiates recall to EMS Recall floor. Car removes
itself from car and hall call service. At EMS recall floor, door operation per user-defined door operation under
EMS recall. Car remains on EMS Phase I as long as hall switch activated. Once hall switch deactivated, car
returns to normal operation after user-defined timer elapses if in-car switch not activated within that time.
Troubleshooting:
1. Verify no hall EMS recall switch activated.
2. EMS Recall operation can also be terminated by removing in-car EMS switch from pre-programmed IO.
3. Related inputs: EMSHallSwitch0: Normally low, EMSHallSwitch1: Normally low
6-29
Troubleshooting

iControl Messages
Emergency Power Activated
Description: Commercial power has been lost and power is now supplied by an emergency power generator.
Car Reaction: Car makes emergency stop due to momentary loss of power and remains shut down until com-
manded to lower to pre-determined floor or proceed to next available floor. Once all cars have reached a
floor, one or more cars will be selected to run on emergency power.
Troubleshooting:
1. Related inputs: EPI: Active level field adjustable.
Emergency Power and no communication with group, EMERG PWR NO COMM
Description: iControl has detected an emergency power condition and it has not established communication
with emergency power supervisor (typically a group controller).
Car Reaction: Car is not allowed to move to prevent overloading emergency power generator. If car is mov-
ing when event occurs, car will make an emergency stop. motor contactor and brake contactor are immedi-
ately dropped. The car is also shut down (calls and all other demands are canceled).
Troubleshooting:
1. If the system is NOT operating under emergency power, refer to job prints and verify wiring to controller
Emergency Power status input.
2. Verify correct input state (high/low) on iView/Car Operation/Emergency Power/EPI Input setting.
3. Check group to car communication.
Emergency Power Deactivated. See Emergency Power Activated.
Description: This event is logged when commercial power is restored.
Troubleshooting:
1. Related inputs:
EPI: Active level field adjustable.
Emergency Power Recall, EMERG POWER RECALL. See Emergency Power Activated.
Description: Event logged when elevator commanded to lower to emergency power recall floor.
Car Reaction: Elevator proceeds to user-defined emergency power recall floor. Door operation at recall floor
per user defined door operation under emergency power recall conditions.
Troubleshooting:
1. Related inputs:
EPR: Normally low (high to lower the car)
PTR: Normally low (low to lower the car)
Emergency Power Recall (In Service), EP RECALL-IN SERVICE
Description: Event is logged and related car status messages displayed on OBD and iView if a car that has
been commanded to recall during emergency power remains in service for car calls.
Car Reaction: An attendant operated car (FIRE II, IND, ATA, CFSS In-Car, EMS) goes back into service for car
calls only when it is selected to recall. The car is shut down once it is at a floor with doors open or if the car
fails to move or open its doors within a user defined timer (30 seconds).
Troubleshooting: Check the Emergency Power Version option (System > Configuration > Emergency Power)
and set it to Pre 2008 if this operation is not desired.
Emergency Power Run, EMERG POWER RUN. See Emergency Power Activated.
Description: This elevator is allowed to respond to calls during emergency power operation.
Troubleshooting:
1. Related inputs (only on elevators with emergency power overlay operation)
EPR: Normally low (low to run the car), PTR: Normally low (low to run the car)
Emergency Power Shutdown, EMERG POWER SHUTDOWN. See Emergency Power Activated.
Description: This event is logged when emergency power is initially activated or if communication with the
emergency power supervisor has been lost while on emergency power.
Car Reaction: Emergency stop. Car removed from service.
Troubleshooting:
1. Related inputs:
EPI: Active level field adjustable.
6-30 Manual # 42-02-2223


iControl Messages
Emergency Stop Input Activated, EMERGENCY STOP INPUT
Description: Events logged and related status messages displayed to reflect status of Emergency Stop Input.
Car Reaction: When Emergency Stop Input activated, car makes an emergency stop and cancels all calls.
This input has priority over all modes of operation including Fire Service.
Troubleshooting: Check the status of the Emergency Stop Input.
Emergency Stop Input Deactivated see Emergency Stop Input Activated.
ESTOP due to disabled direction of travel
Description: The car has performed an emergency stop because the current travel direction has been disal-
lowed due to flood operation becoming active, disallowing the destination floor.
Car Reaction: After stopping, the car will correct to a floor above the flood zone. 6
ETA Mode Activated
Description: The Estimated Time of Arrival dispatching engine is now active.
Excessive Brake Feedback Fault, EXCESS BRAKE FDBK FLT
Description: After brake activity, controller checks to see that current is bleeding off properly. (After 1 sec-
ond, voltage should be at or below 85% of voltage applied by last command.) Fault issued if brake voltage
too high when checked.
Troubleshooting:
1. At factory, RB (brake resistor value) set 3 to 5 times brake coil resistance. Reduce RB to allow current to
bleed off more quickly. (Do not reduce RB below 3 times brake coil resistance.) Please refer to Verifying
Brake Current Resistance on page 2-9.
2. On iView Brake screen, Timers tab, reduce Voltage Decay Time (minimum, 0.0 seconds).
3. Check Brake Voltage Feedback test point on iView Oscilloscope screen.
4. Check iField Brake Module connections.
5. Check brake and brake connections.
6. If you continue to see this fault, you may have a defective brake module or iBox Safety board.
Excessive Faults Shutdown, EXCESSIVE FAULTS
Description: Generated if car already at a floor or reaches a floor when Excessive Faults Warning
detected. Also if there are another five faults that resulted in an emergency, controlled or ASAP stop as car
was trying to reach a floor after an Excessive Faults Warning fault (see also Excessive Faults Warning).
Car Reaction: Emergency stop: Motor and brake contactors immediately dropped. Doors cycle if at a floor.
Latching fault. Clear by pressing iBox Fault Reset, toggling Inspection or cycling power to controller.
Troubleshooting:
1. Check Event Log to see what drive faults were generated before this fault was triggered. Refer to those
drive faults for troubleshooting information.
Excessive Faults Warning, EXCESSIVE FLTS WARN
Description: Excessive number of faults detected. Generated when there are more than five faults that
resulted in an emergency, controlled or ASAP stop. Resets if car makes ten normal runs without faults.
Car Reaction: Car taken out of service. All registered calls canceled. Car proceeds to next available floor with
an opening and cycles doors. Once at a floor, Excessive Faults Shutdown fault is activated and car will
remain shut down until iBox Fault Reset button pressed, Inspection toggled or power to controller cycled.
Troubleshooting:
1. Check Event Log to see what drive faults were generated before this fault was triggered. Refer to those
drive faults for troubleshooting information.
6-31
Troubleshooting

iControl Messages
Excessive Motor Field Feedback Fault, EXCESS MF FDBK FAULT
Description: Excessive current detected flowing through motor field. Threshold is set to 85% of forcing cur-
rent for more than 4 seconds. If fault is recurring, excessive faults will be generated and motor field module
will be disabled.
Car Reaction: Emergency Stop.
Troubleshooting: Problem may be related to faulty motor field module, faulty iBox, or invalid motor field cal-
ibration.
1. If excessive faults (fault) has been generated, module is disabled and should not be outputting any volt-
age. If this is not the case, there may be a problem with motor field module.
2. Calibrate motor field. During calibration, current and voltage should start at their maximum value and
decrease as calibration proceeds. If this is not the case, there may be a problem with the iBox.
Excessive Relevels Fault, EXCESS RELEVELS FAULT
Description: The car has failed to relevel after ten attempts.
Car Reaction: Cancel all calls and shutdown. Doors are cycled and car remains shutdown until fault is reset
by pressing iBox Fault Reset button, toggling Inspection or cycling power to controller.
Troubleshooting:
1. Check for mechanical or other failure preventing proper releveling.
2. Adjust brake and motor control during releveling with a full load in the car.
Excessive Restarts Fault, EXCESS RESTARTS FAULT
Description: Elevator has attempted to start movement from the same floor successively an excessive num-
ber of times. Fault is issued after twenty-five attempts. Counter is reset if car makes one successful run.
Car Reaction: Cancel calls and shutdown. Doors cycled and car remains shutdown for five minutes after first
fault or until fault is reset by pressing iBox Fault Reset, toggling Inspection or cycling power to controller.
Troubleshooting:
1. Check for mechanical or other failure preventing car from moving away from floor the floor.
Excessive Restarts Warning
Description: Elevator has attempted to start movement from the same floor successively an excessive num-
ber of times. Fault issued after ten attempts. Counter is reset if car makes one successful run.
Car Reaction: None.
Troubleshooting:
1. Check for mechanical or other failure preventing car from moving away from floor the floor.
Exercise Operation Activated, EXERCISE OPERATION
Description: Car has been idle for a user-defined time and is now performing a user-defined number of Exer-
cise operation runs.
Car Reaction: Car lowers to bottom landing, then proceeds to top landing and back down to bottom without
cycling doors (one exercise run). The user defines the number of exercise runs.
Exercise Operation Deactivated
Description: Car has completed all exercise runs or Exercise operation has been terminated due to change in
mode of operation or calls being entered into the system.
Fault Bypass Switch On, FAULT BYPASS SW ON
Description: iBox Fault Bypass switch is in the ON position.
Car Reaction: None.
Fault Bypass Switch Timed Out, FLT BYP SW TIMED OUT
Description: Indicates fault bypass has timed out. (Bypasses are allowed for 15 minutes with the iBox Fault/
Function Bypass switch in the ON position.)
Troubleshooting:
1. To clear this fault, place the Fault/Function Bypass switch to the OFF position.
F DPM OPEN-GS CLOSED. See Front DPM Open - GS Closed.
F DR CLS FLT REC FAIL. See Front Door Close Fault Recovery Failure
6-32 Manual # 42-02-2223


iControl Messages
Field Module Over Temperature Fault, FIELD MODULE OVR TEMP
Description: Temperature of Motor Field module heat sink is excessive (DC only).
Car Reaction: Stop at the next floor. Restart not permitted.
Troubleshooting:
1. Check machine room ambient temperature (should not exceed 104 degrees F or 40 degrees C).
2. Verify air enters through bottom of power box and is only expelled via fan at top of the power box.
3. Check for insufficient air circulation through the power box.
4. Check the running temperature inside the power box (should not exceed 105 degrees F).
5. Check for faulty field module.
6. Check for faulty iBox.
7. Check for faulty connection between motor field module and iBox. 6
Fire Service In-car Activated, Fire Service In-car, Fire Svc In-car
Description: In-car firefighters service has been activated via the in-car fire service key-switch.
Car Reaction: Car and Door operation is in accordance to the user-defined fire code. (iView/Car Operation/
Fire Service.)
Troubleshooting:
1. Related inputs:
FireIIOn: Normally low
FireIIOff: Normally high
FireIIHold: Normally low
Fire Service In-Car Deactivated
Description: In-car firefighters service has been deactivated.
Car Reaction: Car is returned to prevailing mode of operation.
Fire Service In-car Hold Operation
Description: Car is on in-car firefighter hold operation.
Car Reaction: Car is held at a floor, typically with doors open. Car calls and door close buttons are disabled.
Troubleshooting:
1. Check the in-car firefighter switch status and Fire II hold operation user settings.
Fire Service In-car Recall Operation
Description: A car on in-car firefighter operation is being recalled to the designated fire recall floor.
Car Reaction: Car proceeds to designated fire recall floor. Once at recall floor, door operation is according to
user-defined door operation under fire recall operation.
Troubleshooting:
1. Check the in-car firefighter switch status and Fire II operation user settings.
Fire Service Recall Alternate, Fire Recall Alternate, Fire Recall Alt.
Description: Fire recall to the alternate fire floor has been initiated.
Car Reaction: Car proceeds to user-defined alternate fire recall floor. Once at recall floor, door operation is
Troubleshooting:
1. If in error, inspect the fire sensor and switch inputs and connections.
2. Related Inputs: Smoke sensors and fire recall switches as indicated on the job prints.
Fire Service Recall Main, Fire Recall Main, Fire Recall Main
Description: Fire recall to the main fire floor has been initiated.
Car Reaction: Car proceeds to the user-defined main fire recall floor. Once at the recall floor, door operation
is according to the user-defined door operation under fire recall operation.
Troubleshooting:
1. If in error, inspect the fire sensor and switch inputs and connections.
2. Related Inputs: Smoke sensors and fire recall switches as indicated on the job prints.
6-33
Troubleshooting

iControl Messages
Fire Service Recall Deactivated
Description: Fire service recall operation has been deactivated.
Car Reaction: Car returns to its prevailing mode of operation.
Troubleshooting: NA
Flood Operation Activated, FLOOD OPERATION
Description: Flood operation has been activated via system command or hardware switch.
Car Reaction: A car in the flood zone area moves immediately to a floor outside the flood zone. The car will
no longer service the floors in the flood zone until Flood Operation is deactivated.
Troubleshooting: Check the flood zone switch and the user interface command.
Flood Operation Deactivated
Description: Flood operation has been deactivated.
Car Reaction: The car will service all eligible floors.
Floor Heat Detectors Activated, FLOOR HEAT DETECTORS
Description: One or more floor heat detector inputs activated. Fire warning light will flash until all heat detec-
tors have been reset. The fire-warning buzzer will sound until the car is shutdown at a floor.
Car Reaction: A car that is parked at a floor will open its doors and shut down. A car in motion will proceed in
the current direction to next available floor where heat detector is not tripped. If all heat detectors in current
direction are tripped, car will reverse direction and proceed to first floor where heat detector is not tripped. If
again all heat detectors are tripped, car shall proceed to main fire recall floor unless car is also on Fire Ser-
vice, in which case car will proceed to appropriate fire recall floor. Once car is stopped at a floor it shall auto-
matically open its doors and shut down. Then, if machine room or hoistway heat detectors are active, a
signal is provided to disconnect main power line and activate sprinklers where available.
Floor Heat Detectors Deactivated
Description: All floor heat detector inputs are deactivated.
Car Reaction: The car is allowed to run.
Floor Location Fault, FLOOR LOCATION FAULT
Description: Floor magnet location is recorded during floor height learn. The on and off positions for both
ULM and DLM sensors are recorded, for a total of four pieces of data for every floor magnet, front and rear.
The controller watches for floor magnets constantly and checks to see that each is in its learned location.
Car Reaction: Run to next stop, then shut down.
Troubleshooting:
1. Usually, a magnet has shifted position or fallen off.
2. Check clearance between floor sensor board and magnets. Set if necessary. (Sometimes this clearance
will be off just enough to make some magnets fail to register properly.)
3. Re-learn floor heights.
4. Perform a Terminal synchronization.
Floor Sensor Fault, FLOOR SENSOR FAULT
Description: The system did not detect a floor sensor while performing floor synchronization. Terminal syn-
chronization will be performed as a result.
Car Reaction: Normal stop.
Troubleshooting: Indicates elevator location in hoistway is not where system expected or door zone sensor is
not being detected.
1. Fault will be generated if car was moved while controller was not powered. The system will detect move-
ment of elevator for only ten seconds after power is removed. This will be sufficient to accommodate
time required for an elevator to stop after power is removed when running at contract speed.
2. On Inspection, verify system is detecting LU, DZ, and LD signals when elevator passes a floor. The sig-
nals can be observed on the iView Floor Heights Configuration screen.
6-34 Manual # 42-02-2223


iControl Messages
Floor Synchronization Fault
Description: While performing floor synchronization, system either did not receive edge position data from
cartop or did not detect a floor position magnet where expected.
Car Reaction: The car will stop and initiate terminal synchronization.
Troubleshooting:
1. Verify car was not moved after power was shut off.
2. Move car past floors around vicinity of fault and verify proper activation of LU and LD sensors.
3. Verify system is communicating with cartop (no Cartop Communication Fault).
4. Verify absolute and cartop positions change by same amount and in same direction while moving car.
5. Verify that a magnet has not fallen off.
6. Check clearance between floor sensor board and magnets. Sometimes this clearance will be off just 6
enough to make some magnets fail to register properly. Adjust clearance if necessary.
7. Re-learn floor heights.
8. The iLink, iLand or iBox may be faulty.
Front Door Close Fault, FRONT DOOR CLOSE FLT
Description: One or more front door failures to close detected. Controller will attempt to close doors as
defined by user parameters (door close protection timer and number of attempts) before declaring fault.
iView Car Operation/Doors tab.
Car Reaction: Doors will reopen fully. All car calls are canceled and car removes itself from hall call service
(hall calls assigned to car are canceled or reassigned to other cars if available). Doors may be closed using
constant pressure on front door close button.
Troubleshooting:
1. Door closed status determined by front door close limit and by front door position monitor contact if
applicable. Check wiring of these signals.
2. Check door close protection timer and number of closing attempts on Car Operation - Doors tab.
Front Door Close Fault Recovery Failure, F DR CLS FLT REC FAIL
Description: The Door Close Fault Recovery timer starts when a Door Close Fault is generated. When timer
expires, Door Close Fault is cleared to allow doors to again attempt to close (see Front Door Close Fault).
This is repeated number of times specified by Door Close Fault Recovery Attempts parameter. If doors have
failed to close when number of attempts equals recovery attempts parameter setting, Front Door Close Fault
Recovery Failure is generated.
Car Reaction: The car is not allowed to run until a mode change is detected or the doors are successfully
closed via constant pressure on the Door Close Button.
Troubleshooting:
1. Door closed status determined by front door close limit and front door position monitor contact if applica-
ble. Check wiring of these signals.
2. Check door close protection timer and number of closing attempts on the Car Operation - Doors tab.
Front Door Close Time-out
Description: A failure of front door to close detected. Controller will attempt to close doors for a period of
time defined by Closing protection timer parameter (Door Motor Protection Timers). If timer elapses prior to
doors closing fully, this event is generated.
Car Reaction: Doors reopen fully and again attempt to close.
Troubleshooting:
1. Door closed status determined by front door close limit and front door position monitor contact if applica-
ble.
2. Check wiring of these signals.
3. Check Closing protection timer (iView Car Operation Configuration/Doors Tab/General Tab/Door Motor
Protection Timers).
6-35
Troubleshooting

iControl Messages
Front Door Contact Fault, FRONT DOOR CNTCT FLT
Description: Faulty front door contact (gate switch, door lock) detected. Detected when doors are in their
fully open position and either gate switch contact is closed or doors appear to be locked.
Car Reaction: All car calls canceled and car removes itself from hall call service. The front doors are not
allowed to close and car is not allowed to run.
Troubleshooting:
1. Check front door gate switch and door lock contact at floor at which car is located.
2. Check associated wiring for these signals.
Front Door Open Button Bypassed, FRONT DOB BYPASSED
Description: Front door open button continuously activated for user-defined time and is now bypassed
according to user-defined setting. (iView/Car Operation/Doors/Advanced.)
Car Reaction: The front door open button is rendered inoperative.
Troubleshooting:
1. Check corresponding input: Front Door - Open Button (Normally low).
2. The operation of the door open button can also be restored by setting the Door open button bypass
option to off (unchecked) (Car Operation Configuration/Doors tab/Advanced dialog).
Front Door Open Fault, FRONT DOOR OPEN FAULT
Description: One or more failures of front door to open fully detected. After repeated attempts to open door
(specified by user parameters), door open failure is declared. Time allowed for door to open and number of
attempts made are user parameters. iView Car Operation/Doors tab, plus Advanced dialog.
Car Reaction: The door stalls at its last position. Car calls are canceled and car removes itself from hall call
service (hall calls assigned to car are canceled or reassigned to other cars if available). Doors may be moved
via constant pressure on the door open and door close buttons.
Troubleshooting:
1. Door open status determined by front door open limit status. Check wiring of this signal.
2. Check door open protection timer and number of open attempts on Operation screen Doors tab and
associated Advanced dialog.
Front Door Open Time-out
Description: A failure of front door to open detected. Controller will attempt to open doors for a period of
time defined by Opening protection timer parameter (Door Motor Protection Timers). If timer elapses prior to
doors opening fully, this event is generated.
Car Reaction: Door open cycle is halted and door is allowed to reclose. If so configured, repeated attempts
will be made to open the door. Otherwise, the car is allowed to leave the landing once the doors are closed.
Troubleshooting:
1. Door open status determined by front door open limit and front door position monitor contact if applica-
ble.
3. Check Opening protection timer (iView Car Operation Configuration/Doors Tab/General Tab/Door Motor
Protection Timers).
Front Doors Stopped, FRONT DOORS STOPPED
Description: Door Stop button or Emergency Stop switch activated preventing doors from moving.
Car Reaction: The car is not allowed to move unless the doors are fully closed.
Troubleshooting: Can be cleared by activation of Door Open button, Door Close button or if car goes into
Inspection or Fire Service mode, provided that Door Stop input is off.
Front DPM Open - GS Closed, F DPM OPEN-GS CLOSED
Description: The front door position monitoring contact is open while the gate switch is closed.
Car Reaction: None.
Troubleshooting: Check the front door position monitoring contact, gate switch and all related circuitry.
6-36 Manual # 42-02-2223


iControl Messages
Front Hall Door Open Button Bypassed, FRONT HALL DOB BYP
Description: Front hall door open button continuously activated for user-defined time (Door open bypass
timer) and is now bypassed in accordance with user-defined setting (Car Operation Configuration/Doors tab/
Advanced dialog).
Car Reaction: The front hall door open button is rendered inoperative.
Troubleshooting:
1. Check corresponding input, Front Door - Hall Door Open Button: Normally low.
2. Operation of hall door open button can also be restored by setting Door open button bypass option to off
(unchecked) (Car Operation Configuration/Doors tab/Advanced dialog).
Front Photo Eye Bypassed, FRONT PHOTO EYE BYP
Description: Front photo eye continuously activated for user-defined time and is now bypassed in accordance 6
to user-defined setting. (iView/Car Operation/Passenger/Anti Nuisance.)
Car Reaction: The front photo eye device is rendered inoperative.
Troubleshooting:
1. To restore the operation of the photo eye device, check the corresponding input.
2. Related inputs: PhotoEyeFront: Normally low
Front Photo Eye Failure, FRONT PHOTO EYE FAIL
Description: Photo eye continuously activated for predetermined time, 4 seconds, while doors fully closed.
Car Reaction: The front photo eye is rendered inoperative.
Troubleshooting:
1. Check for abnormal blockage or failure of the front optical device.
2. Related inputs: FrontPhotoEye: Normally low
Front Safe Edge Bypassed, FRONT SAFE EDGE BYP
Description: Front door safe edge continuously activated for user-defined time and is now bypassed accord-
ing to user-defined setting. (iView/Car Operation/Common/Door Device Bypass Timers.)
Car Reaction: The front safe edge is rendered inoperative.
Troubleshooting:
1. Check state of the front safe edge input.
2. Related inputs: SafeEdgeFront: Normally low
Front Safe Edge Failure, FRONT SAFE EDGE FAIL
Description: Logged when front door safe edge is continuously activated for a predetermined time (4 sec-
onds) while front doors are fully closed.
Car Reaction: The front door safe edge is rendered inoperative.
Troubleshooting:
1. Check for abnormal blockage or failure of front door mechanical reopening device.
2. Related inputs: FrontSafeEdge: Normally low
Global Parameter Update, Reset Controller, PARAM CHNG-RESET CAR
Description: Indicates all controller parameters have been updated and it is necessary to reset controller
once update is completed (press the iBox COMPUTER RESET button).
Car Reaction: Car not allowed to run until parameter update has been completed and computer reset.
Governor open, GOVERNOR OPEN
Description: Gov input dropped. Causes Ascending Car Overspeed Fault and sets rope gripper if running up.
Car Reaction: Emergency stop if running. The car is not allowed to run again until the problem is corrected.
Troubleshooting:
1. Check the GOV (Governor) input, connection, and function.
6-37
Troubleshooting

iControl Messages
Governor Speed Reduction Switch Fault, GOV SPEED SWITCH FLT
Description: Generated if car is moving and Governor Speed Reduction Switch input goes low (spare input
assigned via iView Motor/Drive tab). Bypassed for Car/Counterweight Safety and Electrical Governor tests.
Car Reaction: Immediate slowdown to leveling speed, stop at next floor and cycle doors. Car is not allowed
to run again until fault is reset.
Troubleshooting:
1. Verify the state of the Governor Speed Reduction Switch and input.
2. Reset the Governor Speed Reduction Switch and press the iBox Fault Reset button.
Group Communication Established
Description: The car has established communication with the main iCue dispatcher.
Group Communication Lost
Description: Communication with the main iCue dispatcher has been lost.
Car Reaction: Car establishes communication with backup dispatcher car if one has been selected. Otherwise
car goes into emergency dispatch mode if that operation is not bypassed via the hardware override switch.
Troubleshooting: Check the group to car communication related connections and parameters.
Hall Call Bus n Failure, HALL CALL BUS n FAIL (n = 1 to 4)
Description: There is no power to the named hall call bus.
Car Reaction: No response to calls from the affected floor.
Troubleshooting:
1. Check bus fuses and connections. Test associated hall call bus driver.
Hall Call Bypass Input OFF (see Hall Call Bypass Input ON)
Hall Call Bypass Input ON, HALL CALL BYPASS INP.
Description: Discrete input used to bypass hall calls.
Car Reaction: Car takes itself out of hall call service. Hall calls remain registered until answered. Car is also
not eligible for parking.
Troubleshooting: Check the related discrete inputs.
Hall Call Service Disabled
Description: Car is rejecting hall calls (iBox IN GROUP indicator is Off and the Hall call reject status LED on
the iView Diagnostics > Diagnostic Outputs > Car Operation tab is On) either because of current mode of
operation (Inspection, Test, Independent service, Capture) or because of a fault condition.
Car Reaction: Hall calls are rejected.
Troubleshooting:
1. Verify car is not on a mode of operation in which hall calls are not accepted.
2. Check iView Faults text box and Event Log for faults that would cause car to reject hall calls.
3. If car is not responding to hall calls, but neither 1 or 2 apply, problem could be due to loss of communi-
cation with dispatcher, security settings, heavy load status or hall call system malfunction.
Hall Call Service Enabled (see Hall Call Service Disabled)
Description: Car is accepting hall calls (iBox IN GROUP indicator is On). See also, Hall Call Service Disabled.
Heat Detectors Recall Activated, HEAT DETECTORS RECALL
Description: A heat detector input has been activated.
Car Reaction: Car parked at a floor will open doors and shut down. Car in motion proceeds in current direc-
tion to next available floor where heat detector is not tripped. If all heat detectors in current direction are
tripped, car reverses direction and proceeds to first floor where heat detector is not tripped. If again all heat
detectors are tripped, car proceeds to main fire recall floor unless car is also on Fire Service, in which case
car proceeds to fire recall floor. Once stopped at a floor, car automatically opens doors and shuts down. Then,
if machine room or hoistway heat detectors are active, a signal is provided to disconnect main power line and
activate the sprinklers where available.
Heat Detectors Recall Complete
Description: Indicates car has completed Heat Detectors Recall operation (at a floor and doors fully open).
Car Reaction: Shut down until all heat detector inputs deactivated (Heat Detectors Recall Deactivated).
6-38 Manual # 42-02-2223


iControl Messages
Heat Detectors Recall Deactivated
Description: All heat detector inputs are deactivated
Heat Sensor Fault n (n = 2 to 4)
Description: Not currently used.
Hoistway Access Disabled, HA INSP. DISABLED
Description: Hoistway access inspection operation has been disabled.
Car Reaction: The car cannot be run on hoistway access inspection operation.
Troubleshooting:
1. Check for any car status that might prevent hoistway access inspection operation, e.g. earthquake. 6
Hoistway Access Enabled
Description: Hoistway access inspection operation which was previously disabled is now enabled.
Hoistway Access Inspection Operation, Hoistway Access Operation, Hoistway Access
Description: Car is on Hoistway access (enabled by the Hoistway access switch).
Car Reaction: If running, car will make an emergency stop and is taken out of normal service. Under this
mode, car can only be moved manually using access key switches.
Troubleshooting:
1. Related inputs: HoistwayAccess: Normally high
Hoistway Door Bypass, HOISTWAY DOOR BYPASS
Hoistway Door Bypass switch on iBox in Bypass position. (View-only on iView Safety screen, enabled/dis-
abled by MCE according to safety jurisdiction.) Ability to set this bypass must be enabled at factory and is
only available if allowed by safety regulations in area. Check iView Safety Configuration screen to see if fea-
ture is enabled in your installation.
Car Reaction: Car placed in Inspection mode. To move car, place it in either cartop or car panel inspection.
No other modes of operation are allowed.
Hoistway Heat Detectors Activated, HOIST HEAT DETECTORS
Description: Hoistway heat detector input activated. Fire warning light will flash until all heat detectors have
been reset. The fire-warning buzzer will sound until the car is shutdown at a floor.
current direction to next available floor where heat detector is not tripped. If all heat detectors in current
matically open doors and shut down. Then, if machine room or hoistway heat detectors are active, a signal is
provided to disconnect main power line and activate sprinklers where available.
Hoistway Heat Detectors Deactivated
Description: The hoistway heat detector input is deactivated.
HOISTWAY LEARN ON
Description: This message, on iBox display, indicates system is ready to perform hoistway learn operation.
IMP Switch Fault - Car Door Bypass, IMP SW FLT:C DOOR BP
Description: There is a problem with the iBox CAR DOOR BYPASS switch. Both poles must activate.
Car Reaction: None
Troubleshooting:
1. Sometimes the switch fault can be temporarily cleared by toggling the switch multiple times.
2. The iBox slide switches can be repaired using MCE part: IMP-SW-JUMPER-KIT.
6-39
Troubleshooting

iControl Messages
IMP Switch Fault - Emergency Stop, IMP SW FAULT: EM STOP
Description: There is a problem with the iBox CONTROLLER STOP switch. Both poles must activate.
Car Reaction: If stopped, car is immediately shut down and taken out of service for all types of demands,
including fire and medical emergencies. If switch fault is detected while running, car is allowed to reach its
next destination before shutting down.
Troubleshooting:
IMP Switch Fault - Fault Bypass, IMP SW FAULT: FLT BYP
Description: There is a problem with the iBox FAULT/FUNCTION BYPASS switch. Both poles must activate.
Car Reaction: None
Troubleshooting:
IMP Switch Fault - Hoistway Door Bypass, IMP SW FLT: H DOOR BP
Description: There is a problem with the iBox HOISTWAY DOOR BYPASS switch. Both poles must activate.
Car Reaction: None
Troubleshooting:
IMP Switch Fault - Inspection, IMP SW FAULT: INSP
Description: There is a problem with the iBox INSPECTION switch. Both poles must activate.
Car Reaction: If stopped, the car is immediately shut down and taken out of service for all types of demands,
including fire and medical emergencies. If the switch fault is detected while running, the car is allowed to
reach its next destination before shutting down.
Troubleshooting:
IMP Switch Fault - Inspection DOWN, IMP SW FAULT: INSP DN
Description: There is a problem with the iBox Inspection DOWN switch. Both poles must activate.
Car Reaction: None
IMP Switch Fault - Inspection Enable, IMP SW FAULT: INSP EN
Description: There is a problem with the iBox Inspection ENABLE switch. Both poles must activate.
Car Reaction: None
IMP Switch Fault - Inspection UP, IMP SW FAULT: INSP UP
Description: There is a problem with the iBox Inspection UP switch. Both poles must activate.
Car Reaction: None
IMP Switch Fault - Learn, IMP SW FAULT: LEARN
Description: There is a problem with the iBox LEARN switch. Both poles must activate.
Car Reaction: None
Troubleshooting:
IMP Switch Fault - None
Description: Generated when an IMP switch fault has occurred and is then cleared. If multiple switch faults
occur at same time, message is generated when all faults have been cleared.
Car Reaction: If the car had been shut down due to the IMP switch faults, it is cleared to run again.
6-40 Manual # 42-02-2223


iControl Messages
IMP Switch Fault - Test, IMP SW FAULT: TEST
Description: There is a problem with the iBox TEST switch. Both poles of this switch must activate.
Car Reaction: None
Troubleshooting:
IMP Switch Fault - Write Enable, IMP SW FLT: WRITE EN
Description: There is a problem with the iBox WRITE ENABLE switch. Both poles must activate.
Car Reaction: None
Troubleshooting:
6
Independent Service, Independent Svc
Description: Indicates that the Independent Service switch has been activated.
Car Reaction: Car and door operation in accordance to user-defined settings for independent service. (iView/
Car Operation/Independent Service.) Car does not respond to hall calls.
Troubleshooting:
1. If reported in error, check the Independent Service switch and wiring.
Inspection Operation, Inspection
Description: The car is operating in Inspection mode.
Car Reaction: One of the inspection modes (in-car, machine room, or cartop) is active. The car will operate
using the Inspection performance pattern.
Inspection Overspeed Fault
Description: On Inspection, car exceeded Inspection Overspeed setting on iView Safety Configuration screen.
Troubleshooting:
1. The fault will automatically clear 5 seconds after the car stops. The car is then allowed to run again.
2. If reported in error, check the Inspection Overspeed setting on the Safety Configuration screen.
3. Check the iView event log for any events immediately preceding the overspeed fault.
4. Determine and correct the cause of the overspeed.
Insufficient Brake Feedback Fault, INSFCNT BRK FDBK FLT
Description: Brake current feedback is abnormally low.
Troubleshooting:
1. Check DB-25 connector from iField module to iBox. Check power supply on brake iField module.
2. Verify all wiring connections on the brake (BK) contactors are properly terminated and conducting.
3. Verify brake voltage parameters.
4. Verify iField Module setting for terminals FMCI and FMHC. Please refer to IFIELD-MODULE Terminals on
the ICE-FMP Board (Brake Module) on page 6-84.
5. Verify that the brake is properly calibrated. Please refer to Magnetek AC Drive Introduction on page 2-
24. Please refer to Brake Parameter Adjustments on page 4-19.
6. Check Brake voltage on the Operational Status tab. If the value goes below 0.00 volts, and/or the drive
offset (Input ADC) was recently calibrated or adjusted, verify / set the Input ADC = 0.0 on the Configu-
ration > Drive > Calibration tab.
6-41
Troubleshooting

iControl Messages
Insufficient Motor Field Feedback Fault, INSFCNT MF FDBK FLT
Description: Indicates that Motor Current Feedback signal is less than 50% of the commanded field current.
Car Reaction: If detected four times over seven runs the car will shut down.
Troubleshooting:
1. Check motor field AC supply off isolation transformer.
2. Check connections from controller to motor.
3. Check connections to iField motor module.
4. Check for open fuses.
5. Recalibrate motor field.
Insufficient Motor Field Forcing Feedback Fault, INSFCNT MF FORCNG FLT
Description: Motor field voltage is inadequate. DC motors only.
Car Reaction:
Troubleshooting:
1. Verify motor field voltage parameters.
2. The motor field may be improperly calibrated. Check settings (iView Motor Configuration screen).
3. Recalibrate motor field if necessary.
Invalid Configuration BALRQ, INVALID CNFG BALRQ
Description: Bottom Access Landing Rear Qualifier. The safety system has detected the improper use of
BALRQ option on the iView safety configuration screen.
Car Reaction: Safety OK status remains off.
Troubleshooting:
1. Check that the Safety Configuration, Bottom Access Landing Rear option is properly set.
Invalid Configuration Input, INVALID CNFG INPUT
Description: An invalid input was discovered when cross checking safety inputs against safety configuration.
Troubleshooting:
1. Check car setup/wiring against Safety Screen configuration.
2. Press Fault Reset to clear.
3. Re-learn Safety Configuration.
Invalid Configuration Input Off (See: Invalid Configuration Input)
Invalid Configuration Input CTEX, INVLD CNFG INPUT CTEX
Description: Cartop Emergency Exit. The safety system detected an input/safety setting difference when
cross checking inputs against configuration.
Troubleshooting:
1. Verify car setup/wiring matches the Safety screen setting for the option.
3. Re-learn the Safety Configuration.
Invalid Configuration Input DCAB, INVLD CNFG INPUT DCAB
Description: Door Close Access Bottom. The safety system detected an input/safety setting difference when
Troubleshooting:
6-42 Manual # 42-02-2223


iControl Messages
Invalid Configuration Input DCAT, INVLD CNFG INPUT DCAT
Description: Door Close Access Top. The safety system detected an input/safety setting difference when
Troubleshooting:
Invalid Configuration Input DCMS, INVLD CNFG INPUT DCMS
Description: Door Close Main String. The safety system detected an input/safety setting difference when
cross checking inputs against configuration. 6
Troubleshooting:
Invalid Configuration Input DCMS R, INV CNFG INPUT DCMS R
Description: Door Close Main String Rear. The safety system detected an input/safety setting difference
when cross checking inputs against configuration.
Troubleshooting:
Invalid Configuration Input DLAB, INVLD CNFG INPUT DLAB
Description: Door Lock Access Bottom. The safety system detected an input/safety setting difference when
Troubleshooting:
Invalid Configuration Input DLAT, INVLD CNFG INPUT DLAT
Description: Door Lock Access Top. The safety system detected an input/safety setting difference when
Troubleshooting:
Invalid Configuration Input DLMS, INVLD CNFG INPUT DLMS
Description: Door Lock Main String. The safety system detected an input/safety setting difference when
Troubleshooting:
6-43
Troubleshooting

iControl Messages
Invalid Configuration Input DLMS R, INV CNFG INPUT DLMS R
Description: Door Lock Main String Rear. The safety system detected an input/safety setting difference when
Troubleshooting:
Invalid Configuration Input DPM, INVLD CNFG INPUT DPM
Description: Door Position Monitoring. The safety system detected an input/safety setting difference when
Troubleshooting:
Invalid Configuration Input DPM_R, INV CNFG INPUT DPM_R
Description: Door Position Monitoring Rear. The safety system detected an input/safety setting difference
when cross checking inputs against configuration.
Troubleshooting:
Invalid Configuration TALRQ, INVALID CNFG TALRQ
Description: Top Access Landing Rear Qualifier. The safety system detected an input/safety setting differ-
ence when cross checking inputs against configuration.
Car Reaction: Safety OK remains off.
Troubleshooting:
Invalid Configuration Inventory Cross Check BALRQ, INV INVTRY XCHK BALRQ
Description: Bottom Access Landing Rear Qualifier. The safety system detected a configuration/inventory
(board complement) difference when cross checking board complement against system configuration.
Troubleshooting:
1. Verify Configuration settings on Setup > Safety > Configuration tab match car options/wiring. Any rear
door options require a rear door board be attached to the safety expansion bus. Likewise, a rear door
board attached to the safety expansion bus requires at least one rear door option be selected on the
Safety Configuration (Setup > Safety > Configuration tab).
2. If safety configuration is incorrect, make appropriate changes and re-learn new configuration using Learn
operation on Setup > Safety > Configuration tab.
3. Re-learn inventory of boards using Inventory Learn procedure on Setup > Safety > Inventory tab.
4. Reset fault (press the iBox FAULT RESET button).
6-44 Manual # 42-02-2223


iControl Messages
Invalid Configuration Inventory Cross Check DCCOR, INV INVTRY XCHK DCCOR
Description: Door Close Contact Rear. Safety system detected a configuration/inventory (board comple-
ment) difference when cross checking board complement against system configuration.
Troubleshooting:
door options require a rear door board. Likewise, a rear door board requires at least one rear door option
be selected on Safety Configuration (Setup > Safety > Configuration tab).
2. If safety configuration is incorrect, make appropriate changes and re-learn configuration using Learn
3. Re-learn board inventory using the Inventory Learn procedure on the Setup > Safety > Inventory tab. 6
4. Reset the fault (press the iBox FAULT RESET button).
Invalid Configuration Inventory Cross Check NMS R, INV INVTRY XCHK NMS R
Description: No Main String Rear. The safety system detected a configuration/inventory (board complement)
difference when cross checking board complement against system configuration.
Troubleshooting:
be selected on Safety Configuration (Setup > Safety > Configuration tab).
3. Re-learn board inventory using Inventory Learn procedure on Setup > Safety > Inventory tab.
Invalid Configuration Inventory Cross Check RD Board, INV INVTRY XCHK RD BD
Description: Rear Door board. The safety system detected a configuration/inventory (board complement)
Troubleshooting:
be selected on the Safety Configuration (Setup > Safety > Configuration tab).
2. If the safety configuration is incorrect, make appropriate changes and re-learn the new configuration
using the Learn operation on the Setup > Safety > Configuration tab.
Invalid Configuration Inventory Cross Check RDOPT, INV INVTRY XCHK RDOPT
Description: Rear Door Option. The safety system detected a configuration/inventory (board complement)
Troubleshooting:
door options require a rear door board be attached to the safety expansion bus. Likewise, a rear door
board attached to the safety expansion bus requires at least one rear door option be selected on the
Safety Configuration (Setup > Safety > Configuration tab).
2. If safety configuration is incorrect, make appropriate changes and using the Learn operation on Setup >
Safety > Configuration tab.
6-45
Troubleshooting

iControl Messages
Invalid Configuration Inventory Cross Check RG Board, INV INVTRY XCHK RG BD
Description: Rope Gripper board. Safety system detected a configuration/inventory (board complement) dif-
ference when cross checking board complement against system configuration.
Troubleshooting:
1. Verify Configuration on Setup > Safety > Configuration tab match car options/wiring. Any emergency
brake options require an emergency brake board. Likewise, emergency brake board requires at least one
emergency brake option selected on Safety Configuration (Setup >Safety >Configuration tab).
2. If safety configuration is incorrect, make appropriate changes and re-learn using Learn operation on
Setup > Safety > Configuration tab.
Invalid Configuration Inventory Cross Check RGOPT, INV INVTRY XCHK RGOPT
Description: Rope Gripper Option. The safety system detected a configuration/inventory (board comple-
ment) difference when cross checking board complement against system configuration.
Troubleshooting:
1. Verify Configuration settings on Setup > Safety > Configuration match car options/wiring. Any emer-
gency brake options require an emergency brake board. Likewise, emergency brake board requires at
least one emergency brake option selected on Safety Configuration (Setup >Safety >Configuration tab).
3. Re-learn board inventory on Setup > Safety > Inventory tab.
Invalid Configuration Inventory Cross Check TALRQ, INV INVTRY XCHK TALRQ
Description: Top Access Landing Rear Qualifier. Safety system detected configuration/inventory (board com-
plement) difference when cross checking complement against system configuration.
Troubleshooting:
be selected on the Safety Configuration (Setup > Safety > Configuration tab).
Invalid Destination, INVALID DESTINATION
Description: The car has been assigned to a destination floor that does not have an opening.
Car Reaction: Car ignores the demand.
Troubleshooting: Check current mode of operation and check corresponding recall floor and verify floor is set
to a floor with an opening.
Invalid Front Door Position, INVLD FRONT DOOR PSTN
Description: The front door inputs are in an invalid state (i.e.: doors open and closed at the same time).
Car Reaction: Car is taken out of service and doors will stall.
Troubleshooting:
1. Check all the front door inputs and wiring.
2. Related inputs:
FrontDoorCloseLimit: Low when the doors are fully closed
FrontDoorPositionMonitoring: High when the doors are fully closed
FrontDoorOpenLimit: Low when doors are fully open
FrontCarGate: High when doors are fully closed
6-46 Manual # 42-02-2223


iControl Messages
Invalid Input (See: Invalid Configuration Input)
Invalid Rear Door Position, INVLD REAR DOOR PSTN
Description: The rear door inputs are in an invalid state (i.e., doors open and closed at the same time).
Car Reaction: Car is taken out of service and doors will stall.
Troubleshooting:
1. Check all the rear door inputs and wiring.
2. Related inputs:
RearDoorCloseLimit: Low when the doors are fully closed
RearDoorPositionMonitoring: High when the doors are fully closed
RearDoorOpenLimit: Low when doors are fully open
RearCarGate: High when doors are fully closed 6
IO Map Compare Fault, IO MAP COMPARE FAULT
Description: Safety A IO Map did not match Safety B IO Map.
Car Reaction: If running, car makes an emergency stop. Car is not allowed to run.
Troubleshooting:
1. Press the Fault Reset button to clear the fault.
2. If problem persists the iBox may need to be replaced. Consult MCE Technical Support for instructions.
IO Map Compare Fault Off (See: IO Map Compare Fault)
IO Map Compare Long Term Fault, IO MAP COMPARE LT FLT
Description: Safety A long term products did not match Safety B long term products for 1.2 seconds.
Car Reaction: If running, car makes an emergency stop. Car is not allowed to run.
Troubleshooting:
2. If problem persists the iBox may need to be replaced. Consult MCE Technical Support for instructions.
IO Map Toggle Compare Fault, IO MAP TOGLE COMP FLT
Description: Safety input failure detected during input toggle test (performed at end of each run). This test
verifies proper operation of safety system inputs that normally remain unchanged during normal operation.
Troubleshooting:
2. If problem persists it is an indication that the iBox may need to be replaced. Consult MCE Technical Sup-
port for instructions.
IO Map Toggle Compare Fault Off (See: IO Map Toggle Compare Fault)
iView Logged Off. Passenger operation. A previously active iView connection to controller has logged off.
iView Logged On. Passenger operation. An iView user has logged on to the controller.
iView Lost Connection. An iView connection has been dropped.
iView Timed Out. An iView connection was inactive for a period of time beyond the idle timeout and has
been disconnected.
Jail Master Mode
Description: Car has been placed in Jail Master Mode via Jail Master Mode Input or Jail Operation PC.
Car Reaction: The car operates as configured via the Jail > Master mode parameters.
Jail Secure Mode
Description: Car has been placed in Jail Secure Mode via Jail Secure Mode Input or Jail Operation PC.
Car Reaction: The car operates as configured via the Jail > Secure mode parameters.
6-47
Troubleshooting

iControl Messages
Landing System Sensor Fault, LAND SYS SENSOR FAULT
Description: Generated when a ULM or DLM sensor is activated while car is running and is away from a floor.
Can also be generated if M contactor is ON (car is commanded to run) and safety system sees a door zone
magnet for more than 16 inches of single direction travel.
Car Reaction: Emergency Stop. Motor and brake contactors immediately dropped.
Troubleshooting:
2. If allowed, set Contactor Drop Delay Time to 0.9 seconds.
3. Check for stuck door zone sensor input (front or rear).
LCD Fault
Description: Generated if controller gets a not ready state from LCD. This can happen if iBox LCD is not
connected properly or, with some LCD models, if contrast is set to an extreme.
Car Reaction: None. The fault is simply an indication to adjust or replace the iBox LCD.
Troubleshooting:
1. Check the iBox Onboard Display LCD. If the LCD is blank or frozen, adjust the contrast dial to midpoint.
2. If the display looks corrupted, press the iBox Computer Reset button.
Learn Switch Timed Out Fault, LEARN SW TIMED OUT
Description: When the Learn Switch is ON for more than 15 minutes, the car will shut down.
Car Reaction: The car is not allowed to restart after the current run is completed.
Troubleshooting:
1. Turn OFF the iBox Learn switch.
2. If more time is needed in Learn mode, turn the Learn switch back ON to reset the fifteen minute timer.
Learn U/DNT1-5 and U/DETS Positions, LEARN U/DTS POSITIONS
Description: The positions for the normal and emergency terminal limit switches have not been learned.
Car Reaction: The elevator can only be run on Inspection or Test modes.
Troubleshooting: Perform the normal and emergency terminal limit switches learn operation (Learn tab on
the iView Terminal Switches Configuration screen)
Learn U/DNT1-5 and U/DETS Speeds, LEARN U/DTS SPEEDS
Description: The speeds for the normal and emergency terminal limit switches have not been learned.
Car Reaction: The elevator can only be run on Inspection or Test modes.
Troubleshooting: Perform the normal and emergency terminal limit switches learn operation (Learn tab on
the iView Terminal Switches Configuration screen)
Learning empty load values, LEARNING EMPTY LOAD
Description: Empty car load learn calibration has been initiated.
Car Reaction: Car will start load learn process.
Learning full load values, LEARNING FULL LOAD
Description: Full car load learn calibration has been initiated.
Light Load Antinuisance
Description: Light load anti-nuisance operation. Car load in less than programmed Light Load Threshold.
Car Reaction: Anti-nuisance feature limits number of car calls registered. If exceeded, car calls canceled.
Troubleshooting:
1. Verify Light Load Threshold. (Load Weigher Configuration screen.)
2. Verify number of car calls allowed if load less than Light Load Threshold.
3. Determine if load in car less than Light Load Threshold. Calibrate load weigher.
4. For discrete input weigher, check Light Load input per job prints.
6-48 Manual # 42-02-2223


iControl Messages
Limit Switches Checksum Fault, LIMIT SW CHKSUM FAULT
Description: Learned ETS and NTS limit switch speeds have an Invalid Checksum in nonvolatile memory. An
invalid checksum means that the data stored may not be reliable.
Troubleshooting:
1. Relearn Hoistway limit switches. Use Default option on Terminal Switch learning screen.
Limit Switches Learn Fault, LIMIT SW LEARN FAULT
Description: Safety Processor A failed to store learned limit switch speed values to nonvolatile memory.
Troubleshooting:
1. Press Fault Reset button to clear fault. If problem persists, consult MCE Technical Support.
6
Load calibration on, LOAD CALIBRATION ON
Description: Load learn calibration has been initiated.
Load learn process activated. See Load Calibration On.
Load learn process deactivated
Load weigher zero calibration: Complete
Description: Load weigher zero calibration has completed.
Load weigher zero calibration: Manual
Description: Load weigher zero calibration manually initiated.
Load weigher zero calibration: Periodic
Description: Load weigher periodic zero calibration initiated.
Load weigher zero calibration: Recall
Description: Load weigher zero calibration recall initiated,
Load weigher zero calibration: Recall Aborted/Pending
Description: Load weigher zero calibration recall is waiting to execute or has been aborted after beginning
execution,
Lobby Peak Mode, LOBBY PEAK MODE
Description: The elevator is operating in lobby peak mode, favoring traffic coming from the lobby.
Loss of Position or Speed Indicators, LOSS OF POS/SPD IND
Description: A discrepancy was detected between the feedback signal from motor encoder and the velocity
feedback signal from the car top, indicating a loss of traction.
Car Reaction: Emergency Stop. Latched fault must be manually reset.
Troubleshooting:
1. Examine ropes and sheaves for slippage, wear or damage.
2. On iView oscilloscope or DVM connected between STP1 and STP2, compare Pattern Command and Speed
Feedback. They must match within 0.050 VDC while car is running at steady speed. If not, adjust TACH
ADJ trimpot. Please refer to Following Error Margin on page 2-45.
3. Use hand-held tach to verify car speed. If actual speed does not match commanded speed, adjust motor
parameter LF.22. Please refer to Following Error Margin on page 2-45.
4. Run the car on inspection and check the speed displayed on the iBox display.
Mac Address Error, MAC ADDRESS ERROR
Description: iBox has detected that one of its three MAC addresses has been defaulted or set to zero. This
could lead to multiple cars having the same MAC address, which will cause network problems.
Car Reaction: None.
Troubleshooting: Remove iBox front cover. On iBox OBD select Car > View Factory Data > MAC Addresses.
Verify MAC addresses displayed match bar code addresses on ICE-IMP board. Make corrections if necessary.
6-49
Troubleshooting

iControl Messages
Machine Room Heat Detectors Activated, MR HEAT DETECTORS
Description: Machine room heat detector input activated. Fire warning light will flash until all heat detectors
have been reset. Fire-warning buzzer will sound until car is shut down at a floor.
current direction to next available floor where heat detector is not tripped. If all heat detectors in current
matically open its doors and shut down. Then, if machine room or hoistway heat detectors are active, a
signal is provided to disconnect main power line and activate sprinklers where available.
Machine Room Heat Detectors Deactivated
Description: The machine room heat detector input is deactivated.
Machine Room Stop Switch Open, MR STOP SWITCH OPEN
Description: The machine room stop switch input has dropped.
Troubleshooting:
1. Check the Machine Room stop switch on the front panel of the iBox.
Machine Room Inspection Disabled, MR INSP. DISABLED
Description: Machine room inspection operation has been disabled.
Car Reaction: The car cannot be run on machine room inspection operation.
Troubleshooting:
1. Check for any car status that might prevent machine room inspection operation, e.g. earthquake.
Machine Room Inspection Enabled
Description: Machine room inspection operation which was previously disabled is now enabled.
Machine Room Inspection Operation, Machine Rm Inspection, Mach Rm Insp
Description: Car placed in Machine Room Inspection operation using the iBox Inspection switch.
Car Reaction: Car begins operating in Inspection mode. If running, car will make an emergency stop and is
taken out of normal service. Car can only be moved manually using iBox Inspection Up and Down switches.
Troubleshooting:
1. Related inputs: MachineRoomInspection: Normally high
Main Floor Smoke Sensor Recall, MAIN FLOOR SMOKE
Description: Recall to alternate fire floor due to active or latched smoke detector inputs from the main floor.
Troubleshooting:
1. If in error, inspect the sensor input and connections.
2. Related Inputs: Main floor smoke and fire sensors as indicated on job print drawing(s) -1.
Motion Start Fault, MOTION START FAULT
Description: Car initiated movement but was unable to start for more than ten seconds.
Troubleshooting:
1. Determine mechanical or other reason car is unable to start.
Motion stopped due to IO toggle test, MOTION STOPPED-IO TST
Description: iBox requested start of motion while a toggle test was being performed.
Car Reaction: None. iBox will resend request.
Troubleshooting: NA
6-50 Manual # 42-02-2223


iControl Messages
Motor Contactor Driver Proofing Fault, MOTR CNTR DRV PRF FLT
Description: Fault signal for motor contactor driver proofing circuits.
Car Reaction: None
Troubleshooting:
1. Verify motor contactor driver proofing circuits and motor contactor coil.
Motor Contactor Proofing Fault, MOTOR CNTR PROOF FLT
Description: Fault signal for motor contactor proofing circuits.
Car Reaction: None
Troubleshooting:
1. Verify motor contactor proofing circuits. 6
Motor Field Forcing Timed Out, MF FORCING TIMED OUT
Description: DC motors only. The motor field was being forced for over 1 minute.
Car Reaction: Stop the run. Restart.
Troubleshooting:
1. Motor field starts forcing if there is demand and doors are closing. Check doors are not obstructed and/
or passengers are not holding doors open past 1 minute limit.
Motor Limit Protection Timer Elapsed, MOTOR LMT TIMED OUT 2
Description: Generated if system requests movement for more than ten minutes but no movement detected.
Car Reaction: Currently for informational purposes only.
Motor Limit Timed Out, MOTOR LIMIT TIMED OUT
Description: Generated if no other fault has been generated and system has attempted to move car for three
minutes with no movement detected or minimum movement for ten minutes.
Troubleshooting:
1. Check that Pattern Scaling is not set to 0.0.
2. Check Contract Speed is correctly set.
3. Check pattern voltage to drive (0 - 10V) with meter.
Nudging Front, NUDGING FRONT
Description: Logged when front door nudging operation is invoked.
Car Reaction: Front doors start closing at reduced speed and torque.
Nudging Operation
Description: The doors are operating in Nudging mode. (Passenger operation).
Nudging Rear, NUDGING REAR
Description: This event is logged when rear door nudging operation is invoked.
Car Reaction: Rear doors start closing at reduced speed and torque.
Other Cars Alternate Fire Sensor Recall, OTHER CARS ALT FIRE
Description: Alternate fire recall due to active or latched smoke detector input(s) from hoistway or machine
room of other cars in system.
Troubleshooting:
1. If in error, inspect the sensors, inputs, and connections.
2. Related Inputs: Other Cars Alt Recall sensor inputs as indicated on job prints.
6-51
Troubleshooting

iControl Messages
Other Cars Main Fire Sensor Recall, OTHER CARS MAIN FIRE
Description: Main fire recall due to active or latched smoke detector input(s) from hoistway or machine room
of other cars in system.
Car Reaction: Car proceeds to user-defined main fire recall floor. Once at recall floor, door operation is
Troubleshooting:
2. Related Inputs: Other Cars Main Recall sensor inputs as indicated on job prints.
PARAM CHNG-RESET CAR, see Global Parameter Update, Reset Controller
Passenger Operation, Passenger. Normal operation status message.
Photo Eye Antinuisance
Description: Logged when car calls are canceled due to a user-defined number of car calls being registered
without interruption of photo eye.
Car Reaction: All car calls are cancelled.
Troubleshooting:
1. Check user defined options related to operation. (iView/Car Operation/Passenger/Anti Nuisance.)
2. Check photo eye and related inputs.
Position Cartop Offset Fault, POSTN CARTP OFFST FLT
Description: Each time car stops, it obtains position information from cartop position encoder. If reported
position varies from position last reported at this location by more than two feet, this fault is generated.
Car Reaction: Emergency stop. Motor and brake contactors immediately dropped.
Troubleshooting: Perform a Terminal Synchronization (Pattern Configuration screen>Common tab>Position
Synchronization.
Position Location Error Fault, POSTN LCTN ERROR FLT
Description: If difference between learned position of a floor (magnet) and currently indicated position of
floor (magnet) is greater than 2 feet, this fault is generated.
Car Reaction: Car will perform a terminal synchronization.
Troubleshooting:
1. Check that the iLand landing system is properly installed and adjusted. (Refer to Section 3 of this guide.)
Position Quadrature Fault, POSITION QUAD FAULT
Description: iLand quadrature signal not detected (one or both streams). When moving above 30 fpm, sys-
tem monitors transitions on quadrature signals. Fault may be bypassed on Diagnostics > Fault Bypass tab.
Troubleshooting:
1. Verify quadrature channels are arriving at iBox.
2. On Hoistway screen, verify absolute position increments when moving up and decrements when moving
down (on inspection). If absolute position does not change, there may be a problem with iBox.
Position Quadrature Reversed Fault, POSITN QUAD RVRSD FLT
Description: Sequence of quadrature pulse streams indicates travel in opposite direction system request.
Car Reaction: None.
Troubleshooting:
1. Verify elevator moves in requested direction.
2. On Hoistway screen, verify cartop position increments moving up/decrements moving down.
3. On Hoistway screen, verify absolute position increments moving up/decrements moving down.
4. Check JP1 jumper on iLAND-c. Position A is for normal mounting orientation; position b is for upside
down mounting position.
6-52 Manual # 42-02-2223


iControl Messages
Position Speed Deviation Fault, POSITN SPEED DVTN FLT
Description: Safety processor compares distance travelled reported by position quadrature with distance
travelled per motor rotation. If quadrature reports 48 travelled but motor reports less than 32, fault is gen-
erated. May be bypassed on Diagnostics > Fault Bypass tab.
Troubleshooting:
1. Check velocity feedback from drive.
2. Check that Pattern Configuration/General tab Position Encoder Resolution is set to 256.
3. Check calibration of speed feedback signal.
Position Speed Threshold Fault, POSTN SPD THRSHLD FLT
Description: The quadrature synthesized speed exceeds 115% of contract speed. This fault may be bypassed 6
on the Diagnostics > Fault Bypass tab.
Troubleshooting:
1. On iView oscilloscope, compare Pattern Command and Speed Feedback to see that they match.
2. Use a hand-held tachometer to verify car speed.
3. Run car on inspection and check speed displayed on iBox display.
4. For SCR drives, verify programmed running motor field is close to actual motor field value at contract
speed. If value is higher, system will have to weaken motor field as elevator reaches contract speed. If
motor field is very inductive, this may cause an overshoot. If value is too low, excessive current may flow
through armature. Note that load will affect this value. Running up with a full load in car will yield worst-
case scenario. For an empty elevator, running down produces worst-case scenario (value will be higher
than for fully loaded car.)
5. For highly inductive motor fields, begin motor field weakening earlier; end motor field weakening earlier.
If begin weakening percentage is too low, poor control will result when elevator is approaching destina-
tion floor (spotting). In this case, reduce end weaken percentage without modifying (by much) begin
weakening percentage. Generally, begin is around 50%; end is around 90% for normal motor fields.
6. Reduce high roll jerk.
Position Synchronization Fault
Description: System was not able to read position correction value stored in battery backed RAM when con-
troller powered up. Usually results in a floor sensor fault or a position location fault.
Car Reaction: None.
Troubleshooting:
1. Verify iBox battery connection and charge (lower left side of ICE-IMP board - iBox cover removed).
Battery type: 1/2 AA, 3.6V Lithium. Manufacturer: SAFT, part # LS14250. MCE part # 30-05-0001.
Position Synchronization Required at Floor, POSITION SYNC-FLOOR
Description: The elevator needs to verify position by crossing a door zone sensor.
Car Reaction: Cancel all existing calls, synchronize to floor.
Position Synchronization Required at Terminal, POSITION SYNC-TERMINAL
Description: Elevator has lost position and needs to locate a terminal door zone sensor to establish it.
Car Reaction: Cancel all existing calls, synchronize to terminal.
Position Synchronized at Floor
Description: Synchronization completed using door zone sensor. See Position Synch Required at Floor.
Car Reaction: Return to normal service.
Position Synchronized at Terminal
Description: Elevator has completed synchronizing its position using a terminal door zone sensor. See Posi-
tion Synchronization Required at Terminal.
Car Reaction: Return to normal operation.
6-53
Troubleshooting

iControl Messages
Power Transfer Input Activated, Power Transfer, POWER TRANSFER
Description: Power transfer input activated. Transfer to/from emergency power.
Car Reaction: Cancel existing calls. Stop at next floor and open doors.
Troubleshooting: Check the Power Transfer input.
Power Transfer Input Deactivated
Power Up Position Synchronization Required at Terminal
Description: Position synchronization at terminal landing required after power-up/reset. Power up synchro-
nization occurs if elevator required to synchronize before power lost, controller reset, or synchronization
information in battery backed SRAM is invalid.
Car Reaction: The elevator will synchronize at a terminal landing.
Troubleshooting:
1. Battery may need to be changed.
2. Check for faulty SRAM.Check for SRAM not correctly inserted in socket.
3. Check for faulty iBox.
Pre-start Door Lock Fault
Description: Once decision to move is made, three acknowledgments (motion start, door lock, drive start)
required before movement allowed. If so configured, pre-start sequencing begins while doors closing. If door
lock acknowledgement not received within 15 seconds (after pre-start sequence begun, fault is generated.
Car Reaction: Pre-start sequence will stop and the sequence will repeat. If the fault persists, an excessive
restarts fault will occur.
Troubleshooting:
1. Verify doors (front and/or rear) become locked within the prescribed time.
2. Verify, iView Diagnostics - Motion, system sees doors closing/locking within prescribed time. Informa-
tion reflects front and rear door status.
3. Verify, Diagnostics - Car Operation - Front/Rear, system sees front/rear doors closing/locking within pre-
scribed time.
Primary Fire Switch Bypass, PRI FIRE SWITCH BYP
Description: The primary fire switch is in the Bypass position.
Car Reaction: According to selected Fire Code.
Troubleshooting:
1. Check the primary fire recall switch inputs.
Primary Fire Switch On, PRI FIRE SWITCH ON
Description: The primary fire switch is in the On position.
Car Reaction: Car will recall to Main fire recall floor, position doors as directed on Car Operation/Fire/Modify/
Fire Recall screen, and wait for activation of in-car firefighter switch.
Troubleshooting: If in error, check the Primary Fire Recall Switch input.
QPRAM Device Error, QPRAM DEVICE ERROR
Description: Safety Processor A problem writing to QPRAM device.
Troubleshooting:
1. Replace QPRAM on Safety Processor A. Contact MCE.
6-54 Manual # 42-02-2223


iControl Messages
Rear Door Close Fault, REAR DOOR CLOSE FAULT
Description: One or more rear door failures to close detected. Controller attempts to close doors as defined
by parameters (door close protection timer and number of attempts) before declaring fault. iView Car Oper-
ation/Doors tab.
Car Reaction: Doors will reopen fully. Car calls canceled and car removes itself from hall call service (hall
calls assigned to car are canceled or reassigned). Doors close using constant pressure on door close button.
Troubleshooting:
1. Door closed status is determined by rear door close limit and rear door position monitor contact.
2. Check the wiring of these signals.
3. Check the door close protection timer and number of closing attempts on the Operation/Doors tab.
Rear Door Close Fault Recovery Failure, R DR CLS FLT REC FAIL 6
Description: Door Close Fault Recovery timer starts when Door Close Fault generated. When timer expires,
Door Close Fault cleared so doors again attempt to close (see Rear Door Close Fault). This is repeated num-
ber of times specified by Door Close Fault Recovery Attempts parameter. If doors have failed to close when
number of attempts equals recovery attempts setting, Rear Door Close Fault Recovery Failure generated.
Car Reaction: Car may not run until mode change detected or doors successfully closed via constant pres-
sure on Door Close Button.
Troubleshooting:
1. Door closed status determined by door close limit and door position monitor. Check wiring.
2. Check door close protection timer and number of closing attempts on Car Operation - Doors tab.
Rear Door Close Time-out
Description: Failure of rear door to close detected. Controller will attempt to close doors for a period of time
defined by Closing protection timer parameter (Door Motor Protection Timers). If timer elapses prior to doors
closing fully, event is generated.
Car Reaction: Doors reopen fully and again attempt to close.
Troubleshooting:
1. Door closed status determined by rear door close limit and rear door position monitor contact.
3. Check Closing protection timer (iView Car Operation Configuration/Doors Tab/General Tab/Door Motor
Protection Timers).
Rear Doors Stopped, REAR DOORS STOPPED
Description: Door Stop button or Emergency Stop switch activated preventing door movement.
Car Reaction: Car is not allowed to move unless doors are fully closed.
Troubleshooting: Can be cleared by activation of Door Open or Door Close button or if car enters Inspection
or Fire Service mode, provided the Door Stop input is off.
Rear Door Contact Fault, REAR DOOR CONTCT FLT
Description: Faulty rear door contact (gate switch, door lock) detected. Detected when doors are in fully
open position and either gate switch contact is closed or doors appear to be locked.
Car Reaction: All car calls canceled and car removes itself from hall call service. Rear doors are not allowed
to close and car is not allowed to run.
Troubleshooting:
1. Check the rear door gate switch and door lock contact at the floor at which the car is located.
2. Check associated wiring for these signals.
Rear Door Open Button Bypassed, REAR DOB BYPASSED
Description: Rear door open button continuously activated for user-defined time and now bypassed accord-
ing to user setting. (iView/Car Operation/Doors/Advanced.)
Car Reaction: The rear door open button is rendered inoperative.
Troubleshooting:
1. Check corresponding input: Rear Door - Open Button (Normally low).
2. Operation of door open button can be restored by setting Door open button bypass option to off
(unchecked) (Car Operation Configuration/Doors Tab/Advanced dialog).
6-55
Troubleshooting

iControl Messages
Rear Door Open Fault, REAR DOOR OPEN FAULT
Description: One or more rear door failure to open fully detected. After repeated attempts to open (as spec-
ified by user parameters), open failure declared. Time allowed for opening and number of attempts made are
user parameters. iView Car Operation/Doors tab, plus Advanced dialog.
Car Reaction: Door stalls at its last position. Car calls canceled and car removes itself from hall call service
(hall calls assigned to car are canceled or reassigned to other cars if available). Doors may be moved via
constant pressure on door open and door close buttons.
Troubleshooting:
1. Door open status determined by rear door open limit status.
2. Check wiring of this signal.
3. Check door open protection timer and number of open attempts on Operation screen Doors tab and
associated Advanced dialog.
Rear Door Open Time-out
Description: Failure of rear door to open detected. Controller will attempt to open doors for time defined by
Opening protection timer (Door Motor Protection Timers). If timer elapses prior to doors opening fully, event
is generated.
Car Reaction: Door open cycle halted and door allowed to reclose. If configured, repeated attempts will be
made to open door. Otherwise, car is allowed to leave landing once doors are closed.
Troubleshooting:
1. Door open status determined by rear door open limit and rear door position monitor contact if applicable.
3. Check Opening protection timer (iView Car Operation Configuration/Doors Tab/General Tab/Door Motor
Protection Timers).
Rear Doors Stopped, REAR DOORS STOPPED
Description: While rear doors opening or closing, Door Stop button or Emergency Stop switch activated caus-
ing doors to stop.
Car Reaction: The car is not allowed to move unless the doors are fully closed.
Troubleshooting: Can be cleared by Door Open button, Door Close button or changing operating mode.
Rear DPM Open - GS Closed, R DPM OPEN-GS CLOSED
Description: The rear door position monitoring contact is open while the gate switch is closed.
Car Reaction: None.
Troubleshooting: Check the rear door position monitoring contact, gate switch and all related circuitry.
Rear Hall Door Open Button Bypassed, REAR HALL DOB BYP
Description: Rear hall door open button continuously activated for user-defined time (Door open bypass
timer) and now bypassed per user-defined setting (Car Operation Configuration/Doors tab/Advanced dialog).
Car Reaction: The rear hall door open button is rendered inoperative.
Troubleshooting:
1. Check corresponding input, Rear Door - Hall Door Open Button: Normally low.
2. Operation of hall door open button can be restored by setting Door open button bypass option to off
(unchecked) (Car Operation Configuration/Doors tab/Advanced dialog).
Rear Photo Eye Bypassed, REAR PHOTO EYE BYP
Description: Rear photo eye continuously activated for user-defined time and now bypassed per user-defined
setting. (iView/Car Operation/Passenger/Anti Nuisance.)
Car Reaction: The rear photo eye device is rendered inoperative.
Troubleshooting:
1. To restore the operation of the photo eye device, check the corresponding input.
2. Related inputs: PhotoEyeRear: Normally low
6-56 Manual # 42-02-2223


iControl Messages
Rear Photo Eye Failure, REAR PHOTO EYE FAIL
Description: Logged when photo eye continuously activated for predetermined time (4 seconds) while rear
doors are fully closed.
Car Reaction: The rear photo eye is rendered inoperative.
Troubleshooting:
1. Check for blockage or failure of rear photo eye.
2. Related inputs: RearPhotoEye: Normally low
Rear Safe Edge Bypassed, REAR SAFE EDGE BYP
Description: Rear door safe edge continuously activated for user-defined time and now bypassed per user-
defined setting. (iView/Car Operation/Common/Door Device Bypass Timers.)
Car Reaction: The rear safe edge is rendered inoperative.
6
Troubleshooting:
1. Check the state of the rear safe edge input.
2. Related inputs: SafeEdgeRear: Normally low
Rear Safe Edge Failure, REAR SAFE EDGE FAIL
Description: Logged when rear door safe edge continuously activated for predetermined time (4 seconds)
while rear doors fully closed.
Car Reaction: The rear door safe edge is rendered inoperative.
Troubleshooting:
1. Check for blockage or failure of rear door mechanical reopening device.
2. Related inputs: RearSafeEdge: Normally low
Receive Sys Params
Description: Controller receiving parameters from Central/Local dispatcher. (DO NOT RESET CONTROLLER).
Restricted, RESTRICTED
Description: Restricted Mode enabled. Controller runs but will not accept hall calls. Mode exited by entering
Restricted Mode Key as described in document 42-IS-0144, Restricted Mode Instruction for iControl Users.
Obtain Restricted Mode Key from MCE Credit Department at (916) 463-9582. Please provide job number and
car identifier.
R DR CLS FLT REC FAIL. See Rear Door Close Fault Recovery Failure
Retiring Cam Door Lock Fault Activated, Retiring Cam Door Lock Fault, RETIRING CAM DLK FLT
Description: Door locks failed to make up within user-adjustable time after user adjustable number of
attempts to lock doors. Detected on cars equipped with retiring cam door lock mechanism.
Car Reaction: Car is taken out of service and doors re-open fully. Doors can be closed with constant pressure
on door close button.
Troubleshooting:
1. Check door locks and retiring cam circuitry.
2. Verify related user-defined parameters are correct.
3. Cleared by mode of operation change or if doors closed with constant pressure on door closed button.
Retiring Cam Door Lock Fault Deactivated. See Retiring Cam Door Lock Fault Activated
Retiring Cam Protection Fault Activated, Retiring Cam Protection Fault, RET CAM PROTECTIN FLT
Description: Retiring cam output activated for user-adjustable time after doors successfully locked. Moni-
tored in event car fails to reach destination.
Car Reaction: Emergency stop if car is traveling when fault is detected. Car is taken out of service. If car is at
a landing, doors shall re-open fully.
Troubleshooting:
1. Check the door locks and the retiring cam circuitry.
2. Verify that the related parameters are correct.
3. This fault is cleared by any mode of operation change or by the iBox Fault Reset button.
Retiring Cam Protection Fault Deactivated. See Retiring Cam Protection Fault Activated
6-57
Troubleshooting

iControl Messages
Sabbath Operation Activated, Sabbath Operation, SABBATH OPERATION. Elevator operating in Sab-
bath mode initiated by software command, switched input or timer. Sabbath mode allows elevator to operate
without requiring button presses for hall calls or car calls. Car behavior determined by parameters on Car
Operation Configuration > Sabbath tab.
Sabbath Operation Deactivated. See Sabbath Operation Activated.
Safety A Contract Overspeed Fault, SPA COS FAULT
Description: Contract Overspeed setting exceeded (iView, Safety Configuration screen). May be bypassed on
Diagnostics > Fault Bypass tab.
Car Reaction: Emergency Stop: Motor contactor and brake contactor immediately dropped.
Troubleshooting:
1. Fault will automatically clear 5 seconds after car stops. The car is then allowed to run again.
2. Check contract overspeed parameter (iView/Safety Configuration/General).
Safety A DETS Level 2 Speed Fault, SPA DETS L2 SPEED FLT
Description: Car contacted Down Emergency Terminal Switch while traveling at over 95% of contract speed.
This fault may be bypassed on the Diagnostics > Fault Bypass tab.
Troubleshooting:
2. Check for the proper positioning of the DETS switch in the hoistway.
Safety A IMP Configuration Mismatch
Description: Parameters saved in Safety system do not match values in main processor. When Safety screen
parameters are changed, this message appears after Send button is pressed. Complete Safety learn opera-
tion as directed on iView Safety Configuration screen to learn new safety configuration.
Car Reaction: Car will not run.
Troubleshooting:
1. Using iView, check values on Safety Configuration screen. Verify correct.
2. Download correct values to Safety system by executing learn process from the Safety screen.
Safety A Inspection Leveling Overspeed Fault, SPA LOS FAULT
Description: Car exceeded leveling overspeed limit (detected by safety processor A). This fault may be
bypassed on the Diagnostics > Fault Bypass tab.
Troubleshooting:
1. Fault will automatically clear 5 seconds after car stops. The car is then allowed to move again.
2. Check the leveling overspeed parameter for proper setting (iView/Safety Config/General).
Safety A Inspection Overspeed Fault, SPA IOS FAULT
Description: Car has exceeded inspection overspeed limit of 150 fpm (detected by safety processor A). This
fault may be bypassed on the Diagnostics > Fault Bypass tab.
Troubleshooting:
1. The fault will automatically clear 5 seconds after the car stops. The car is then allowed to move again.
Safety A SIB Device Fault, SPA SIB DEVICE FAULT
Description: Safety Processor A has a problem writing Safety Ice Bus.
Troubleshooting:
1. Replace iBox. SAF Board damaged. Contact MCE.
Safety A SIB Device Fault Off (See: Safety A SIB Device Fault)
6-58 Manual # 42-02-2223


iControl Messages
Safety A UETS Level 2 Speed Fault, SPA UETS L2 SPD FLT
Description: Car contacted the Up Emergency Terminal Switch while traveling at over 95% of contract
speed.This fault may be bypassed on the Diagnostics > Fault Bypass tab.
Troubleshooting:
2. Check for the proper positioning of the UETS switch in the hoistway.
Safety A Unintended Motion Fault, SPA UNTD MOTION FLT
Description: Safety processor A has detected both hoistway doors and car gate doors open as car moved
away from floor without a command from iControl main processor (IMP board) to move.
Car Reaction: Emergency stop: Motor contactor and brake contactor immediately dropped. If applicable, the
6
rope brake drops.
Troubleshooting:
1. Check for proper door operation and control.
2. Close the hoistway doors and close the car gate.
3. Press the Fault Reset button. Test.
Safety B Contract Overspeed Fault, SPB COS FAULT
Description: Car exceeded Contract Overspeed setting. May be bypassed on Diagnostics > Fault Bypass.
Troubleshooting:
2. Check the contract overspeed parameter for proper setting. (iView/Safety Config/General)
Safety B DETS Level 2 Speed Fault, SPB DETS L2 SPEED FLT
Description: The car contacted the Down Emergency Terminal Switch while traveling at over 95% of contract
speed. This fault may be bypassed on the Diagnostics > Fault Bypass tab.
Troubleshooting:
2. Check for the proper positioning of the DETS switch in the hoistway.
Safety B Fault Activated, SAFETY B FAULT
Description: Event logged and related car status messages displayed on OBD and iView if a fault is detected
by safety processor B but not by safety processor A.
Car Reaction: Emergency stop: Motor contactor and brake contactor immediately dropped. If the fault per-
sists, after a delay all calls are cancelled.
Troubleshooting:
1. Check the Event Log for other faults and information related to this fault.
Safety B Fault Deactivated (See: Safety B Fault Activated)
Safety B Fault Bypass Switch Timed Out
Description: Indicates that a fault bypass has timed out. (Bypasses are allowed for 15 minutes with the iBox
Fault/Function Bypass switch in the ON position.) On Inspection mode, this fault is bypassed indefinitely.
Troubleshooting:
1. To clear this fault, place the Fault/Function Bypass switch to the OFF position.
Safety B Inspection Leveling Overspeed Fault, SPB LOS FAULT
Description: The car exceeded the leveling overspeed limit (detected by safety processor B). This fault may
be bypassed on the Diagnostics > Fault Bypass tab.
Troubleshooting:
2. Check the leveling overspeed parameter for proper setting (iView/Safety Config/General).
6-59
Troubleshooting

iControl Messages
Safety B Inspection Overspeed Fault, SPB IOS FAULT
Description: Car has exceeded the inspection overspeed limit of 150 fpm (detected by safety processor B).
Troubleshooting:
Safety B SIB Device Fault, SPB SIB DEVICE FAULT
Description: Safety Processor B has a problem writing Safety Ice Bus.
Troubleshooting:
1. Replace iBox. SAF Board damaged. Contact MCE.
Safety B SIB Device Fault Off (See: Safety B SIB Device Fault)
Safety B Safety Bypass Jumper Timed Out
Description: Safety Processor B has detected that Safety Bypass Jumper has been on for more than 15 min-
utes.
Car Reaction: The car will not be allowed to restart after the end of the current run.
Troubleshooting:
1. Remove the iBox Safety Bypass Jumper.
2. If more time is needed in the Safety Bypass mode, then reinstall Safety Bypass Jumper and the 15 min-
ute timer will restart.
Safety B UETS Level 2 Speed Fault, SPB UETS L2 SPD FLT
Description: The car contacted the Up Emergency Terminal Switch while traveling at over 95% of contract
speed. This fault may be bypassed on the Diagnostics > Fault Bypass tab.
Troubleshooting:
2. Check for the proper positioning of the UETS switch in the hoistway.
Safety B Unintended Motion Fault, SPB UNTD MOTION FLT
Description: Safety processor B has detected that both hoistway doors and car gate doors were open as the
car moved away from the floor without a command from the iControl main processor (IMP board) to move.
Car Reaction: Emergency stop: Motor contactor and brake contactor immediately dropped. If applicable, the
rope brake drops.
Troubleshooting:
1. Check for proper door operation and control.
2. Close the hoistway doors and close the car gate.
3. Press the Fault Reset button. Test.
Safety Bypass Jumper On
Description: Indicates that the Safety Bypass Jumper is in place.
Safety Bypass Jumper Timed Out, SFTY BYP JMPR TMD OUT
Description: Safety Processor A has detected Safety Bypass Jumper has been on for more than 15 minutes.
Car Reaction: The car will not be allowed to restart after the end of the current run.
Troubleshooting:
1. Remove the iBox Safety Bypass Jumper.
2. If more Safety Bypass time needed, reinstall Safety Bypass Jumper and 15 minute timer will restart.
Safety C String Open, SAFETY C STRING OPEN
Description: The input has dropped.Input does not come on when bypassed, but the bypass will allow it to
run on Test and Machine Room Inspection.
Troubleshooting:
1. Check the car safety string elements and finally the actual input to the iBox.
Safety C String Open Off (See: Safety C String Open)
6-60 Manual # 42-02-2223


iControl Messages
Safety Configuration Checksum Fault, SFTY CONFIG CHKSM FLT
Description: Safety configuration parameters stored in nonvolatile memory are corrupt or missing.
Car Reaction: The car is not allowed to move.
Troubleshooting:
1. Learn the Safety Configuration.
Safety Configuration Learn Fault, SFTY CONFIG LEARN FLT
Description: Safety Processor A had a failure when storing configuration values to nonvolatile memory.
Car Reaction: Car will not run until fault is cleared.
Troubleshooting:
1. Make sure car is on Machine Room Inspection before learning safety configuration.
2. Check installed safety configuration matches selections on Safety Configuration screen and that no
6
bypasses are in place.
3. Repeat the learn process.
4. If unsuccessful, contact MCE Technical Support. (Possible iBox failure.)
Safety Configuration Mismatch, SFTY CONFIG MISMATCH
Description: Parameters saved in the Safety system do not match the values saved in the main processor.
Troubleshooting:
1. Using iView, check the values programmed under the Safety Configuration screen. Verify that they are
correct.
2. Download correct values to the Safety system by executing the learn process from the Safety tab.
Safety Configuration Inventory Cross Check Fault, SFTY VCTR XCHK FLT
Description: The safety-related boards in the controller do not match the learned configuration.
Car Reaction: The car is not allowed to move.
Troubleshooting:
1. Verify safety bus inventory against safety configuration. If changes are made, relearn the safety configu-
raton.
2. Re-learn the board complement (inventory).
Safety H String Open, SAFETY H STRING OPEN
Description: The input has dropped.Input does not come on when bypassed, but the bypass will allow it to
run on Test and Machine Room Inspection.
Troubleshooting:
1. Check the car safety string elements and finally the actual input to the iBox.
Safety H String Open Off (See: Safety H String Open)
Safety Inventory Checksum Fault, SFTY INVTRY CHKSUM FLT
Description: The Safety Ice bus board inventory stored in nonvolatile memory is corrupt or missing.
Car Reaction: The car will not run.
Troubleshooting:
1. Relearn the inventory of boards using the Learn operation on the Setup > Safety > Inventory tab.
Safety Inventory Comparison Fault, SFTY INVTRY COMPARE FLT
Description: Safety boards attached to iBox do not match safety board inventory kept in the safety system.
Car Reaction: The car will not run.
Troubleshooting:
1. Relearn inventory of boards using the Learn operation on the Setup > Safety > Inventory tab.
6-61
Troubleshooting

iControl Messages
Safety Inventory Creation Fault, SFTY INVTRY CREATION FLT
Description: During Safety board inventory learn, system could not create board list in non-volatile storage.
Troubleshooting:
1. Relearn inventory of boards using Learn operation on the Setup > Safety > Inventory tab.
3. If the fault does not clear, cycle power to the controller. Repeat the first two steps if the fault reoccurs.
4. If the previous steps are unsuccessful, iBox replacement may be indicated.
Safety Inventory Learn Fault, SFTY INVTRY LEARN FLT
Description: Safety Processor A failed to store inventory values to nonvolatile memory.
Car Reaction: None
Troubleshooting:
1. Relearn the inventory of boards using the Learn operation on the Setup > Safety > Inventory tab.
3. If the fault does not clear, cycle power to the controller. Repeat the first two steps if the fault reoccurs.
4. If the previous steps are unsuccessful, iBox replacement may be indicated.
Safety String Open
Description: Contact in safety circuit is open.
Troubleshooting:
1. Refer to the job prints. Verify all safety string switches and wiring.
2. Verify power at: SAFC, SAFH, GOV, ESM, and ESC (if car stop switch bypass is off). SAFC and SAFH can
be bypassed by installing Safety Bypass Jumper on IRB board if car must be moved off final limits.
3. If a rope gripper installed and rope gripper option selected, check RGOK is equal to 1.
4. If cartop exit present and cartop exit option selected, check that CTEX input is equal to 1.
5. If Unintended Motion tripped, clear Unintended Motion fault.
6. Clear faults left on iBox display.
7. When problem is fixed, fault will automatically clear after 5 seconds.
Safety String Closed (See: Safety String Open)
SCR AC Phase Fault, SCR AC PHASE FAULT
Description: Indicates the 6 feed wires to M-contactor at bottom of System 12 Drive are incorrectly con-
nected. When incorrectly connected, 30-degree phase angle between X and Y inputs is lost. DC controls only.
Troubleshooting:
1. Check for defective or disconnected 32-pin ribbon cable between SCR_LGA board and iBox.
2. Check if the SCR Drive Diagnostic indicators WYE PR, DELTA PR, or 30-Degree PR are ON.
SCR Armature Voltage On, SCR ARM VOLTAGE ON
Description: Indicates presence of DC voltage between armature terminals A1 and A2 in excess of 0.7VDC
before RE relay enabled. DC controls only.
Car Reaction: Failure prevents a normal run.
Troubleshooting:
1. Verify test point TP1 on SCR-LGA board (see Section 8) is 0.0mv when no direction is commanded.
Adjust R2 if needed.
2. Check cable between iBox AC/DC Drive jack and SCR drive.
3. Check SCR-LGA board (see Section 8).
6-62 Manual # 42-02-2223


iControl Messages
SCR Contactor Fuse Fault, SCR CNTACTR FUSE FLT
Description: Indicates semiconductor fuse blown or one or more of 6 contacts within two contactors failed.
DC controls only.
Troubleshooting:
1. Check secondary wires of drive isolation transformer.
2. Check primary voltage on each of the primary terminals of the drive isolation transformer.
3. Check for harsh motor control, vibration, or humming.
4. Check for motor mechanical defect such as interpole (partially shorted).
5. Oscilloscope to 2msec/div, 500mv/div, AC coupling. Verify 12 drive pulses equal amplitudes and periods.
6. Check M1 and M2 contacts. 6
7. Check semiconductor fuses. (See Section 8.)
SCR Drive Ready Fault, SCR DRIVE READY FAULT
Description: Ready signal from System 12 SCR Drive is inactive. Signal is inactive when System 12 Drive
detects fault or is being reset (about 5 seconds). DC controls only.
Car Reaction: The elevator is prevented from moving while this signal is inactive.
Troubleshooting: Check Event Calendar, Hoistway display or iBox display for active SCR drive faults and fol-
low the recommended troubleshooting for those faults.
SCR Dynamic Brake Fault, SCR DYN BRAKE FAULT
Description: Indicates either more than 18-volts across dynamic braking resistor or dynamic brake input
from SCR drive is active. DC controls only.
Troubleshooting:
1. If fault occurs with no other SCR Drive faults in Event Log, likely that a different failure such as AC Phase
Failure occurred but occurred too quickly to be captured.
2. If other SCR drive faults present, possible defective dynamic brake SCR or SCR-LG9A) board.
SCR Excessive Armature Current, SCR EXS ARM CURRENT
Description: Armature feedback current exceeded 200% of rated armature current within 250 milliseconds
after run enabled. Triggers Drive Forced fault if encountered 4 times within 7 run attempts. DC controls only.
Troubleshooting:
1. Run car on inspection while monitoring armature current versus command current. Verify both are
approximately equal.
2. Check interpole feedback, filter capacitors (SCR page of job prints), any component in loop feedback
from SCR drive out to motor and back to drive.
3. Verify drive header current and voltage.
4. Check serial cable between iBox and drive.
5. Check SCR-LGA board (section 8).
SCR Excessive Current Command, Drive Disabled, SCR EXS CURRENT CMD DD
Description: Current command output greater than 200mV before run enable. DC controls only.
Troubleshooting:
1. Verify standard control gains (proportional, integral) on drive screens.
SCR Excessive Current Command, Drive Enabled, SCR EXS CURRENT CMD DE
Description: Current command output greater than 7VDC within 300mS after enabling run enable relay,
drive enabled. DC controls only.
Troubleshooting:
1. Check serial cable between iBox and drive.
2. Check SCR-LGA board (section 8).
6-63
Troubleshooting

iControl Messages
SCR High Temp Fault, SCR HIGH TEMP FAULT
Description: Indicates ambient temperature in System 12 drive exceeded 170 degrees F or bad or failing
SCR. iControl attempts to bring car to nearest floor before shutdown. Clears if temp drops below threshold.
Car Reaction: Stop at nearest floor. Car out of service until fault cleared.
Troubleshooting:
1. Check for excessive ambient temperature.
2. Check for insufficient air flow, especially if fault occurs when car running and clears when car is stopped.
Verify fan is operating properly. Check fan fuse.
3. Check for bad or failing SCR.
4. Check for defective fault-generating thermostat. There are two heat sensors, one on each heat sink.
Check integrity of heat sensor normally closed contacts.
5. Check drive rated armature current to determine if it is operating close to limit threshold. Please refer to
Current Limit Adjustments in Section 2.
SCR Instantaneous Over Current, SCR INST OVER CURRENT
Description: Indicates System 12 SCR Drive detected excessive armature current. DC controls only.
Troubleshooting:
1. Check if main supply is being shut off during regeneration.
2. Check for a clipped door lock.
3. Check for a motor connection problem.
4. Possible failure of an SCR in the System 12 Drive.
SCR Insufficient Armature Current, SCR INSF ARM CURRENT
Description: Indicates insufficient armature feedback current. Generated if requested current at least 20% of
rated armature current yet detected feedback remains below 10% of rated armature current. Automatically
resets if detected four or fewer times in seven consecutive runs. DC controls only.
Troubleshooting:
1. Check Armature Voltage Limit/Armature Current Limit settings on iView/Drive/Safety.If fault occurs with
car running at speed, adjust Motor Field so armature voltage is within rated motor armature voltage.
2. Verify current sensor connection on SCR-LGA board (section 8). Check SCR-LGA board.
3. Check serial cable from drive to iBox.
4. Monitor Up and Down direction inputs on SCR-LGA (bottom of R14 down, bottom of R22 up). If momen-
tary drop in direction signal before run complete, use jumpers to determine if a section of safety string is
failing. WARNING: Car must be on Independent Service before performing test.
5. If failure persists, make sure current signal on SCR-LGA board test point TP3 is not dropping out.
SCR Loop Over Current, SCR LOOP OVER CURRENT
Description: DC loop current has grossly exceeded the reference value.
Car Reaction: Emergency Stop. DC controls only.
Troubleshooting:
1. Verify that the brake is completely lifting.
2. Check that the load in the car is not in excess of full load.
SCR Low Line Caution Activated, SCR Low Line Caution, SCR LOW LINE CAUTION
Description: iBox detects line voltage to System 12 Drive between 80% and 95% of rated armature voltage.
Line voltage tested every time elevator stops. Detected percentage based on Rated Armature Voltage setting
on iView Drive Configuration screen > General tab. DC controls only.
Car Reaction: None. Elevator speed is limited to the detected line voltage percentage.
Troubleshooting:
1. Verify Rated Armature Voltage value is correct. RMS value (AC phase measurement on a voltmeter) at
TP4 on System 12 SCR-LGA board reflects line voltage divided by one hundred (The RMS values of line-
to-line voltages at wye and delta connections of drive or secondary isolation transformer).
2. Verify voltage into primary of Drive Isolation Transformer is not sagging.
3. Check drive header rating against voltage on isolation transformer secondary.
6-64 Manual # 42-02-2223


iControl Messages
SCR Low Line Caution Deactivated. See SCR Low Line Caution Activated.
Description: iBox detected line voltage to System 12 Drive above 90% of rated armature voltage (see SCR
Low Line Caution (Activated)). DC controls only.
SCR Low Line Fault, SCR LOW LINE FAULT
Description: System 12 AC line voltage dropped below 95% of SCR-LGA header value. DC controls only.
Car Reaction: Car will not move.
Troubleshooting:
1. Verify Rated Armature Voltage value. RMS value (AC phase measurement on voltmeter) at TP4 on Sys-
tem 12 SCR-LGA board reflects line voltage divided by one hundred (RMS values of line-to-line voltages
at wye and delta connections of drive or secondary isolation transformer).
2. Verify voltage into primary of Drive Isolation Transformer is not sagging. 6
3. Check drive header rating against voltage on isolation transformer secondary.
SCR Low Line Test Fault
Description: Test for line voltage to System 12 drive failed. DC controls only.
Car Reaction: None. Previous line voltage test values are used.
Troubleshooting: Possible internal hardware error on iBox trying to update System 12 drives MDAC.
SCR Phase Lock Loop Fault, SCR PHASE LCK LP FLT
Description: Phase lock loop circuit PLL LED ON in SCR-LGA and System 12 Drive unable to lock onto incom-
ing line frequency. PLL LED normally on for a few seconds during power up. DC controls only.
Troubleshooting:
1. Contact MCE technical support.
SCR Phase Lock Loop Warning
Description: Phase lock loop circuit PLL LED ON in SCR-LGA and System 12 Drive unable to lock onto incom-
ing line frequency. PLL LED normally on for a few seconds during power up. DC controls only.
Troubleshooting:
1. Verify PLL indicator is active on SCR-LGA board.
2. Verify iBox not resetting SCR drive. If so, PLL indicator active for short interval. For recurring fault, iBox
resets SCR drive every 15 seconds. If so, there may be underlying fault iBox is trying to clear.
3. Contact MCE technical support.
SCR Power Supply Fault, SCR POWER SUPPLY FLT
Description: Indicates that power supplied to System 12 SCR Drive is insufficient. DC controls only.
Troubleshooting:
1. Check all supply voltages on the SCR-PS board (section 8). Check the F2D fuse.
2. Verify voltages inside drive are within 1%. If voltages correct, check drive cable from iBox to drive.
Check the SCR-LGA board (section 8).
Secondary Fire Switch On, SEC FIRE SWITCH ON
Description: The Secondary Fire Recall Switch is in the ON position.
Car Reaction: Car will recall to Main fire recall floor, position its doors as indicated on Car Operation > Fire
Service > Fire Code > Fire Recall tab, and await activation of in-car firefighter switch.
Troubleshooting: If in error, check Secondary Fire Recall switch input.
Serial COP Bus n Comm Fault, SCOP BUS n COMM FAULT (n = 1 - 4)
Description: Lost communication: ICE-CTP (cartop) and ICE-COP (serial COP) boards over 1.5 seconds.
Car Reaction: none
Troubleshooting:
1. Check cable between ICE-CTP and ICE-COP boards.
2. Check for high electrical noise interference.
3. Check for proper shielding of cables (board to board and board to controller).
6-65
Troubleshooting

iControl Messages
Serial COP Bus n Inventory Fault, SCOP BUS n INVENTORY FLT (n = 1 - 4)
Description: Lost communication between ICE-COP (serial COP) board and ICE-COP-x boards. Could indicate
ICE-COP-x board was connected or disconnected after system powered up (I/O inventory changed).
Car Reaction: none
Troubleshooting:
1. Check for bad cable(s) between the ICE-COP and ICE-COP-x boards.
2. Check for a bad ICE-COP-x board.
3. Press the RESET button on the ICE-COP board (takes a new inventory).
Sheave Brake Drop Fault, SHEAVE BRAKE DROP FLT
Description: Sheave brake disabled via Sheave Brake Enable output, Sheave Brake Monitor input high.
There is a five second delay before fault is generated.
Car Reaction: Emergency stop: Motor brake contactors immediately dropped. All calls cancelled. Doors cycle.
Troubleshooting:
1. Verify Sheave Brake Monitor input and Sheave Brake Enable output programmed (Configuration > I/O
Boards > Configuration tab).
2. Check voltage at Sheave Brake Monitor input and internal representation via View button on Configura-
tion > I/O Boards > Configuration tab.
3. Check voltage at Sheave Brake Enable output and internal representation via View button on Configura-
4. Check sheave brake mechanism and circuitry.
Sheave Brake Pick Fault, SHEAVE BRAKE PICK FLT
Description: Sheave brake enabled via Sheave Brake Enable output, but Sheave Brake Monitor input low.
There is a five second delay before a fault is generated.
Car Reaction: Emergency stop: Motor/brake contactors immediately dropped. All calls cancelled. Doors cycle.
Troubleshooting:
1. Verify Sheave Brake Monitor input and Sheave Brake Enable output programmed (Configuration > I/O
Boards > Configuration tab).
2. Check voltage at Sheave Brake Monitor input and internal representation via View button on Configura-
3. Check voltage at Sheave Brake Enable output and internal representation via View button on Configura-
4. Check sheave brake mechanism and circuitry.
Shuttle Service Activated, SHUTTLE SERVICE ON
Description: Indicates Shuttle service activated via key-switch/input, software command or timer.
Shuttle Service Deactivated, SHUTTLE SERVICE OFF (see Shuttle Service Activated)
Silent Mode Activated
Description: Indicates Silent mode activated via Activate button (Controller > View > Configuration > Car
Operation > Devices tab), timer (System > Configuration tabs > Timer Tables) or iMonitor.
Silent Mode Deactivated (see Silent Mode Activated).
Single Channel QUAD Fault, SNG CHANNEL QUAD FLT
Description: Indicates failure of one of two landing system quadrature signals (DP1 or DP2).
Troubleshooting:
1. Check DP1 and DP2 wiring from the landing system to the iBox.
Software Recall Switch Activated, SOFTWARE RECALL ON
Description: The software recall command has been activated via iMonitor.
Car Reaction: Car recalls to specified floor. Car calls, doors operate per software recall command parameters.
Troubleshooting: Check the status of the recall command and related parameters.
SPA Spare Event n (n = 1 to 8)
Description: SPA Spare Events 1 through 8 are used for testing.
6-66 Manual # 42-02-2223


iControl Messages
Speed Limit, MF Forcing, SPD LMT MF FORCING
Description: System detected armature current without armature current command. (The motor field is
forced to help dynamic braking slow the car.) DC controls only.
Car Reaction:
Troubleshooting:
1. Check that the brake is setting properly.
Stuck Cartop Inspection Input, STUCK CT INSP. INPUT
Description: Monitoring enabled by Monitor cartop and car panel inspection inputs option (Setup > Safety >
Configuration). On passenger operation, generated if cartop inspection inputs (CTEN, ICTU, ICTD) remain
high for more than 250msec. On inspection, generated if any combination of cartop inspection inputs remain
high more than five seconds, except Enable plus Up (CTEN + ICTU) and Enable plus Down (CTEN + ICTD). 6
Car Reaction: None
Troubleshooting: Check and fix the car panel inspection buttons and related circuitry (Enable, Up, Down).
Stuck Car Panel Inspection Input, STUCK CP INSP. INPUT
Description: Monitoring enabled by Monitor cartop and car panel inspection inputs option (Setup > Safety >
Configuration). On passenger operation, generated if car panel inspection inputs (ICEN, ICPU, ICPD) remain
high more than 250msec. On inspection, generated if any combination of car panel inspection inputs remain
high for more than five seconds, except Enable plus Up (ICEN + ICPU) and Enable plus Down (ICEN + ICPD).
Car Reaction: None
Troubleshooting: Check and fix the cartop inspection buttons and related circuitry (Enable, Up, Down).
Stuck Inspection Input Fault, STUCK IN. INPUT FLT
Description: Generated when stuck inspection input detected during passenger operation (see Stuck Cartop /
Car Panel Inspection Input message). Not generated if car on inspection. To avoid entrapment, fault is not
generated until car has reached a floor.
Car Reaction: All hall calls reassigned or canceled. Car will complete run. When at a floor, doors cycled to let
passengers out and car calls canceled. Car is shut down and remains out-of-service until fault is cleared.
Troubleshooting: Check and fix all inspection inputs/buttons. Then press the iBox Fault reset button.
Swing Operation Activated, Swing Operation, SWING OPERATION
Description: Indicates car is in swing car operation, independent of Group Controller. Car should be servicing
hall call riser dedicated to car. Car will use settings from Simplex Hall Call and Parking settings from car Sim-
plex supervisor screens.
Swing Operation Deactivated. See Swing Operation Activated.
SYSTEM SYNC
Description: The iBox is establishing communication with the cartop and acquiring position data.
Tach Error Fault, TACH ERROR FAULT
Description: Difference between intended speed and speed feedback signal exceeded Following Error.
Car Reaction: Emergency stop: Motor and brake contactors immediately dropped. Followed by normal run.
Troubleshooting:
1. Please refer to Tach Error Tripping Threshold Adjustment on page 4-39.
Tach Failure, TACH FAILURE
Description: Difference between synthetic tach signal and external speed feedback signal exceeded toler-
ance. DC controls only.
Troubleshooting:
1. Check velocity encoder and re-calibrate tach failure and synthetic tach. Please refer to Tach Failure Cal-
ibration on page 2-62 and see synthetic speed Calibration on page 4-18.
TERMINAL LEARN ON
Description: This message indicates system prepared to learn speed and position values for normal (UNT1-5/
DNT1-5) and emergency (UETS/DETS) terminal switches.
6-67
Troubleshooting

iControl Messages
Terminal Synchronization Fault, TERMINAL SYNC FAULT
Description: System did not receive edge position data from cartop or did not detect a floor position magnet
where expected.
Car Reaction: Car stops after crossing floor magnet at top or bottom terminal and is not allowed to move.
Troubleshooting:
1. Verify car was not moved after power shut off.
2. Verify up/down normal terminal switch #5 opens at correct location. When up/down switch opens, no LU
or LD sensor should be active. Also, only one floor magnet should be encountered in direction of travel
after up/down switch opens.
3. Move car past floors around vicinity of fault and verify proper activation of LU and LD sensors.
4. Verify system is communicating with cartop (no Cartop Communication Fault).
5. Verify absolute and cartop positions change by same amount and same direction while moving car.
6. Verify terminal magnet has not fallen off.
7. Check clearance between floor sensor board and magnets. Sometimes clearance will be off enough to
make some magnets fail to register. Adjust clearance if necessary.
8. Re-learn the floor heights. The iLink, iLand or iBox may be faulty.
Test Mode, Test
Description: Elevator in the Test mode. iBox Test switch in Test position.
Car Reaction: Door operation is disabled. This setting is used to adjust or test the elevator.
This Car Alternate Fire Sensor Recall, THIS CAR ALT FIRE
Description: Recall to alternate fire floor due to active or latched smoke detector input(s) from cars hoistway
or machine room.
Car Reaction: Car proceeds to user-defined alternate fire recall floor. At recall floor, door operation per user-
defined door operation under fire recall operation. The fire warning indicator light will flash.
Troubleshooting:
1. If in error, inspect sensors, inputs, and connections.
2. Related Inputs: This Car Alt Recall sensor inputs as shown on the job prints.
This Car Main Fire Sensor Recall, THIS CAR MAIN FIRE
Description: Recall to main fire floor for active/latched smoke detector input from hoistway or machine room.
Car Reaction: Car proceeds to user-defined main fire recall floor. Once at recall floor, door operation per
user-defined door operation under fire recall operation. The fire warning indicator light will flash.
Troubleshooting:
2. Related Inputs: This Car Main Recall sensor inputs as shown on the job prints.
Unintended Motion Fault (see Safety A Unintended Motion Fault)
Up Direction Limit Open, UP DIR LIMIT OPEN
Description: Up normal terminal direction switch open
Car Reaction: Immediate stop if moving. Further up direction movement prevented.
Troubleshooting:
1. Verify switch operating properly.
2. Verify correct state of iBox UNTD input.
3. Verify UNTD switch activating/deactivating at appropriate location (normally 2 below bottom terminal
landing - see prints).
6-68 Manual # 42-02-2223


iControl Messages
Up Emergency Terminal Switch Position Fault, UP ETS POSITION FAULT
Description: Reported position upon encountering Terminal Switch differed from learned position by more
than set margin. Fault may be bypassed on Diagnostics > Fault Bypass tab.
Car Reaction: Emergency Stop: Motor and brake contactors immediately dropped. Hall and car calls can-
celled. After car is stopped, it will run at Correction speed to next available floor and cycle doors. Door Open
button will remain operational. If generated when car moving, fault latched and Fault Reset button must be
pushed to clear it. If generated when car not moving, fault will self clear when condition no longer exists.
Troubleshooting:
1. Physically check integrity of switch and wiring.
2. Check iBox input for switch.
3. On Diagnostics > Terminal Switches Status tab, compare Last pass position to Learned position for 6
switch. Verify Position Margin is reasonable (Configuration > Terminal Switches tab). If appropriate,
move switch closer to terminal landing.
4. Relearn NTS and ETS switches. Please refer to Learning Normal & Emergency Terminal Limit Switches
on page 4-8.
Up Emergency Terminal Switch Shutdown, UP ETS SHUTDOWN
Description: Up Emergency Terminal Switch opened at speed or position exceeding specified threshold. Fault
stays latched and Fault Reset button must be pushed to clear it. If generated car stopped, fault will self clear
when condition no longer exists.
Troubleshooting:
1. Logged in conjunction with speed or position fault at UETS. Check Event Log. Follow troubleshooting for
Up Emergency Terminal Switch Position Fault or Safety A/B UETS Level 2 Speed Fault.
2. Press iBox Fault Reset to clear the fault.
Up Normal Terminal Switch n Level 1 Speed Fault, UP NTSn L1 SPEED FLT (n = 1 to 5)
Description: Level 1 Overspeed fault detected at Up Normal Terminal switch 'n' (1 to 5). When switch
opened, car traveling faster than defined Level 1 overspeed settings (sum of learned speed plus Overspeed 1
Margin percentage setting on Configuration > Terminal Switches tab) but not fast enough to trigger Level 2
overspeed fault. This fault may be bypassed on the Diagnostics > Fault Bypass tab.
Car Reaction: Controlled stop using Emergency Slowdown pattern parameters.
Troubleshooting:
1. On Diagnostics > Terminal Switches Status tab, compare Last pass and Learned speeds for switch. If
2. May be caused by a change in Pattern parameters. Always re-learn terminal switches after any change to
Pattern parameters.
3. One or two floor runs may come in hotter than multi-floor runs.(switches learned making full hatch
runs). If short runs cause problem, increase Overspeed 1 Margin (Configuration > Terminal Switches
tab) or lower Standard profile - High Roll Jerk parameter (Configuration > Pattern > Modes tab.
4. May be caused by car following pattern poorly due to heavy load or poor speed loop performance. In this
case, adjust speed loop to follow pattern as well as possible and/or alter pattern parameters to produce
gentler deceleration and approach (then re-learn switches).Please refer to Terminal Switch Overspeed
and Position Faults on page 4-53.
6-69
Troubleshooting

iControl Messages
Up Normal Terminal Switch n Level 2 Speed Fault, UP NTSn L2 SPEED FLT (n = 1 to 5)
Description: Level 2 Overspeed fault detected at Up Normal Terminal switch 'n' (1 to 5). Car traveling faster
than defined Level 2 overspeed settings (105% of sum of learned speed plus Overspeed 1 Margin percentage
on Configuration >Terminal Switches tab). Fault may be bypassed on Diagnostics >Fault Bypass tab.
Troubleshooting:
1. Check Diagnostics > Terminal Switches Status tab to see how fast car was traveling on Last pass by
switch. Check against Learned speed for switch. If appropriate, increase Overspeed 1 Margin on Config-
uration > Terminal Switches tab.
2. May be caused by change in Pattern parameters. Re-learn terminal switches after changes to Pattern.
3. One or two floor runs may come in hotter than multi-floor runs. (Switches learned making full hatch
runs.) If short runs cause this, increase Overspeed 1 Margin or lower Standard profile - High Roll Jerk.
4. Can be caused by car following pattern poorly due to heavy load or poor speed loop performance. Adjust
speed loop to follow pattern as well as possible and/or alter pattern parameters to produce gentler decel-
eration and approach (re-learn switches). Please refer to Terminal Switch Overspeed and Position
Faults on page 4-53.
Up Normal Terminal Switch n Position Fault, UP NTSn POSITION FLT (n = 1 to 6)
Description: When switch opened or closed, car reported position different from learned position by value
exceeding margin set on Configuration > Terminal Switches tab. May mean switch opened early, late or not
at all on approach to terminal. May also mean switch closed early, late, or not at all on departure from termi-
nal. Finally, switch can go open while standing at a floor where learned position is closed, or go closed at a
floor where learned position is open. Fault may be bypassed on the Diagnostics > Fault Bypass tab.
Car Reaction: Traveling up, car executes emergency slowdown, continues at low speed until it encounters a
floor. Car stops at floor, opens doors, and performs floor sync operation. If fault persists, car goes out of ser-
vice. Traveling down, car continues to first stop, opens doors and performs floor sync operation. If fault per-
sists, car goes out of service. If stopped at a floor, car opens doors, does floor sync, and, if fault persists,
goes out of service.
Troubleshooting:
1. Diagnostics >Terminal Switches Status tab, compare Last pass position to Learned position for switch.
2. If fault is mechanical (switch movement, magnet movement), fault will tend to repeat at same position.
3. A stuck switch is easy to spot by running car on inspection and observing the input LEDs on the iBox.
4. Perform a Terminal Sync operation (Terminal button on the Configuration > Pattern > Common tab).
User code accessing an invalid logical indicator (internal event)
User Event n Off (n = 1- 10) (see User Defined Event n On)
User Event n On (n = 1 - 10), User Defined Event Fault, USER DEF EVENT FAULT
Description: Indicates that User Event x (1 - 10) has been activated via User Input n (1 - 10)
Car Reaction: Determined by user programming (Configuration > User Inputs tab)
Troubleshooting: Determined by user programming (Configuration > User Inputs tab)
Vector Checksum Fault (see Safety Inventory Checksum Fault)
Vector Comparison Fault (see Safety Inventory Comparison Fault)
Vector Creation Fault (see Safety Inventory Creation Fault)
Vector Learn Fault (see Safety Inventory Learn Fault)
Watchdog Ordered Control Stop Before Reset
Description: A critical component in the system has locked up.
Car Reaction: The car will come to a controlled stop and the system will reboot automatically.
Watchdog Ordered Emergency Stop Before Reset
Description: A critical component in the system has locked up.
Car Reaction: The car will perform an emergency stop and the system will reboot automatically.
6-70 Manual # 42-02-2223

iControl AC iBox Troubleshooting
iBox Troubleshooting
In this section:
iBox boot-up sequence
Upgrading iBox firmware
iBox removal and replacement
iBox boot-up sequence

The iBox provides visual feedback as boot-up progresses. The sequence is as follows:
1. :oo All of the status LEDs on the
iBox turn on momentarily. 6
2. :02 The Drive On LED turns on
indicating that the root task has
COMPUTER UP SAFETY OK
started. The Safety OK, Computer, SAFETY A DRIVE ON DOORS LOCKED
Safety A and Safety B LEDs turn on SAFETY B DOWN INSPECTION
as the safeties are checked. CARTOP RUN IN GROUP
SYS COMM RELEVEL FAULT
3. :05 The message shown on the right appears on iBox

the LCD. Boot ROM
4. :06 The Down LED turns on indicating that the Version 4.0.0
EEPROMS have been read.
System Booting...
5. :07 The Run LED turns on indicating that the
application has loaded.
6. :10 The Relevel LED turns on indicating that the
application is running.
7. :20 All of the center column of LEDs turn off. @003 s 015 FG RO L03
8. :40 The LCD message turns off. Passenger
9. :50 The Standard LCD display appears and iCon-
trol begins normal operation. Ofpm
2:26:22AM
11/30/2009
Car Mgmt
If the iBox fails to boot-up as described, contact MCE Technical Support.
6-71
Troubleshooting
Updating iBox Firmware

iBox program files are stored in flash memory and can be updated in the field using the iView
PC. Please refer to Updating Controller Firmware on page 8-41.
iBox Removal and Replacement

The configuration file for the original iBox can be uploaded from a computer to the replacement
iBox so that many operational settings remain in place. Some information, like floor heights
and brake calibration, etc., may need to be re-learned when an iBox is replaced. This section
contains:
iBox Configuration > Save
iBox Removal
iBox Installation
iBox Configuration > Load
iBox Configuration > Save

You can easily save the configuration information for the iBox to a computer hard drive (see
Saving Current Parameters to a Configuration File on page 8-21). Some or all of the informa-
tion in this file can then be uploaded to the same or another iBox, simplifying configuration.
1. Locate the Configuration file for the iBox you need to replace (default location is My
Documents > Motion Control Engineering> iView > Configurations). If no Configura-
tion file exists, depending on the nature of the malfunction, you may be able to create a
Configuration file now:
2. Connect to the iBox through its #3 PC Ethernet connector.
3. Select Save from the File > Configuration menu.
A typical Windows save dialog will appear. The default name suggested for the file will be the
controller connection name and date.cfg, e.g., if the connection name was Car A, the suggested
file name would be CarA_mm_dd_yyyy.cfg. The default file suggested (My Documents >
Motion Control Engineering> iView > Configurations) will be the file folder that contains the
connection icon for the controller. You may change either or both of the default suggestions and
store the file wherever you wish under any name you wish. As with any Windows file, if you
change or delete the file extension (.cfg) it will lose its association with the application that cre-
ated it. It is best to leave the file extension as-is.
4. Save the file to the desired location.
iBox Removal
1. Shut off power at the main disconnect. Open the iControl cabinet.
2. Loosen the iBox cover retaining screws and remove the cover.
3. Unplug all connections to the body of the iBox. You can leave the connections to the rail-
mounted circuit boards above and below the iBox connected.
4. Slightly loosen the retaining screws for the rail-mounted circuit boards and slide them
away from the iBox (disconnecting the pluggable central bus).
5. Loosen the four captive, retaining screws that secure the iBox to the circuit board rails.
6. Remove the iBox.
6-72 Manual # 42-02-2223

iControl AC Replacing Circuit Boards
iBox Installation
1. Verify that power is off at the main disconnect. Open the iControl cabinet.
2. Remove the cover (bezel) from the new iBox.
3. Secure the new iBox in position between the rail-mounted circuit boards.
4. Slide the rail-mounted circuit boards above and below the iBox back into position so
that the central bus is plugged back in.
5. Tighten the retaining screws for the iBox and all of the circuit boards.
6. Reinstall the iBox cover.
7. Reconnect all cabling to the body of the iBox.
iBox Configuration > Load 6

While online (connected to a controller, you may select a Configuration (.cfg) file and send all or
selected data from that file to the controller. Please refer to Loading Parameters from a Config-
uration File on page 8-22.
Replacing Circuit Boards

Peripheral circuit boards in iControl and in the iLink cartop box are connected along a central,
pluggable bus. The boards are mounted on slide-tracks so that, if you need to replace a board
you can loosen the mounting bolts of the boards above or below it, slide them away, then
loosen, slide, and remove the board you need to replace. In iControl, the central bus extends
both above and below the iBox.
Figure 6.1 Circuit Board Removal and Replacement
Board retaining
screws: Loosen to
slide board
Pluggable central
bus connectors
Note
Before using iView to assign or reassign inputs or outputs to I/O boards, consult MCE so that your job
prints can be corrected. Remember that reassigning an input or output will also require appropriate re-
routing of the wiring.
6-73
Troubleshooting
iControl Circuit Board Quick References

This section contains information about iControl circuit boards and assemblies. The circuit
boards are listed in the table below. If you are viewing this file on a computer, click the page
number to jump to the appropriate section.
Table 6.4 iControl Circuit Boards
Board Name Where Used See

ICE-COP Serial Car Operating Panel Board Car Operating Panels page 6-75
ICE-CTP-2 Car Top Processor Board iLink Car Top Interconnect page 6-78
ICE-EB Emergency Brake Board iControl AC and DC page 6-82
ICE-FML Field Module Logic Board iControl AD, DC page 6-83
ICE-IEQ Earthquake Board iControl AC, DC page 6-84
ICE-IMP Main Processor Board iControl AC, DC page 6-88
ICE-IRB Relay Board iControl AC, DC page 6-90
ICE-IRD Rear Door Board iControl AC, DC page 6-93
ICE-LCB Low Current Brake Board iControl AC, DC page 6-94
ICE-MIAC Multiple Input (120V) AC Board
iControl AC, DC, iCentral Group, iLink page 6-95
ICE-MIAC-24V Multiple Input (24V) AC or DC Board
ICE-MOR Multiple Output Relay Board iControl AC, DC, iCentral Group, iLink page 6-97
ICE-RG-2 Rope Gripper Board iControl AC, DC page 6-99
ICE-SAF Safety Board iControl AC, DC page 6-100
ICE-SF Serial Fixture Board iControl AC, DC page 6-105
SC-HCDA-ISO Serial Hall Call Driver Isolation Board iControl AC, DC Simplex / Swing Car page 6-106
SC-HCE-2 Serial Hall Call ethernet - Digi Board iCentral Group page 5-23
SC-HCE-ME Serial Hall Call Ethernet - Digi Board iCentral Group page 5-23
SC-HCNT Serial Hall Call Node Board Hall Call Fixture Enclosures page 6-106
SC-ION Serial Control I/O Node Board iCentral Group page 6-107
6-74 Manual # 42-02-2223

iControl AC iControl Circuit Board Quick References
ICE-COP-2 Serial Car Operating Panel Board

The ICE-COP-2 board interfaces between analog devices in the elevator car and serial devices in
the elevator controller. Multiple ICE-COP-2 boards may be daisy-chained together to accom-
modate high-rise installations.
Board connection is described in detail on the prints for the specific job.
Normal Operation
During normal operation, I/O LEDs will be lighted when the associated I/O is active (dimmer
when the output is active; brighter when the input is active). The SPA processor LED will be
continuously lighted. If I/O LEDs remain in a static condition or the SPA processor LED is not
continuously on: 6
Press the RST button on the board. The I/O LEDs will all cycle and the board will resume
operation.
Select RS485 communication: DIP switch S2, rocker 8 to the OFF position.
Input Threshold Level:
DIP switch S2, rocker 5 OFF = 900mV
DIP switch S2, rocker 5 ON = 700mV
Other DIP switch S2 rockers: 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 7 - OFF (Default).
Board Diagnostics
DIP switches and the I/O status LEDs also provide diagnostic information. When diagnosing
the board, you may:
Set the two bottom DIP switches (1 and 2) to the ON position.
I/O 1 and 2 LEDs will flash if RS485 with the cartop is good. LED1 monitors received
data; LED 2 monitors transmitted data. If an LED is not flashing, that phase of com-
munication has failed.
I/O 4 and 5 LEDs will flash if ICE-EXP-IN port communication with the preceding
board in the chain is good. LED 4 monitors received data; LED 5 monitors transmitted
data. If an LED is not flashing, that phase of communication has failed.
I/O 7 and 8 LEDs will flash very rapidly (appearing to remain on) if ICE-EXP-OUT
port communication with the next board in the chain is good. LED 7 monitors received
data; LED 8 monitors transmitted data. If an LED is not flashing, that phase of com-
munication has failed.
Over voltage detection:
Set all DIP switches OFF:
LEDs will scroll upwards if 33 VDC or greater is detected between V+ and COM.
Under voltage detection:
Set all DIP switches OFF:
LEDs will scroll downwards if 18 VDC or less is detected between V+ and COM.
6-75
Troubleshooting
Software Version Query

Used by themselves (not in conjunction with another DIP switch as in Diagnostics), switches 1,
2, and 3 will separately display the board software version level (iControl only):
Switch 1 ON will display the low version number on the first 8 LEDs (IO1 - IO8).
Switch 2 ON will display the middle version number on the first 8 LEDs (IO1 - IO8).
Switch 3 ON will display the high version number on the first 8 LEDs (IO1 - IO8).
The number is expressed in binary format with IO1 the least significant and IO8 the most signif-
icant value.
Table 7. iControl Software Version Number Example
IO8=128 IO7=64 IO6=32 IO5=16 IO4=8 IO3=4 IO2=2 IO1=1 Value

S1 OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF 16
S2 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF 8
S3 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON 3
Example software version: 3.8.16
If you do a software version query, BE SURE to set the DIP switch rockers (1, 2,
3,4, 6, 7 back to OFF afterwards. OFF is their default.
6-76 Manual # 42-02-2223

Figure 6.2 ICE-COP-2 Serial Car Operating Panel Board

4-pin universal inputs may be used
instead of screw terminals if desired. Test points,+5v
OUT to additional
ICE-COP boards
(RJ45)
Reset button
8-position DIP
switch package
6
I/O Status LEDs
I/O SPA processor OK

connections
24 VDC
6W max.
Test point,+3.3v
To CTP board in NOT USED for

iLink Cartop box iControl
IN from additional
ICE-COP boards
(RJ45)
+24VDC power
for COP
Board power buttons
input. See
prints.
Test point COM, GND

CAR CALL
BUTTON
+24V
Caution
This system is designed for 24 VDC cir-
cuits only. Connecting 120VAC or DC will
open the input fuses and may damage the COM
board. +24V SIGNAL
Connection Example:
Universal 4-pin inputs
COM
6-77
Troubleshooting
ICE-CTP Cartop Processor Board

The Cartop Processor board handles local control and communications for the iLink cartop
interconnect. Like the iBox, the Cartop Processor usually has track-mounted expansion boards
for extra inputs and outputs.
Figure 6.3 ICE-CTP-2 Cartop Processor Board
Ground Test point
LED, Computer On
RST OUT test point
Diagnostic Switches
Load Weigher test point

LW
Clock Out test point
CTS Cartop Safety Relay,

part of the safety string
TP_LW test point
Load Weigher adjust,

Refer to iControl User
Manual, Section 5 for
adjustment instructions
Ground test point
Connectors for serial

Front door level sensor
Car Operating Panel
from iLand
COP boards
Rear door level sensor
from iLand
6-78 Manual # 42-02-2223

Table 6.1 ICE-CTP-2 Board Connections
Terminal Description
1 Common
DLSP Door Logic Supply (See job prints for source level)
2 120VAC
DOF Door Open Function output (active level =DLSP)
DBF Door Boost Function output (active level =DLSP)
DCF Door Close Function output (active level =DLSP)
NUDG Door Nudge output (active level =DLSP)
SP1 Spare Input (120VAC signal level)
SP2 Spare Input (120VAC signal level) 6
SP3 Spare Input (120VAC signal level)
IMP_RST Reset from ICE-IMP board
SE (Door) Safe Edge Input (120VAC signal level)
PHE Photo Eye input (120VAC signal level)
DOL Door Open Limit input (120VAC signal level)
DCL Door Close Limit input (120VAC signal level)
DPM Door Position Monitor input (120VAC signal level)
ICTD Cartop inspection down button (110VDC= switch closed)
ICTU Cartop inspection up button (110VDC= switch closed)
INCT Cartop inspection switch active (110VDC= switch closed)
GS Gate Switch input (110VDC= switch closed)
GS-R Gate Switch Rear (110VDC= switch closed)
ULM-R Up Level Marker Rear output (110VDC= output active)
DZ-R Door Zone Rear (110VDC= output active)
DLM-R Down Level Marker Rear (110VDC= output active)
ULM Up Level Marker (110VDC= output active)
DZ Door Zone (110VDC= output active)
DLM Down Level Marker (110VDC= output active)
1 Common
2 120VAC
3 110VDC
SCT1 Cartop Safety Contact 1 (110VDC= contact closed)
SCT2 Cartop Safety Contact 2 (110VDC= contact closed)
6-79
Troubleshooting
Table 6.2 ICE-CTP-2 Board Connections
SHLD Shield: Common
+26V 26V output to load weigher
LW- Input from Load Weigher (analog voltage)
LW+ Input from Load Weigher (analog voltage)
DP2- Position input from iLand (balanced pair with DP2+)
DP2+ Position input from iLand (balanced pair with DP2-)
SHLD Shield: Common. Wire from shield associated with DP2.
DP1- Position input from iLand (balanced pair with DP1+)
DP1+ Position input from iLand (balanced pair with DP1-)
SHLD Shield: Common. Wire from shield associated with DP1
TX+ Transmit to iBox (connect to iBox terminal RX+)
TX- Transmit to iBox (connect to iBox terminal RX-)
SHLD Shield: Common. Wire from shield associated with TX.
RX+ Receive from iBox (connect to iBox terminal TX+)
RX- Receive from iBox (connect to iBox terminal TX-)
SHLD Shield: Common. Wire from shield associated with RX.
Table 6.3 ICE-CTP-2 Board Testpoints
Test point State

GND (x4) Ground test points
Volt (x8) +3.3, +E3.3, +5, -15, +15, -26, +26V
LW Measured from LW to TP_LW, 0.3 1.0 VDC = Empty car.
LW- Measured from LW- to TP_L@, -0.3 -1.0 VDC = Empty car.
TP_LW Measured from TP_LW to GND, 4 8 VDC = Full car.
RSTOUT 0V= computer reset
CLKOUT Microprocessor clock
ICE-CTP-2 Cartop Diagnostics

There are eight diagnostic LEDs on the CTP-2 board. On power up or reset, these LEDs will
light sequentially, first in one direction, then the other, after which they will briefly clear.
Diagnostic LED 1 Regardless of the switch settings, LED 8 is ON when an interrupt is

being serviced. In normal operation it turns on and off quickly enough that it is almost as bright
as a fully illuminated LED. If LED 8 stays OFF, it indicates that the board is not functioning
normally and should be reset (press the RESET button).
Note
If there is a problem with communication between the iBox and the CTP-2 board after initial
installation, verify that the iBox TX+ and TX- terminals are connected to the CTP-2 board RX+
and RX- terminals, and the iBox RX+ and RX- terminals are connected to the CTP-2 board TX+
and TX- terminals (see ICE-CTP-2 Board Connections on page 6-80).
6-80 Manual # 42-02-2223

Manual Reset Regardless of switch settings, the LEDs have the same meaning during
reset and startup.
When the reset button is release, the LEDs will light up one at a time in the following
sequence - (1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 7, 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1). Normal operation should commence
immediately following the reset sequence.
If the reset sequence consists of three iterations of all LEDs on at the same time followed by all
LEDs off, the board has been programmed with a non-production version of firmware. The
board should be reprogrammed.
Diagnostic Switches The Diagnostic Switches should all be in the fully OFF position in
normal operation. Be sure to push the switches firmly in the appropriate direction when setting
the switches. The use of a small screwdriver or ballpoint pen is recommended. 6
Normal Operation The normal operating condition is with all DIP switches OFF.
Table 6.4 Diagnostic Indicators (Normal Operation - All DIP Switches OFF)
LED Description
1 Message input from iBox to iLink. With normal communication, toggles every 80mS. Goes
OFF and stays OFF if input is lost.
2 Indicates cartop detected unintended motion safety fault. With the car on Passenger opera-
tion, after the car had reached a landing, the car moved at a speed greater than 150 feet-
per-minute.
3 Indicates that the cartop detected an unintended motion safety fault. With the car on
Inspection, after the car had reached a landing, the car moved with doors open.
4 Message output from iLink to iBox. With proper communication, toggles approximately every
80mS. Goes OFF and stays OFF if output is lost.
5 This is the alive indicator. It toggles every 80mS during normal operation.
6 Lights when the car is on Inspection mode.
7 Unused.
8 Indicates that an interrupt is being serviced. If it goes off and stays off, the board is not
functioning normally and should be reset (press the RESET button).
When the iBox is not active, only LED 5 will toggle. When the iBox is active and normal opera-
tions are in progress, LEDs 1, 4 and 5 will toggle regularly.
Firmware Download Firmware updates can be downloaded via iView. Normally, no

manual intervention is needed at the cartop. However, if a problem does develop, the following
may be of use in recovering:
1. Set the S1 DIP switches 1, 6 and 8 = ON.
2. Press the manual Reset button on the ICE-CTP-2 board. This tells the cartop firmware
to wait for a firmware download without attempting to run the normal cartop applica-
tion first.
3. Perform the firmware update using iView (File > Firmware Update).
6-81
Troubleshooting
ICE-EB Emergency Brake Board

The Emergency Brake board is used in iControl AC and DC elevator controllers to control a
hoist motor-mounted emergency brake. The emergency brake is typically a separate friction
brake mounted on an extended or secondary sheave.
Figure 6.4 ICE-EB Emergency Brake Board
Factory wiring connections Factory wiring connections
Central interconnect/control bus
Unintended Motion
Fault indicator
Signal presence Unintended Motion
indicators Fault reset button
Voltage testpoints Safety Processor Poll

Left-to-Right SPA
GND SPB
+3.3V
+5V
+24V
Fuse FEBP Fuse FEB2

1/10A, 250V, MDQ 1/2A, 250V, AGC
24VDC input 120VAC input
LED lighted = Fuse OK LED lighted = Fuse OK
Table 6.5 ICE-EB Board Inputs and Outputs
Connector Signal Connector Signal

EBP1: 0VAC= Brk picked, 120VAC= Brk engaged 1: Common
EBP2: 0VAC= Brk picked, 120VAC= Brk engaged 24X2: 24VDC input
EBP3: 0VAC= Brk picked, 120VAC= Brk engaged 24: 24VDC input
EBP4: 0VAC= Brk picked, 120VAC= Brk engaged 2: 120VAC input
EBS1: 120VAC= Brk OK (picked)
EBS2: 120VAC= Brk OK (picked)
EBR1: 120VAC= Brk picked, 0VAC= Brk engaged
EBR2: 120VAC= Brk picked, 0VAC= Brk engaged
The user makes no direct connections to this board. Refer to job prints for circuit information.
6-82 Manual # 42-02-2223

ICE-FML Field Module Logic Board

iField Modules are used to supply power to the brake on iControl AC and DC systems and to the
motor field on iControl with DC drive. The iField Modules used for both purposes are the same,
with the exception of the wiring to terminal J7 on the ICE-FMP, Field Module Power Board.
IFIELD-MODULE Specifications
Inputs: 70 VAC min, 300 VAC max, 1 Phase, 50/60Hz, 42 AMPS Maximum
Outputs: 0 VDC minimum, 265 VDC maximum, 45 AMPS Maximum
OVER-CURRENT PROTECTION REQUIRED ON INPUT
- For loads up to 30A - use Bussman type FNQ or LittleFuse type FLQ
- For loads over 30A - use Ferraz Shawmut type A50QS80-4 or LittleFuse type L50S80
6
Figure 6.5 ICE-FML Field Module Logic Board
Terminals
Indicators 1
+15ISO OK 2
F. BAD Fan
+15 OK Fan2
HI TEMP Temp1
TP +15 IGBT FLT Temp2
Terminals on
FMP board
FMO+
TP GND FMO-
TP ISO GND FMSI
TP +15 ISO FMCI
FMHC
FMS1
FMS2
FMLD
FMSO
FMX1
FMX2
TP BT1
TP BT2
To SAF
board
TP VI1
TP 60Hz Ref
To ICE-FMP TP VI2
TP -15
board
R74
6-83
Troubleshooting
Table 6.6 IFIELD-MODULE Indicators on the ICE-FML Board
Indicators Description
+15 ISO OK LED indicator for isolated +15V power supply, measured with respect to isolated
Ground, GND-ISO. Normally ON. Turns OFF when module loses +15 ISO voltage.
F. BAD LED indicator for AC input on FMX1 and FMX2 terminals (on FMP board). Normally
OFF. Turns ON when any input side AC fuse opens.
+15 OK LED indicator for +15V power supply, measured with respect to Ground. Normally
ON. Turns OFF when module looses +15V.
HI TEMP LED turns ON to indicate high temperature on the heatsink. Normally OFF. Turns ON
when the temperature of the main IGBT raises above 85oC (185oF).
IGBT FLT LED turns ON to indicate that the AUX IGBT has failed open.
Table 6.7 IFIELD MODULE Terminals on the ICE-FML Board
1 1 BUS: AC input supply to the ICE-FML Board.
2 2B BUS: AC input supply to the ICE-FML Board.
FAN 1 (not used) Terminals for connecting an external fan.
FAN 2 (not used) Terminals for connecting an external fan.
TEMP 1 (not used) Terminals for connecting an external temperature sensor.
TEMP 2 (not used) Terminals for connecting an external temperature sensor.
Table 6.8 IFIELD-MODULE Terminals on the ICE-FMP Board (Brake Module)
FMO+ Field Module Output, positive, to brake coil.
FMO- Field Module Output, negative, to brake coil.
FMSI Field Module Safety Input: Jumpered to FMSO. FMSI and FMSO are always jumpered
together unless there is a requirement for a mechanical safety contact to break
between the load and the field module.
FMCI Field Module Current Input: When load current is higher than 10A, jumper FMCI to
FMHC. For load current less than 10A, leave both FMCI and FMHC open.
FMHC Field Module High Current: See FMCI.
FMS1 Field Module Snubber 1: When used as a Brake Module, a shunt RC parallel network
(RB & CB) is connected between FMS1 and FMLD.
FMS2 Field Module Snubber 2: N/C
FMLD Field Module Load Diode: FMLD is connected to the cathode of a diode on the ICE-
FMP board. FMLD is also connected to RC network RB & CB (see FMS1).
FMSO Field Module Safety Output: Jumpered to FMSI. (see FMSI)
FMX1 AC power input to Field Module from brake contacts (70 VAC min, 300 VAC max)
FMX2 AC power input to Field Module from brake contacts (70 VAC min, 300 VAC max)
6-84 Manual # 42-02-2223

Table 6.9 IFIELD-MODULE Terminals on the ICE-FMP Board (Motor Field Module)
FMO+ Field Module Output, positive, to motor field.
FMO- Field Module Output, negative, to motor field.
FMSI Field Module Safety Input: Jumpered to FMSO. FMSI and FMSO are always jumpered
together unless there is a requirement for a mechanical safety contact to break
between the load and the field module.
FMCI Field Module Current Input: When load current is higher than 10A, jumper FMCI to
FMHC. For load current less than 10A, leave both FMCI and FMHC open.
FMHC Field Module High Current: See FMCI.
FMS1 Field Module Snubber 1: When used as a Motor Field Module, an RC filter network 6
(RM & CM) is connected between FMS1 and FMS2. FMS1 is also jumper to FMLD.
FMS2 Field Module Snubber 2: Connect to RC filter (CM) see FMS1.
FMLD Field Module Load Diode: FMLD is connected to the cathode of a diode on the ICE-
FMP board. FMLD is also jumpered to FMS1.
FMSO Field Module Safety Output: Jumpered to FMSI. (see FMSI)
FMX1 AC power input to Field Module (70 VAC min, 300 VAC max)
FMX2 AC power input to Field Module (70 VAC min, 300 VAC max)
6-85
Troubleshooting
ICE-IEQ Earthquake Board

The Earthquake board provides an interface between motion sensing devices and the iControl
elevator controller.
Figure 6.6 ICE-IEQ Earthquake Board
Testpoints
GND, On = EQ sensor tripped
+5V,
+3.3V Board Query LED
EQ Board Reset
Fuse FCW
EQSP LED 1/4A, 250V, MDQ
On = EQ fault
Off = No EQ fault
ESS LED
On = Normal
Off = Seismic device tripped
+24VDC Testpoint
CW2 LED, On = CW String OK
CW1 LED, On = CW String OK
Table 6.10 Earthquake Board Connections

EQSP 1:Spare. 0V=Normal. 120VAC=Tripped 1: Common
ESS: 120VAC= Normal, 0V= Tripped CWX2: 18VAC
(120VAC from #2 bus, through sensor to ESS)
CWX1: 18VAC
CW2: 24VDC= Normal, 0V= String shorted

CW1: 24VDC= Normal, 0V= String shorted
6-86 Manual # 42-02-2223

Figure 6.7 Earthquake Board, Supporting Information
6-87
Troubleshooting
ICE-IMP Main Processor Board

JP8, JP16
JP1
Test Points:
+1.5V TorqMax
+2.5V Interface
+3.3 B
+5V
DGND
RS 232 PC
Ethernet
3 = PC
Programming
port, factory
use only Ethernet
2 = SYSTEM
Ribbon cable to
Onboard Display Ethernet
1 = LAN
Internal CAN
JP14, JP13, JP12 +5V to power

supply shunt
IMP Flash
JP6
Internal CAN
CAN Trmnate
External CAN
AC 18V
Battery:
1/2 AA, 3.6V
Lithium Serial Hall
Call 1
Switches:
INSPECTION
UP
ENABLE
DOWN Serial Hall
CONTRLR. STOP Call 2
CAPTURE
TEST
FAULT BYPASS
WRITE ENABLE
LEARN Magnetek
C.DOOR BYPASS Interface
H.DOOR BYPASS
6-88 Manual # 42-02-2223

The ICE-IMP Main Processor Board provides central processing, data storage, control switches
and communication. The Onboard display and ICE-SAF boards plug into the ICE-IMP board.
Table 6.11 ICE-IMP Jumper Table
Jumper Setting Description

JP1 B I2C EEPROM Write Protect, A = ON, B = OFF
JP2 B MODCK1, processor speed setting
JP3 A MODCK2, processor speed setting
JP4 B MODCK3, processor speed setting
JP5 B Processor HRESET configuration
JP6 Battery SRAM power select (Battery/Regular) 6
JP7 B Socket 1 setting, A = Flash, B = SRAM
JP8 A CANH configuration to expansion boards (future)
JP9 ON CAN1 Termination
JP10 B RSTCONF, A = used for debugging, B = normal setting
JP11 ON CAN2 Termination
JP12 ON* IMP (iControl Main Processor): ON = enables iBox COMPUTER RESET button
to reset this processor.
*iBox Rev. 7 thru 10 have a wire from this jumper to the ICE-SAF board
which allows resetting if any power supply voltages are out of tolerance.
iBox Rev. 11 and above use an internal circuit for this purpose.
JP13 ON SPA (Safety Processor A): ON = enables iBox COMPUTER RESET button to
reset this processor.
JP14 ON SPB (Safety Processor B): ON = enables iBox COMPUTER RESET button to
reset this processor.
JP15 ON Serial interface transmit configuration
JP16 A CANL configuration to expansion boards (future)
6-89
Troubleshooting
ICE-IRB Relay Board

The Relay Board is an integral part of the iBox. Three system relays are mounted on the board.
The SAFT relay is socketed (replaceable). There are also six fuses protecting the 110VDC and
120VAC iBox output buses that may be replaced. Electrically, the Relay Board is between the
iBox processor and the motor and brake field modules inside the iPower Box. The SB and 3 ter-
minals are accessible through the front of the iBox and bypass the safety string when jump-
ered together. If a jumper is placed, it times out automatically after 15 minutes. In TSSA
jurisdictions, SB and 3 terminals are capped with insulators and are not front panel accessible.
Figure 6.8 ICE-IRB Relay Board
Motor Driver Relay

Brake Driver Relay TM Triac
Testpoints: Safety Relay
3.3V, 5.0V, 15V
Power Bus Fuses

250VAC,
Bussman MDQ or
Littelfuse Type 313
6-90 Manual # 42-02-2223

Table 6.12 ICE-IRB Relay Board
Signal (Left Edge) Signal (Right Edge)

BD: Brake Driver relay indicator. When the BD relay on M1: Drive contactor coil connection.
the Relay board is closed to pick the brake, this LED
will light. Monitored by Safety Processor A.
TB: Brake Triac active indicator. When the brake triac M2: Drive contactor coil connection.
on the Relay board is active (completes circuit for BD
relay), this LED will light. Monitored by Safety Proces-
sor B.
BRD: Brake Redundancy. This LED lights when the MR: Connects to drive contactor auxiliary contact
main brake contactor drops out. for redundancy input.
BDRD: Brake Drive Redundancy. This LED lights when MX: Connects to drive contactor auxiliary contact 6
the BD relay drops out. for brake qualification.
MD: Motor Drive relay indicator. When the MD relay on M: Part of MX circuit.
the Relay board is closed to enable the motor, this LED
will light. Monitored by Safety Processor A.
TM: Motor Triac active indicator. When the motor triac UP: Up direction output to MCE System 12 SCR
on the Relay board is active (completes circuit for MD Drive.
relay), this LED will light. Monitored by Safety Proces-
sor B.
MRD: Motor Redundancy. This LED lights when the DN: Down direction output to MCE System 12
main motor contactor drops out. SCR Drive.
MDRD: Motor Drive Redundancy. This LED lights when _ _: Not connected.
the MD relay drops out.
SAFC: Safety Cartop input. Cartop safety relays and 2D: 120VAC power to the drive. Fused on IRB
switches are wired in series between SAFH (Safety board (fuse F2D).
Hoistway) and SAFC. If any contact in the safety string
opens, there will be 0VDC on this input and the car will
not run. If all safety contacts in the string are closed,
there will be 110VDC on this input.
SAFH: Safety Hoistway input. Hoistway safety relays 1D: System common to the drive - source is the
and switches are wired in series between the #3 bus 1 bus.
and SAFH. The patch also includes the Governor
switch, with the GOV connection providing access to
the #3 bus via the governor switch. (#3 to GOV
through governor switch, GOV to SAFH through hoist-
way safety relays and switches). The job prints for the
job provide specific wiring instructions. If any contact
in the safety string opens, there will be 0VDC on this
input and the car will not run. If all safety contacts in
the string are closed, there will be 110VDC on this
input.
SP1 D: Optional input. See job prints. BK2: Connects to the brake contactor for redun-
dancy checking. The source of power for this cir-
cuit comes from fuse F2 on the IRB board.
SP2 D: Optional input. See job prints. (When used as BK1: Connects to the brake contactor for redun-
a brake pick switch input: Set brake = 110VDC. Picked dancy checking. The source of power for this cir-
brake = 0VDC. cuit comes from fuse F2 on the IRB board.
SP2: Optional input. See job prints. BC1: Connects to the brake contactor coil (see
job prints for connection).
SP3: Optional input. See job prints. BC2: Connects to the brake contactor coil (see
job prints for connection).
6-91
Troubleshooting
Signal (Left Edge) Signal (Right Edge)

SP4: Optional input. See job prints. SAF: When used, provides an additional SAF
relay.
1: (4x) Common bus connections. 0VDC 1: Common bus.
2PI: (2x) 120VAC outputs for position indicator. LED DOF: Door Open output.
ON = bus powered.
2: (2x) #2 bus outputs. 120VAC. 2 LED lighted when DBF: Door Boost Output.
bus is powered.
3HA: (2x) #3 bus outputs for hoistway. 110VDC. 3HA DCF: Door Close Output.
LED lighted when bus is powered.
3: (2x) #3 bus outputs. 110VDC. 3 LED lighted when NUDG: Door Nudging Output.
bus is powered.
RCO: Retiring Cam Output.
DLSP: Door Logic Supply Voltage. Selectable (by
wiring) power input to door control relays. See
job prints.
1: Common bus.
2: (2x) 120VAC bus.
3D: (2x): 110VDC bus.
Checking TM Triac on ICE-IRB Board

If the PM or M contactors are not picking, you might see the following fault messages:
Motor Contactor Driver Proofing Fault
Drive Ready On Fault
Drive Enable Feedback Fault
SCR Insufficient Armature Current
Note
These faults do not necessarily mean that the problem is with the TM Triac. It is recommended
to first consult the iControl Messages table in the Troubleshooting section and follow the trou-
bleshooting tips for the message(s) displayed.
To check the TM triac:

1. With controller power off remove the cover on the iBox.
2. The TM triac is in the upper right hand corner of the ICE-IRB board, which is the lowest
board under the iBox cover and has three relays on it.
3. Measure the resistance across the outside legs of the TM triac. The legs can be hard to
get to depending on the probe leads used. You can get to the upper leg from the left and
the lower leg from below.
4. If the resistance is 60-70 ohms then the triac is good and continue troubleshooting the
fault. If the resistance is 15 ohms or less the ICE-IRB board needs to be replaced.
6-92 Manual # 42-02-2223

ICE-IRD Rear Door Board

The Rear Door board provides additional door zone inputs.
Figure 6.9 ICE-IRD Rear Door Board
Testpoints L to R: Safety Processor

+5V, GND, +3.3V Query LEDs. Safety
Processors A, and B
Table 6.13 Rear Door Board Connections

DZ-R: Rear Door Zone signal from iLink. 110VDC active 1 (4x): Common bus
signal level. Off = 0. connections.
ULM-R: Rear Up Level Marker signal from iLink. 110VDC
active signal level Off = 0.
DLM-R: Rear Down Level Marker signal from iLink.
110VDC active signal level. Off = 0.
DPM-R: Rear Door Position Monitor input. Door closed,
input inactive. 120VAC. Door not closed, 0VAC.
GS-R: Rear Gate Switch input. The gate switch makes
up when the elevator doors close. When the switch is
made, there will be 110VDC on this input. When the
switch is open, there will be 0VDC on this input. The
gate switch may be wired in series with other switches
or locks on the elevator doors (as shown in the job
prints) so that, if any of the switches do not make, the
GS input will remain low and the car will not run.
DLMS-R: Rear Door Lock Main String input. If top and
bottom hoistway access is not provided, all hoistway
rear door locks are wired in series between the #3 bus
and this input. When the switch is made, there will be
110VDC on this input. When any switch is open, there
will be 0VDC on this input and the car will not run.
DCMS-R: Rear Door Contact Main String input. If top
and bottom hoistway access is not provided, all hoist-
way rear door contacts are wired in series between the
#3 bus and this input. When the switch is made, there
will be 110VDC on this input. When any switch is open,
there will be 0VDC on this input and the car will not run.
6-93
Troubleshooting
ICE-LCB Low Current Brake Board

Most iControls use the iField brake module for precise control of brake picking, holding, and
application. If the requirements of the job permit, the Low Current Brake board may be used
instead to provide simple brake pick and hold control. If used, the Low Current Brake board is
usually mounted on the right wall inside the iPower Box. Brake adjusting components (resis-
tors, capacitors, diodes) may be wired in to the board circuitry using AWG 18 wire and on-
board screw terminals to modify the performance of the circuit. The job prints will show the
Low Current Brake board connections clearly if it is used.
Table 6.14 Low Current Brake Board Signals
Signal Use
B2 -, B1+ Brake voltage feedback signals to iControl Safety Board.
BKX1, BKX2 110VAC (typical) inputs to Low Current Brake Board rectifier.
BKD1 Brake Diode D1 cathode (used to include D1 in the circuit)
B2MCE Used to include external components in the circuit
FBS1 Brake Diode D1 anode (used to include D1 in the circuit)
FBS2 Used to include external components in the circuit
BK2 Used to include external components in the circuit
BK1 Used to include capacitor C1 in the circuit
B1 Positive voltage output to brake coil via controller B1 terminal
B2 Return from brake coil via controller B2 terminal
6-94 Manual # 42-02-2223

ICE-MIAC (-24V) Multiple Input Board

The ICE-MIAC board is used in AC and DC iControls and in the iLink cartop interconnect as a
general purpose input board suitable for industry-common 120VAC input signal levels. The
ICE-MIAC-24V board can be used for 24V AC or DC inputs.
Figure 6.10 ICE-MIAC Multiple Input AC Board
120VAC input terminals (Orange) 3.3V, 5V, and GND Testpoints
LED lights when associated input is active Board Query LED
Figure 6.11 ICE-MIAC-24V Multiple Input AC/DC Board
Caution!
Blue terminals indicate low voltage (24V AC or DC) input.
Connecting 120VAC to these inputs will damage the board.
ICE-MIAC-24V
6-95
Troubleshooting
Table 6.15 ICE-MIAC Board Connections

Orange Terminals 1: Common
Inputs 1 - 32
Orange
Orange 120VAC = input active
Typical Input Circuit
LST 670
Table 6.16 ICE-MIAC-24V Board Connections

Blue Terminals 1: Common
Blue Inputs 1 - 32
Blue 24V AC or DC = input active
Caution! Connecting 120V
to these terminals will
damage the board.
Typical Input Circuit
8.2K
2.21K
LST 670
6-96 Manual # 42-02-2223

ICE-MOR Multiple Output Relay Board

The ICE-MOR board is a multi-purpose, relay-closure output board. ICE-MOR boards are used
in iControl elevator controllers and in iLink cartop enclosures.
Output Connections
Connect outputs as shown in your job prints. Outputs may be configured (in specific groups) to
provide either a path to ground or current to drive indicator lamps/LEDs.
Output State Selection The outputs are divided into five groups. Each group shares a
common. The common may be wired to provide a current source or a path to ground. The
groups are:
Relays 1 4 6
Relays 5 8
Relays 9 16
Relays 17 - 24
Relays 25 - 32
before shipment. You need only connect outputs as shown on the job prints.
Table 6.17 ICE-MOR Board Connections

Output determined by Common 1: Common
connection to board connector J5. 1: Common
AC2: MOR2, typical 18VAC
AC1: MOR1, typical 18VAC
Common 25 - 32
Common 9 - 16
Common 5 - 8
Common 17 - 24
Common 25 - 32
1: Common
6-97
Troubleshooting
Figure 6.12 ICE-MOR Board
FMOR Fuse
6/10A, 250V, MDQ
+5V Testpoint
+24V Testpoint 18VAC
Board Query LED
24V OK LED 1 bus
On when iBox queries board
LED lights when corresponding

output relay is active.
Active = Open
Active = Closed
Determined by iView settings
according to user requirements.
Typical output circuit
6-98 Manual # 42-02-2223

ICE-RG-2 Rope Gripper Board

The Rope Gripper board monitors and resets a rope gripper (emergency brake). The board is
used in both AC and DC iControls.
Figure 6.13 ICE-RG Rope Gripper Board
Reset button Fault indicator
Fuse F2EB, 4A, MDQ

Test Points
Ground, +3.3V, +5V, +24V
Fuse FRG, 1/10A, MDQ
Safety Processor A and B

query indicators
Table 6.18 Rope Gripper Board Connections

RG1:120VAC to RG power supply 1: Common
RG2: RG power supply return 24x2: 18VAC in
RG5:120VAC=rope gripper OK 0V=rope gripper tripped 24: 18 VAC in
RG7: 120VAC signal to rope gripper 2: 120VAC in
Figure 6.14 Simplified Rope Gripper Operation
Rope Gripper
120VAC
RG1 Rope Gripper Power Supply
RG2
RG5 RG OK Safety A
120VAC RG OK Safety B
RG7
Manual switch:
Open = manual operation, rope gripper disabled Closed = Rope Gripper Retracted
Closed = normal operation, rope gripper enabled Open = Rope Gripper Actuated
6-99
Troubleshooting
ICE-SAF Safety Board

To I/O Boards
Status LEDs JP5, JP6 Encoder/Tach Switch
TACH ADJ.
trimpot
Power Input
1
-15VDC
+15VDC
GND
+5VDC
Motor Field
connections
RS485 Fault LED
Brake
connections
FIELD WIRING
AC/DC Drive
connections
DCC Filter
OFF
ON
J3 AC Drive
Encoder Output
Drive Serial Port
Test Points
STP1
STP2
GND
To ICE-IRB Board
JP1
6-100 Manual # 42-02-2223

Table 6.19 ICE-SAF Board Jumper Table
Jumper Setting Description

JP1 A Encoder Voltage. A = +5V, B = +15V
JP3 AC Pre-Torque Filter (AC / DC): AC setting is hard wired, adds filtering to the
pre-torque output.
JP5 B Tach input range. A = 20-80V, B = 81-190V
JP6 B Tach input range. A = 20-80V, B = 81-190V
Table 6.20 ICE-SAF Board Switches
Switch Description
6
SW1 Serial Port switch: Setting for the Drive Serial Port (AC Drive / DC Drive). DC Drive set-
ting hard wired.
SW2 Encoder / Tach:
Encoder = AC drive with velocity encoder connected to AC drive.
Tach = DC drive or AC drive with velocity encoder connected to iBox VELOCITY inputs.
SW4 DCC Filter (ON / OFF) Default = ON, adds filtering to Drive Current Command output.
.
Table 6.21 iBox Field Connections on ICE-SAF Board
Source Connection Signal Description

TS Tach positive signal. Analog. 0 - 30 VDC (15 VDC @ 1000 RPM).
TACH
TC Tach common (negative in respect to TS when car moving down)

SHLD Tach shield connection (connect at iBox-end only)
DP1+ Positive going, +15V, digital pulse stream from iLand to iLink to iBox (DP1
leads DP2 when car moves up).
DP1- Negative going, -15V, digital pulse stream from iLand to iLink to iBox.
POSITION
SHLD Shield connection for twisted-pair DP1+/DP1-

DP2+ Positive going, +15V, digital pulse stream from iLand to iLink to iBox (DP2
leads DP1 when car moves down)
DP2- Negative going, -15V, digital pulse stream from iLand to iLink to iBox
A+ Positive going, +12V, digital pulse from motor velocity encoder. Please
refer to Velocity Encoder Installation and Wiring on page 2-10.
VELOCITY ENCODER
A- Negative going, -12V, digital pulse from motor velocity encoder.

B+ Positive going, +12V, digital pulse from motor velocity encoder.
B- Negative going, -12V, digital pulse from motor velocity encoder.
Z+ Positive going, +12V, digital pulse from motor velocity encoder.
Z- Negative going, -12V, digital pulse from motor velocity encoder.
VE- Encoder power return
VE+ +12 VDC power to encoder (relative to VE-)
6-101
Troubleshooting

TX+ iBox transmit, positive going serial communication stream from iBox to
iLink. Connects to iLink ICE-CTP Board terminal RX+. TX+ and TX-
comprise a differential communications pair. Please refer to Installing
iLink on page 3-3.
CARTOP LINK
TX- iBox transmit, negative going serial communication stream from iBox to
iLink. Connects to iLink ICE-CTP Board terminal RX-.
SHLD Shield connection for twisted-pair TX+/TX-
RX+ iBox receive, positive going serial communication stream from iLink to
iBox. Connects to iLink ICE-CTP board terminal TX+. RX+ and RX-
comprise a differential communications pair.
RX- iBox receive, negative going serial communication stream from iLink to
iBox. Connects to iLink ICE-CTP board terminal TX-.
SHLD Shield connection for twisted-pair RX+/RX-
DZ Door Zone Sensor input. Activated = 110 VDC.
ULM Up Leveling Marker Sensor input. Activated = 110 VDC.
DLM Down Leveling Marker Sensor input. Activated = 110 VDC.
INCT Cartop Inspection Station INSP/AUTO Switch input. Activated = 110 VDC.
ICTU Cartop Inspection Station UP Button input (includes SAF button). Activated
= 110 VDC.
ICTD Cartop Inspection Station DN Button input (includes SAF button). Acti-
vated = 110 VDC.
INCP COP Inspection Station INSP/AUTO Switch input. Activated = 110 VDC.
ICPU COP Inspection Station UP Button input. Activated = 110 VDC.
CAR
ICPD COP Inspection Station DN Button input. Activated = 110 VDC.

INA Car Panel (Hoistway) Access Enable switch input. 0 VDC active signal
level. Off = 110 VDC.
ESC Car Panel Emergency Stop switch input. 0 VDC active signal level stops
car. Off = 110 VDC.
DCL Door Close Limit input. Door fully closed, input inactive, 0 VAC. Door not
closed signal level, 120 VAC.
DOL Door Open Limit input. Door fully open, input inactive, 0 VAC. Door not
open signal level, 120 VAC.
DPM Door Position Monitor input. Door closed, input inactive, 120 VAC. Door
not closed, 0 VAC.
6-102 Manual # 42-02-2223


UNTD Up Normal Limit Direction switch input. 110 VDC = input on/switch closed.
0 VDC = input off/switch open.
UNT5 Up Slowdown Limit switch #5 input. (see UNTD)
UETS Up Emergency Terminal Limit switch input. (see UNTD)
LIMITS

DNT1 Down Slowdown Limit switch #1 input. (see UNTD) 6
DETS Down Emergency Terminal Limit switch input. (see UNTD)
DNT2 Down Slowdown Limit switch #2 input. (see UNTD)
DNTD Down Normal Limit Direction switch input. (see UNTD)
ATU Hoistway Access Top Up switch input. When the Car Panel Access Enable
switch (INA input) is on, an active input (key switch closure) here (110
VDC) will cause the car to move up the hoistway. A hoistway limit switch
electrically between the ATU input and the activating switch will open and
stop the car after it has moved the required distance up the hoistway (if
installed). Normal/Off state = 0 VDC. Refer also to the -MRW drawing in
the job prints.
ATD Hoistway Access Top Down switch input. When the Car Panel Access
Enable switch (INA input) is on, an active input (key switch closure) here
(110 VDC) will cause the car to move down the hoistway. A hoistway limit
switch electrically between the ATD input and the activating switch will
open and stop the car after it has moved the required distance down the
hoistway (if installed). Normal/Off state = 0 VDC. Refer also to the -MRW
H/WAY
drawing in the job prints.

ABU Hoistway Access Bottom Up switch input. When the Car Panel Access
(110 VDC) will cause the car to move up the hoistway. A hoistway limit
switch electrically between the ABU input and the activating switch will
open and stop the car after it has moved the required distance up the
ABD Hoistway Access Bottom Down switch input. When the Car Panel Access
(110 VDC) will cause the car to move down the hoistway. A hoistway limit
switch electrically between the ABD input and the activating switch will
open and stop the car after it has moved the required distance down the
6-103
Troubleshooting

GS Gate Switch input. The gate switch makes up when the elevator doors
close. When the switch is made, there will be 110 VDC on this input. When
the switch is open, there will be 0 VDC on this input. The gate switch may
be wired in series with other switches or locks on the elevator doors (as
shown in the job prints) so that if any of the switches do not make, the GS
input will remain low and the car will not run.
DLAT Door Lock Access Top input. When a top hoistway access is provided (see
INA, ATU, and ATD), the hoistway door lock associated with that landing is
connected between the #3 bus and this input. When the switch is made,
there will be 110 VDC on this input. When the switch is open, there will be
0 VDC on this input and the car will not run unless INA is active and then
only in response to the ATU or ATD input.
DLMS Door Lock Main String input. If top and bottom hoistway access (see INA,
ATU, ATD, ABU, and ABD) is not provided, all hoistway door locks are
wired in series between the #3 bus and DLMS. When the switches are
made, there will be 110 VDC on this input. When any switch is open, there
will be 0 VDC on this input and the car will not run.
DLAB Door Lock Access Bottom input. When a bottom hoistway access is pro-
vided (see INA, ABU, and ABD), the hoistway door lock associated with
LOCKS/CONTACTS
that landing is connected between the #3 bus and this input. When the
switch is made, there will be 110 VDC on this input. When the switch is
open, there will be 0 VDC on this input and the car will not run unless INA
is active and then only in response to the ABU or ABD input.
DCAT Door Contact Access Top input. When a top hoistway access is provided
(see INA, ATU, ATD, and DLAT), the hoistway door contact associated with
that landing is connected between the #3 bus and this input. When the
switch is made, there will be 110 VDC on this input. When the switch is
open, there will be 0 VDC on this input and the car will not run unless INA
is active and then only in response to the ATU or ATD input.
DCMS Door Contact Main String input. If top and bottom hoistway access (see
INA, ATU, ATD, ABU, and ADB) is not provided, all hoistway door contacts
are wired in series between the #3 bus and DCMS. When the switches are
made, there will be 110 VDC on this input. When any switch is open, there
will be 0 VDC on this input and the car will not run.
DCAB Door Contact Access Bottom input. When a bottom hoistway access is pro-
vided (see INA, ABU, ABD, and DLAB), the hoistway door contact associ-
ated with that landing is connected between the #3 bus and this input.
When the switch is made, there will be 110 VDC on this input. When the
switch is open, there will be 0 VDC on this input and the car will not run
unless INA is active and then only in response to the ABU or ABD input.
GOV Governor input. The governor is connected between the #3 bus and this
input. When the governor switch is made, there is 110 VDC on this input.
It the governor switch trips/opens, there is 0 VDC on this input and the car
will not run.
SP 1 Spare input 1. If used, connect as shown in the job prints.
6-104 Manual # 42-02-2223

ICE-SF-x Serial Fixtures Board

The Serial Fixtures board is used in iControl elevator controllers to communicate with serial-
control audible and visual indicators, e.g., voice annunciators or character displays. The board
provides two identical outputs one for hall displays and one for car displays. The x in the
part number refers to the fixture type:
CE = CE Electronics
EM = E-Motive
HJ = Hong Jiang
Figure 6.15 ICE-SF Serial Fixtures Board
Left-to-Right
3.3V Testpoint 6
24V Testpoint
FSF Fuse, 4A, 250V, AGC
Computer On LED, ON
= Computer running
DIP Switches
+5V Testpoint Reset button
Ground Testpoint
Board Query LED
4-Character Display
of transmitted data
Table 6.22 Serial Fixture Board Connections

1: Common 18VAC
+24: 24VDC 18VAC
CData: Data to car 1: Common
1: Common 1: Common
+24: 24VDC
HData: Data to hall
DIP Switches and Display The DIP switches and 4-character display are used for fac-
tory testing and diagnostics. For normal operation, all of the DIP switches are set to OFF
(down). The 4-character display shows direction and ascii floor number.
6-105
Troubleshooting
SC-HCDA-ISO Serial Driver Isolation Board

The SC-HCDA-ISO Serial Hall Call Driver Isolation Board is placed between the SC-HCDA
Serial Hall Call Driver (usually mounted inside the iPower Box) and the Serial Hall Call Input
on the right side of the iBox. Revision 6.0 and later ICE-IMP boards incorporates the isolation
circuitry, eliminating the need for the SC-HCDA-ISO. Please refer to Serial Hall Call on
page 5-17 for additional information.
Figure 6.16 SC-HCDA-ISO Serial Hall Call Driver Isolation Board
SC-HCNT Serial Hall Call Node Board

In a typical installation, an SC-HCNT Serial Hall Call Node board is mounted in each hall call
enclosure. Please refer to Hall Call Installation on page 5-19. The board provides two outputs
to power hall call lamps or LEDs, two inputs for hall call buttons, and jumpers to set floor ID
and hall call type.
Figure 6.17 SC-HCNT Serial Hall Call Node Boar
JP5 Future use

JP3 Floor Address X10 JP2 Floor Address X1
JP4 unused JP1 Call Type
Hall Call Bus

Power / signal
Up / Down
buttons
Up / Down
indicators
For more information on setting the node board addresses, see Setting Node Board Addresses
on page 5-20.
6-106 Manual # 42-02-2223

SC-ION: Serial Control I/O Board

One or more SC-ION boards may be used in an iCentral group controller. The SC-ION board
provides an interface between discrete signal level or relay-oriented field equipment and the
serial communications bus used by iCentral for serial hall calls. Inputs and outputs on the SC-
ION board are assigned unique serial addresses at the factory according to customer require-
ments. Using iView, customers can view the function assigned to each address and may even
assign a different (MCE-supported) function if necessary. Each SC-ION board provides 16 user-
configurable inputs and 16 user-configurable outputs.
I/O Connections
Connect inputs and outputs as shown in your job prints. SC-ION board inputs are always
117VAC. Outputs may be configured (in specific groups) to provide either a path to ground or 6
current to drive indicator lamps/LEDs.
Output State Selection The outputs are divided into three groups. Each group shares
a common. The common may be wired to provide a current source or a path to ground. The
groups are:
Relays 1 4
Relays 5 8
Relays 9 16
before shipment. You need only connect the inputs and outputs as shown on the job prints.
Board Addresses Each of the 16 inputs and 16 outputs have an address on the system
bus. The addresses are assigned as indicated by the job survey before the system is shipped. The
board may be configured using a serial cable connected from the iView computer to the board.
The configuration screen is available through iView/System/System Configuration/System I/O
- SC-ION board configuration.
Table 6.23 SC-ION Board Inputs and Outputs

In 1-16:117VAC when active 1: Common
Out 1-16: Determined by common SHCS: Serial signal, +/-15V bit
connection stream
SHCC: Serial signal, common
1: Common
SHCS: Serial signal, +/- 15V bit
stream
- COM 9-16: Connect to select

active output for outputs 9-16.
6-107
Troubleshooting
Figure 6.18 SC-ION Serial Control I/O Board
COMP ON:
On = Computer on
Off = Computer resetting
RST_OUT: Low when computer is in reset mode

Inputs
Board programming port:
Outputs Factory use only.
DIP switch and LEDs used Board

in factory diagnostics and Reset
programming. No field
application.
High/Low (Current Source/
Testpoints, Current Sink) Output Selec-
Ground tion (J4). For example, con-
+24V necting the COM 9 - 16
+3.3V terminal to the MCE #1
+5.0V (common) bus would mean
that when one of outputs 9
through 16 was active the
signal connected to it would
be taken to ground (sink/
active low).
LED lights when corresponding
input or output is active.
6-108 Manual # 42-02-2223

Table 6.24 SC-ION Board Inputs and Outputs

In 1-16:117VAC when active 1: Common
Out 1-16: Determined by common SHCS: Serial signal, +/-15V bit
connection stream
1: Common
SHCS: Serial signal, +/- 15V bit
stream
6
COM 9-16: Connect to select
COM 5-8: Connect to select active

output for outputs 5-8.
COM 1-4: Connect to select active

output for outputs 1-4.
6-109
Troubleshooting
6-110 Manual # 42-02-2223

iBox Front Panel Controls
About the iBox Front Panel

System status indicator LEDs and function control switches are accessible on the iBox front
panel. The front panel also provides:
LCD display and entry keypad (see page 7-2).
Access to iBox Ethernet Port addresses (see page 7-8).
System-level diagnostic LED display (see page 7-10).
System function control switches (see page 7-11).
Front panel controls allow you to:

Directly view and adjust iBox configurable parameters (see page 7-2).
Quickly ascertain system status (see page 7-10).
Access Controller mode and other function switches (see page 7-11).
7-1
LCD Display and Keypad

The iBox LCD display and keypad allow you to:
View and change parameter settings
View and register calls
View the status of inputs, outputs, and flags
View error messages and the system event log
Typically, when you need to view or change parameters in an iControl, you connect to the iBox
through the PC or LAN ethernet port and use the iView graphical user interface running on a
Windows OS PC to easily access, view, or edit any desired parameter. However, during initial
system setup when setting the parameters that allow PC access to your system, or when a PC is
not available, some parameters can be directly accessed and edited through the keypad and
LCD display located on the front panel of every iBox.
Figure 7.1 iBox Data Entry Keypad and LCD Display
LCD Display
@040 001 F R L01

Passenger COMPUTER
0fpm RESET
6:15:09AM
11/30/2003
Car FAULT Softkeys
RESET
Directional Arrows /
1 2 3 4 Value Incrementers
Select Parameter /
Enter Value
ENTER
7-2 Manual # 42-02-2223

iControl AC LCD Display and Keypad
Keypad Controls
Keypad controls include:
Display Contrast adjusts the LCD display
Computer Reset resets the iBox computers
Fault Reset initializes the fault list
Softkeys selects the associated topic across the bottom of the LCD display
Up Arrow moves the selection bar up or increases a parameter value
Down Arrow moves the selection bar down or decreases a parameter value
Left Arrow moves the cursor left (digit selection)
Right Arrow moves the cursor right (digit selection) 7
ENTER confirms a selection or enters a parameter value
LCD Display
The LCD display allows you to view iBox parameters. The @003 s 015 FG RO L03
top line of each display screen provides a status snap- Passenger
shot for the car associated with the controller. In our
example: Ofpm
2:26:22AM
@ (door zone)
11/30/2003
@: in door zone
: below door zone Car Mgmt
+: above door zone
003 current floor
s or t (direction arrows)
015 next floor
F (front doors)
G Open
OClosed
Opening/Closing
Invalid door position
R (rear doors)
G Open
O Closed
Opening/Closing
Invalid door position
S or L (Simplex or Local)
03 (Car ID)
The second line of the display shows the mode of operation (Passenger in the example) dis-
played in rotation with any active status or error messages. If a soft key is pressed (Car or
Mgmt) the remaining display lines change to display appropriate information. The labels in the
bottom line change to indicate the function of their associated soft key.
7-3
Parameter Entry
To edit or view a parameter, you select a broad topic by pressing the Enter soft key, then select
and view or edit a parameter. For example, to change or edit a Car-associated parameter.
1. Press the soft key (1) beneath the Car label. The @003 s 015 FG RO L03
LCD will change as shown to the right. Passenger
2. Use the arrow keys to scroll to a topic. Network Setup
3. With the topic selected (Network Setup in our View Event Log
example), press ENTER. View/Register Calls
Set Time/Date
Note that the soft key labels have changed: View Factory Data
Home Back PgUp PgDn
Home Returns you to the home screen.
Back Takes you back one screen.
PgUp When there are more topics than can be listed on a single screen, PgUp moves you
up the list a full screen at a time.
PgDn When there are more topics than can be listed on a single screen, PgDn moves you
down the list a full screen at a time.
4. Use the arrow keys to scroll to a topic.
5. With the topic selected, press ENTER.
When you press ENTER, the display updates.

6. Use the arrow keys to scroll to a topic.
7. With the topic selected, press ENTER.
When you press ENTER, the display updates. The cursor/arrow indicates a parameter can be
edited.
8. Use the left/right arrow keys to position the arrow below the number to be changed.
9. Use the up/down arrow keys to increment or decrement the value.
10. Repeat positioning and incrementing/decrementing as necessary. Press ENTER to enter
the new value.
11. The soft key labels will indicate Save and Cancel. Press Save to save your changes after a
yes or no acknowledgement.
or,
12. Press Cancel to leave the screen without saving your changes (after a yes or no acknowl-
edgement).
7-4 Manual # 42-02-2223

Editing a Controller Parameter

To edit a parameter:
1. Navigate to the desired screen.
2. Edit the parameter.
3. Save the edited parameter.
The following illustration shows which parameter groups are accessible on the Car and Mgmt
menu LCD screens. Use the illustration and Table 6.1 to help you locate a parameter to be
adjusted.
Figure 7.2 Onboard Diagnostics Car Menu Tree

7
Car Mgmt
Network Setup End Write Privilege

FTP User Name Write Privlge Timeout
FTP User Password Clone Controller Data
IP Name 1
IP Address 1
IP Gateway 1
IP Subnet Mask 1 View Event Log
IP Name 2 View/Register Calls
IP Address 2 Set Time & Date
IP Gateway 2 View Factory Data
IP Subnet Mask 2 MAC Addresses
IP Name 3 Manufacturing Information
IP Address 3 Version Info
IP Gateway 3 View / Clear Statistics
IP Subnet Mask 3 View Statistics
Clear Statistics
7-5
Table 7.1 Car Menu Parameters
Car Menu Parameters
Network Setup
There are three Ethernet ports on the iBox.
#1 is the Local Area Network connection used to connect Group and Elevator controllers to your Local Area
Network.
#2 is the MCE equipment connection used to interconnect Group and Elevator controllers for equipment
control purposes.
#3 is the PC Direct connection used to connect a PC directly to a Controller for immediate access.
Network setup parameters allow the IP information to be set for each of the three ports. Additionally, an FTP
User Name and Password must be set here without which the File Transfer Protocol server may not be
accessed.
To set the FTP User Name:
Enter a User Name that must be employed to access the FTP server.
To set the FTP User Password:
Enter a password that must be employed to access the FTP server.
To set the IP Name 1:
Enter a name for the #1 port. This is the peripherals port used for local area network connection, typically
for networked PCs running iView.
To set the IP Address 1:
Enter an address for the #1 port. Please refer to System, LAN, & 3=PC TCP/IP Addresses on page 7-8.
To set the IP Gateway 1:
Enter a gateway address for the #1 port. Please refer to System, LAN, & 3=PC TCP/IP Addresses on
page 7-8.
To set the IP Subnet Mask 1:
Enter a subnet mask address for the #1 port. Please refer to System, LAN, & 3=PC TCP/IP Addresses on
page 7-8.
Enter a name for the #2 port. This is the system port used to connect to the hub that supports MCE control-
lers, serial hall call, etc.
Enter an address for the #2 port. Please refer to System, LAN, & 3=PC TCP/IP Addresses on page 7-8.
page 7-8.
page 7-8.
Enter a name for the #3 port. This is the PC port, meant for direct connection to a PC running iView using a
standard Ethernet cable and NO HUB.
Address for the #3 port. Default at 192.168.193.1.
page 7-8.
page 7-8.
7-6 Manual # 42-02-2223

Table 7.1 Car Menu Parameters
Car Menu Parameters

View Event Log
View Event log accesses the event database maintained by the controller. This database lists messages by
ID Number, ordered by time-of-occurrence. Additional data is also stored, e.g. Type, Date, Time, Acknowl-
edgement Status, and Event (name) for each event. A listing of iBox Event Log ID Numbers and a cross-ref-
erence to iControl Messages and descriptions can be found in Section 6 of this User Guide. Please refer to
Cross Reference: iBox Event Log ID Numbers to iControl Messages on page 6-4 and see iControl Mes-
sages on page 6-13
To view the Event Log:
Press softkey (1) beneath the Car label, scroll down to View Event Log and press Enter. To view event
details, scroll to the desired event and press Enter. Scroll down to see all data, including event name.
View/Register Calls 7
The View/Register Calls dialog allows you to send transport commands to the controller.
To View/Register Calls:
Allows you to enter car and hall calls for Front or Rear Car Operating Panels.
Set Time/Date
This parameter sets the real time clock for the controller.
To set the Set Time/Date:
Enter the current time and date for use by the controller real time clock.
View Factory Data
View Factory Data accesses serial number, date, and MAC address information for the controller. This infor-
mation is very useful should you ever have to contact MCE about your equipment.
MAC Addresses:
A six-byte, unique, identifying code used by LANs to positively identify communicating equipment. This
parameter allows you to view the MAC address for each of the three Ethernet ports.
Manufacturing Info:
View the controller serial number, revision, and ICE-IMP information.
Version Info
Version Info provides version information for the software currently installed on your controller.
Version Info:
View the software version information for the controller and car top processors.
View / Clear Statistics
View/clear statistical data collected by controller. Statistical data includes odometer, power-up cycles, front
and rear door cycles, motion cycles, floor time, floor runs, inspection runs, auto runs, and auto relevels.
Table 7.2 Mgmt Menu Parameters
Mgmt Menu Parameters

End Write Privilege
Use to cancel write privilege which has been granted to an iView PC connected to the controller.
Write Privilege Timeout
Use to change the write privilege timeout timer setting. The default value is 15 minutes.
Clone Controller Data
When replacing an iBox (or ICE-SAF board), this option allows safety learned and inventoried parameters
to be saved to flash memory. That memory can then be physically transferred to the new iBox (or ICE-SAF
board), eliminating the need to enter or relearn those settings. Specific instructions for using this feature
are provided with the replacement iBox.
7-7
Setting iBox Ethernet Port Addresses

The table below lists the factory default addresses TCP/IP addresses. The iBox 3 = PC port (PC
direct) is set to 192.168.193.001 and should not be changed.

System all 192.168.192.201-202 1-20 192.168.192.001-020 192.168.192.211-214

LAN A 192.168.191.201-202 1-20 192.168.191.001-020 192.168.192.101-200*
LAN B 192.168.191.203-204 1-20 192.168.191.021-040
LAN C 192.168.191.205-206 1-20 192.168.191.041-060
LAN D 192.168.191.207-208 1-20 192.168.191.061-080
LAN E 192.168.191.209-210 1-20 192.168.191.081-100
The default Subnet Mask for all ports is 255.255.255.000.

The default Gateway for the #1 (LAN or Peripheral Port) is 192.168.191.254.
The default Gateway for the #2 and #3 ports is 000.000.000.000.
You should not need to change the factory-set IP information. If you are having problems con-
necting to an iBox Ethernet port, refer to the following topic to verify and, if necessary, set IP
addresses.
Note
The Group ID setting in iView determines the iCue System IP address at which iCue will accept messages.
NO NOT set the Group ID to a setting other than 1 unless instructed to do so by MCE. Group IDs
other than 1 are reserved for future use and will cause group-to-car communication to fail. If you need
advanced System addressing information, please contact MCE.
7-8 Manual # 42-02-2223

iControl AC Setting iBox Ethernet Port Addresses
IP Address Verification/Setting
You should not need to change the factory-set IP information. If you are having problems con-
necting to an iBox Ethernet port, verify that IP information is correct as described here. If you
find an incorrectly set port, these instructions will help you correct it. These instructions are for
Port 1 but the procedure is the same for all iBox ports.
1. Press the soft key (1) beneath the Car label. The @003 s 015 FG RO L03
LCD will change as shown to the right. Passenger
2. With Network Setup selected, press ENTER. Network Setup
3. Scroll down to IP Address 1, press ENTER. View Event Log
View/Register Calls
4. Verify that the Address displayed is correct (see
Set Time/Date
preceding table). For example, Car A of Group 1
should be 192.168.191.001.
View Factory Data 7
Home Back PgUp PgDn
5. If you are using the default addresses, and the
address displayed is incorrect, set it according to
the table using Left and Right arrow keys to select a number and Up and Down arrow
keys to change the value. Continue until the address is correct, then press ENTER. Press
SAVE to save your changes (if any).
6. Scroll down to IP Gateway 1. The default for the #1 Port is 192.168.191.254. (The default
for the #2 and #3 Ports is 000.000.000.000) If necessary, change it as described above.
7. Scroll down to IP Subnet Mask 1. The default is 255.255.255.000. If necessary, change
as described above.
8. Continue as above to verify the IP information for the #2 and #3 Ports respectively.
Check the preceding table for factory default addresses.
7-9
System Status Display

iBox front panel LEDs and the LCD display both provide status information.
LED Status Display

The LEDs of the front panel display provide immediate controller status information:
Computer: Lights green when the controller microprocessor is running properly.
Safety A: Lights green when Safety System A is functioning properly.
Safety B: Lights green when Safety System B is functioning properly.
Car Top: Lights green when the Cartop microprocessor is running properly.
Sys Comm: Lights green when controller is communicating with Group.
Up: Lights amber when car is moving up.
Drive On: Lights amber when drive has control of car. Drive On may be ON while UP and
DOWN are OFF indicating no movement but drive is holding zero speed.
Down: Lights amber when car is moving down.
Run: Lights green when car is making a run between floors. Remains off during re-leveling
operations.
Relevel: Lights red when car is releveling.
Safety OK: Lights green when safety path is made up.
Doors Locked: Lights green when doors are locked.
Inspection: Lights amber when car is on Cartop, In-Car, Machine Room, or Hoistway
Access Inspection.
In Group: Lights green if car is able to respond to group hall call demand.
Fault: Lights red if one or more system faults are active.
COMPUTER UP SAFETY OK
SAFETY A DRIVE ON DOORS LOCKED
SAFETY B DOWN INSPECTION

CARTOP RUN IN GROUP
SYS COMM RELEVEL FAULT
Note
These displays are frequently used when the elevator controller is being configured. Please refer to Sec-
tions 3 and 4 of this guide for use descriptions.
7-10 Manual # 42-02-2223

iControl AC System Status Display
LCD Status Display

The LCD screen displays text messages advising of sys- @003 s 015 FG RO L03
tem status. The second line of the display shows the mode Passenger
of operation (Passenger in the example) displayed in
rotation with any active status messages. Please refer to Ofpm
iControl Messages on page 6-13 for description. 2:26:22AM
11/30/2003
Car Mgmt
System Control Switches

The front panel system control switches allow you direct access to system functions including:
7
Inspection: Switch used to place the car on Machine Room Inspection (Insp) or Normal
operation (Norm).
Up: Push switch used to run the car up when the system is on Machine Room Inspection
and the Enable button is simultaneously pressed and held.
Enable: Push switch used to run the car up or down when the system is on Machine Room
Inspection and the Up or Down button is simultaneously pressed and held.
Down: Push switch used to run the car down when the system is on Machine Room
Inspection and the Enable button is simultaneously pressed and held.
Controller Stop: Switch used to immediately remove hoist motor and brake power (Stop)
or apply power to those systems (Run).
Capture: Switch used to place Car on Capture operation (On). While this switch is On, the
car will not respond to hall call demand or Parking.
Test: Switch used to place the car on Test Mode operation (On).
Fault/Function Bypass: Switch to allow specific faults and safety functions (as determined
by Keypad/LCD settings) to be bypassed. Car must be in Test mode.
Write Enable: (Factory only) Switch used to allow special data to be saved (On).
Learn: Switch used to confirm intended Learn operation. The learn procedure must be
selected. For Hoistway Learn, the car must be on Inspection mode. For Terminal Switch
Learn, the car must be on Test mode.
Car Door Bypass: Switch used to bypass the car door electric contacts (Bypass position).
When set to Bypass, the car will run only on Inspection mode. The ability to set this bypass
must be enabled at the factory and is only available if allowed by safety regulations in your
area. Check the iView Safety Configuration screen to see if the feature is enabled in your
installation.
7-11
Hoistway Door Bypass: Switch used to bypass the hoistway door electric contacts (Bypass
position). When set to Bypass, the car will run only on Inspection mode. The ability to set
this bypass must be enabled at the factory and is only available if allowed by safety regula-
tions in your area. Check the iView Safety Configuration screen to see if the feature is
enabled in your installation.
CONTROLLER FAULT/FUNCTION
INSPECTION STOP BYPASS
INSP RUN ON
NORM STOP OFF
UP CAPTURE WRITE ENABLE

ON ON
OFF OFF
ENABLE TEST LEARN

ON ON
OFF OFF
CAR DOOR HOISTWAY

DOWN BYPASS DOOR BYPASS
BYPASS BYPASS
OFF OFF
Note
These control switches are used when the elevator controller is being configured. Please refer to Sections
3 and 4 of this guide for use descriptions.
Safety Bypass Jumper and Fuses

The iBox provides four fused outputs:
120v/60Hz AC: Fuses F2 and F2PI.
110v DC: Fuses F3 and F3HA.
120v/60Hz AC: Motor Drive. Fuse F2D.
120v/60Hz AC: Motor Contactor. Fuse F2MC.
When installed, the Safety Bypass jumper electrically connects the SB and 3 terminals on the
IRB Relay Board. Information about the Safety Bypass jumper is in Section 6 of this guide (see
Safety String Bypass Jumper on page 6-3).
Danger
The fuses and the bypass jumper expose dangerous high voltages that can cause bodily
harm or death. ONLY TRAINED, AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL should have access to these
areas.
7-12 Manual # 42-02-2223

Using iView
About iView
This section provides working instructions for the iView application. iView on-line Help pro-
vides detailed information about settings and is available anytime you are working in the iView
application. This section contains:
How iView Works (see page 8-2)
Setting up an iView PC (see page 8-3)
LAN Connections (see page 8-12)
Working Online (see page 8-16)
Saving Parameters to a Configuration File (see page 8-21)
Saving Default Parameters to a Configuration File (see page 8-22)
Loading Parameters from a Configuration File (see page 8-22)
Working Offline (see page 8-23)
Accessing Online Help (see page 8-24)
iView Windows and Tabs (see page 8-25)
Resizing Windows & Docking/Undocking Windows (see page 8-34 & page 8-35).
Updating Controller Firmware (see page 8-41)
8-1
Using iView
How iView Works

iView communicates with a controller through an Ethernet connection and loads operating
parameters stored on the controller into iView screens. The user can view any controller param-
eter and can edit/adjust any user-configurable parameter, then send changed parameters to the
controller.
A single PC can be used to administer multiple elevators or even multiple groups of elevators.
Elevator adjusters who service multiple sites will find it convenient to connect directly to a con-
troller, then easily upload proven settings. The diagram below illustrates just a few of the ways
Ethernet connectivity allows iView to communicate with elevator controllers.
iBox elevator controllers
Hub or Router
PC Ethernet through Local Area Network (LAN)
iBox elevator controllers
Hub or Router
PC
PC to local modem, through phone lines to site
modem, through Local Area Network (LAN).
PC
Directly to the iBox PC Ethernet port (3).
8-2 Manual # 42-02-2223

iControl AC Setting Up an iView PC
Setting Up an iView PC
Important If you purchased your iView PC from MCE, iView was installed at the factory.
In addition, all of the network assignments (connections) for your job have been created and
stored on the iView PC. Therefore, once the physical connections (cables) between each iCon-
troller iBox and the iCentral or Comm-Connect Ethernet Switches have been installed per the
job prints, you are set to go. You can power up the iView PC and launch the iView.NET applica-
tion. If this is the case you can skip this section and go to Working Online (see Working
Online on page 8-16).
The following information is provided in case you find it necessary to reinstall iView or if you
wish to install and setup iView on a laptop or other PC. Setting up an iView PC for the first time
is a three step process: 8
1. Installing the iView application software (see Installing iView below).
2. Setting the iView PC IP address (depends on the type of connection to be used). Please
refer to Setting the iView PC IP Address on page 8-4.
3. Creating Connections in iView. For a direct connection see Creating a Direct Connec-
tion in iView on page 8-8. For LAN connections see Creating a New LAN Connection
on page 8-12.
Installing iView
Minimum requirements for a free-standing (not in iCentral) iView PC are:
Sufficient free hard drive space for installation
Minimum 2GB RAM
Windows 2000, XP, or Win7 1operating system
CD-ROM drive
10/100 Ethernet capable
Simple text or comparable text editing software
These instructions assume familiarity with personal computers. To install iView:

1. Insert the iView CD-ROM in the computer CD-ROM drive.
2. Launch the CD.
3. Double-click the Read Me First (or other accompanying text file) to review the latest
iView instructions.
4. Double-click on the Setup.exe application.
5. Follow on-screen instructions to install iView.
After installation, the iView icon will appear on your desktop. Double click the
iView.NET icon to launch the iView application.
1. The instructions in this manual are for Windows 7.
8-3
Using iView
Setting the iView PC IP Address

There are two ways to connect the iView PC to an iController iBox:
Direct Connection: Connect the PC directly to the iBox using the iBox 3 = PC port. Unless
the LAN hub/switch has already been installed, you will find it easiest to connect a PC to
the iBox using the 3 = PC port (direct connection).
LAN Connection: Connect the PC to the LAN hub/switch supporting one or more iCon-
trollers (iBox 1 = LAN port). The LAN hub/switch is part of the iCentral/Comm-connect
installation.
Figure 8.1 Ethernet Cable and iBox Ethernet Ports
iBox ethernet ports
1 = LAN 2 = System 3 = PC
Direct (no hub) connection to
PC only
Connection through LAN hub

or switch only. 2 port is for
MCE equipment (elevator and
group controllers). 1 port is for
Typical ethernet CAT-5 shielded cable.
Local Area Network connec-
RJ45 connectors at each end.
tion.
The IP address to which you set the iView PC depends on the type of connection you intend to
use:
For a direct connection the iView PCs IP address is typically set to 192.168.193.2
For a LAN connection the main iView PC IP address is typically set to 192.168.191.101
(see About LANs below). Note that each PC connected to the LAN must have a unique IP
address.
About LANs: LAN stands for Local Area Network. A LAN is basically several computers
(or smart equipment with a computer inside like the iBox or iCue) all connected at a common
point (the hub or switch) so they can communicate with each other. In order for a message from
one computer to reach the computer (or iCue/iBox) it wants to talk to, all the computers con-
nected to the LAN must have their own unique address. The address is called a TCP/IP number.
The table below lists iControl default IP addresses. Your job prints provide specific instructions
as to how all of your IP addresses are set.
Please refer to System and LAN Ethernet on page 9-12 for more detail. Also please see Sys-
tem, LAN, & 3=PC TCP/IP Addresses on page 8-5.
Note
If you are working with IP addresses on the iCentral PC that runs both iCue and iView
on a single platform: Please refer to iControl Ethernet Overview on page 5-4.
8-4 Manual # 42-02-2223


System all 192.168.192.201-202 1-20 192.168.192.001-020 192.168.192.211-214

LAN A 192.168.191.201-202 1-20 192.168.191.001-020 192.168.191.101-200*
LAN B 192.168.191.203-204 1-20 192.168.191.021-040
LAN C 192.168.191.205-206 1-20 192.168.191.041-060
LAN D 192.168.191.207-208 1-20 192.168.191.061-080
LAN E 192.168.191.209-210 1-20 192.168.191.081-100
8
To set the iView PC IP Address:

1. Start the PC.
right corner).

Adapter Settings.
4. Double-click the Local Area Connec-
tion icon to open the Local Area Connection Status dialog.
8-5
Using iView



Properties dialog
8-6 Manual # 42-02-2223

8. For a direct connection, set the IP Address to match the iBox EXCEPT FOR the last set
of numbers. The #3 iBox port is defaulted to 192.168.193.1. Typically, you can set your
PCs IP address to 192.168.193.2
9. For a LAN connection, the IP addresses available are 192.168.191.101 - 200. The first
iView PC is typically set to 192.168.191.101. Each PC connected to the network most have
a unique address.
to 255.255.255.0.
11. Set the Gateway to
192.168.191.254 for a
LAN (#1 port) con-
nection. Otherwise, 8
leave it blank.
any instructions to
made.
The default Subnet Mask for all ports is 255.255.255.000.

The default Gateway for the #1 (LAN or Peripheral Port) is 192.168.191.254.
The default Gateway for the #2 and #3 ports is 000.000.000.000.
Note
It is important that a free-standing (iView ONLY PC not running iCue dispatching) PC have only one IP
address assigned. Click the Advanced button and verify that the PC is configured for only a single IP
Address (192.168.193.2 for a direct connection and an unused address like 192.168.191.101 - 200 for a
LAN connection).
8-7
Using iView
Creating a Direct Connection in iView

Once you have set your computer TCP/IP as described previously, you need to create a connec-
tion in iView.
1. Double-click on the iView icon on your computer screen to launch iView.
2. Click File on the menu bar.
3. Select Connection and click New to open the Connection dialog.
4. Type in a name for the connec-

tion.
5. Enter the direct connection IP
Address for the iBox
(192.168.193.1).
6. Select Controller/Simplex.
7. Click OK. The Save As dialog
opens.
8-8 Manual # 42-02-2223

8. Enter a File name for this connection in the Save As dialog. When creating direct con-
nections, it is a good practice to name them clearly so they are easy to distinguish (i.e.,
CarA Direct).
9. The suggested (default) location for connections is the Connections folder (My Docu-
ments > Motion Control Engineering > iView > Connections). You may choose another
location using standard windows methods. You may also create sub-folders inside the
iController Connections folder in which groups of connections can be stored.
10. Click Save to save the connection.
8-9
Using iView
Connecting to the iBox Once the connection is created and saved, you are ready to
connect.
1. Click the Open Connection button

2. or click File on the menu bar, select
Connection and click Open. The
Open dialog appears.
3. To connect to a controller, double click the desired connection or select the connection
and click Open.
4. If there is a problem making the connection, you can ping the address using the iView
PC (see Pinging on page 5-11).
8-10 Manual # 42-02-2223

5. When iView is communicating with a controller, this symbol

is displayed in the bottom left corner of the iView screen.
6. When iView is not communicating with a controller, this
symbol is displayed in the bottom left corner of the
iView screen.
7. When the connection is established, the Operational Status tab and Hoistway window
are displayed.
8-11
Using iView
LAN Connections
In most installations, there will be at least one iView PC continuously connected to the Local
Area Network on which the iBox controllers reside. LAN TCP/IP addresses and associated set-
tings for any hubs, routers, or other equipment involved are resolved when network equipment
is installed. In these instances, the iView PC is already connected through the network to the
controllers.
Creating a New LAN Connection
A controller connection must be created before it appears in the iView Connections folder. This
is typically completed at the factory, before the system is shipped (if your PC was purchased
through MCE). Creating a new LAN connection is similar to creating a new Direct connection.
To create a LAN connection:
1. Double-click on the iView icon on your computer screen to launch iView.
2. Click File on the menu bar.
3. Select Connection and click New to open the Connection dialog.
4. Type in a name for the connection.

5. Enter the Ip Address, the controllers
#1 (LAN) Ethernet port address. The
site network administrator should
have this information for you. Please
refer to System, LAN, & 3=PC TCP/
IP Addresses on page 8-5 for the
factory default settings.
6. Select Controller/Simplex.
7. Click OK. The Save As dialog opens.
8-12 Manual # 42-02-2223

8. Enter a File name for this connection in the Save As dialog (the Connection automati-
cally suggested).
9. The suggested (default) location for connections is the Connections folder (My Docu-
ments > Motion Control Engineering > iView > Connections). You may choose another
location using standard windows methods. You may also create sub-folders inside the
iController Connections folder in which groups of connections can be stored.
10. Click Save to save the connection.
8-13
Using iView
Connecting to the iBox

Once the connection is created and saved, you are ready to connect.
1. Click the Open Connection button

2. or click File on the menu bar, select
Connection and click Open. The
Open dialog appears.
3. To connect to a controller, double click the desired connection. The connection will take
a moment or two to establish, then a main screen will appear.
4. If there is a problem making the connection, you can ping the address using the iView
PC (see Pinging on page 5-11).
Note
The default location for connection (.conn) files is the Connections folder (My Documents > Motion Con-
trol Engineering > iView > Connections). The default location for configuration (.cfg) files is the Configu-
ration folder (My Documents > Motion Control Engineering > iView > Configuration). If you want to
work online, connected to a controller, select Connection > Open from the File menu. Connection (.conn)
files will be displayed in the Open dialog. If you want to work in an offline configuration file, select Con-
figuration File > Edit from the File menu. Configuration (.cfg) files will be displayed in the Open Configu-
ration File dialog. Refer to the Working Online and Working Offline topics later in this section for more
information.
8-14 Manual # 42-02-2223

Editing an Existing LAN Connection

You can edit existing LAN connections:
1. Click Edit on the File > Connection
menu.
2. The Open dialog is displayed. Double
click the connection you wish to edit.The
connection dialog is displayed. Click in
any field and correct the information you
wish to edit.
3. Click OK.
Deleting an Existing LAN Connection You can delete an existing connection from
the iControl Connections folder:
1. Select Edit on the File > Connection menu.
2. The Open dialog is displayed. Right-click on the connection you wish to delete.
3. Select Delete from the popup menu.
4. A warning dialog will appear. Click Yes to delete the connection or No to cancel without
deleting.
8-15
Using iView
Working Online
Working Online means that you are connected to an iController and are viewing or adjusting its
parameters. To work online, select Open from File > Connection menu and double click the
desired connection in the Open dialog.
When the connection is established, the Operational Status tab and Hoistway window are dis-
played with the Controllers connection name on the top left side of the title bar.
When iView is communicating with a controller, this symbol

When iView is not communicating with a controller, this symbol

When working online, you may:

View and adjust any configurable settings.
Send adjusted settings to the controller.
Save parameters to a Configuration file.
Get parameters from a Configuration file and send them to the controller.
Access Online Help
8-16 Manual # 42-02-2223

iControl AC Working Online
iView Menu Bar

Table 8.2 lists the description and location where the menu bar options are explained.
Table 8.2 iView Menu Bar Options
Menu Option Description

File Connection Create a new direct connection (page 8-8) or LAN connection
(page 8-12). Open, close, edit or delete an existing connection 8
(page 8-14).
Configuration Save default parameters (page 8-20) or current parameters
(page 8-21) to a configurations file. Load parameters from a
configuration file (page 8-22).
Event Log View the controllers event log.
Firmware Update Update the controllers firmware files (page 8-41).
Upgrade Options Allow an old version of iView to connect and make upgrade
(page 8-43).
Exit Close the iView application.
Write Privilege Acquire Send adjustments to the controller (page 8-17).
Relinquish Relinquish write privilege.
View Configuration Please refer to Controller - View Menu on page 8-26.
Diagnostics Please refer to Controller - View Menu on page 8-26.
Setup Please refer to Controller - View Menu on page 8-26.
Hoistway Please refer to Controller - View Menu on page 8-26.
Safety Tests Please refer to Controller - View Menu on page 8-26.
Layouts Please refer to Controller - View Menu on page 8-26.
Tools FTP File Viewer Use under direction of MCE Tech Support to copy, save or
replace controller firmware files (page 8-44).
Boot parameter Use under direction of MCE Tech Support if the controller is
recovery unable to boot-up (page 8-49).
Help iView Help View the on-line help for the iView application (page 8-24).
About iView iView and controller firmware version numbers.
8-17
Using iView
iView Button Bar

Table 9.2 lists the locations where the functions of the buttons are explained.
Open Connection System view

Open Configuration File Controller view
Save Configuration File Refresh
Call Registration
Table 8.3 Buttons and Dialogs

Buttons / Dialogs Description See
Open Connection Displays the Open dialog page 8-10
Open Configuration File Displays the Open Configuration File dialog page 8-22
Save Configuration File Displays the Save Configuration File dialog page 8-21
Call Registration Place car calls and hall calls
Refresh Refreshes the parameters being displayed
Firmware Update Update the iBox imbedded firmware page 8-41
Controller Causes the Controller view to be displayed
System Causes the System view to be displayed
iView Status Bar

The status bar at the bottom of the iView screen provides the following information:
Connection status Date and time

Write privilege status
Controller Type
Connection Status Connected arrows, shown above, indicate that iView is communi-
cating with the controller. Broken arrows indicate that the connection has been broken.
Write Privilege Status/Time Remaining An unlocked lock, shown above, indi-

cates that this connection does not have write privilege. A locked lock indicates that write privi-
lege has been granted, and the time remaining before time-out is displayed.
Controller Type Indicates the type of controller to which iView is connected. For a
description of each type. The controller types include:
Simplex - a single car that is not part of a group.
Local - a car that is part of a group.
Local (Swing) - a local car that can swing away (detach from the group).
Swing - a local car that is currently detached from the group and is acting like a simplex.
Local (Alternate Dispatcher) - a local car that can assume dispatching responsibilities.
Local / Dispatcher - a local car that is also currently the dispatcher. iCue dispatching soft-
ware is running on the local cars iBox.
iCentral - a central dispatcher with iCue dispatching software running on a dedicated PC
or embedded micro controller.
8-18 Manual # 42-02-2223

Viewing and Adjusting Settings

To view and/or adjust settings, you first select the Configuration tab associated with those set-
tings. There are two ways to select Configuration tabs:
1. Click the desired tab on the View > Configuration menu.
2. To display all of the configuration tabs (this takes a few seconds), click View > Layouts >
Configuration. You can then click the desired tab (Configuration layout shown with Pat-
tern/Modes tab selected).
Some tabs have one or more sub-tabs, each

supporting a related set of controls or displays.
For example, if you want to adjust a timer
associated with the brake, click the Brake tab
and then click the Timers tab. The Timer set-
tings will appear.
To adjust a particular setting, Pick delay for
example, you may either drag the cursor over
the existing value and type in a new value or
you may use the associated control (up/down
arrows) to increase or decrease the setting.
8-19
Using iView
Sending Adjustments to the Controller

After making adjustments you will want to send the new parameter values to the controller. To
send the new values:
1. Select Acquire from the 1Write Privilege menu.

2. Press the Yes softkey on the iBox to grant the privilege
request.
3. Then click Send to send changes to the controller. (The
Send button becomes active when parameter changes
have been made.)
Saving Default Parameters to a Configuration File

The Controller and/or System default parameter settings can be saved to a configuration (.cfg)
file. The default parameter values can then be loaded onto the controller should you determine
that you want to start making adjustments beginning with the default values.
To Save the Default Parameters:

1. Select Controller or System
from the File > Configuration
> Generate default menu. The
Controller or System default
configuration dialog appears.
2. In the Controller or Sys-

tem default configuration
dialog, enter the desired
file name.
3. The default folder sug-
gested is the Configura-
tions folder (My
Documents > Motion
Control Engineering >
iView > Configurations).
You may change this if
you so desire.
4. Click Save to save the file.
5. Once you have saved the
file, it will appear in the
Open Configuration File
dialog the next time you
select either Load or Edit from the File > Configuration menu. You can load the default
parameters onto the controller by selecting Load from the File > Configuration menu as
described on the next page.
1. If iView is on the same PC as iCue in a central dispatcher, write privilege for that PC/Dispatcher is automatic.
8-20 Manual # 42-02-2223

Saving Current Parameters to a Configuration File

All of the iView settings associated with a controller can be saved in a configuration (.cfg) file.
The .cfg extension identifies a file used to store information in a predetermined, fixed structure
(XML).
Using configuration files to store settings on a hard drive, USB Flash Drive or other storage
media provides some great capabilities:
Working Offline: Using iView, you can open a file and work with its settings without neces-
sarily having access to the controller itself.
File Uploading: When connected to a controller, you can choose to get some or all of the
settings in a configuration file and send them to the controller.
Adjuster Portability/Flexibility: Elevator adjusters can store configuration files associated
8
with all the controllers they service on their laptop PC. They can edit values offline, then
coordinate with on site, machine room personnel to connect and upload those changes to
the controller through the elevator Local Area Network or, through modems, DSL, T1 or
other internet connections, from virtually anyplace in the world.
Archiving controller data for future use.
You create configuration files by saving controller parameters to a file while you are working
online.
Save to File
While connected to a controller, you can easily save all controller parameters to a configuration
(.cfg) file.
1. Click the Save Configuration File button

2. or select Save from the File >
Configuration menu. A typical
Windows save dialog appears.
The default name suggested
for the file will be the control-
ler connection name with.cfg
appended. Caution: If the
parameters for this control-
ler have previously been
saved using the default name,
those previously saved
parameters will be overwrit-
ten unless you change the file
name. You may want to add a
number or date to the file
name.
The default folder suggested in the dialog is the Configurations folder (My Documents
> Motion Control Engineering > iView > Configurations).
3. Click Save to save the file.
4. Once you have saved the file, it will appear in the Open Configuration File dialog the
next time you select either Load or Edit from the File > Configuration menu.
8-21
Using iView
Loading Parameters from a Configuration File

When working online (connected to a controller), you may load (send) selected data from a pre-
viously saved configuration (.cfg) file to the controller (after ensuring that it is safe to do so and
setting the iBox Controller Stop switch appropriately).
1. Acquire Write Privilege (select Acquire from the Write Privilege menu.
2. Select Load from the File > Configu-
ration menu.
3. The Open Configuration File dialog
is displayed, allowing you to choose
the desired configuration file. Select
the file and click Open or double
click the file.
4. The Select Categories dialog opens
allowing you to choose the data to
send: All screens or data from Selected screens.
5. After selecting the desired data, click Ok to send or Cancel. If you selected All catego-
ries or any Security parameters, you must enter the Security Password and click Ok.
The default security password is manager.
8-22 Manual # 42-02-2223

iControl AC Working Offline
Working Offline
Working offline means that you are not connected to a controller but are working with a config-
uration (.cfg) file. You must have previously created the configuration file by saving it while
working on line with a controller. Please refer to Saving Current Parameters to a Configuration
File on page 8-21. To work offline:
1. Launch iView.
2. Select Edit from the File > Configuration menu.
3. The Open Configuration File dialog opens. Double-click or select the desired configura-
tion file and click Open. The .cfg extension indicates that this is a configuration file used
when working off-line.
4. A top level screen resembling the controller screen will appear. The title bar of the 8
screen displays the path and file name. You access the parameter screens and edit
parameters just as you do online. However, you cannot send parameters to a controller
while offline. Please refer to Loading Parameters from a Configuration File on page 8-
22.
5. To save changes, click the Save button .
Note
While working offline you will not be able to view some real-time data screens such as Hoistway and
Floor Heights.
To copy a configuration file: You may not want to modify the original configuration
file. Instead, you can make a copy of the original and then edit the copy.
1. Click the Start button.
2. Click My Documents.
3. Double click the Motion Control Engineering folder.
4. Double click the iView folder.
5. Double click the Configurations folder.
6. Select the configuration file and click Copy this file in the File and Folder Tasks list.
7. Select a location from the Copy Items dialog and click Copy.
8. Right click the copied file and select Rename.
9. Type the new name and press Enter.
10. From the File menu in iView, select Configuration > Edit.
11. Select the file from the Open Configuration File dialog and click Open.
12. Edit and Save the file.
8-23
Using iView
Accessing Online Help

iView offers extensive online help. Help is available whether you are working online or offline.
On-line help is incorporated into iView to provide information about iControl screens and
parameters. You can access iView On-line Help in the following ways:
Context Sensitive Help You can view On-line Help information about any screen or
tab by pressing function-key one (F1) while a screen or tab has focus. Do the following:
Click the title bar of a window, e.g., the Hoistway window, to bring focus to the window.
The background color of the windows title bar darkens indicating that the window has focus.
Then press the F1 key. iView Help will display the topic that describes the window.
Click a tab (title). An outline will appear around the tab title indicating that the tab has
focus. Then press the F1 key. iView Help will display the topic that describes the tab.
Context Sensitive Event Help The Controller logs status and error information in
the Event Log. To view the Event Log, Event Properties and Context Sensitive Event Help:
1. In the Controller view, click View > Diagnostics > Event Log to display the Event Log.
2. Double click an event in the Event Log to display the Event Properties dialog.
3. Click the Help button in the Event Properties dialog to display the Troubleshooting Tips
dialog which provides a description of the event, an indication of what action is taken,
and troubleshooting tips if appropriate.
Help Viewer iView On-line Help provides three additional ways of locating information.
The Contents and Index tabs let you find general information. The Search tab lets you look up
specific words or phrases.
To start iView On-line Help:
1. On the iView menu bar, click Help.
2. On the Help menu, click iView Help. The help viewer is displayed. Use the Contents,
Index or Search tabs to locate the desired information.
iView On-line Help provides the following kinds of information:

Using iView Help - A description of the many options, capabilities and ways of using iView
On-line Help.
Using iView - Provides information and instructions on how to use the iView graphical
user interface.
iView Windows and Tabs - Lists all of the iView windows and tabs and provides links to
descriptions of the parameters on each tab.
Message Reference - An alphabetical listing of iControl status and error messages. Each
listing includes a description, an indication of what action is taken, and troubleshooting
tips.
Parameter Reference - a tab by tab listing of all of the Controller and System parameters
including a description of each parameter.
8-24 Manual # 42-02-2223

iControl AC iView Windows and Tabs
iView Windows and Tabs

The View menu is used to navigate to the various windows and tabs in the Controller view and
System view. Many tabs have subordinate tabs that are not shown here, but are documented in
the Content Overview tables that follow.
Controller - Configuration Tabs

Controller parameter settings are displayed and may be changed on the Controller - Configura-
tion tabs. The Configuration tabs may be accessed in one of two ways.
1. While in Controller view, select the desired tab from the View > Configuration menu.
2. Display all of the Configuration tabs by selecting Configuration from the View > Layouts
menu. Then click the desired configuration tab. 8
Controller - Diagnostic Tabs

The Controller - Diagnostic tabs contain information about the status and condition of the con-
troller. The Diagnostic tabs can be accessed in one of two ways.
1. Select the desired tab from the View > Diagnostics menu.
2. Display all of the Diagnostic tabs by selecting Diagnostics from the View > Layouts
menu. Then click the desired diagnostics tab.
Controller - Setup Tabs

The Controller - Setup tabs are used to perform the iControl automatic and semi-automatic
setup procedures. The Setup tabs can be accessed by selecting Setup from the View menu. Then
click the desired calibration tab.
Additional Windows
Additional windows can be accessed from the View menu. They include:
Data Trap
Hoistway
Outputs
Safety Tests
Virtual Oscilloscope
8-25
Using iView
Specific contents will vary depending on the hardware installed at your site and on the revision
level of your iView and iBox software. Always refer first to the online help available within
iView. Online help contains the most detailed and current information about your iView soft-
ware. For detailed parameter or display descriptions, refer to iView on line help.
Table 8.4 lists the items on the View menu and tables 8.5 through 8.7 list the tabs found on the
Configuration, Diagnostics and Setup menus. Click the see page links to jump to that page.
Table 8.4 Controller - View Menu
Window Content
Configuration Parameter settings are displayed and may be changed on the Configuration tabs.
The tabs include Brake, Car Operation, Drive, General, I/O Board, Load Weigher,
Motor Field, Pattern, Safety, Serial I/O Simplex Configuration, Simplex Security,
Terminal Switches and Timer Tables.
Diagnostics The Diagnostic tabs contain information about the status and condition of the con-
troller. The tabs include Diagnostic Outputs, Event Log, Fault Bypass, Operational
Status and Terminal Switches Status. Three additional diagnostic screens, Data
Trap, Diagnostic Outputs and Virtual Oscilloscope, are displayed each in their own
window. This allows them to be used with other windows.
Setup The Setup tabs are used to perform the automatic and semi-automatic setup pro-
cedures. The tabs include Brake, Counterweight, Drive, Floor Heights, Floor Off-
sets, Load Weigher, Safety and Terminal Switches.
Hoistway A graphical representation of the car in the hoistway, including assigned car and
hall calls. Shows the current mode of operation, direction preference, speed and
actual floor height information.
Safety Tests Automated control of acceptance test procedures.
Layouts Pre-programmed screen layouts can be displayed. Custom screen layouts can be
created and saved and displayed.
Table 8.5 Controller - Configuration Tabs
Tab Sub-Tab Content

Advanced Custom Allows existing inputs, outputs and internal flags to be combined in a logic
Outputs equation which can then generate a custom output.
User Events Configure User Events
Brake Control Brake voltage, timer and filter settings.
Configuration Brake voltage, Output timer, and Current reference settings for braking
progression at 10% increments (brake fine tuning).
Car Call Enable Configure the enable inputs to be active high or low.
Car Operation Doors Door motor protection timer settings, safe edge and photo eye bypass
selections, plus front and rear door closing delay, etc.
Devices Hall and car gong settings, emergency alarm monitoring and serial fixture
parameters and discrete PI outputs.
Passenger Anti-nuisance, nudging, exercise operation, automatic swing operation,
and door operation settings for car in normal passenger service.
Fire Service Main and alternate recall, fire code selection, and door functionality for
car in fire service operation.
Independent Door and call functionality for car on Independent service.
Service
8-26 Manual # 42-02-2223

Tab Sub-Tab Content

Car Operation Elevator Recall Recall floor, call disposition, door operation, and override settings for car
(continued) on recall operation.
Earthquake Counterweight displacement sensor enable/disable, and earthquake code
selection for car on earthquake operation.
EMS Emergency Medical Service settings (recall floor, switch, and doors etc.
Emergency Includes recall, generator and door settings for car on Emergency Power
Power operation.
CFSS Commandeer for Special Services. Parameters determine car behavior
when operating in CFSS Recall and In-car modes.
Flood Determines Flood operation floors, substitute Emergency Power and Fire 8
operation recall floors, and Flood operation bypass settings.
Attendant Set front and rear door operation parameters used during Attendant Ser-
service vice operation.
Auto stop Parameters determine car behavior during Automatic Stop operation.
Sabbath Enable/disable, select floors and other parameters that determine car
operation behavior while on Sabbath operation.
Shuttle Allows a car to provide express service for a subset of the buildings
Service floors.
Heat Detectors Parameters determine car behavior when heat detectors are activated.
Jail Operation Provides special control over elevator use.
Destination General Enable DBD, set door operation, anti-nuisance and floor settings parame-
Based ter.
Dispatching Fixtures Car assignment tone, hall fixtures, car fixtures, car ID display and floors
with hall fixtures.
Drive General Drive type selection, speed reference selection, speed reference configu-
ration, and system drive-related selections for drive.
Safety Speed reference and over-current settings.
Filters Drive notch and system filter settings.
Pre-Torque Pretorque enable/disable and option settings.
Calibration Drive offset settings.
Floor Heights Configurations Use to view the learned values for the floor heights.
Floor Offsets Use to view the learned values of the floor offsets.
General General Job information, car label, ID, simplex car and backup dispatcher options.
Floors Data Front and rear opening settings for all floors.
Car Call Car Call eligibility settings for all floors. Default eligibility configurations to
Eligibility be used during special modes of operation, e.g. Independent service.
I/O Board Configuration Graphical display and organization of controller and cartop I/O boards
including specific input and output assignment on connectors.
Configurable Determines during which modes of operation the Door Enable Output,
outputs Automatic Closing Output and/or Hall Door Button Output are disabled.
IBox IP information for iControl.
Configuration
Load Weigher Load Weigher configuration and threshold settings.
8-27
Using iView
Tab Sub-Tab Content

Pattern Common Display and edit parameters common to all pattern profiles. Position
encoder resolution, leveling and releveling speeds, pattern scaling, dead
zone distance, door pre-opening distance, and position synchronization by
floor or terminal switches.
Modes Parameter settings for Standard, Earthquake, Emergency power, Emer-
gency slowdown, Correction, Inspection, and Alternate 1-2 profiles.
Terminal Position margin settings for up and down normal terminal and emergency
Switches terminal switches, and Overspeed 1 margin setting.
Timer Tables Programming of timed operations (Sabbath, Swing and Auto stop opera-
tion).
Table 8.6 Controller - Diagnostics Tabs
Tab Sub-Tab Content

Operational Displays the car status including: motion, speed, position, pattern, motor
Status and brake, processor, in-service, leveling, door locks, faults and car sta-
tus.
Data Trap Use this tool to record and analyze controller data including input and
output states, internal flags and parameter values.
Diagnostic Car Operation Displays status of car operation input and output flags, including front and
Flags rear doors, e.g. car call above, car call below. Click arrow buttons to dis-
play dependent outputs.
Motion Displays the status of Passenger (automatic) and Inspection mode motion
related inputs and outputs, e.g. Ready, Synchronization and Qualifier sta-
tus.
Drive Displays the status of Drive related inputs and outputs, e.g. Up direction
request, Pattern enable, and Motor run mode.
Safety Displays the status of Safety related inputs and outputs, e.g. Car top exit
open, Governor open, and Safety (Car) open.
Diagnostic Selection and display of up to sixteen system outputs for monitoring or
Outputs diagnosis. Hundreds of outputs are available.
Event Log Display of recorded controller events.
Fault Bypass Enable/disable selected system faults to facilitate adjustment and testing.
Display of faults currently bypassed.
Terminal Displays the learned terminal switch speeds and positions, overspeed and
Switches Status position fault thresholds and last pass positions and speeds.
Virtual An on-board oscilloscope with software selection of test point signals to
Oscilloscope be monitored and customizable display.
Call Generator Use this dialog to generate a new call list (script) or execute an existing
script.
8-28 Manual # 42-02-2223

Table 8.7 Controller - Setup Tabs
Tab Content
Brake Calibrate the brake voltage settings (see page 2-24).
Counterweight Learn the position where counterweight is adjacent to the car (see page 3-11).
Drive Learn the values for the Drive Offsets (see page 2-29).
Floor Heights Learn the absolute floor positions (distance to each floor from the lowest landing). Also
used to assist in measuring and entering the floor offsets (deviation of floor magnet
position from actual floor stopping position) (see page 4-2, page 4-25).
Load Weigher Learn the car empty and full load weights (see page 4-31).
Safety Verify that the configurations of the main and safety processors match. Perform the
Inventory learn procedure. 8
Terminal Switches Learn the speeds and positions of the normal and emergency terminal switches (see
page 4-8.
Table 8.8 Controller - Miscellaneous Dialogs/Controls
Tab Content
Call Allows you to register car and hall calls. This control is accessed by clicking the Call
Registration Registration button on the button bar.
Firmware Update Guides you through the process of updating iControl firmware. This control is accessed
by selecting Firmware Update from the File menu.
Refresh Updates the information displayed on iView windows and tabs. This control is accessed
by clicking the Refresh button on the button bar.
8-29
Using iView
Controller - Layouts
With iView, you can move and size tabs to suit the task to be performed. When you find a partic-
ular arrangement to be useful, you can save it as a custom layout (View > Layouts > Save as).
You can then display that layout at any time by selecting your custom lay0ut from the View >
Layouts > Custom menu.
Some useful layouts have been pre-programmed and are supplied with iView. They include:
Configuration: This layout displays all of the configuration tabs for easy selection.
Diagnostics: Displays all of the diagnostic tabs for easy selection.
Default: Displays the default (initial connection) layout.

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Brake: Used to perform the brake calibration procedure. Displays the Brake setup and
configuration tabs plus the Hoistway pane.
Drive: Used to perform the drive offsets calibration. Displays the Drive setup and configu-
ration tabs plus the Hoistway pane (see page 2-29).
Floor Heights: Used to perform the hoistway (floor heights) learn operation. Displays the
Floor Heights setup and configuration tabs plus the Hoistway pane.
Load Weigher: Used to perform the Load Weigher learn procedure. Displays the Load
Weigher setup and configuration tabs plus the Hoistway pane.
Motor Field: Used to perform the Motor Field calibration procedure. Displays the Motor
Field setup and configuration tabs plus the Hoistway pane.
Terminal Switches: Used to perform the Terminal learn procedure. Displays the Terminal
Switches setup, configuration and diagnostics tabs plus the Hoistway pane.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Custom: Used to select a custom layout to be displayed. This is the listing of custom lay-
outs created using View > Layouts > Save as.
Save As: Used to create and save a custom layout.
Enter the name for the custom layout.
Click OK.
8-30 Manual # 42-02-2223

System View Windows and Tabs

Note that, if iView and iCue are on the same PC in a central dispatcher. Write Privilege is auto-
matically granted for that PC/dispatcher.
System - Configuration Tabs

System parameter settings are displayed and may be changed on the System - Configuration
tabs. The Configuration tabs may be accessed in one of two ways.
1. While in System view, select the desired tab from the View > Configuration menu.
2. Display all of the Configuration tabs by selecting Configuration from the View > Layouts
menu. Then click the desired configuration tab.
System - Diagnostic Tabs

The System - Diagnostic tabs contain information about the status and condition of the system.
The Diagnostic tabs can be accessed in one of two ways.
1. Select the desired tab from the View > Diagnostics menu.
2. Display all of the Diagnostic tabs by selecting Diagnostics from the View > Layouts
menu. Then click the desired diagnostics tab.
Additional Windows
Additional windows can be accessed from the View menu. They include:
Hoistway
System Performance
Layouts
Table 8.9 System - View Menu
Window Content
Configuration System parameter settings are displayed and may be changed on the Configura-
tion tabs. The tabs include Emergency Power, System Configuration, Legacy Group
Interface, Security, System I/O, Timer Tables, User Inputs and User Outputs.
Diagnostics The System Diagnostic tabs contain information about the status and condition of
the system. The tabs include Event Log.
Hoistway A graphical representation of the cars in the system hoistways, including assigned
car and hall calls. Shows the current mode of operation, direction preference and
current floor for each elevator.
System Performance Graphical representation of system performance statistics.
Layouts Use to load Configuration, Diagnostic or Custom layouts.
8-31
Using iView
Table 8.10 System - Configuration Tabs
Tab Sub-Tab Content

Emergency Use to indicate cars connected to each generator and define how switching
Power to and from emergency power is handled.
System Building Floor definition and labeling. Car definition and labeling.
Configuration CFSS Definition of Commandeer For Special Services modes 1 and 2.
Dispatching Define system dispatching options and manually select dispatching config-
urations
Hall Call Define up to eight Hall call eligibility configurations.
Eligibility
Mode of Define up to eight dispatching Mode of Operation configurations.
Operation
Parking Define up to eight Parking configurations.
Parking Define up to eight Parking Eligibility configurations.
Eligibility
Split Bank This capability is only available through the Central Dispatcher.
Management Controls Remote Monitoring Authorization and Local Dispatcher - Resend
system parameters command.
Destination Enable DBD, set general DBD parameters, Destination Input Device param-
Based eters, Hallway configuration and special operations configuration parame-
Dispatching ters.
Legacy Group Select either Cross-cancellation or Cross-registration.
Interface
Security General Shows the status of System Security. Use these controls to configure car
Hall Calls and hall call restrictions for a simplex or swing car or car assigned to be the
backup or local dispatcher for a group.
Car Calls
System I/O System Configuration of system input/output settings.
Bus Serial bus troubleshooting.
Timer Tables Use to configure timer tables to control system functions, e.g., Hall call eli-
gibility, Parking, Parking eligibility, Mode of operation, Security, and User
outputs 1 through 3.
User Events Define User Events which, when assigned a hardware input, are logged on
the System Event Log when activated and deactivated.
Remote Outputs Configuration Define and configure up to 32 Remote Outputs which can be wired to any
Trigger input or other device as needed.
Predictive Gongs Parameters determine the behavior of predictive gongs.
Table 8.11 System - Diagnostic Tabs
Tab Content
Event Log Display of recorded system events.
Network Diagnostics Controller and Remote Client network information.
DBD Call Diagnostics Destination Based Dispatching call diagnostics tool.
Table 8.12 System - Miscellaneous Dialogs/Controls
Tab Content
Call Allows you to register car and hall calls. This control is accessed by clicking the Call
Registration Registration button on the button bar.
8-32 Manual # 42-02-2223

Table 8.12 System - Miscellaneous Dialogs/Controls
Tab Content
DBD Call Allows you to register DBD calls. This control is accessed by clicking the DBD Call Reg-
Registration istration button on the button bar.
Refresh Updates the information displayed on iView windows and tabs. This control is accessed
by clicking the Refresh button on the button bar.
Pinning and Unpinning Windows

iView windows have a little push-pin icon in the upper right
corner, e.g. the Hoistway window shown on the right.
When the pin is pointing down, the window is pinned 8
in its designated position.
If you click the pin icon, it points left and a button

labeled Hoistway appears.
The window remains in view if it has focus (click the
window title bar) or as long as the mouse cursor
remains on the window or button.
But if another window has focus and you move the

mouse cursor off of the window or button, the window
collapses out of view.
To temporarily bring the window into view again, place

the mouse cursor over the button. The window slides
into view and will remain in view if you click the title bar
or as long as the cursor remains on the button/window.
To permanently display the window again:
1. Bring the window into view by placing the cursor over
the button.
2. Click the pin so that it is pointing down again.
8-33
Using iView
Resizing Windows
iView windows can be resize so that you see just the data you need to perform a test or task.
To resize a window:
1. Place the mouse cursor in the space between the windows.
Cursor
2. When the cursor changes to a double line with arrows, you can click and drag
(hold the left mouse button down while moving the mouse) the window boundary and
resize the window.
8-34 Manual # 42-02-2223

Docking and Undocking Windows

iView windows can be undocked from their assigned position and moved to another position on
the screen.
To undock and move a window:

1. Notice that the Diagnostics window is positioned at the bottom of the screen (connec-
tion arrows at bottom left corner). Double click the window title bar.
2. The title bar and frame around the Diagnostics window change to a solid blue line indi-
cating that the window is now undocked and can be moved.
3. Click the title bar and drag (hold down the left mouse button while moving the mouse)
the window to a new location.
4. Release the mouse button. The undocked window will appear in the new location, on top
of what ever is in that location. You can tell that it is undocked because the solid blue
frame remains.
5. You can quickly return the window to its original docked location by double-clicking in
the windows title bar.
8-35
Using iView
To dock a window in a new location:

1. Notice that while moving an undocked window, docking controls appear near the center
and at the top, bottom and sides of the screen. As you slide the cursor over the controls,
a light blue highlight indicates the position to which the window will be moved. Release
the mouse button and the window docks in the new location.
Light blue highlighted area Docking controls
8-36 Manual # 42-02-2223

2. An alternate method of moving a window is to right click the title bar of the window. In
the drop down list that appears, select Dock to and click the desired location. In the
example below, the Diagnostics window has been moved to the top of the screen.
Drop down list
3. If you like this arrangement and would like to be able to easily display this arrangement
in the future, you can save it as a Custom Layout. Please refer to Controller - Layouts
on page 8-30.
8-37
Using iView
Printing Screens
1. With the screen displayed, press the Print Screen key to send the entire screen to the
clipboard (PC memory).
2. To send only the selected item (widow or dialog) to the clipboard, press and hold the Alt
key, then press the Print Screen key.
Items sent to the clipboard can be pasted into any of several applications. One that you should
definitely have on your PC is Wordpad.
3. Open the Wordpad application (Start > All Programs > Accessories > Wordpad).
4. Select Paste from the Edit menu or press and hold the Ctrl key while pressing and
releasing the v key to paste the captured screen into Wordpad.
5. Select Print from the File menu to print the screen.
6. Save the file if you want to keep a record of the screen on the PC hard drive.
Setting the System Date and Time

The iControl system date and time can be set using the iView application connected to the Cen-
tral Dispatcher (iCue PC), Local/Dispatcher or Simplex car controller. Dispatcher time and date
are transferred to all running local cars and to other cars as they power up.
To set the time and date:

1. Establish an iView connection to the system dispatcher or simplex car.
2. Double-click the time/date display at the bottom-right of the status bar (shown
below). The Date / Time Configuration dialog will appear:
3. Use the controls to set the date and/or time and click Apply or OK. The date and time
will be updated on all controllers communicating with the dispatcher.
Note
The iView PCs time, which is displayed at the very bottom-right corner of the screen, is not the same as
the iControl systems date and time. The iControl systems date and time are displayed on the iView sta-
tus bar and are set using the Date / Time Configuration dialog shown above.
8-38 Manual # 42-02-2223

Editing Dynamic Displays

The virtual oscilloscope display is editable. You may easily modify labels, displays, animation,
and more to suit your immediate display needs. When a display is closed, then re-opened, it
reverts to its default values.
To edit a display:
1. Right-click on the graph or on one of the scales
to reveal a popup menu. Select Edit from the
menu.
8-39
Using iView
2. Experiment with modifying the display to find the combinations that suit the signal
types you are currently examining. The Edit menu is extensive:
3. Several different editors are available depending on where you click in the graphic dis-
play.
8-40 Manual # 42-02-2223

iControl AC Updating Controller Firmware
Updating Controller Firmware

Warning! Do not attempt this procedure without first contacting
MCE Technical Support. Failure to do so can result in cata-
strophic failure of the iBox.
Firmware Update allows you to install updated iControl operating software. It is likely that two
firmware program files will be updated. They are:
Bootrom.mce, the iControl boot-up program.
vxworks.mce, the iControl IMP computer program.
To update iControl firmware: 8

1. Copy the new Bootrom.mce (Bootrom folder) and vxworks.mce (IMP folder) files to the
desktop of the computer being used to perform the firmware update.
2. Use iView to connect to the iBox on which the firmware is being updated.
3. If you want to save the configuration settings for later re-loading, select Save from the
File > Configuration menu. In the Save Configuration File dialog, type a name in the File
name: box and click Save. Please refer to Saving Current Parameters to a Configuration
File on page 8-21.
4. Select Firmware Update from the File menu.
5. Click Yes in the dialog This action will automatically deactivate all screens. Proceed?
6. Follow instructions 1 through 4 in the Firmware Update dialog and then click Continue.
The Firmware Update dialog will change to:
8-41
Using iView
7. Update the Bootrom first. Double click the () in the Bootrom row.
8. Use the Open dialog to navigate to the computers Desktop and double click the
Bootrom.mce file. The bootrom file will load and the version will be indicated in the
Upgrade version column.
9. Click Start upgrade. The upgrade progress will be indicated in the text window. When
the upgrade is completed you will be instructed to close iView and press the iBox Com-
puter Reset button.
Note
Note: If an FrmFtp Login dialog appears asking for a User and Password, click OK. The user name and
password are not used for this operation at this time.
10. Use iView to connect to the iBox when it finishes the re-boot.
11. Repeat steps 4, 5 and 6.
12. Click the check box to Delete the paramf and constf files on the controller after IMP
upgrade
13. Double click the () in the Imp row.
14. Use the Open dialog to navigate to the computers Desktop and double click the
vxworks.mce file. The IMP application file will load and the version will be indicated in
the Upgrade version column.
8-42 Manual # 42-02-2223

15. Click Start upgrade. The upgrade progress will be indicated in the text window. When
the upgrade is completed you will be instructed to close iView and press the iBox Com-
puter Reset button.
16. Use iView to connect to the iBox when it finishes the re-boot.
17. Select About iView from the Help menu and verify the version numbers for the IMP
Application and IMP Bootrom.
18. If you want to restore the original parameter settings which were saved in step #3, first
acquire write privilege and then select Load from the File > Configuration menu. Please
refer to Loading Parameters from a Configuration File on page 8-22.
19. Select and Open or double click the desired file from the Open Configuration File dialog.
20. Select All screens or the Selected screens for which you wish to restore the original
parameter settings, and click OK.
8
Upgrade Options
When upgrading firmware from a pre-December 2005 release to a later release, in the event
that the Upgrade Wizard fails to properly load the parameters file, iView may not be able to con-
nect to the upgraded controller. The Upgrade Options Dialog (File > Upgrade Options) can be
used to enable iView to connect to the controller or iCue and complete the upgrade.
8-43
Using iView
FTP File Viewer

The FTP File Viewer is a very useful troubleshooting tool. It can be used to copy firmware files
from an iBox to a PC, delete iBox firmware files or copy firmware files from a PC to an iBox. For
example, the Controllers Event Log file could be copied from the iBox to the iView PC and then
sent via e-mail to MCE for evaluation. Typically this would be done per instructions from MCE
Tech Support.
Using the FTP File Viewer

1. From the iView Tools menu, click FTP File
Viewer.
2. The FTP Viewer window opens.
8-44 Manual # 42-02-2223

3. Connect the FTP File Viewer utility to

a controller: Select Connect from
the File menu and click Open
4. or click Connect next

to STEP 1:
5. The Open dialog

appears. Click the
desired connection.
6. Next acquire write privi-

lege. Click Acquire
next to STEP 2:
7. The Write Privilege dia-

log appears. Press Yes
(1) on the iBox Onboard
Display
8-45
Using iView
8. Set the iBox INSPECTION,

CONTROLLER STOP and
WRITE ENABLE
switches as shown.
9. The FTP Viewer window changes to:
8-46 Manual # 42-02-2223

10. To copy a file from an iBox to a PC, select a file in the Controller FLASH or
BBRAM list and then click Copy to PC. The default folder to which the files are copied
is Documents and Settings\Users name\My Documents\Motion Control Engineer-
ing\FTP Viewer. Note that a description of the file is shown in the list box below the
lists.
11. To delete a file from the Controller FLASH or BBRAM lists, select a file and
then click Delete File.
Note
If you attempt to delete the PARAMF file, the following Information message appears:
8-47
Using iView
12. To copy a file from a PC to an iBox, select the file in the Computer list box and
then click Copy to iBox.
Note
If you attempt to copy the VXWORKS file to the iBox, the following Warning message appears:
8-48 Manual # 42-02-2223

Boot parameter recovery

In very rare instances the iBox may refuse to bootup. This utility may be able to allow the iBox
to recover from this state. Note: To use this tool, the iBox must have Boot Loader version 4.0 or
greater.
1. An RS232 serial cable must be connected between a serial port on the PC and the RS232
PC port on the iBox.
2. Launch the Boot parameter recovery utility by

selecting Boot parameter recovery from the
iView Tools menu.
3. The iBox Boot Parameter Recovery dialog opens.

8
4. Click Connect.
Assign inputs on parameter

recovery:
5. Assign LAN IP Address:

If you wish to assign a new
LAN IP address as part of
the boot parameter recov-
ery, enter the new LAN IP
Address for the iBox.
6. The default subnet mask is

shown. If you need to
change it, click Assign
subnet mask and use the
drop down list to select.
7. If you wish to assign new

MAC addresses, click
Assign MAC addresses
and enter the new
addresses
8. Click Recover Params.
9. The iBox will automatically reboot, set the boot parameters to their default values, and
then reboot again.
8-49
Using iView
Bootrom Recovery via OBD

In rare instances the iBox may refuse to bootup, usually iBox
after updating or backdating firmware. This utility on the Boot ROM
OBD, may allow the ibox to be recovered. It is available Version 4.0.2
on bootrom version 4.0.2 or greater. These options are
meant for expert users or tech support only. System Booting
Begin by pressing and holding the ENTER button on the

iBox. Momentarily press the COMPUTER RESET button.
Continue holding in the ENTER button until the Boot Boot Menu:
Menu is displayed.
1: Change IP Address
Change IP Address - Use this option to change the IP 2: Default Boot Prms
address of the LAN Network port before bootup (see 3: Start FTP server
Default Boot Params). This is helpful if the boot parame- 4: Boot
ters have been corrupted or the IP is not correct and you
need to FTP into the iBox.
With the Boot Menu displayed, press soft switch #1: Use IP Address
the left/right arrow keys to select the digit and the up/ 010.010.052.041
down arrows to make the correction. Press Enter to save ^
the changed IP address. Mask:
FFFF0000
Default Boot Params - This option allows the com-
puter to reset all parameters to standard settings. With Use Arrows To Edit
the Boot Menu displayed, press soft switch #2: Press Enter to Save
The Parameters Defaulted message is displayed to indi- Parameters Defaulted

cate that the parameters have been defaulted. Press Enter Press Enter
to return to the Boot Menu. To Return
Warning: You will need to check the IP addresses and
MAC addresses to make sure they match the job site.
Also, all of the configuration parameters will be set to
their default values. If you have a saved configuration file
you can load it once the iBox has booted.
Start FTP Server - available on iView 3.5.0 and above. FTP Server Running..
With the Boot Menu displayed, press soft switch #3. To recover Controller
1. Open iView
This option starts an FTP server on the iBox to allow
2. Launch FTP Viewer
access to the Flash and BBRAM file system. This is useful
3. File > IBox File
if the vxworks.mce image is corrupted or missing. Using System Recovery
the FTP Viewer in iView, the vxworks file can be replaced, 4. Press Reset
the paramf file can be deleted, etc. Instructions for using
the FTP File Viewer are in the April 2010 Release or later
iControl User Guide.
Boot - This option causes the boot process to continue. Press soft switch #4.
8-50 Manual # 42-02-2223

Reference
About this Section

This section contains detailed information about:
iControl AC Specifications (see page 9-2).
Software Test Point Signals: Descriptions of the signals that can be routed to hardware
and software test points (see page 9-2).
iBox Field Connections: Descriptions of field input and output connections on the left side
of the iBox, including signal levels in active and inactive states (see page 9-6).
Terminal Field Connections (see page 9-12).
System and LAN Ethernet: Information about TCP/IP addresses (see page 9-12).
TORQMAX F5 Parameters Quick Reference: A listing of TORQMAX F5 drive parameters
and their default and typical settings (see page 9-23).
PowerBack R6 Parameters Quick Reference: A listing of PowerBack R6 Regenerative drive
parameters and their default and typical settings (see page 9-27).
Magnetek HPV900 Series 2 Parameters Quick Reference: A listing of HPV900 Series 2
Drive parameters and their default settings (see page 9-28).
Magnetek Quattro AC Quick Reference: A listing of Quattro AC drive parameters and their
default settings. (See page 9-35.)
9-1
Reference
iControl AC Specifications
Table 9.1 iControl AC Specifications
Parameter Specification
Car Speed Up to 1800 fpm (9 m/s)
Jerk 15 ft/sec3 (7.62 m/sec3) maximum
8 ft/sec3 (2.44 m/sec3) nominal
1 ft/sec3 (0.305 m/sec3) minimum
Acceleration 10 ft/sec2 (3.04 m/sec2) maximum
4 ft/sec2 (1.52 m/sec2) nominal
1 ft/sec2 (0.31 m/sec2) minimum
Number of Stops Up to 96 (60 for Simplex operation)
Number of Cars in Group Up to 15
Floor Leveling Accuracy +/- 0.25 inches (6.35mm) guaranteed
+/- 0.125 inches (3.18mm) typical
Minimum Floor to Floor Time 4.8 seconds for 12-foot (3.66m) floor heights if rotating equipment is
capable of delivering the necessary torque.
Environmental Limits 32 to 104 degrees F (040 degrees C) ambient
12,000 ft (3,658m) altitude
95% relative humidity (non-condensing)
Software Test Point Signals

The iBox allows you to select any one of over fifty signals to display on-screen in iView or on the
iBox LCD display at each of two software test points. A signal selected on a software test point
(Test Point 1, Test Point 2) is also output on the corresponding iBox physical test point (STP 1,
STP 2). For example, if you selected Brake Voltage on software Test Point 1, the Brake Voltage
value would be displayed on screen and would also be output on iBox test point STP 1. Signals
you can choose from are listed in the following table.
Raw signals are unprocessed signals directly from a source. They are frequently too spikey to
use to read an average value but provide proof of activity and instantaneous reaction to chang-
ing conditions.
Filtered values represent the average, filtered value extrapolated from the raw signal to provide
a viewable, smoothed, signal.
Table 9.2 Test Point Signals

Test Signal Description / Text References
Acceleration (Command) Post-filter, acceleration command signal.
Acceleration (Directional) Directional acceleration signal.
Acceleration (Filtered) Pre-filtered acceleration signal.
Acceleration (Interpolated) Interpolated (smoothed) acceleration signal.
Acceleration (Raw) Raw acceleration signal.
Acceleration (Slew) Slew rate limited acceleration signal.
Armature Active Status High = armature control enabled.
Armature Command Control Filtered armature composite command.
Armature Command (Damped) Damped armature composite command.
Armature Command (Raw) Raw armature composite command.
9-2 Manual # 42-02-2223

iControl AC Software Test Point Signals

Armature Composite Control The summation of Armature Command Control and Armature
Feed forward Control.
Armature Control Set PID control sets that reflect standard, start (normal), stop (nor-
mal), steady-state (normal) and start (relevel) adjustment
parameters.
Normal:
0 = Idle - before motor contactor picks [PID - Standard]
1 = Idle - after motor contactor picks [PID - Start (normal)]
2 = Acceleration [PID - Standard]
3 = Peak [PID - Steady-State (normal)]
4 = Deceleration [PID - Standard]
5 = Flare [PID - Stop (normal)]
9
6 = Leveling [PID - Standard]
7 = Idle - before motor contactor drops [PID - Standard]
Relevel:
8 = Idle - before motor contactor picks [PID - Standard]
9 = Idle - after motor contactor picks [PID - Start (relevel)]
10 = Acceleration - Leveling [PID - Standard]
Armature Current Dampen Feedback Armature current dampening signal.
Armature Current Signal Raw armature current feedback signal.
Armature Current Synthetic Feedback Armature current synthetic speed signal used for internal speed
reference and for current safety calibration.
Armature Differential Command Armature differential command.
Armature Differential Gain Armature differential gain.
Armature Error (Damped) Dampened armature error signal.
Armature Error (Raw) Raw armature error signal.
Armature Feedforward (Control) Filtered armature feedforward command.
Armature Feedforward (Raw) Raw armature feedforward command.
Armature Integral Command Armature integral command.
Armature Integral Gain Armature integral gain.
Armature On Status High = PID control enabled.
Armature Proportional Command Armature proportional command.
Armature Proportional Gain Armature proportional gain.
Armature Voltage Dampen Feedback Armature voltage dampening signal.
Armature Voltage Signal Raw armature voltage feedback signal.
Armature Voltage Synthetic Feedback Armature voltage synthetic speed signal used for internal speed
reference and for voltage safety calibration.
Brake Contactor Status Indicates status (open/closed) of brake contactor. When the sig-
nal is high, the contacts are closed. When the contactor is closed
AND the brake field module is enabled, the brake will lift.
Brake Current Feedback Filtered brake current feedback signal.
Brake Current Signal Raw brake current feedback signal.
Brake Enable Status Indicates status of signal that enables the brake field module.
When high, the module is enabled. When the module is enabled
AND the contactor is closed, the brake will lift.
Brake Voltage Feedback Filtered brake voltage feedback signal.
Brake Voltage Signal Raw brake voltage feedback signal.
DAC Offset Status Indicates whether DAC signal offset is positive or negative.
Drive Enable Status Indicates status of signal that enables the motor field module.
When high, the module is enabled. When the module is enabled
AND the contactor is closed, the motor will run.
9-3
Reference

Drive IOS Limit This signal represents the hard-coded threshold at which an
Inspection Overspeed will be tripped. 150fpm.
Drive IOS Param Limit This signal represents the user-configurable threshold (Safety
screen) at which an Inspection Overspeed will be tripped.
Encoder Signal Raw encoder speed signal.
Field Active Status High = motor field control enabled.
Field Command (Control) Motor field composite command.
Field Control Path MCE internal diagnosis only.
Field Current Feedback Filtered motor field current feedback signal.
Field Current Signal Raw motor field current feedback signal.
Field Error Motor field error signal.
Field Integral Command Motor field integral command.
Field Integral Gain Motor field integral gain.
Field Proportional Command Motor field proportional command.
Field Proportional Gain Motor field proportional gain.
Field Voltage Feedback Filtered motor field voltage feedback signal.
Field Voltage Signal Raw motor field voltage feedback signal.
Load Weigher (Raw) Analog load weigher signal, after amplification (adjusted by
trimpot LW ADJ), at test point TP_LW on the CTP (cartop) board.
Load Weigher (Signal) The controllers internal representation of the Load Weigher
(Raw) signal.
Load Weigher Balanced This signal is used to determine the amount of pretorque that
the controller needs to provide to the motor to help prevent roll-
back on takeoff. 0 = balanced load. Please refer to Pretorque
Gain Adjustments on page 4-17.
Load Weigher Feedback This signal represents the smoothed, processed Load Weigher
(Signal), captured with doors closed, just before departure.
Motor Contactor Status Indicates status (open/closed) of motor contactor. When the sig-
nal is high, the contacts are closed. When the contactor is closed
AND the motor field module is enabled, the motor will run.
Over Current Armature current signal used for Loop Over Current. Adjusted
using Rated Loop Over Current and Loop Over Current Fault
Time.
Over Current Power Armature power accumulated. Used for Loop Over Current.
Adjusted using Rated Loop Over Current and Loop Over Current
Fault Time.
Over Current Power Threshold The armature power threshold above which a Loop Over Current
fault is generated. Adjusted using Rated Loop Over Current and
Loop Over Current Fault Time.
Over Current Threshold Armature current signal threshold above which over current
power is accumulated. Used for Loop Over Current. Adjusted
using Rated Loop Over Current and Loop Over Current Fault
Time.
Pattern (Command) Post-filtered pattern command signal. Please refer to Following
Error Margin on page 2-45. Please refer to Verifying a One
Floor Run on page 4-4. Please refer to Pattern Scaling on
page 4-7. Please refer to Setting Pattern Parameters on
page 4-14.
Pattern (Directional) Directional pattern signal.
Pattern (Filtered) Pre-filtered pattern signal. Please refer to Tach Error Tripping
Threshold Adjustment on page 2-46
9-4 Manual # 42-02-2223

iControl AC Software Test Point Signals

Pattern (Interpolated) Interpolated (smoothed) pattern signal.
Pattern (Phase) The numbers displayed represent segments of the speed profile.
Please refer to Shaping the Speed Profile on page 4-12.
0 = Idle
1 = Initial Jerk
2 = Acceleration
3 = Low Roll Jerk (during acceleration, high speed is reached)
4 = Peak (High Speed)
5 = High Roll Jerk (during acceleration, high speed not reached)
6 = High/Low Roll Jerk (during deceleration)
7 = Deceleration
8 = Flare Jerk (transition from deceleration to leveling)
9
9 = Approach Jerk (transition from deceleration to leveling)
10 = Leveling
Pattern (Raw) Raw pattern signal.
Pattern (Region) The numbers reflect a simplified representation of the speed
profile in comparison to Pattern (Phase).
0 = Idle 3 = Deceleration
1 = Acceleration 4 = Flare
2 = Peak 5 = Leveling
Pattern (Slew Limited) Slew rate limited pattern signal.
Position Bit This signal represents car position/motion. It is abstracted from
the motor velocity encoder or tach signal. The signal toggles low
or high with every 32-inches of motor travel. Increasing fre-
quency = increasing rate of position change.
Pre-Run Status High = Pre-energizes motor field as doors are closing and
demand occurs.
Pretorque (Command) This is the actual pretorque signal sent to the drive and used to
pretorque the motor. This is filtered representation of the raw
pretorque demand signal, captured as the doors close and
used to pretorque the motor as needed depending on the weight
in the car.
Pretorque (Raw) This is a representation of the raw pretorque demand signal. It
will react to car load changes (i.e., doors open, passengers load-
ing/unloading).
SCR Current Sensor Offset Status High = SCR current sensor signal offset positive.
SCR Intg Offset Status High = SCR integrator signal offset positive.
Speed Bit When the car is still, this signal is high. When the car is travel-
ling at a rate in excess of 40fpm, this signal is low.
Speed Feedback Filtered speed feedback signal. Please refer to Following Error
Margin on page 2-45.Please refer to Tach Error Tripping
Threshold Adjustment on page 2-46. Please refer to Empty Car
Tests on page 3-13. Please refer to Verifying a One Floor Run
on page 4-4. Please refer to Setting Pattern Parameters on
page 4-14. Please refer to Tach Error Tripping Threshold Adjust-
ment on page 4-39.
Sufficient Field Status High = sufficient motor field current has been achieved. Differ-
ent percentage of forcing, depending on mode. Inspection =
60% of forcing. Other, 80% of forcing.
Synthetic Signal Speed signal synthesized from armature voltage and current.
9-5
Reference

Tach Error Lower Limit This signal represents the lower margin of tach error allowed at
contract speed before a tach fault is generated. Display with
Speed Feedback signal to see the margin. If Speed Feedback
crosses Tach Error Lower Limit the tach fault will be generated.
Please refer to Tach Error Tripping Threshold Adjustment on
ment on page 4-39.
Tach Error Upper Limit This signal represents the upper margin of tach error allowed at
contract speed before a tach fault is generated. Display with
Speed Feedback signal to see the margin. If Speed Feedback
crosses Tach Error Upper Limit the tach fault will be generated.
Please refer to Tach Error Tripping Threshold Adjustment on
ment on page 4-39.
Tachometer Signal Raw tachometer signal.
iBox Field Connections

The majority of field connections to the iBox are made through pluggable terminal strips along
the left edge of the iBox (as you face it). Field connections are control and data connections to
and from equipment external to the iBox. For example, connections through the traveler cable
to car and hoistway equipment or connections to additional machine room equipment like rope
grippers, velocity encoders, governors, etc. In this section, three tables describe connections
iBox connections, expansion board connections, and iControl terminal connections respec-
tively.
Table 9.3 iBox Field Connections

TS Tach positive signal. Analog. 0 - 30 VDC (15 VDC @ 1000 RPM).
TACH
TC Tach common (negative in respect to TS when car moving down)

SHLD Tach shield connection (connect at iBox-end only)
DP1+ Positive going, +15V, digital pulse stream from iLand to iLink to iBox (DP1 leads
DP2 when car moves up).
DP1- Negative going, -15V, digital pulse stream from iLand to iLink to iBox.
POSITION

DP2+ Positive going, +15V, digital pulse stream from iLand to iLink to iBox (DP2 leads
DP1 when car moves down)
DP2- Negative going, -15V, digital pulse stream from iLand to iLink to iBox
9-6 Manual # 42-02-2223

iControl AC iBox Field Connections

A+ Positive going, +12V, digital pulse from motor velocity encoder. Please refer to
VELOCITY ENCODER
Velocity Encoder Installation and Wiring on page 2-10.

A- Negative going, -12V, digital pulse from motor velocity encoder.
B+ Positive going, +12V, digital pulse from motor velocity encoder.
B- Negative going, -12V, digital pulse from motor velocity encoder.
Z+ Positive going, +12V, digital pulse from motor velocity encoder.
Z- Negative going, -12V, digital pulse from motor velocity encoder.
VE- Encoder power return
VE+ +12 VDC power to encoder (relative to VE-)
9
TX+ iBox transmit, positive going serial communication stream from iBox to iLink.
Connects to iLink ICE-CTP Board terminal RX+. TX+ and TX- comprise a dif-
ferential communications pair. Please refer to Installing iLink on page 3-3.
TX- iBox transmit, negative going serial communication stream from iBox to iLink.
CARTOP LINK
Connects to iLink ICE-CTP Board terminal RX-.

SHLD Shield connection for twisted-pair TX+/TX-
RX+ iBox receive, positive going serial communication stream from iLink to iBox. Con-
nects to iLink ICE-CTP board terminal TX+. RX+ and RX- comprise a differ-
ential communications pair.
RX- iBox receive, negative going serial communication stream from iLink to iBox.
Connects to iLink ICE-CTP board terminal TX-.
SHLD Shield connection for twisted-pair RX+/RX-
DZ Door Zone Sensor input. Activated = 110 VDC.
ULM Up Leveling Marker Sensor input. Activated = 110 VDC.
DLM Down Leveling Marker Sensor input. Activated = 110 VDC.
INCT Cartop Inspection Station INSP/AUTO Switch input. Activated = 110 VDC.
ICTU Cartop Inspection Station UP Button input (includes SAF button). Activated = 110
VDC.
ICTD Cartop Inspection Station DN Button input (includes SAF button). Activated = 110
VDC.
INCP COP Inspection Station INSP/AUTO Switch input. Activated = 110 VDC.
ICPU COP Inspection Station UP Button input. Activated = 110 VDC.
CAR
ICPD COP Inspection Station DN Button input. Activated = 110 VDC.

INA Car Panel (Hoistway) Access Enable switch input. 0 VDC active signal level. Off =
110 VDC.
ESC Car Panel Emergency Stop switch input. 0 VDC active signal level stops car. Off =
110 VDC.
DCL Door Close Limit input. Door fully closed, input inactive, 0 VAC. Door not closed
signal level, 120 VAC.
DOL Door Open Limit input. Door fully open, input inactive, 0 VAC. Door not open sig-
nal level, 120 VAC.
DPM Door Position Monitor input. Door closed, input inactive, 120 VAC. Door not
closed, 0 VAC.
9-7
Reference

UNTD Up Normal Limit Direction switch input. 110 VDC = input on/switch closed. 0 VDC
= input off/switch open.
UNT5 Up Slowdown Limit switch #5 input. 110 VDC = input on/switch closed. 0 VDC =
input off/switch open.
UETS Up Emergency Terminal Limit switch input. 110 VDC = input on/switch closed. 0
VDC = input off/switch open.
LIMITS

DNT1 Down Slowdown Limit switch #1 input. 110 VDC = input on/switch closed. 0 VDC
DETS Down Emergency Terminal Limit switch input. 110 VDC = input on/switch closed.
0 VDC = input off/switch open.
DNTD Down Normal Limit Direction switch input. 110 VDC = input on/switch closed. 0
VDC = input off/switch open.
9-8 Manual # 42-02-2223


ATU Hoistway Access Top Up switch input. When the Car Panel Access Enable switch
(INA input) is on, an active input (key switch closure) here (110 VDC) will cause
the car to move up the hoistway. A hoistway limit switch electrically between the
ATU input and the activating switch will open and stop the car after it has moved
the required distance up the hoistway (if installed). Normal/Off state = 0 VDC.
Refer also to the -MRW drawing in the job prints.
ATD Hoistway Access Top Down switch input. When the Car Panel Access Enable
switch (INA input) is on, an active input (key switch closure) here (110 VDC) will
cause the car to move down the hoistway. A hoistway limit switch electrically
between the ATD input and the activating switch will open and stop the car after it
has moved the required distance down the hoistway (if installed). Normal/Off 9
H/WAY
state = 0 VDC. Refer also to the -MRW drawing in the job prints.
ABU Hoistway Access Bottom Up switch input. When the Car Panel Access Enable
cause the car to move up the hoistway. A hoistway limit switch electrically
between the ABU input and the activating switch will open and stop the car after
it has moved the required distance up the hoistway (if installed). Normal/Off state
= 0 VDC. Refer also to the -MRW drawing in the job prints.
ABD Hoistway Access Bottom Down switch input. When the Car Panel Access Enable
cause the car to move down the hoistway. A hoistway limit switch electrically
between the ABD input and the activating switch will open and stop the car after
it has moved the required distance down the hoistway (if installed). Normal/Off
state = 0 VDC. Refer also to the -MRW drawing in the job prints.
9-9
Reference

GS Gate Switch input. The gate switch makes up when the elevator doors close.
When the switch is made, there will be 110 VDC on this input. When the switch is
open, there will be 0 VDC on this input. The gate switch may be wired in series
with other switches or locks on the elevator doors (as shown in the job prints) so
that if any of the switches do not make, the GS input will remain low and the car
will not run.
DLAT Door Lock Access Top input. When a top hoistway access is provided (see INA,
ATU, and ATD), the hoistway door lock associated with that landing is connected
between the #3 bus and this input. When the switch is made, there will be 110
VDC on this input. When the switch is open, there will be 0 VDC on this input and
the car will not run unless INA is active and then only in response to the ATU or
ATD input.
DLMS Door Lock Main String input. If top and bottom hoistway access (see INA, ATU,
ATD, ABU, and ABD) is not provided, all hoistway door locks are wired in series
between the #3 bus and DLMS. When the switches are made, there will be 110
VDC on this input. When any switch is open, there will be 0 VDC on this input and
the car will not run.
DLAB Door Lock Access Bottom input. When a bottom hoistway access is provided (see
INA, ABU, and ABD), the hoistway door lock associated with that landing is con-
LOCKS/CONTACTS
nected between the #3 bus and this input. When the switch is made, there will be
110 VDC on this input. When the switch is open, there will be 0 VDC on this input
and the car will not run unless INA is active and then only in response to the ABU
or ABD input.
DCAT Door Contact Access Top input. When a top hoistway access is provided (see INA,
ATU, ATD, and DLAT), the hoistway door contact associated with that landing is
connected between the #3 bus and this input. When the switch is made, there
will be 110 VDC on this input. When the switch is open, there will be 0 VDC on
this input and the car will not run unless INA is active and then only in response
to the ATU or ATD input.
DCMS Door Contact Main String input. If top and bottom hoistway access (see INA, ATU,
ATD, ABU, and ADB) is not provided, all hoistway door contacts are wired in
series between the #3 bus and DCMS. When the switches are made, there will be
110 VDC on this input. When any switch is open, there will be 0 VDC on this input
and the car will not run.
DCAB Door Contact Access Bottom input. When a bottom hoistway access is provided
(see INA, ABU, ABD, and DLAB), the hoistway door contact associated with that
landing is connected between the #3 bus and this input. When the switch is
made, there will be 110 VDC on this input. When the switch is open, there will be
0 VDC on this input and the car will not run unless INA is active and then only in
response to the ABU or ABD input.
GOV Governor input. The governor is connected between the #3 bus and this input.
When the governor switch is made, there is 110 VDC on this input. It the gover-
nor switch trips/opens, there is 0 VDC on this input and the car will not run.
SP 1 Spare input 1. If used, connect as shown in the job prints.
BD Brake Drive relay indicator. When the BD relay on the iBox IRB board is closed to
pick the brake, this LED will light. Monitored by Safety Processor A.
TB Brake Triac active indicator. When the brake triac on the iBox IRB board is active
BRAKE
(completes circuit for BD relay), this LED will light. Monitored by Safety Processor
B.
BRD Brake Redundancy indicator. This LED lights when the main brake contactor drops
out.
BDRD Brake Drive Redundancy indicator. This LED lights when the BD relay drops out.
9-10 Manual # 42-02-2223


MD Motor Drive relay indicator. When the MD relay on the iBox IRB board is closed to
enable the motor, this LED will light. Monitored by Safety Processor A.
TM Motor Triac active indicator. When the motor triac on the iBox IRB board is active
DRIVE
(completes circuit for MD relay), this LED will light. Monitored by Safety Processor
B.
MRD Motor Redundancy indicator. This LED lights when the main motor contactor
drops out.
MDRD Motor Drive Redundancy indicator. This LED lights when the MD relay drops out.
SAFC Safety Cartop input. Cartop safety relays and switches are wired in series
between SAFH (Safety Hoistway) and SAFC. If any contact in the safety string
opens, there will be 0 VDC on this input and the car will not run. If all safety con-
9
tacts in the string are closed, there will be 110 VDC on this input.
SAFH Safety Hoistway input. Hoistway safety relays and switches are wired in series
SAFETY
between the #3 bus and SAFH. The path also includes the Governor switch, with
the GOV connection providing access to the #3 bus via the governor switch. (#3
to GOV through governor switch, GOV to SAFH through hoistway safety relays
and switches). The job prints for the job provide specific wiring instructions. If
any contact in the safety string opens, there will be 0 VDC on this input and the
car will not run. If all safety contacts in the string are closed, there will be 110
VDC on this input.
SP1 D Optional input. Job prints will show if and how this is used on a per installation
basis.
SP2 D Optional Brake Pick switch input. When brake is set = 110 VDC. When brake is
picked (brake pick switch open) = 0 VDC.
SPARES
SP2 Optional input. Job prints will show if and how this is used on a per installation
basis.
basis.
basis.
1 Common Bus connections. 0 V
COMMON

2 PI 120 VAC. Fused, 2PI.
120 VAC
2 PI 120 VAC. Fused, 2PI.

2 120 VAC. Fused, F2.
2 120 VAC. Fused, F2.
3 HA 110 VDC. Fused, F3HA.
110 VDC
3 HA 110 VDC. Fused, F3HA.

3 110 VDC. Fused, F3.
3 110 VDC. Fused, F3.
9-11
Reference
Field connections are also made to terminal strips in the iControl cabinet. Terminal connec-
tions provided vary from job to job depending upon need. Power distribution connections,
beyond the basic three system buses, are specified in the job prints and are not included here.
Table 9.4 Controller Terminal Strip Connections
Label Signal Description

B1, B2 DC power to motor brake. Voltage across terminals will vary depending upon brake
control method (Low Current Brake Board or iField Brake Module). See your job
prints. Significant voltage may be present even when brake is not picked.
MF1, MF2 DC power to motor field. Voltage across terminals will vary. Significant voltage may
be present even if motor is not running.
15A Final Limit switch. Wired as shown in job prints. 110 VDC when switch is made. 0
VDC when switch in string opens.
15B Pit/Final Limit switch. Wired as shown in job prints. 110 VDC when switch is made. 0
VDC when switch in string opens.
1 System common.
2 120 VAC bus.
3 110 VDC bus.
System and LAN Ethernet

Communication between iControl elevator controllers and iCentral group control uses Ethernet
TCP/IP (Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol) over the System network. Commu-
nication between iControl elevator controllers and/or the iCentral group control and personal
computers running iView or other iControl applications is over the LAN (Local Area Network)
network. Cables used in the two systems are color-coded for easy recognition. System cables
are orange. LAN cables are blue.
The following tables provide in-depth addressing information for the iControl/iCentral system.
MCE Direct-Connect Port (Links one iBox to one Laptop with iView)
IBox Direct Connect Port = same as above
IP Subnet Gateway DNS
Any iBox 192.168.193.1 255.255.255.0 Blank or 0.0.0.0 Blank or 0.0.0.0
Any PC / Laptop 192.168.193.2
(MCE reserved) All other addresses
9-12 Manual # 42-02-2223

iControl AC System and LAN Ethernet
Elevator LAN Network

Normally extends throughout a building and may span to other buildings, networks, or loca-
tions across the internet/intranet.
= same as above
LAN Network Hub (Blue cables)
* = see Note #1
(IEEE reserved) 192.168.191.0 255.255.255.0 192.168.191.254 * 192.168.191.254 *
Group 1 LAN Network (Blue cables)
iBox Car 1 192.168.191.1 255.255.255.0 192.168.191.254 * 192.168.191.254 *
iBox Car 2 192.168.191.2
9
iBox Car 3 192.168.191.3
iBox Car 4 192.168.191.4
iBox Car 5 192.168.191.5
iBox Car 6 192.168.191.6
iBox Car 7 192.168.191.7
iBox Car 8 192.168.191.8
iBox Car 9 192.168.191.9
iBox Car 10 192.168.191.10
iBox Car 11 192.168.191.11
iBox Car 12 192.168.191.12
iBox Car 13 192.168.191.13
iBox Car 14 192.168.191.14
iBox Car 15 192.168.191.15
iBox Car 16 192.168.191.16
iBox Car 17 192.168.191.17
iBox Car 18 192.168.191.18
iBox Car 19 192.168.191.19
iBox Car 20 192.168.191.20
iView 192.168.191.101
192.168.191.102
iCue 192.168.191.201
192.168.191.202
iBox Car 1 192.168.191.21 255.255.255.0 192.168.191.254 * 192.168.191.254 *
iBox Car 2 192.168.191.22
iBox Car 3 192.168.191.23
iBox Car 4 192.168.191.24
iBox Car 5 192.168.191.25
iBox Car 6 192.168.191.26
iBox Car 7 192.168.191.27
iBox Car 8 192.168.191.28
iBox Car 9 192.168.191.29
iBox Car 10 192.168.191.30
iBox Car 11 192.168.191.31
iBox Car 12 192.168.191.32
9-13
Reference
iBox Car 13 192.168.191.33

iBox Car 14 192.168.191.34
iBox Car 15 192.168.191.35
iBox Car 16 192.168.191.36
iBox Car 17 192.168.191.37
iBox Car 18 192.168.191.38
iBox Car 19 192.168.191.39
iBox Car 20 192.168.191.40
192.168.191.103
iView
192.168.191.104
192.168.191.203
iCue
192.168.191.204
iBox Car 1 192.168.191.41 255.255.255.0 192.168.191.254 * 192.168.191.254 *
iBox Car 2 192.168.191.42
iBox Car 3 192.168.191.43
iBox Car 4 192.168.191.44
iBox Car 5 192.168.191.45
iBox Car 6 192.168.191.46

iBox Car 20 192.168.191.60
192.168.191.105
iView
192.168.191.106
192.168.191.205
iCue
192.168.191.206
iBox Car 1 192.168.191.61 255.255.255.0 192.168.191.254 * 192.168.191.254 *
iBox Car 2 192.168.191.62
iBox Car 3 192.168.191.63
iBox Car 4 192.168.191.64
iBox Car 5 192.168.191.65
iBox Car 6 192.168.191.66

iBox Car 20 192.168.191.80
192.168.191.107
iView
192.168.191.108
192.168.191.207
iCue
192.168.191.208
iBox Car 1 192.168.191.81 255.255.255.0 192.168.191.254 * 192.168.191.254 *
iBox Car 2 192.168.191.82
iBox Car 3 192.168.191.83
iBox Car 4 192.168.191.84
iBox Car 5 192.168.191.85
iBox Car 6 192.168.191.86
9-14 Manual # 42-02-2223


iBox Car 20 192.168.191.100
192.168.191.109
iView
192.168.191.110
192.168.191.209
iCue
192.168.191.210
iBox Car 1 192.168.191.121 255.255.255.0 192.168.191.254 * 192.168.191.254 *
iBox Car 2 192.168.191.122
iBox Car 3 192.168.191.123
iBox Car 4 192.168.191.124 9
iBox Car 5 192.168.191.125
iBox Car 6 192.168.191.126

iBox Car 20 192.168.191.140
192.168.191.111
iView
192.168.191.112
192.168.191.211
iCue
192.168.191.212
iBox Car 1 192.168.191.141 255.255.255.0 192.168.191.254 * 192.168.191.254 *
iBox Car 2 192.168.191.142
iBox Car 3 192.168.191.143
iBox Car 4 192.168.191.144
iBox Car 5 192.168.191.145
iBox Car 6 192.168.191.146

iBox Car 20 192.168.191.160
192.168.191.113
iView
192.168.191.114
192.168.191.213
iCue
192.168.191.214
iBox Car 1 192.168.191.161 255.255.255.0 192.168.191.254 * 192.168.191.254 *
iBox Car 2 192.168.191.162
iBox Car 3 192.168.191.163
iBox Car 4 192.168.191.164
iBox Car 5 192.168.191.165
iBox Car 6 192.168.191.166

iBox Car 20 192.168.191.180
192.168.191.115
iView
192.168.191.116
192.168.191.215
iCue
192.168.191.216
9-15
Reference

iBox Car 1 192.168.191.181 255.255.255.0 192.168.191.254 * 192.168.191.254 *
iBox Car 2 192.168.191.182
iBox Car 3 192.168.191.183
iBox Car 4 192.168.191.184
iBox Car 5 192.168.191.185
iBox Car 6 192.168.191.186

iBox Car 20 192.168.191.200
192.168.191.117
iView
192.168.191.118
192.168.191.217
iCue
192.168.191.218
Note
#1: This parameter may have a site-dependant value depending on the unique DSL service or internet
connection details. The default value shown can be used until a new value is identified. There may be
more than one of these values provided.
Summary
This is a summary of the entire LAN IP address space including MCE supplied equipment and
non-MCE supplied equipment.
LAN Network IP Address Summary Map For Network=192.168.191.*)

IP
(IEEE non-usable) 192.168.191.0
IBox (Groups 1, 2, 3 4, 5) 192.168.191.1 - 192.168.191.100
iView 192.168.191.101 - 192.168.191.120
IBox (Groups 6, 7, 8, 9) 192.168.191.121 - 192.168.191.200
ICue 192.168.191.201 - 192.168.191.220
iMonitor 192.168.191.221 - 192.168.191.222
With Optional Third-party Access
3rd-Party access address 192.168.191.223
With Optional Firewall / Router / Modem Dial-in
DHCP addresses / 192.168.191.224 - 192.168.191.245
VPN Tunnel addresses /
Extra Dial-in addresses /
Extra Static IP addresses
Static IP addresses 192.168.191.246 192.168.191.251
First Dial-in address 192.168.191.252
MCE Reserved 192.168.192.253
Firewall / Router 192.168.191.254
(IEEE non-usable) 192.168.191.255
9-16 Manual # 42-02-2223

Summary by Group
Group #1 Floors ( ) Machine Room Floor ( )
Group #1 -iBox Direct Connect Port = same as above

Any iBox 192.168.193.1 255.255.255.0 Blank or 0.0.0.0 Blank or 0.0.0.0
Any PC / Laptop 192.168.193.2
Group #1 -MCE System Network (Orange cables)
iBox Car 1 192.168.192.1
iBox Car 2 192.168.192.2
iBox Car 3 192.168.192.3 9
iBox Car 4 192.168.192.4
iBox Car 5 192.168.192.5
iBox Car 6 192.168.192.6
iBox Car 7 192.168.192.7
iBox Car 8 192.168.192.8
iBox Car 9 192.168.192.9
iBox Car 10 192.168.192.10
iBox Car 11 192.168.192.11
iBox Car 12 192.168.192.12
iBox Car 13 192.168.192.13
iBox Car 14 192.168.192.14
iBox Car 15 192.168.192.15
iBox Car 16 192.168.192.16
iBox Car 17 192.168.192.17
iBox Car 18 192.168.192.18
iBox Car 19 192.168.192.19
iBox Car 20 192.168.192.20
192.168.192.201
iCue
192.168.192.202
Digi Hall Calls 192.168.192.211
UDP 3000- 192.168.192.214
3007
9-17
Reference
Group #1 -LAN Network (Blue cables)

iBox Car 1 192.168.191.1 255.255.255.0 192.168.191.254 192.168.191.254 *
*
iBox Car 2 192.168.191.2
iBox Car 3 192.168.191.3
iBox Car 4 192.168.191.4
iBox Car 5 192.168.191.5
iBox Car 6 192.168.191.6
iBox Car 7 192.168.191.7
iBox Car 8 192.168.191.8
iBox Car 9 192.168.191.9
iBox Car 10 192.168.191.10
iBox Car 11 192.168.191.11
iBox Car 12 192.168.191.12
iBox Car 13 192.168.191.13
iBox Car 14 192.168.191.14
iBox Car 15 192.168.191.15
iBox Car 16 192.168.191.16
iBox Car 17 192.168.191.17
iBox Car 18 192.168.191.18
iBox Car 19 192.168.191.19
iBox Car 20 192.168.191.20
192.168.191.101
iView
192.168.191.102
192.168.191.201
iCue
192.168.191.202
9-18 Manual # 42-02-2223


Group #2 LAN Network (Blue cables)
iBox Car 1 192.168.191.21 255.255.255.0 192.168.191.254 192.168.191.254 *
*
iBox Car 2 192.168.191.22
iBox Car 3 192.168.191.23
iBox Car 4 192.168.191.24
iBox Car 5 192.168.191.25
iBox Car 6 192.168.191.26
iBox Car 7 192.168.191.27
iBox Car 8 192.168.191.28 9
iBox Car 9 192.168.191.29
iBox Car 10 192.168.191.30
iBox Car 11 192.168.191.31
iBox Car 12 192.168.191.32
iBox Car 13 192.168.191.33
iBox Car 14 192.168.191.34
iBox Car 15 192.168.191.35
iBox Car 16 192.168.191.36
iBox Car 17 192.168.191.37
iBox Car 18 192.168.191.38
iBox Car 19 192.168.191.39
iBox Car 20 192.168.191.40
192.168.191.103
iView
192.168.191.104
192.168.191.203
iCue
192.168.191.204
9-19
Reference

Group #3 - LAN Network (Blue cables)
iBox Car 1 192.168.191.41 255.255.255.0 192.168.191.254 192.168.191.254 *
*
iBox Car 2 192.168.191.42
iBox Car 3 192.168.191.43
iBox Car 4 192.168.191.44
iBox Car 5 192.168.191.45
iBox Car 6 192.168.191.46

iBox Car 20 192.168.191.60
192.168.191.105
iView
192.168.191.106
192.168.191.205
iCue
192.168.191.206
Group 4 Floors ( ) Machine Room Floor ( )

iBox Car 1 192.168.191.61 255.255.255.0 192.168.191.254 192.168.191.254 *
*
iBox Car 2 192.168.191.62
iBox Car 3 192.168.191.63
iBox Car 4 192.168.191.64
iBox Car 5 192.168.191.65
iBox Car 6 192.168.191.66

iBox Car 20 192.168.191.80
192.168.191.107
iView
192.168.191.108
192.168.191.207
iCue
192.168.191.208
9-20 Manual # 42-02-2223


iBox Car 1 192.168.191.81 255.255.255.0 192.168.191.254 192.168.191.254 *
*
iBox Car 2 192.168.191.82
iBox Car 3 192.168.191.83
iBox Car 4 192.168.191.84
iBox Car 5 192.168.191.85
iBox Car 6 192.168.191.86

iBox Car 20 192.168.191.100 9
192.168.191.109
iView
192.168.191.110
192.168.191.209
iCue
192.168.191.210

iBox Car 1 192.168.191.121 255.255.255.0 192.168.191.254 192.168.191.254 *
*
iBox Car 2 192.168.191.122
iBox Car 3 192.168.191.123
iBox Car 4 192.168.191.124
iBox Car 5 192.168.191.125
iBox Car 6 192.168.191.126

iBox Car 20 192.168.191.140
192.168.191.111
iView
192.168.191.112
192.168.191.211
iCue
192.168.191.212
9-21
Reference

iBox Car 1 192.168.191.141 255.255.255.0 192.168.191.254 192.168.191.254 *
*
iBox Car 2 192.168.191.142
iBox Car 3 192.168.191.143
iBox Car 4 192.168.191.144
iBox Car 5 192.168.191.145
iBox Car 6 192.168.191.146

iBox Car 20 192.168.191.160
192.168.191.113
iView
192.168.191.114
192.168.191.213
iCue
192.168.191.214

iBox Car 1 192.168.191.161 255.255.255.0 192.168.191.254 192.168.191.254 *
*
iBox Car 2 192.168.191.162
iBox Car 3 192.168.191.163
iBox Car 4 192.168.191.164
iBox Car 5 192.168.191.165
iBox Car 6 192.168.191.166

iBox Car 20 192.168.191.180
192.168.191.115
iView
192.168.191.116
192.168.191.215
iCue
192.168.191.216

iBox Car 1 192.168.191.181 255.255.255.0 192.168.191.254 192.168.191.254 *
*
iBox Car 2 192.168.191.182
iBox Car 3 192.168.191.183
iBox Car 4 192.168.191.184
iBox Car 5 192.168.191.185
iBox Car 6 192.168.191.186

iBox Car 20 192.168.191.200
192.168.191.117
iView
192.168.191.118
192.168.191.217
iCue
192.168.191.218
9-22 Manual # 42-02-2223

iControl AC TORQMAX F5 Drive Parameters Quick Reference
TORQMAX F5 Drive Parameters Quick Reference

This section includes quick reference information for the TORQMAX F5 drive parameters.
Please refer to the F5 drive manual provided with the iControl for a detailed explanation.
Caution
For Permanent magnet (PM Synchronous) motors, consult the following sections of the TORQMAX
F5 Drive manual before roping the machine, 5.5 PM Synchronous Motors, 5.8 Encoder Feedback
and 5.11 Running the Motor.
Table 9.5 TORQMAX F5 Drive Parameters Quick Reference for iControl AC
WARNING: Do not change drive parameters while the elevator is running. Incorrect drive parame- 9
ters can cause erratic elevator operation. Parameters with an asterisk (*) must be set correctly
for your specific motor/machine. Refer to the drive adjustment manual for detailed information.
Digital
Setting Default Factory
Operator Parameter Description Unit
Range Setting Setting
Display
Signal operating mode:
AbSpd = Absolute Analog Speed AbSpd
d SPd = Digital speed control d SPd
A tor= Analog torque control A tor
LF.02 - bnSPd *________
A Spd= Analog speed control A Spd
SErSP = Serial Com. Speed Control SErSP
bnSPd = Binary Speed Selection bnSPd
S POS = Serial Position Feedback
LF.03 Drive configuration:
run = run mode
conF = Configuration (5 minute time limit) run
Stop = Drive Stopped, Motor cannot run. conF
S Lrn = activate auto tune Stop
I Lrn = Inertia Learn. Learns system inertia. S Lrn
- conF run
P Lrn = Pole Learn. PM motor pole positions. I Lrn
SPI = Learns absolute encoder position for PM P Lrn
motor without sheave movement. **** SPI
OStST = Allows car to over speed for one run OStST
without changing drive parameters
(see also LF.49).****
Motor selection: Displays mode selected using Read only.
LF.04 - - ***
US.4 and US.10 See US.10
LF.05 Drive fault auto reset 1 0-10 5 5
LF.08 Electronic motor overload protection - on/off off on
Electronic overload current: 1.0 - 110%
LF.09 A 8.0
PM- Not visible, auto set same as LF.12. Rtd *________
Rated motor power 0.00 -
LF.10 HP 5.0
PM- Read only, auto calc. 125.00 IM*______
LF.11 Rated motor speed rpm 10.0-6000 1165 or 150 *________
1.0 - 110%
LF.12 Rated motor current A 8.0
Drive rated *________
LF.13 Rated motor frequency Hz 4.0 - 100.0 60.0 *________
Rated motor voltage
IM - Name plate rated voltage (120 - 500V)
LF.14 V - 230/460
PM - No-load, phase-to-phase back EMF rms *________
voltage LF.11 (1 - 32000V/krpm)
9-23
Reference
Digital
Display
LF.15 IM: Power factor, PM: not visible 1 0.50 - 1.00 0.90 0.90
IM: Field weakening speed set @ 80%of
LF.16 rpm 0.0-6000.0
PM - not visible LF.11 *________
Rated motor torque, IM- Read only, auto calc. IM - calc IM ***
LF.17 lb ft 1 - 10000
PM- enter motor name plate torque PM - 18 PM*______
PM: Motor stator resistance - from data sheet or
LF.18 perform learn procedure (see F5 Drive manual) ohms 0.0-50.0 49.999 PM*______
IM: not visible
PM: Motor leakage inductance - from data sheet or
LF.19 learn procedure (see F5 Drive manual) mH 0.1 - 500.0 1.00 PM*______
IM: not visible
LF.20 Contract Speed fpm 0 - 1600 0
*________
LF.21 Traction sheave diameter (measured value) inch 7.0 - 80.0 24.00
*________
LF.22 Gear reduction ratio 1 1.00-99.99 30.00
*________
LF.23 Roping ratio 1 1-8 1
*________
LF.24 Load weight lbs 0 - 30000 0
*________
LF.25 Estimated gear ratio (Read only, auto calc.) .01 1.00 - 99.99 calculated ***
0.LF.26 Encoder Interface: Displays feedback type - - ***
LF.27 Encoder pulse number
For IncIE and SinCo see customer data
ppr 256 - 16835 1024
For HIPEr set to 1024
For EndAt set to 2048
Encoder channel swap / direction
0 nothing reversed
LF.28 1 encoder A<->B swapped 1 0-3 0 *________
2 motor rotation reversed
3 motor rotation reversed and A<->B swapped
LF.29 Encoder sample time mSec 0.5 - 32 4 4 or 8
(recommend gearless = 4, geared = 8) *________
Control mode:
0, 1 = Open loop induction motor operation
2 = Closed loop speed control (LF. 2 = A Spd)
LF.30 1 0-4 0 *________
3 = Closed loop speed fcontrol with pre-torque
4 = Closed loop torque control (LF. 2 = A tor)
5 = Closed loop speed control w/synth pre-torque
A.LF.31 Kp speed accell: Proportional gain, accel & run 1 1 - 50396 3000 ** 3000
d.LF.31 Kp speed decell: Proportional gain, decel 1 1 - 50396 3000 ** 3000
P.LF.31 KP speed torque (Synth. Pretorque 1 1 - 50396 2000 2000
A.LF.32 Ki speed accell: Integral gain, accel & run 1 1 - 26214 350 ** 350
d.LF.32 Ki speed decell: Integral gain, decel 1 1 - 26214 250 ** 250
P.LF.32 Ki speed torque (Synth. Pretorque) 1 1 - 26214 10000 10000
A.LF.33 Ki speed offset accell: Gain at low speed, accel 1 0 - 8000 3000 ** 3000
d.LF.33 Ki speed offset decell: Gain at low speed, decel 1 0 - 8000 1000 ** 1000
0.LF.36 Maximum torque (auto calculated by the drive) lb.ft. 0-500% Trtd calculated ***
1.LF.36 Maximum torque emergency operation (= LF.17) lb.ft. 0-500% Trtd calculated ***
LF.37 Open loop torque boost: Open loop op. only % 0-25.5 10.0 10.0
9-24 Manual # 42-02-2223

iControl AC TORQMAX F5 Drive Parameters Quick Reference
Digital
Display
Carrier frequency; 0= 8 KHz, 1= 16KHz
LF.38 1 0, 1 0
(Note: set LF.38 = 0 if E.OL2 error on drive) *_________
LF.41 Leveling speed (Not used, must be set to 0) fpm 0 - 25 0.0 0.0
LF.42 High speed fpm 0 - LF.20 0.0 *________
LF.43 Inspection speed (Not used, must be set to 0) fpm 0 - 150.00 0.0 0.0
LF.44 High leveling speed (Not used, must be set to 0) fpm - 0.0 0.0
LF.45 Earthquake speed (Not used, must be set to 0) fpm - 0.0 0.0
LF.46 Emerg. power Speed (Not used, must be set to 0) fpm - 0.0 0.0
LF.47 Intermediate speed (Not used, must be set to 0) fpm - 0.0 0.0 9
LF.49 Over Speed Function Test: speed setting for Over
fpm 1 - 2400 100 100
Speed Test Function (see LF.3 - OStST). ****
Note: Parameters LF.50 through LF.56 default to oFF when LF. 2 is set to AbSPd, A Spd or A Tor.
0.LF.50 Profile 0 - Starting jerk (Not used) ft/s3 see note see note oFF
0.LF.51 Profile 0 - Acceleration (Not used) ft/s2 see note see note oFF
0.LF.52 Profile 0 - Deceleration jerk (Not used) ft/s3 see note see note oFF
0.LF.53 Profile 0 - Deceleration jerk (Not used) ft/s 2 see note see note oFF
0.LF.55 Profile 0 - Approach jerk (Not used) ft/s 3 see note see note oFF
1.LF.51 Profile 1 - Acceleration (Not used) ft/s 2 see note see note oFF
1.LF.55 Profile 1 - Approach jerk (Not used) ft/s3 see note see note oFF
2.LF.51 Profile 2 - Acceleration (Not used) ft/s 2 see note see note oFF
2.LF.55 Profile 2 - Approach jerk (Not used) ft/s 3 see note see note oFF
LF.56 Stop jerk (Not used) ft/s 3 see note see note oFF
LF.57 Speed following error (0 = off, 1 = on) - off, on on on
LF.58 Speed difference % 0 - 30 10 10
Trigger time speed difference: Following error
LF.59 sec 0.0 -1.0 1.0 1.0
timer
LF.61 Emergency operation mode - off off
LF.67 Pretorque gain - 0.25 - 2.00 1.00 1.00
LF.68 Pretorque offset % -100 - 100 0.00 0.00
LF.69 Pretorque direction (-1 = -V, 1 = +V) 1 -1, 1 1 1
LF.70 Speed pick delay (Delay to turn on DRO). sec 0.00 - 3.00 0.30 0.30
LF.71 Brake pick delay sec 0.0 - 3.0 0.05 0.05
LF.76 Encoder resolution multiplier
2 for incremental encoder 1 0 - 13 2
8 for Sin/Cos, EnDat or Hiperface encoder
LF.77 Absolute encoder position (measured) 1 0 - 65535h 0 0
9-25
Reference
Digital
Display
Brake drop delay: Time motor will hold full current
LF.78 sec 0.0-3.00 0.50 0.50
and control after direction inputs drop.
Current hold time: Delay in turning off the drive
0.300 -
LF.79 (Delay to turn OFF the motor current after the sec 0.300 0.30 - 0.80
3.000
direction is dropped and LF.78 has expired)
Diagnostic Parameters (Read only)
LF.25 Estimated gear ratio 1
LF.80 Software version
LF.81 Software date MMDD.Y
LF.82 X2A-input state see tables in
LF.83 X2A-output state F5 Drive
LF.86 Operational mode Manual
LF.87 Actual inverter load (100% = rated load) %
LF.88 Motor command speed rpm
LF.89 Actual motor speed rpm
LF.90 Actual elevator speed ft/m
LF.93 Phase current A
LF.94 Peak phase current A
LF.95 Actual DC voltage V
LF.96 Peak DC Voltage V
LF.97 Actual output frequency Hz
O.LF.98 Last error
US - Parameters
Password: With different passwords, different
US. 1 parameter groups can be accessed for advanced - 0-9999 - -
programming.
Load defaults. Select LoAd and press ENTER to
US. 3 cause all LF parameters to be reset to drive default - LoAd - -
values.
Load configuration. Select LoAd and press ENTER
US. 4 - LoAd - -
to load the configuration selected in US.10.
Select Configuration. User selection of drive mode.
I CLSd = Induction motor (closed loop) ICLSd
I 9LSS = Induction motor (closed loop) gearless I 9LSS *
US.10 - -
P CLSd = Synchronous motor (closed loop) P CLSd _________
P 9LSS = Synchronous motor (closed loop)gearless P 9LSS
Loaded using parameter US.04.
* Parameters are motor/machine/job dependent.
** Recommended but field adjustable.
*** The value is automatically calculated from the motor data or other parameter values.
****Parameters apply to Drive Software Version 1.71 or greater)
Parameters for Drive Software Version (LF.80 = 1.61 or greater), Software date (LF.81 = 2801.9 or later)
Job #: Drive Serial #:
Prod. Order #: Test technician:
Drive Model #: Date:
9-26 Manual # 42-02-2223

iControl AC PowerBack R6 Regenerative Drive Quick Reference
PowerBack R6 Regenerative Drive Quick Reference

This section includes quick reference information for the PowerBack R6 Regenerative AC drive.
Please refer to the R6 Regenerative drive manual provided with the iControl for detailed expla-
nation of the parameters.
Table 9.6 Quick Reference for PowerBack R6 Regenerative Drive

WARNING: Do not change drive parameters while the elevator is running. Incorrect values of
drive parameters can cause erratic elevator operation.
Display Parameter Description Setting Range Resolution Field/MCE Setting
CP. 0 Password input 0...9999 1 ---
9
CP. 1 Status display --- --- ---
CP. 2 Main Line Frequency --- 0.1 Hz ---
CP. 3 AC-Phase current L1 --- 0.1 A ---
CP. 6 Actual Load --- 1% ---
CP. 7 Actual Load / peak value --- 1% ---
CP. 8 DC output current --- 0.1 A ---
CP. 9 Actual DC voltage --- 1V ---
CP.10 DC voltage / peak value --- 1V ---
CP.11 Heat sink temperature --- 1 0C ---
CP.12 Over load counter --- 1% ---
CP.13 Active power --- 0.1kW ---
CP.14 Total regen kWhr counter --- 0.1 kWh ---
CP.15 Total motor kWhr counter --- 0.1 kWh ---
CP.16 Total net kWhr counter --- 0.1 kWh ---
CP.17 Apparent power / Line input --- 0.1 kVA ---
CP.18 Analog output 1 / amplification factor -20.00...20.00 0.01 1.00
Set to 260 for 208 - 240Vac
CP.19 DC bus switching level +/- 30000.00 0.01
CP.20 Auto error reset counter 0...10 1 3
CP.21 Last Error --- ---
CP.22 Last Error 1 --- ---
CP.29 Software version ---
CP.30 Software date code DDMM.Y
CP.31 Power part ID code ---
CP.32* Pulse off Level -100kW...0.0kW 0.1kW -0.8kW
Operating Mode
Set to 0 for Main Regen drive
CP.33* 0: Master with Commutation Choke 0...3 1
Set to 2 for Second drive
2: Slave with Commutation Choke
CP.34* Control Angle 0.0...60.0 0.1 29.0
*NEW PARAMETERS in software version 1.3
Job #: Drive Serial #:
Production Order # Test Technician:
Drive Model #: Date:
9-27
Reference
Magnetek HPV900 Series 2 Parameters Quick Reference

This section includes quick reference information for the Magnetek HPV900 Series 2 AC Eleva-
tor drive parameters. Please refer to the Magnetek drive manual provided with iControl for a
detailed explanation. Enter the settings you make while adjusting into the Field Setting column.
Table 9.7 Magnetek AC Drive Parameters Table
Operator Setting MCE Field

# Parameter Description Unit
Display Range Defaults Setting
Adjust A0
A1 Drive
Contract Car Spd Elevator Contract Speed fpm 0 - 3000 0.1
Contract Mtr Spd Motor Speed at elevator contract speed rpm 50 - 3000 1130
Response Speed regulator sensitivity. Set too high, rad/ 1.0 - 20.0 10
motor current and speed jittery. If too small, sec
motor will be sluggish.
Inertia System inertia sec 0.25 - 50.00 2.0
Inner Loop Xover Inner speed loop crossover frequency (only rad/ 0.1 - 20.0 2.0
with Ereg speed regulator) sec
Gain Reduce Mult Speed regulator response percentage to use in % 10 - 100 100
low gain Mode. 100% = no reduction.
Gain Chng Level Speed level to change to low gain mode % 0 - 100.0 100
(only with internal gain switch)
Tach Rate Gain Compensates for rope resonance. Use only % 0 - 30.0 0
after A1, Inertia, and A1, Response, have
been set correctly.
Spd Phase Margin Phase margin of speed regulator o 45 - 90 80
(only with PI speed regulator)
Ramped Stop Time Time to ramp from rated torque to zero (only sec 0 - 2.50 0.20
with torque ramp down stop function)
Contact Flt Time Time before a contactor fault is declared sec 0.10 - 5.00 0.50
Brake Pick Time Time before a brake pick fault is declared sec 0 - 5.00 0.00
Brake Hold Time Time before a brake hold fault is declared sec 0 - 5.00 0.00
Overspeed Level Threshold for detection of overspeed fault % 100.0 - 150.0 125.0
Overspeed Time Time before an overspeed fault is declared sec 0 - 9.99 1.00
Overspeed Mult Multiplier for overspeed test (U4) % 100 - 150 100
Encoder Pulses Encoder counts per revolution ppr 600 - 10000 1024
Spd Dev Lo Level Range around speed reference for speed devi- % 00.1 - 10.0 10
ation low logic output
Spd Dev Time Time before speed deviation low logic output sec 0 - 9.99 1.00
is true
Spd DevHi Level Level for declaring speed deviation alarm % 0 - 99.9 20.0
Spd Command Bias Subtracts an effective voltage from actual volts 0 - 6.00 0.00
speed command voltage
Spd Command Mult Scales analog speed command - 0.90 - 3.00 1.00
Pre Torque Bias Subtracts an effective voltage from actual pre volts 0 - 6.00 0.00
torque command voltage
Pre Torque Mult Scales pre-torque command - -10.00-10.00 1.00
Zero Speed Level Threshold for zero speed logic output % 0 - 99.99 1.00
9-28 Manual # 42-02-2223

iControl AC Magnetek HPV900 Series 2 Parameters Quick Ref-

Zero Speed Time Time before zero speed logic output is sec 0 - 9.99 0.10
declared true
Up/Dwn Threshold Detection threshold, up or down direction % 0 - 9.99 1.00
Mtr Torque Limit Motoring torque limit. Torque Limit LED will % 0 - 250.0 250.0
light when this limit is reached.
Regen Torq Limit Regenerating torque limit. Torque Limit LED % 0 - 250.0 250.0
will light when this limit is reached.
Flux Wkn Factor Defines torque limit at higher speeds % 60.0 - 100.0 75.0
Ana 1 Out Offset Subtracts an effective voltage to actual analog % -99.9 - 99.9 0.00 9
output 1
Ana 2 Out Offset Subtracts an effective voltage to actual analog % -99.9 - 99.9 0.00
output 2
Ana 1 Out Gain Scaling factor for analog output 1 - 0 - 10.0 1.0
Ana 2 Out Gain Scaling factor for analog output 2 - 0 - 10.0 1.0
Flt Reset Delay Time Before a fault is automatically reset sec 0 - 120 5
Flt Reset / Hour Number of faults allowed to reset automati- fault 0 - 10 3
cally per hour
Up to SPD. Level The logic output function is true when the % 0 - 110.00 080.00
motor speed is above the user specified speed
defined here
Mains DIP Speed When enabled by Main DIP Speed (A1) param- % 5 - 99.9 25.00
eter, speed reduced by this percent when
undervoltage alarm declared
Run Delay Timer Delays drive recognition of RUN signal. sec 0.00 - 0.99 0.00
AB Zero Spd Lev Auto Brake Function - N/A to MCE products % 0.00 - 2.00 0.00
AB Off Delay N/A to MCE products sec 0.00 - 9.99 0.00
Contactor DO Dly N/A to MCE products sec 0.00 - 5.00 0.00
TRQ Lim Msg Dly Time duration drive is in torque limit before sec 0.50 - 10.00 0.50
Hit Torque Limit message displayed.
SER2 INSP SPD Defines serial mode 2 Inspection ft/ 0 - 100 30
(only serial mode 2) min
SER2 RS CRP SPD Creep speed used in rescue mode ft/ 0 - 100 10
min
SER2 RS CPR Time Maximum time drive will continue to run at sec 0 - 200 180
rescue creep speed (only serial mode 2)
SER2 FLT TOL Maximum time that may elapse between valid sec 0.0 - 2.0 0.04
run time messages before a serial fault is
declared (only serial mode 2)
Rollback Gain Ant-rollback gain - 1 - 99 1
Notch Filter Frq Notch Filter Center Frequency Hz 5 - 60 20
Notch Filt Depth Notch filter maximum attenuation % 0 - 100 0
MSPD Delay 1-4 Recognition time delay for a defined multistep sec 0.00 - 10.0 0.00
speed command
A2 S-Curves
Accel Rate 0 Acceleration rate #0 ft/s2 0 - 7.99 3.00
Decel Rate 0 Deceleration rate #0 ft/s2 0 - 3.999 3.00
9-29
Reference

Accel Jerk in 0 Rate of increase in acceleration, up to ACCEL ft/s3 0 - 8.0 8.0
Rate, when increasing elevator speed
Accel Jerk out 0 Rate of decrease of acceleration to zero when ft/s3 0 - 8.0 8.0
approaching contract elevator speed
Decel Jerk in 0 Rate of increase of deceleration, up to Decel ft/s3 0 - 8.0 8.0
Rate, when decreasing elevator speed
Decel Jerk out 0 Rate of decrease of deceleration to zero when ft/s3 0 - 8.0 8.0
slowing the elevator to leveling speed
Decel Rate 1 Deceleration rate #1 2
ft/s 0 - 7.99 3.00
Accel Jerk in 1 Rate of increase of acceleration, up to ACCEL ft/s 3 0 - 8.0 8.0
Accel Jerk in 2 Rate of increase of acceleration, up to ACCEL ft/s3 0 - 8.0 8.0
Accel Jerk in 3 Rate of increase of acceleration, up to ACCEL ft/s3 0 - 8.0 8.0
A3 Multistep Ref
Speed Command 1 Multi-Step Speed command #1 ft/m 0
9-30 Manual # 42-02-2223


9
A4 Power Convert
Id Reg Diff gain Flux Current regulator differential gain - 0.80 - 1.20 1.00
Id Reg Prop Gain Flux current regulator proportional gain - 0.20 - 0.40 0.30
Iq Reg Diff Gain Torque current regulator differential gain - 0.80 - 1.20 1.00
Iq Reg Prop Gain Torque current regulator proportional gain - 0.20 - 0.40 0.30
PWM Frequency Carrier frequency kHz 2.5 - 16.0 10.0
UV Alarm Level Level for undervoltage alarm % 80 - 99 80
UV Fault Level Level for undervoltage fault % 50 - 88 80
Extern Reactance External choke reactance % 0 - 10 0
Input L-L Volts Nominal line-line AC input Voltage, RMS volts 110 - 480 Drive dep.
A5 Motor
Motor ID Motor Identification - 4 Pole DFLT, 6 MCE Test
Pole DFLT,
MCE Test
Rated Mtr Power Rated motor output power HP 1.0 - 500 5.0
Rated Mtr Volts Rated motor terminal RMS voltage volts 190.0 - 575.0 460
Rated Excit Freq Rated excitation frequency Hz 5.0 - 400.0 60
Rated Motor Curr Rated motor current amps 1.00 - 800.00 6.8
Motor Poles Motor poles - 2 - 32 6
Rated Mtr Speed Rated motor speed at full load RPM 50.0 - 3000.0 1130
% No Load Curr Percent no load current % 10.0 - 60.0 45
Stator Leakage X Stator leakage reactance % 0 - 20.0 9.0
Rotor Leakage X Rotor leakage reactance % 0 - 20.0 9.0
Stator Resist Stator resistance % 0 - 20.0 1.5
Motor Iron Loss Iron loss at rated frequency % 0 - 15.0 0.5
Motor Mech Loss Mechanical loss at rated frequency % 0 - 15.0 1.0
Ovld Start Level Maximum continuous motor current % 100 - 150 110
Ovld Time Out Time that defines motor overload curve sec 5.0 - 120.0 60.0
Flux Sat Break Flux saturation curve slope change point % 0 - 100 75
Flux Sat Slope 1 Flux saturation curve slope for low fluxes % 0 - 200.0 0
Flux Sat Slope 2 Flux saturation curve slope for high fluxes % 0 - 200.0 50
9-31
Reference

Configure C0
C1 User Switches
Spd Command Src Speed Command Source - Analog input Multi-step Serial
Multi-step
Serial
Run Command Src Run Command Source - External TB External Serial
Serial TB1
Serial+extern
Hi/Lo Gain Src High / low gain change switch source - External TB 1 Internal
Serial
Internal
Speed Reg Type Chooses speed regulator - Elev spd reg Elev spd
Pi speed reg reg
Motor Rotation Allows user to reverse direction of motor rota- - Forward Forward
tion Reverse
Spd Ref Release Determines when speed reference release is - Reg release Reg
asserted Brake picked release
Cont Confirm Src Enables external logic input for contactor con- - None None
firmation. External TB
Pre Torque Source Enables and determines the source of the pre - None None
torque command Analog input
Serial
Pre Torque Latch Determines if analog pre-torque command is - Not latched Not
latched Latched latched
PT torq Latch Clck Determines source of pre torque latch control - External TB External
(if used) Serial tb
Fault Reset Src Fault reset source - External TB External
Serial tb
Automatic
Overspd Test Src Determines external logic source to trigger - External TB External
overspeed test Serial tb
Brake Pick Src If drive controls mechanical brake, determines - Internal Internal
source of brake pick command Serial
Brake Pick Cnfrm Enables a logic input to use for brake pick con- - None None
firmation External TB
Brake Hold Src If drive controls mechanical brake, determines - Internal Internal
source of brake hold command Serial
Ramped Stop Sel Selects normal stop or torque ramp down stop - None None
Ramp on stop
Ramp Down En Src Determines the source that signals the torque - External TB External
ramp down stop (if used) Run logic tb
Serial
Brk Pick Flt Ena Brake pick fault enable - Enable Disable
Disable
Brk Hold Flt Ena Brake hold fault enable - Enable Disable
Disable
Ext Torq Cmd Src When Speed Reg Type = External Reg, sets - None None
the source of the torque command Serial
9-32 Manual # 42-02-2223


Dir Confirm Confirms proper analog signal polarity when - Enabled Disabled
enabled and a logic input is programmed to Disabled
Run Up and Run Down
S-Curve Abort Addresses how the S-Curve Speed Reference - Enabled Disabled
Generator handles a reduction in the speed Disabled
command before the S-Curve Generator has
reached its target speed.
Fast Flux Reduces starting takeoff time by reducing - Enabled Enabled
motor fluxing time Disabled
Main DIP Ena Enables the Mains DIP Speed (A1) parameter - Enabled Disabled 9
that reduces speed when an undervoltage Disabled
alarm is declared
DB Protection Dynamic braking Protection fault or alarm Fault Fault
selection Alarm
Encoder Fault Temporarily disables the Encoder Fault - Enabled Enabled
Disabled
Stopping Mode Determines stopping mode when Spd Com- - Immediate Immedi-
mand Src = multi-step Ramp to stop ate
Motor Ovrld Sel Motor Overload Selection - Alarm Alarm
Flt Immediate
Fault at Stop
Auto Stop Auto Stop Function enable - Disable Disable
Enable
Serial Mode Serial Protocol selection - Mode 1 Mode 1
Mode 2
Mode 2 test
SER2 FLT Mode Defines reaction to a serial communication - immediate Immedi-
fault while in Serial Mode 2 (Only serial mode ate
2) Run
remove
rescue
DRV Fast Disable Addresses how fast the drive responds to the - Disable Disable
removal of Drive Enable logic input. Enable
MLT-SPD to DLY1 Assigns multi-step speed command to recog- - None None
nition delay timer 1 mspd1-
mspd15
mspd15
mspd15
mspd15
C2 Logic Inputs
Log In 1 TB1-1 Terminal 1 Selection - - DRIVE
ENABLE
Log In 2 TB1-2 Terminal 2 Selection - - RUN UP
9-33
Reference

Log In 3 TB1-3 Terminal 3 Selection - - RUN
DOWN
Log In 4 TB1-4 Terminal 4 Selection - - FAULT NO
RESET FUNCTION
Log In 5 TB1-5 Terminal 5 Selection - - STEP REF NO
B0 FUNCTION
B1 FUNCTION
B2 FUNCTION
B3 FUNCTION
Log In 9 TB1-9 Terminal 9 Selection - - S-CURVE NO
SEL 0 FUNCTION
C3 Logic Outputs
Log Out 1 tb1-14 Terminal 14 Selection - - SPEED NO
DEV LOW FUNCTION
Log Out 2 tb1-15 Terminal 15 Selection - - RUN COM- NO
MAND FUNCTION
Log Out 3 tb1-16 Terminal 16 Selection - - MTR NO
OVERLOAD FUNCTION
Log Out 4 tb1-17 Terminal 17 Selection - - ENCODER NO
FAULT FUNCTION
Relay Coil 1 Relay 1 Function Selection - - FAULT
Relay Coil 2 Relay 2 Function Selection - - SPEED
REG RLS
C4 Analog Outputs
Ana Out 1 tb1-33 Terminal 33 Selection - - SPEED
CMD
Ana Out 2 tb1-35 Terminal 35 Selection - - SPEED
FEEDBK
Utility U0
U1 Password Password - - 000000
Enable or disable hidden parameters - - ENABLE
U2 Hidden Items Enable Disable
Unit for parameters - - ENGLISH
U3 Unit English Metric
Allows overspeed test during inspection - - No
U4 Overspeed Test Yes No
U5 Restore Dflts Reset all parameters to default values
Drive information:
Drive Version:
U6 Drive Info Boot Version:
Cube ID:
Drive Type:
U7 HEX Monitor Hex Monitor
9-34 Manual # 42-02-2223

iControl AC Magnetek Quattro AC Quick Reference
Magnetek Quattro AC Quick Reference

This section includes quick reference information for the Magnetek Quattro AC Elevator drive
parameters. Please refer to the Magnetek drive manual provided with iControl for a detailed
explanation. Enter the settings you make while adjusting into the Field Setting column.
Table 10. Quattro PM Elevator Drive, iControl

WARNING: Do not change drive parameters while elevator is running. Incorrect drive parameters
can cause erratic operation. Parameters with an asterisk must be set correctly for specific motor/
machine / job. Refer to drive manual for detailed information.
Parameter Description Units Range Def Fac
Adjust A0
9
A1 Drive sub menu
CONTRACT CAR SPD Elevator Contract Speed fpm 0.0 1500.0 100.0 *
CONTRACT MTR SPD Motor Speed at elevator contract speed RPM 30.0 3000.0 50.0 *
RESPONSE Sets sensitivity of drive speed regulator in rad/sec 1.0 20.0 10.0 10.0
terms of speed regulator bandwidth in radians
INERTIA Inertia /torque ratio as seen by the drive sec 0.25 50.00 2.00 2.00
INNER LOOP XOVER This parameter is used as a stiffness factor rad/sec 0.1 20.0 2.0 2.0
GAIN REDUCE MULT Percentage of response the speed regulator % 10 100 100 100
should use in low gain mode
GAIN CHNG LEVEL When the HI/LO GAIN SRC in submenu C1 is % of 0.0 100.0 100.0 100.0
set to internal, the drive will control the high/ rated spd
low gain switch
TACH RATE GAIN Reduces effects of rope resonance or stretch none 0.0 30.0 0.0 0.0
SPD PHASE MARGIN Sets phase margin of speed regulator assum- degrees 45 90 80 80
ing a pure inertial load
RAMPED STOP TIME Used only by torque ramp down function dur- sec 0.00 2.50 0.20 0.20
ing a stop sets time to decrease motor rated
torque to zero.
CONTACT FLT TIME Determines allowable time for motor contac- sec 0.10 5.00 0.50 0.50
tor feedback to be out of sync with com-
manded state before contactor FLT occurs.
BRAKE PICK TIME If brake pick CNFM is set to internal time, this sec 0.00 5.00 1.00 1.00
parameter sets time the drive waits before it
assumes brake has been picked. If brake pick
CNFM is set to external TB, parameter sets
time drive waits receive a brake pick confir-
mation before a brake pick fault is declared
BRAKE HOLD TIME Determines time drive will wait until a BRK sec 0.00 5.00 0.50 0.10
HOLD FLT is declared if a logic input is set to
MECH BRK HOLD
OVERSPEED LEVEL Sets percentage of rated speed drive uses (in % of 90.0 150.0 115.0 115.0
conjunction with OVERSPEED TIME) to deter- contract
mine when an OVERSPEED fault occurs. spd
OVERSPEED TIME Sets time drive can be at or above OVER- sec 0.00 9.99 1.00 1.00
SPEED LEVEL (A1), before it declares OVER-
SPEED FLT.
9-35
Reference

OVERSPEED MULT Sets percentage of CONTRACT CR SPD (A1) % 100.0 150.0 125.0 125.0
for OVERSPEED TEST (U4)
ENCODER PULSES Sets pulses per revolution (per channel) drive PPR 600 20000 2048 *
expects from encoder. Set to agree with
pulses per revolution on encoder nameplate if
directly coupled to motor shaft. If roller is
used to measure linear velocity, this is a cal-
culated value equal to counts expected from
encoder when motor makes exactly one revo-
lution.
SERIAL CNT / REV Number of discrete absolute positions per Cnts / 600 25000 8192 *
rotor revolution from absolute encoder. rev
Heidenhain = 8192.
ABS REF OFFSET Magnetek personnel only. Sets angular offset Deg -180.00 - 0.00
for absolute position reference exported +180.00
through an analog output.
SPD DEV LO LEVEL Range around speed reference for speed devi- % of 0.1 20.0 10.0 10.0
ation low logic output. Percent of contract contract
speed. spd
SPD DEV TIME Speed deviation time. Defines time speed Sec 0.00 9.99 0.50 0.50
feedback needs to be in range around speed
reference defined by SPD DEV LO LEVEL
before Speed Deviation Low logic output is
true.
SPD DEV ALM LVL Speed deviation alarm level. Sets level at % 0.0 99.9 10.0 10.0
which a speed deviation alarm will be
declared.
SPD DEV FLT LVL Speed deviation fault level. Sets the level at % 0.0 99.9 25.0 25.0
which a speed deviation fault is declared.
SPD COMMAND Subtracts an effective voltage from the actual volts 0.00 6.00 0.00 0.00
BIAS analog speed command signal.
SPD COMMAND Scales the analog speed command. none 0.90 5.00 1.00 1.00
MULT
PRE TORQUE BIAS Subtracts an effective voltage from actual volts -6.00 +6.00 0.00 0.00
analog pretorque / torque command (channel
2) voltage signal.
PRE TORQUE MULT Scales analog pretorque / torque command none -10.00 1.00 1.00
(channel 2). If set to 1.00, a 10V signal will +10.00
call for 100% torque.
PRE TORQUE TIME Time to ramp torque from zero to pretorque sec 0.00 10.00 0.00 0.00
value. When set to zero, Pretorque applied
immediately. Helps eliminate bump felt upon
starting caused by torque being immediately
set to rated pretorque. Setting to zero will dis-
able Pre Torque Ramp Up function. With a
non-zero setting for Pre Torque Time, torque
reference will be linearly ramped from zero to
value given through Analog input or serial
channel.
ZERO SPEED LEVEL Sets threshold for zero speed detection. Used % of 0.00 99.99 1.00 1.00
only to generate zero speed logic output. contract
spd
9-36 Manual # 42-02-2223


ZERO SPEED TIME Sets time drive is at or below ZERO SPEED sec 0.00 9.99 0.10 0.10
LEVEL (A1) before zero speed logic output is
true.
UP/DWN THRESH- Sets threshold for direction sense logic out- % of 0.00 9.99 1.00 1.00
OLD puts. If speed feedback does not reach this contract
level, drive will not detect directional change. spd
Used only to generate direction sense logic
outputs
TORQUE LIMIT Sets maximum torque allowed. Adjust to % 0.0 275.0 200.0 200.0
reduce effects of field weakening. Units in per-
cent of rated torque.
ANA 1 OUT OFFSET (Digital to Analog #1 Output Offset) Offset for %
scaling Analog Output Channel
-99.9 +99.9 0.0 0.0
9
ANA 2 OUT OFFSET (Digital to Analog #2 Output Offset) Offset for % -99.9 +99.9 0.0 0.0
scaling Analog Output Channel #2.
ANA 1 OUT GAIN (Digital to Analog #1 Output Gain) Adjusts the none 0.0 10.0 1.0 1.0
scaling for the Analog Output Channel #1.
ANA 2 OUT GAIN (Digital to Analog #2 Output Gain) Adjusts the none 0.0 10.0 1.0 1.0
scaling for the Analog Output Channel #2
FLT RESET DELAY When drive is set for automatic fault reset, sec 0 120 5 5
determines wait time before a fault is auto-
matically reset.
FLT RESETS/HOUR When drive is set for automatic fault reset, faults 0 10 3 3
this is the number of faults allowed to be
automatically reset per hour
UP TO SPD. LEVEL Sets threshold for up-to-speed logic output. % of 0.00 110.00 80.00 80.00
Used only to generate up-to-speed logic out- contract
put. spd
RUN DELAY TIMER Allows user to delay drive recognition of RUN sec 0.00 0.99 0.00 0.00
signal to allow more time for motor contactor
to set.
AB ZERO SPD LEV Sets speed point considered as zero speed for % 0.00 2.00 0.00 0.00
auto brake function. Units are % of contract
speed. In order to use Auto Brake Function, a
logic output needs to be configured for AUTO
BRAKE (C3), SPD COMMAND SRC (C1) =
multi-step, SPD REF RELEASE (C1) = BRAKE
PICKED, and BRAKE PICK CFRM (C1) =
EXTERNAL TB1.
AB OFF DELAY Determines time after zero speed is reached sec 0.00 9.99 0.00 0.00
(level determined by the AB ZERO SPD LEV
parameter) until Auto Brake logic output goes
false.
CONTACTOR DO DLY When drive controls motor contacts via CLOSE sec 0.00 5.00 0.00 0.00
CONTACT logic output, allows user to delay
dropout of motor contactor. Delay time starts
when speed regulator release signal goes
false.
TRQ LIM MSG DLY Determines amount of time drive is in torque sec 0.00 10.00 0.50 0.50
limit before HIT TORQUE LIMIT alarm mes-
sage is displayed.
SER2 INSP SPD Used to select speed during inspection mode Ft/min 0 -100 30 30
SER2 RS CRP SPD Used to select speed during rescue mode Ft/min 0 - 300 10 10
SER2 RS CRP TIME Maximum time to allow rescue mode Sec 0 - 200 180 180
9-37
Reference

SER2 FLT TOL Maximum time to allow between reception of Sec 0 2.00 0.04 0.04
packets in serial mode
ARB INERTIA Anti rollback inertia. Inertia/gain setting when None 0.10 20.00 0.30 0.30
drive is in ARB Mode. Too high a setting may
cause motor instability. If motor growls or
vibrates, lower setting. Too low a setting may
cause excessive rollback. Recommend: Start
value at same value as system inertia (INER-
TIA).
ARB START TIME Anti rollback start time. Dwell time between Sec 0.00 5.00 2.00 *
logic output SPD REG RLS and brake starting
to pick. ARB will not become activated until
ARL START TIME has occurred. Too long a
value will cause major rollback. Too short a
value will cause ARB to begin while brake is
still set. Adjust to begin just as brake is lifting.
ARB DECAY RATE Anti rollback decay rate. Determines slew rate Sec 0.500 0.999 0.850 *
for torque while in ARB Mode. The higher the
value, the more torque change may occur. The
lower the value, the less torque change may
occur. Setting to maximum 0.99 indicates lim-
ited decay. The faster the brake lifts, the
higher this value should be. Adjusting this
may cause ARB RESPONSE to also need
adjustment.
ARB RESPONSE Anti rollback response. Determines how None 5 100 25 *
quickly drive will react to brake opening. For
most systems, should be close to 20. Too high
a value may cause large torque bumps, more
rollback. The lower the value of ARB DECAY
RATE, the lower the value of ARB RESPONSE
will need to be to hold car from rollback.
ARB TORQUE TIME Anti rollback torque time. Helps smooth out Sec 0.00 10.00 0.00 *
torque requirement from drive to motor. Set
at zero, drive will step up torque as required
to hold motor. The higher the value, the
smoother the torque transition to the motor.
However, with higher values more rollback
may occur.
NOTCH FILTER FRQ Determines notch filter center frequency Hz 5 60 20 20
NOTCH FILT DEPTH Determines notch filter maximum attenuation % 0 100 0 0
MSPD DELAY 1-4 Multi step speed delay 1 4. Determines rec- Sec 0.000 0.000 0.000
ognition time delay for a defined multi-step 10.000
speed command.
MID SPEED LEVEL Sets level/threshold for mid speed detection. % 0.00 110.00 80.00 80.00
Used only to generate mid speed logic output.
Units in percent of contract speed.
BRK FAULT LEVEL Sets level of speed error that will cause drive % 0.0 20.0 2.0 2.0
to fault with a BRK IS OPEN fault during an
auto align or auto tune.
ENCDR FLT SENSE Determines percentage of voltage rise to % 10 100 30 30
occur before an Encoder Fault occurs due to
voltage rise at beginning of run. Units in per-
cent of Rated Mtr Volts.
9-38 Manual # 42-02-2223


DSPR TIME Drive Standby Power reduction Time. Deter- min 0 500 10 10
mines how long drive will remain energized
with motor field current at standby amps
before completing drive shutdown. Used only
when DPSR ENABLE (C1) set to Enable
A2 S-Curves Submenu
ACCEL RATE 0 Acceleration rate Limit ft/s2 0.00 7.99 7.99 7.99
DECEL RATE 0 Deceleration Rate limit ft/s2 0.00 7.99 7.99 7.99
ACCEL JERK IN 0 Rate of increase in acceleration up to ACCEL 0.0 29.9 0.0 0.0
RATE when increasing elevator speed ft/s3
ACCEL JERK OUT 0 Rate of decrease in acceleration to zero when ft/s3 0.0 29.9 0.0 0.0
approaching contract elevator speed. 9
DECEL JERK IN 0 Rate of increase in deceleration to DECEL ft/s3 0.0 29.9 0.0 0.0
RATE when decreasing elevator speed
DECEL JERK OUT 0 Rate of decrease in deceleration to zero when ft/s3 0.0 29.9 0.0 0.0
slowing the elevator to leveling speed.
ACCEL JERK IN 1 Rate of increase in acceleration up to ACCEL ft/s3 0.0 29.9 8.0 8.0
RATE when increasing elevator speed
approaching contract elevator speed.
9-39
Reference

A3 Multistep Ref Submenu
SPEED COMMAND 1 Multi-step Speed Command#1 ft/min -3000.0 0.0 0.0
+3000.0
+3000.0
+3000.0
+3000.0
+3000.0
+3000.0
+3000.0
+3000.0
+3000.0
SPEED COMMAND Multi-step Speed Command#10 ft/min -3000.0 0.0 0.0
10 +3000.0
11 +3000.0
12 +3000.0
13 +3000.0
14 +3000.0
15 +3000.0
9-40 Manual # 42-02-2223


A4 Motor Side Power Converter
Id REG DIFF GAIN Differential gain for current regulator flux gen- None 0.00 0.40 0.00 0.00
eration. Meant for advanced operation.
RARELY needs to be changed from default.
Locked by ENGR PARM LOCK, C1.
Iq REG PROP GAIN Proportional gain for current regulator flux None 0.150 3.000 0.700 0.700
generation. Advanced operation. RARELY
needs to be changed from default.
Id REG INTGRL Internal gain for current regulator flux genera- None 0.00 2.00 1.00 1.00
GAIN tion. Advanced operation. RARELY needs to be
changed from default.
Iq REG DIFF GAIN Differential gain for current regulator of motor None 0.00 0.40 0.00 0.00 9
torque. Advanced operation. RARELY needs to
be changed from default value. Locked by
ENGR PARM LOCK, C1.
lq REG PROP GAIN Proportional gain for current regulator torque None 0.150 3.000 0.700 0.700
generation. Advanced operation. RARELY
needs to be changed from default value.
lq REG INTG GAIN Integral gain for current regulator torque gen- None 0.00 2.00 1.00 1.00
eration. Advanced operation. RARELY needs to
be changed from default value.
PWM FREQUENCY Sets PWM or carrier frequency of motor arma- kHz 2.5 16.0 10.0 10.0
ture portion of drive
UV ALARM LEVEL Under voltage alarm level. Sets level at which % 80 99 90 90
under voltage alarm declared. Units in % of L-
L voltage
UV FAULT LEVEL Under voltage alarm level. Sets level at which % 50 99 80 80
under voltage fault occurs. Units in % of L-L
voltage
EXTERN REACTANCE Sets externally connected reactance (as a per- % 0.0 10.0 0.0 0.0
centage of base impedance) between drive
and motor. Units in percent of base imped-
ance.
FINE TUNE OFST Manual offset for absolute position feedback Deg -75.00 - +75.00 0.00 0.00
for TESTING purposes. WARNING: Changing
this can lead to motor runaway. Should always
be set to ZERO for NORMAL OPERATION.
Locked by ENGR PARM LOCK, C1.
ld REF THRESHOLD Magnetek personnel only. Used to manually None 0.00 0.20 0.00 0.00
set non-zero current reference for flux produc-
tion.
FLUX WEAKEN RATE Determines slew rate of flux weakening con- None 0.000 1.000 0.000 0.000
trols. The higher the value, the faster flux
weakening will respond to voltage limit. Set-
ting to zero will disable flux weakening.
FLUX WEAKEN LEV Determines how close to the voltage limit the None 0.70 - 1.00 0.95 0.95
drive will get before it will flux weaken. Locked
by Engr Parm Lock C1.
ALIGN VLT FACTOR Open Loop Alignment Voltage Reference Scal- None 0.05 1.99 1.00 0.00
ing Factor. Use to scale open loop voltage ref-
erence at initial phase of open loop alignment.
9-41
Reference

A5 Line Side Power Convert submenu
LS Id REG P GAIN Proportional gain, out of phase current regula- None 0.00 9.99 0.30 0.30
tor.
LS Id REG I GAIN Internal gain for out of phase current regula- None 0 999 10 10
tor.
LS Iq REG P GAIN Proportional gain for in phase current regula- None 0.00 9.99 0.30 0.30
tor.
LS lq REG I GAIN Integral gain for in phase current regulator. None 0 999 40 40
DC BUS REG P GAIN Proportional gain for bus voltage regulator. None 0 9.00 3.00 3.00
DC BUS REG I GAIN Integral gain for bus voltage regulator. None 0 999 40 40
INPUT L-L VOLTS Input Line to Line Voltage: Must be set cor- volts 150 552 480 *
rectly to calibrate DC Bus voltage regulation
and pre-charge
INITIAL L FREQ Initial Line Freq sets initial freq of input line Hz 50 60 55 55
voltage. Default 55Hz for most applications.
But, when line power switched from utility to
emergency, should be set to actual line power
input frequency.
DC BUS V BOOST DC Bus voltage reference adjusts the DC bus volts 15 75 30 30
voltage boost above the peak of line voltage
SW BUS OV LEVEL Software Bus overvoltage level trip point volts 100 850 850 850
BUS VREF SOURCE Bus voltage reference source. Selects bus volt- none track line v TRACK TRACK
age boost reference: trk vin param LINE V LINE V
Track Line V uses actual line voltage for bus
reference. Recommended for a still line.
Trk Vin Param uses INPUT L-L VOLTS for bus
reference. Recommended for a soft line.
PLL FILTER FC Phase Lock Loop Filter frequency Hz 20.0 150.0 40.0 40.0
POLE FILTER Pole Filter setting. Adds a low pass filter to the kHz 0.1 3.0 2.2 2.2
line side to help alleviate nuisance noise issue
PRE CHGE THRESH Pre charge threshold. Determines allowable none 1 60 28 28
variance between actual and calculated bus
voltage during power up
LS PWM FRE- Line Side PWM freq. Sets PWM of carrier freq kHz 8.0 12.0 10.0 10.0
QUENCY of converter portion of drive.
9-42 Manual # 42-02-2223


A6 Motor Submenu
MOTOR ID Motor Identification none -pm default -pm -pm
def default
RATED MOTOR Sets rated power in horsepower (HP) or kilo- HP 1.0 500.0 0.0 *
POWER watts (kW) of motor. Value obtained from kW 0.75 400.00 0.00 *
motor nameplate.
RATED MTR VOLTS Sets rated motor voltage. Value obtained from Volts 85.0 575.0 0.0 *
motor nameplate.
RATED MOTOR Sets rated motor current. Value obtained from Amps 1.00 800.00 0.00 *
CURR motor nameplate.
MOTOR POLES Sets number motor poles. MUST be even num- None 2 128 0 *
ber or Setup Fault #3 will occur. Value 9
obtained from motor nameplate or calculated
from motor excitation frequency and rated
motor speed.
RATED MTR SPEED Sets rated rpm of Motor. Function of motor RPM 18.0 3000.0 0.0 *
only. Does not need to match Control Mtr
Speed setting. Value obtained from motor
nameplate.
D AXIS INDUCT Sets amount of inductance in flux producing mH 0.50 50.00 10.00 *
equivalent circuit of vector controlled PM
motor. Higher inductances used for higher
horsepower motors. Obtain from motor speci-
fications.
Q AXIS INDUCT Sets amount of inductance in torque producing mH 0.50 50.00 10.00 *
equivalent circuit of vector controlled PM
motor. Higher inductances used for higher
horsepower motors. Obtain from motor speci-
fications.
STATOR RESIST Sets amount of resistance in motor stator as a % 0.0 20.0 7.0 *
percent of BASE IMPEDANCE, D2 which
appears in the Power Data display.
MOTOR IRON LOSS Sets motor iron loss at rated frequency. Units % 0.0 15.0 0.0 0.0
in percent of rated power.
MOTOR MECH LOSS Sets motor mechanical losses at rated fre- % 0.0 15.0 1.0 1.0
quency. Units in percent of rated power.
OVLD START LEVEL Defines maximum current at which motor can % 100 150 110 110
run continuously without triggering motor
overload
OVLD TIME OUT Motor Overload Time out. Defines amount of sec 5.0 120.0 60.0 60.0
time before motor overload alarm occurs when
motor is running at current level defined OVLD
Start Level+40% rated motor current
TRQ CONST SCALE Torque constant scale. Drive automatically cal- None 0.50 2.00 0.78 0.78
culates torque constant. Value can scale calcu-
lated torque constant for better performance.
ENCODER ANG Encoder Angle Offset. Contains value of align- None 0 25000
OFST ment determined during alignment procedure.
9-43
Reference

Adjust C0
C1 User Switches
SPD COMMAND SRC Speed Command Source none serial MULTI- ANA-
multi-step STEP LOG
ser mult step INPUT
analog input
DRV ENABLE SRC Drive enable source. none external tb EXTER- EXTER-
serial NAL TB NAL TB
serial+extrn
BOOST ENABLE SRC Determines method in which the drive will none serial ENABLE ENABLE
start precharge. Precharge is required after enable on run ON DE ON DE
drive is first powered up or after DSPR has enable on de
timed out. external tb
RUN COMMAND SRC Run command source. Sets the source of the none external tb EXTER- EXTER-
run command from one of the following. serial NAL TB NAL TB
serial+extrn
HI/LO GAIN SRC High/ Low gain change switch source none internal INTER- INTER-
external tb NAL NAL
serial
SPEED REG TYPE Speed Regulator Type none elev spd reg ELEV ELEV
pi speed reg SPD REG SPD
external reg REG
MOTOR ROTATION Allows the user to change Motor rotation. none forward FOR- FOR-
reverse WARD WARD
SPD REF RELEASE Speed reference Release none reg release REG REG
brake picked RELEASE RELEAS
E
CONT CONFIRM SRC Contactor Confirm source none external tb NONE EXTER-
none NAL TB
PreTorque SOURCE Pre-Torque Source none none NONE ANA-
analog input LOG
serial INPUT
PreTorque LATCH Pre-Torque Latch none latched NOT NOT
not latched LATCHE LATCHE
D D
PTorq LATCH CLCK Pre-Torque Latch Clock none external tb EXTER- EXTER-
serial NAL TB NAL TB
FAULT RESET SRC Fault Reset Source none -- external tb EXTER- EXTER-
-- serial NAL TB NAL TB
-- automatic
OVERSPD TEST SRC Overspeed Test Source none -- external tb EXTER- EXTER-
NAL TB NAL TB
BRAKE PICK SRC Brake Pick Source none -- internal EXTER- INTER-
-- serial NAL TB NAL
BRAKE PICK CNFM Brake Pick Confirm none none NONE NONE
external tb
internal time
BRAKE HOLD SRC Brake Hold Source none -- internal INTER- INTER-
-- serial NAL NAL
RAMPED STOP SEL Ramp stop select none -- none NONE RAMP
-- ramp on stop ON
STOP
9-44 Manual # 42-02-2223


RAMP DOWN EN Ramp Down Enable Source none -- external tb EXTER- RUN
SRC -- run logic NAL TB LOGIC
-- serial
BRK PICK FLT ENA Brake Pick Fault Enable none -- disable DISABLE DIS-
-- enable ABLE
BRK HOLD FLT ENA Brake Hold Fault Enable none -- disable DISABLE DIS-
-- enable ABLE
EXT TORQ CMD SRC External Torque Command Source none -- none NONE NONE
-- serial
-- analog input
DIR CONFIRM Direction Confirm: When enabled, allows con- none -- disable DISABLE DIS-
firmation of polarity of initial analog speed
command via Run UP or Run Down logic
-- enable ABLE 9
inputs.
S-CURVE ABORT Addresses how S-curve speed reference gen- none -- disable DISABLE DIS-
erator handles reduction in speed command -- enable ABLE
before S-curve generator reaches target speed
I-REG INNER LOOP Current regulator inner loop. Disables/enables None - disable Enabled Enabled
current regulator inner loop function. Used to - enabled low low low
enhance current loop performance. - enabled high
ENCODER FAULT Allows temporary disabling of Encoder Fault none -- disable ENABLE ENABLE
during initial start up when motor model is not -- enable
clearly defined. If disabled, drive will display
Encoder Fault OFF every time RUN command
is removed. Enable after A5 motor parameters
established.
STOPPING MODE Multi-step stopping mode selection none -- immediate IMMEDI- IMME-
-- ramp to stop ATE DIATE
MOTOR OVRLD SEL Motor overload select. Select action to be None - alarm ALARM Fault at
taken by drive when declaring user selectable - flt immediate stop
Motor Overload. - fault at stop
Alarm only.
Flt immediate: declare fault, turn off output.
Fault at stop: Delay declaring fault until run
command removed.
AUTO STOP Auto stop Function Enable none -- disable DISABLE DIS-
-- enable ABLE
SERIAL MODE Select the serial protocol none -- none NONE NONE
-- Mode 1
-- Mode 2
-- Mode 2
-- Mode 2 test
SER2 FLT Mode Select the fault response to be used when run- none -- Immediate IMMEDI- IMME-
ning serial mode 2 -- Run remove ATE DIATE
-- Rescue
MLT-SPD TO DLY1 Multi-step speed command delay. Assigns none None
MLT-SPD TO DLY2 multi-step speed command to recognition -mspd 1
MLT-SPD TO DLY3 delay timer x as defined by MSPD DELAY x (A!) through mspd15
parameter.
MLT-SPD TO DLY4
ENCODER SELECT Magnetek only. Presently, only EnDat absolute None Endat abslute Endat Endat
encoder is available. abslute abslute
ENGR PARM LOCK Magnetek personnel only. Used to lock out Non - locked Locked Locked
parameters that should only be changed by - unlocked
Magnetek engineers.
9-45
Reference

PRIORITY MESSAGE If disabled, user will not see priority mes- None - disable Enable Enable
sages. Faults and alarms will not be displayed - enable
but instead placed into fault history and active
fault lists with Fault LED on. Leave enabled.
ARB SELECT Anti-rollback select. When enabled, drive cal- None - enable Disable Disable
culates pretorque values when movement is - disable
seen on shaft. See drive manual
C2 Logic inputs submenu
LOGIC INPUT 1 Logic input #1: Drive prewired for CONTACT None contact cfirm, CON- CON-
TB1(1) CONFIRM ctr pwr sense, TACT TACT
drive enable, CFIRM CFIRM
LOGIC INPUT 2 Logic input #2: Drive prewired for CTR PWR None extrn fault 1, CTR CTR
TB1(2) SENSE extrn fault 2, PWR PWR
extrn fault 3, SENSE SENSE
LOGIC INPUT 3 Logic input #3 None extrn /flt 4, NO NO
TB1(3) fault reset, FUNC- FUNC-
field enable, TION TION
low gain sel,
LOGIC INPUT 4 Logic input #4 None DRIVE DRIVE
mech brk hold,
TB1(4) ENABLE ENABLE
mech brk pick,
LOGIC INPUT 5 Logic input #5 None no function, RUN RUN
TB1(5) ospd test src,
pre-trq latch,
LOGIC INPUT 6 Logic input #6 None UP/DWN NO
run,
TB1(6) FUNC-
run down,
TION
run up,
LOGIC INPUT 7 Logic input #7 None s-curve sel 0, STEP NO
TB1(7) s-curve sel 1, REF B0 FUNC-
ser2insp ena, TION
LOGIC INPUT 8 Logic input #8 None step ref b0, STEP NO
TB1(8) step ref b1, REF B1 FUNC-
step ref b2, TION
LOGIC INPUT 9 Logic input #9 None step ref b3, FAULT FAULT
TB1(9) trq ramp RESET RESET
down, up/dwn
9-46 Manual # 42-02-2223


C3 Logic Outputs submenu
LOGIC OUTPUT 1 Logic Output 1 None Alarm, CLOSE CLOSE
TB1(25) alarm+flt, CON- CON-
auto brake, TACT TACT
brake hold,
LOGIC OUTPUT 2 Logic Output 2 None RUN RUN
brake pick,
TB1(26) COM- COM-
brk hold flt
MANDE MANDE
brk pick flt,
D D
car going dwn,
LOGIC OUTPUT 3 Logic Output 3 None car going up MTR MTR
TB1(27) , charge fault, OVER- OVER-
LOAD LOAD
LOGIC OUTPUT 4 Logic Output 4 None
close contact,
contactor flt, ENCODE ENCOD
9
TB1(28) curr reg flt, R FLT ER FLT
drv overload,
encoder flt,
LOGIC OUTPUT 5 Logic Output 5 None FAULT FAULT
fault,
TB1(29)
flux confirm,
ground fault,
LOGIC OUTPUT 6 Logic Output 6 None in low gain, SPEED SPEED
TB1(30) motor trq lim, REG REG
mtr overload, RLS RLS
no faults,
LOGIC OUTPUT 7 Logic Output 7 None SPEED SPEED
no function,
TB1(31) REG REG
not alarm,
RLS RLS
over curr flt,
SSR1 TB1(21/22) Solid State Relay #1 None overspeed flt, NO NO
overtemp flt, FUNC- FUNC-
overvolt flt, TION TION
SSR2 TB1(23/24) Solid State Relay #2 None ovrtemp alarm, NO NO
phase fault, FUNC- FUNC-
ramp down TION TION
ena,
RELAY COIL 1 TB2 Relay Coil #1 None ready 2 start, NO NO
(1/3/5) ready to run, FUNC- FAULT
regen trq lim, TION
RELAY COIL 2 TB2 Relay Coil #2 None run com- NO SPEED
(8/10/12) manded, FUNC- REG
run confirm, TION RLS
speed dev,
speed dev low,
speed ref rls,
speed reg rls,
undervolt flt,
up to speed,
uv alarm,
zero speed
9-47
Reference

C4 Analog Outputs submenu
ANA OUT 1 TB1-12 Analog output #1 None analog addr2 SPEED SPEED
analog addr3 REF REF
arm current
arm voltage
aux torq cmd
bus voltage
est motor spd
ANA OUT 2 TB1-13 Analog Output #2 None field current SPEED SPEED
iarm error FEEDBK FEEDB
ls pwr input K
pretorque ref
motor mode
spd rg tq cmd
speed com-
mand
speed error
speed feedbk
speed ref
tach rate cmd
tach speed
torque ref
Table 11. Utility U0 Menu

U0 Param Desc Default Choices
U1 Password Data protection password.
Enter Password Allows password entry 012345
New Password
Password Lockout Enable password lockout Disabled enabled
disabled
U2 Hidden Items
Hidden Items Allows selected parameters to be blocked from drive Enabled enabled
display. disabled
U3 Units
Unit Selection Metric or English unit selection English metric
english
U4 Overspeed Test
Overspeed Test? Allows an overspeed test to be run from drive opera- No Yes
tor. No
U5 Restore Defaults
Restore drive defaults? Resets all parameters in A1, A2, A3, A4, C1, C2, C3, No Yes
and C4 submenus. Also resets A6 parameters Flux No
Confirm Lev, Tach Volt Sense, Tach speed sense, Ovld
Start Level, and Ovld time out.
Restore motor defaults? Restores motor params to default value. No Yes
No
Restore Utility Defaults? Resets A5 submenu parameters to default values. No Yes
Also resets Gain Selection in the A4 submenu. No
U6 MS Drive Info Motor Side Drive Information
9-48 Manual # 42-02-2223

Table 11. Utility U0 Menu

U0 Param Desc Default Choices
MS Type Read Only
MS Code Version
MS S/W Date
MS S/W Time
MS FPGA Rev
MS Cube ID
U7 LS Drive Info Line Side Drive Information
LS Type
LS Code Version
LS S/W Date 9
LS S/W Time
LS FPGA Rev
LS Cube ID
U8 Hex Monitor
Addr1
Addr2&
Addr3&
U10 Rotor Align Rotor alignment procedure.
Alignment Allows alignment procedure or value ENCODER ANG Disable Enable
OFST, A5 to be changed. Disable
Begin Alignment Select alignment begin. No Yes
On run
No
Alignment Method Select alignment type. Open Loop Open loop
Auto align
U11 Autotune Sel Autotune Procedure
Autotune Select Set to Yes or On Run to begin auto tune. Disable Disable
On Run
Yes
Table 12. Fault F0 Menu

F0 Param Desc Default Choices
F1 Active Faults
Display Active Faults? Lists active faults.
Reset Active Faults? Resets active faults.
F2 Fault History
Display Fault History? Lists fault history.
Clear Fault History? Clears fault history.
Display Fault Counters? List of faults with number of occurrences.
9-49
Reference
9-50 Manual # 42-02-2223

Numerics Pretorque 4-16
1 = LAN port 2-4 Releveling 4-28
1 bus, Common bus connections 9-11, 9-12 Ride quality 4-29
110 VDC Bus Connections, iBox 9-11 Speed 4-10
120 VAC Bus Connections, iBox 9-11 Speed pick delay 4-6
15A, Final Limit switch connection 9-12 System 12 Drive 2-29
15B, Pit/Final Limit switch connection 9-12 Tachometer Error tripping threshold 2-46, 4-39
2 = System port 2-4 ALT SPEED PROFILE 1 message 6-13
2 bus, 120 VAC connections 9-11, 9-12 ALT SPEED PROFILE 2 message 6-13
2 PI bus, 120 VAC connections 9-11 Alternate 1 profile 4-13
3 = PC port 2-4 Alternate 2 profile 4-13
3 bus, 110 VDC connections 9-11, 9-12 ALTERNATE FLOOR SMOKE message 6-13
3 HA bus, 110 VDC connections 9-11 Alternate Floor Smoke Sensor Recall message 6-13
Alternate Speed Profile 1 Activated message 6-13
A Alternate Speed Profile 1 Deactivated message 6-13
Alternate Speed Profile 1 message 6-13
A-, Velocity Encoder input 6-101, 9-7
Alternate Speed Profile 2 Activated message 6-13
A+, Velocity Encoder input 6-101, 9-7
Alternate Speed Profile 2 Deactivated message 6-13
ABD, Hoistway Access Bottom Down switch input 6-103, 9-9
Alternate Speed Profile 2 message 6-13
ABU, Hoistway Access Bottom Up switch input 6-103, 9-9
Anti-nuisance controls 4-30
AC Drive
Approach deceleration parameter 4-13
car does not reach high speed 4-10
Approach jerk parameter 4-13
Parameters 4-7, 4-14, 4-27
Armature Active Status test point, description 9-2
parameters 2-20
Armature Command (Control) test point, description 9-2
TORQMAX Parameters Quick Reference 9-23
Armature Command (Damped) test point, description 9-2
AC supply 5-2
Armature Command (Raw) test point, description 9-2
Acceleration (Command) test point, description 9-2
Armature Composite Control test point, description 9-3
Acceleration (Directional) test point, description 9-2
Armature Control Set test point, description 9-3
Acceleration (Filtered) test point, description 9-2
Armature Current Dampen Feedback test point, 9-3
Acceleration (Interpolated) test point, description 9-2
Armature Current Signal test point, description 9-3
Acceleration (Raw) test point, description 9-2
Armature Current Synthetic Feedback test point, 9-3
Acceleration (Slew) test point, description 9-2
Armature Differential Command test point, description 9-3
Acceleration parameter 4-12
Armature Differential Gain test point, description 9-3
Acceleration specification 9-2
Armature Error (Damped) test point, description 9-3
accessing online help 8-24
Armature Error (Raw) test point, description 9-3
acquiring write privilege 2-14
Armature Feedforward (Control) test point, description 9-3
Actual speed, calibrating 2-42
Armature Feedforward (Raw) test point, description 9-3
ADC, verifying ADC conversion 2-29
Armature Integral Command test point, description 9-3
Adding a circuit board 6-73
Armature Integral Gain test point, description 9-3
Adjusting
Armature On Status test point, description 9-3
AC Drive parameters 2-20
Armature Proportional Command test point, description 9-3
Brake Calibration 2-36
Armature Proportional Gain test point, description 9-3
Brake coordination 4-27
Armature Voltage Dampen Feedback test point, 9-3
Brake drop delay 4-25
Armature Voltage Signal test point, description 9-3
Brake parameters 4-19
Armature Voltage Synthetic Feedback test point, 9-3
Brake picking 2-38, 4-18
Ascending Car Overspeed Fault message 6-13
Brake release 4-25
ASCND CAR OVR SPD FLT message 6-13
Brake Resistance 2-9
ATD, Hoistway Access Top Down switch input 6-103, 9-9
Car speed 2-42
Attendant Service message 6-13
Dead zone 4-26
Attendant Svc message 6-13
Emergency slowdown 4-51
ATU, Hoistway Access Top Up switch input 6-103, 9-9
Final Approach 4-15, 4-25
Automatic Stop message 6-13
Following error 2-45
Auto-tuning for induction motors, TORQMAX drive 2-44
Leveling speed 4-26
Load thresholds 4-30
Load Weigher 4-29, 4-31
Motor Current Limiting 4-14
overshoot 4-14
Overspeed Margins 4-53
Pattern parameters 4-14
Index-1
B Brake Voltage Not Off Fault message 6-16
B-, Velocity Encoder input 6-101, 9-7 Brake Voltage Not On Fault message 6-16
B+, Velocity Encoder input 6-101, 9-7 Brake Voltage Signal test point, description 9-3
B1, B2, DC power to motor brake 9-12 BRD, Brake Redundancy indicator 9-10
Backup power direction reversal message 6-13 Bus 2 Fuse Open message 6-16
BACKUP POWER RECALL message 6-13 Bus 2D Fuse Open message 6-16
Backup power recall OFF message 6-13 Bus 2MC Fuse Open message 6-16
Backup power recall ON message 6-13 Bus 2PI Fuse Open message 6-16
Backup power unit failure activated message 6-14 Bus 3 Fuse Open message 6-16
Backup power unit failure deactivated message 6-14 Bus 3HA Fuse Open message 6-16
Backup power unit failure message 6-14 Bus Enabled 5-13
Balanced Mode message 6-14 Bus Status 5-13
BATTERY VLTG LOW-IMP message 6-14 Bus Voltage 5-13
Battery Voltage Low-IMP message 6-14 Button Bar 8-18
BD, Brake Drive relay indicator 9-10 Bypass Jumper, using for troubleshooting 6-3
BDRD, Brake Drive Redundancy indicator 9-10
Blocking New Remote Connections message 6-14 C
BLOCKING REMOTE UIS message 6-14 Cabinet Installation 2-5
Boot parameter recovery utility 8-49 cables for Velocity Encoder 2-11
Brake Calibrate Floor offsets 4-22
adjust to control rollback 2-35 Capture Input OFF message 6-16
auto calibration procedure 2-36 Capture Input ON message 6-16
calibration 2-352-37 Capture message 6-17
calibration procedure 2-35 Capture Mode message 6-17
iBox connections 9-10 Capture Mode switch, iBox control 7-11
Resistance 2-9 Car Connections, iBox 6-102, 9-7
verify picking 2-38 CAR DEL DOORS CLOSED message 6-17
Voltage 6-16 CAR DEL DOORS CLOSING message 6-17
wiring 2-10 CAR DEL DOORS OPEN message 6-17
BRAKE CNT DRV PRF FLT message 6-14 CAR DEL DOORS OPENING message 6-17
BRAKE CONT PRF FAULT message 6-14 CAR DEL DOORS STALLED message 6-17
Brake Contactor Driver Proofing Fault message 6-14 CAR DEL DOORS UNKNOWN message 6-17
Brake Contactor Proofing Fault message 6-14 Car delayed with doors closed message 6-17
Brake Contactor Status test point, description 9-3 Car delayed with doors closing message 6-17
Brake coordination, adjusting for smooth stops 4-27 Car delayed with doors open message 6-17
Brake Current Feedback test point, description 9-3 Car delayed with doors opening message 6-17
Brake Current Resistance 2-9 Car delayed with doors stalled message 6-17
Brake Current Signal test point, description 9-3 Car delayed with unknown door position message 6-17
Brake Drive Redundancy indicator 9-10 car direction, verifying 2-39
Brake drop delay, adjusting for final stop 4-25 car does not reach high speed 4-10
BRAKE DROP FAULT message 6-14 Car Door Bypass message 6-17
Brake Drop Fault message 6-14 Car Door Bypass switch, iBox control 7-11
Brake Enable Fault message 6-15 Car Heavy Load - Deactivated message 6-18
Brake Enable Status test point, description 9-3 Car Heavy Load Activated - Hall Calls Bypassed message 6-18
Brake IGBT Fault, see Excessive Brake Feedback Fault 6-31 CAR HEAVY LOAD message 6-18
Brake Module Over Temperature Fault message 6-15 Car identifier parameter 4-55
Brake Output Circuit Failure message 6-15 CAR OS DOORS CLOSED message 6-18
BRAKE OUTPUT FAILURE message 6-15 CAR OS DOORS CLOSING message 6-18
BRAKE OVER TEMP FAULT message 6-15 CAR OS DOORS OPEN message 6-18
Brake pick delay CAR OS DOORS OPENING message 6-18
adjusting 3-13 CAR OS DOORS STALLED message 6-19
BRAKE PICK FAULT message 6-15 CAR OS DOORS UNKNOWN message 6-18
Brake Pick Fault message 6-15 Car out of service unknown door position message 6-18
Brake Pick Fault Off message 6-15 Car out of service with doors closed message 6-18
Brake release time, adjusting for final stop 4-25 Car out of service with doors closing message 6-18
Brake Switch input 3-5 Car out of service with doors open message 6-18
Brake Triac active indicator 9-10 Car out of service with doors opening message 6-18
BRAKE V NOT OFF FAULT message 6-16 Car out of service with doors stalled message 6-19
BRAKE V NOT ON FAULT message 6-16 Car Over Load Activated message 6-19
Brake Voltage Feedback test point, description 9-3 Car Over Load Deactivated message 6-19
Index-2 Manual # 42-02-2223

CAR OVERLOAD message 6-19 Checking the Hoist Motor 2-9
Car Panel (Hoistway) Access Enable switch input 6-102, 9-7 Circuit boards, troubleshooting 6-74
Car Panel Emergency Stop switch input 6-102, 9-7 Clear drive error 2-20, 2-24
Car Panel Insp message 6-19 Clone Controller Data 7-7
Car Panel Inspection Disabled message 6-19 CNPB Fault, see Brake Contactor Proofing Fault message 6-14
Car Panel Inspection Enabled message 6-19 CNPBD Fault, see Brake Contactor Driver Proofing Fault
Car Panel Inspection Inputs OK message 6-19 message 6-14
Car Panel Inspection message 6-19 CNPM Fault, see Motor Contactor Proofing Fault 6-51
Car Panel Inspection Operation message 6-19 CNPMB Fault, see Motor Contactor Driver Proofing Fault
Car Reaction 4-54 message 6-51
Car shut down due to emergency power operation with no su- Cnstr Car Panel Insp message 6-21
pervisor (Activated) message 6-19 Cnstr Cartop Insp message 6-22
Car Speed specification 9-2 Cnstr CP Insp message 6-21
CAR STOP SWITCH OPEN message 6-20 Cnstr CT Insp message 6-22
Car Stop Switch Open message 6-20 Cnstr HA Insp message 6-22
Car Top, iBox status LED 7-10 Cnstr HA Inspection message 6-22
Car/Counterweight Buffer Test 4-44, 4-45 Cnstr Inspection message 6-22
Car/Counterweight Safety Test 4-43 Cnstr Mach Room Insp message 6-22
CARTOP AUTO UIM FLT message 6-20 Cnstr MR Insp message 6-22
Cartop Automatic Unintended Motion Fault message 6-20 Common Bus Connections, iBox 9-11
CARTOP COMM FAULT message 6-20 Computer IP address, setting 5-5, 5-8, 8-5
Cartop Communication Fault message 6-20 Computer Reset, iBox control 7-3
Cartop Emergency Stop message 6-20 Computer, iBox status LED 7-10
Cartop Exit no Counterweight Configuration Error 6-20 conF 2-22
CARTOP EXIT OPEN message 6-20 Configuration File 6-72
Cartop Exit Open message 6-20 Configuration file
Cartop Exit Open Off message 6-20 creating 8-21
Cartop Firmware Update Mode message 6-21 editing 8-23
CARTOP FW UPDATE MODE message 6-21 loading 8-22
Cartop Insp message 6-21 saving 8-21
CARTOP INSP UIM FLT message 6-21 Configuration File - Generate Default 8-20
Cartop Inspection Disabled message 6-21 Connected 5-13
Cartop Inspection Enabled message 6-21 Connection Status 5-13
Cartop Inspection Inputs OK message 6-21 Construction Car Panel Inspection Operation message 6-21,
Cartop Inspection message 6-21 6-22
Cartop Inspection Operation message 6-21 Construction Cartop Inspection Operation message 6-22
Cartop Inspection Unintended Motion Fault message 6-21 Construction Hoistway Access Inspection Operation 6-22
Cartop Inspection Wiring 2-13 Construction Inspection Operation message 6-22
Cartop interconnections 1-5 Construction Machine Room Inspection Operation 6-22
Cartop Link Connections, iBox 6-102, 9-7 Construction Mode 2-12-47, 3-13-9
Cartop Power Loss message 6-21 exiting 3-9
Cartop Processor Board Quick Reference 6-78 Faults 2-2
Cartop Safety Relay 2-12 Required connections 2-2
Cartop Safety Relay Bypass 2-12, 2-13 Contract Overspeed Test 4-44, 4-46
Cartop Safety Switches 2-12 Controller Main Computer Startup message 6-22
CFSS 1 at floor message 6-21 Controller Specifications 9-2
CFSS 1 In-car message 6-21 Controller Stop switch, iBox control 7-11
CFSS 1 recall message 6-21 Correction profile 4-13
CFSS 2 at floor message 6-21 Counterweight balancing, preparing for final adjust 3-12
CFSS 2 In-car message 6-21 Counterweight derailment detector 3-6
CFSS 2 Recall message 6-21 Counterweight Learn procedure 3-11
CFSS Mode 1 at Floor Activated message 6-21 Coupling rotational ratio 2-18
CFSS Mode 1 In-car Activated message 6-21 CP INSP. DISABLED message 6-19
CFSS Mode 1 Recall Activated message 6-21 Creating a Configuration file 8-21
CFSS Mode 2 at Floor Activated message 6-21 Creating a new LAN connection 8-12
CFSS Mode 2 In-car Activated message 6-21 Crosshead Deflection Load Weigher 4-29
CFSS Mode 2 Recall Activated message 6-21 CT INSP. DISABLED message 6-21
Changing parameters 2-14 CTEX NO CWI CFG ERROR message 6-20
Check for shorts to ground 2-6 Current Limiting 4-14
Checking AC phase 5-2
Index-3
D DP2+, Position Encoder input 6-101, 9-6
DAC Offset Status test point, description 9-3 DPM, Door Position Monitor input 6-102, 9-7
DAC, verifying DAC conversion 2-29 Drive At Speed Fault message 6-24
DBD Mode Activated message 6-22 Drive Communication Fault message 6-24
DBD PHE Antinuisance 6-22 Drive Communication Warning message 6-24
DCAB, Door Contact Access Bottom input 6-104, 9-10 Drive Connections, iBox 9-11
DCAT, Door Contact Access Top input 6-104, 9-10 DRIVE ENABLE FDBK FLT message 6-24
DCL, Door Close Limit input 6-102, 9-7 Drive Enable Feedback Fault message 6-24
DCMS, Door Contact Main String input 6-104, 9-10 Drive Enable Status test point, description 9-3
Dead zone, adjusting for final stop 4-26 Drive error, clearing 2-20, 2-24
Deceleration parameter 4-13 DRIVE FAULT message 6-25
Deceleration rate, bunching up of 4-15 Drive Fault message 6-25
Default IP Addresses Drive Inspection Overspeed Fault message 6-25
iBox settings 7-8 DRIVE IOS FAULT message 6-25
default parameter settings, saving 8-20 Drive IOS Limit test point, description 9-4
Demand Down Peak Mode message 6-22 Drive IOS Param Limit test point, description 9-4
Demand Up Peak Mode message 6-22 Drive Motor/Encoder Setup 2-22
DETS, Down Emerg Terminal Limit switch input 6-103, 9-8 Drive On Fault message 6-25
Direct connections 8-11 Drive On, iBox status LED 7-10
connecting 8-10 Drive Parameters Quick Reference, Magnetek 9-28, 9-35
creating 8-8 Drive Parameters Quick Reference, TORQMAX 9-23
Dispatcher = Car n message 6-22 Drive Ready Fault message 6-26
Display contrast, iBox control 7-3 Drive Ready On Fault message 6-25
DLAB, Door Lock Access Bottom input 6-104, 9-10 Drive Start Failure message 6-26
DLAT, Door Lock Access Top input 6-104, 9-10 Driver VDC 5-13
DLM, Down Leveling Marker Sensor input 6-102, 9-7 DRO fault 4-18
DLMS, Door Lock Main String input 6-104, 9-10 DRO fault, empty car test 3-13
DN ETS POSITION FAULT message 6-23 Drop delay, adjusting for final stop 4-27
DN NTSn L1 SPEED FLT message 6-23 Dual Channel QUAD Fault message 6-26
DN NTSn L2 SPEED FLT message 6-24 DUAL CHANNEL QUAD FLT message 6-26
DN NTSn POSITION FLT message 6-24 DZ, Door Zone Sensor input 6-102, 9-7
DNT1, Down Slowdown Limit switch #1 input 6-103, 9-8
DNT2, Down Slowdown Limit switch #2 input 6-103, 9-8 E
DNT3, Down Slowdown Limit switch #3 input 6-103, 9-8 Earthquake (EQ) sensor 3-6
DNT4, Down Slowdown Limit switch #4 input 6-103, 9-8 Earthquake board power supply OFF message 6-26
DNT5, Down Slowdown Limit switch #5 input 6-103, 9-8 Earthquake board power supply ON message 6-26
DNTD, Down Normal Limit Direction switch input 6-103, 9-8 Earthquake Board Quick Reference 6-86
docking and undocking windows in iView 8-35 Earthquake Emergency Stop message 6-26
DOL, Door Open Limit input 6-102, 9-7 Earthquake Operation (Counterweight) message 6-27
DOOR LK CLIPPED G200 message 6-22 Earthquake Operation (Seismic Switch) message 6-27
DOOR LK CLIPPED L200 message 6-23 Earthquake Operation Activated message 6-26
Door Lock Clipped Greater than 200fpm message 6-22 Earthquake Operation Deactivated message 6-26
Door Lock Clipped Less than 200fpm message 6-23 Earthquake profile 4-13
DOOR LOCK OPENED message 6-23 Earthquake Reduce Speed message 6-27
Door operator, preparing for final adjustments 3-11 Earthquake reset button OK message 6-27
Door parameters, verifying 3-8 Earthquake reset button stuck ON message 6-27
Doors Locked, iBox status LED 7-10 EARTHQUAKE RUN message 6-27
DOWN DIR LIMIT OPEN message 6-23 Earthquake Run message 6-27
Down Direction Limit Open message 6-23 Earthquake Shutdown message 6-27
Down Emergency Switch Shutdown message 6-23 Edit a parameter on the iBox 7-4
Down Emergency Terminal Switch Position Fault 6-23 Edit a parameter using iView 8-19
DOWN ETS SHUTDOWN message 6-23 Editing a configuration file 8-23
Down Normal Terminal n Level 1 Speed Fault message 6-23 Editing displays 8-39
Down Normal Terminal n Level 2 Speed Fault message 6-24 EEPROM Device Error message 6-27
Down Normal Terminal n Position Fault message 6-24 Electrical Governor Test 4-44
Down switch, iBox control 7-11 Elevator Recall Operation (Switch n) message 6-27
Down, iBox status LED 7-10 ELEVATOR RECALL SWn message 6-27
DP1-, Position Encoder input 6-101, 9-6 EM BK UIM RESET STUCK message 6-29
DP1+, Position Encoder input 6-101, 9-6 EMERG ALARM ACTIVATED message 6-28
DP2-, Position Encoder input 6-101, 9-6 EMERG BRAK LEG 2 SHORT message 6-28

EMERG BRAKE OK OPEN message 6-28 ETA Mode Activated message 6-31
EMERG BRAKE TRIPPED message 6-29 Ethernet address verification, iBox 7-9
EMERG BRK LEG 1 SHORT message 6-28 Ethernet connections 2-4
EMERG POWER RECALL message 6-30 Event Log
EMERG POWER RUN message 6-30 viewing on the iBox 7-7
EMERG POWER SHUTDOWN message 6-30 EXCESS BRAKE FDBK FLT message 6-31
EMERG PWR NO COMM message 6-30 EXCESS MF FDBK FAULT message 6-32
Emergency Alarm Acknowledged message 6-27 EXCESS RELEVELS FAULT message 6-32
Emergency Alarm Activated (Alarm button) message 6-28 EXCESS RESTARTS FAULT message 6-32
Emerg Alarm Activated (Car delayed with doors closed) 6-28 Excessive Brake Feedback Fault message 6-31
Emergency Alarm Activated (In-car stop switch) 6-28 EXCESSIVE FAULTS message 6-31
Emergency Alarm Activated (Safety opened) message 6-28 Excessive Faults Shutdown message 6-31
Emergency Alarm Activated message 6-28 Excessive Faults Warning message 6-31
Emerg Alarm Deactivated without Acknowledgment 6-28 EXCESSIVE FLTS WARN message 6-31
Emergency Brake Board Quick Reference 6-82 Excessive Motor Field Feedback Fault message 6-32
Emergency Brake Leg 1 Short Fault message 6-28 Excessive Motor Noise 4-15
Emergency Brake Leg 2 Short Fault message 6-28 Excessive Relevels Fault message 6-32
Emergency Brake OK open message 6-28 Excessive Restarts Fault message 6-32
Emergency Brake OK open Off message 6-29 Excessive Restarts Warning message 6-32
Emergency Brake Test - Unintended Motion 4-46, 4-47 Exercise Operation Activated message 6-32
Emerg Brake Test - Unintended Motion Machine Brake 4-47 Exercise Operation Deactivated message 6-32
Emerg Brake Test - Unintended Motion Rope Gripper 4-46 EXERCISE OPERATION message 6-32
Emergency Brake Tripped message 6-29 exiting Construction Mode 3-9
Emergency Brake UIM Reset Button Stuck message 6-29
Emergency Dispatch message 6-29 F
Emergency Dispatch Off message 6-29 F DPM OPEN-GS CLOSED message 6-36
Emergency Medical Service Bypassed message 6-29 F DR CLS FLT REC FAIL message 6-35
Emergency Medical Service Deactivated message 6-29 F1 help, accessing online help 8-24
Emerg Medical Service In-Car Activated (Switch n) 6-29 FAULT BYPASS SW ON message 6-32
Emerg Medical Service Recall Activated (Switch n) 6-29 Fault Bypass Switch On message 6-32
Emergency power 5-13 Fault Bypass Switch Timed Out Fault message 6-32
Emergency Power Activated message 6-30 Fault Reset, iBox control 7-3
Emergency Power and no communication with group 6-30 Fault, iBox status LED 7-10
Emergency Power Deactivated message 6-30 Fault/Function Bypass switch, iBox control 7-11
Emergency power profile 4-13 Field Active Status test point, description 9-4
Emergency Power Recall (In Service) message 6-30 Field Command (Control) test point, description 9-4
Emergency Power Recall message 6-30 field connections 9-69-11
Emergency Power Run message 6-30 Field Control Path test point, description 9-4
Emergency Power Shutdown message 6-30 Field Current Feedback test point, description 9-4
Emergency slowdown profile 4-13, 4-51 Field Current Signal test point, description 9-4
Emergency Stop Input Activated message 6-31 Field Error test point, description 9-4
Emergency Stop Input Deactivated message 6-31 Field Integral Command test point, description 9-4
EMERGENCY STOP INPUT message 6-31 Field Integral Gain test point, description 9-4
Emergency Stop switch 2-13 Field Module Logic Board Quick Reference 6-83
Emergency Terminal Limit (ETS) 4-8 Field Module Over Temperature Fault message 6-33
Emergency Terminal Overspeed 4-53 FIELD MODULE OVR TEMP message 6-33
Emergency Terminal Switch Overspeed Tests 4-52 Field Proportional Command test point, description 9-4
Empty Car Tests, preparing for final adjustments 3-13 Field Proportional Gain test point, description 9-4
Empty load detection 4-29 Field Voltage Feedback test point, description 9-4
Empty load threshold 4-30, 4-32 Field Voltage Signal test point, description 9-4
EMS In-car (Switch n) message 6-29 Field wiring 2-5
EMS Recall (Switch n) message 6-29 Final Approach to Floor 4-15
Enable switch, iBox control 7-11 Fire Recall Alt. message 6-33
Encoder Signal test point, description 9-4 Fire Recall Alternate message 6-33
Environmental Considerations 2-3 Fire Recall Main message 6-33
Environmental Limits specification 9-2 Fire Service In-car Activated message 6-33
EP RECALL (IN SERVICE) message 6-30 Fire Service In-Car Deactivated message 6-33
EQ board, Earthquake sensor 3-6 Fire Service In-car Hold Operation message 6-33
EQ Reset 3-6 Fire Service In-car message 6-33
ESC, Car Panel Emergency Stop switch input 6-102, 9-7 Fire Service In-car Recall Operation message 6-33
Index-5
Fire Service Recall Alternate message 6-33 Governor Speed Reduction Switch Fault message 6-38
Fire Service Recall Deactivated message 6-34 Group Communication Established message 6-38
Fire Service Recall Main message 6-33 Group Communication Lost message 6-38
Fire Svc In-car message 6-33 Group ID 5-12
Flare jerk parameter 4-13 Group Info 5-12
Flood Operation Activated message 6-34 GS, Gate Switch input 6-104, 9-10
Flood Operation Deactivated message 6-34
FLOOD OPERATION message 6-34 H
Floor Heat Detectors Activated message 6-34 HA INSP. DISABLED message 6-39
Floor Heat Detectors Deactivated message 6-34 Hall call addresses 5-20
FLOOR HEAT DETECTORS message 6-34 HALL CALL BUS n FAIL message 6-38
Floor Heights Hall Call Bus n Failure message 6-38
Learn procedure 4-2 HALL CALL BYPASS INP. message 6-38
Learning the 4-2 Hall Call Bypass Input OFF message 6-38
Floor Leveling Accuracy specification 9-2 Hall Call Bypass Input ON message 6-38
Floor Location Fault message 6-34 Hall Call Driver Testing 5-31
Floor offsets, calibrating 4-22 Hall call enclosures 5-20
Floor Sensor Fault message 6-34 Hall call jumpers 5-20
Floor Sub-Address or Call Type Jumper 5-21 Hall Call Service Disabled message 6-38
Floor Synchronization Fault message 6-35 Hall Call Service Enabled message 6-38
FLT BYP SW TIMED OUT message 6-32 Hall call wiring 5-19
Following error 2-18 Heat Detectors Recall Activated message 6-38
Following error, calibrating 2-45 Heat Detectors Recall Complete message 6-38
FRONT DOB BYPASSED message 6-36 Heat Detectors Recall Deactivated message 6-39
Front Door Close Fault message 6-35 HEAT DETECTORS RECALL message 6-38
Front Door Close Fault Recovery Failure message 6-35 Heat Sensor Fault n message 6-39
FRONT DOOR CLOSE FLT message 6-35 Heavy load threshold 4-30, 4-31
Front Door Close Time-out message 6-35 Heavy load, hall call bypass 4-29
FRONT DOOR CNTCT FLT message 6-36 Help, accessing online help 8-24
Front Door Contact Fault message 6-36 High Current 5-13
Front Door Open Button Bypassed message 6-36 High roll jerk parameter 4-12
Front Door Open Fault message 6-36 High speed parameter 4-13
Front Door Open Time-out message 6-36 HOIST HEAT DETECTORS message 6-39
FRONT DOORS STOPPED message 6-36 Hoist motor insulation testing 2-9
Front Doors Stopped message 6-36 Hoistway Access Bottom Down switch input 6-103, 9-9
Front DPM Open - GS Closed message 6-36 Hoistway Access Bottom Up switch input 6-103, 9-9
FRONT HALL DOB BYP message 6-37 Hoistway Access Disabled message 6-39
Front Hall Door Open Button Bypassed message 6-37 Hoistway Access Enabled 6-39
FRONT PHOTO EYE BYP message 6-37 Hoistway Access Inspection Operation message 6-39
Front Photo Eye Bypassed message 6-37 Hoistway Access message 6-39
FRONT PHOTO EYE FAIL message 6-37 Hoistway Access Operation message 6-39
Front Photo Eye Failure message 6-37 Hoistway Access Top Down switch input 6-103, 9-9
FRONT SAFE EDGE BYP message 6-37 Hoistway Access Top Up switch input 6-103, 9-9
Front Safe Edge Bypassed message 6-37 HOISTWAY DOOR BYPASS message 6-39
FRONT SAFE EDGE FAIL message 6-37 Hoistway Door Bypass message 6-39
Front Safe Edge Failure message 6-37 Hoistway Door Bypass switch, iBox control 7-12
FTP File Viewer 8-44 Hoistway Heat Detectors Activated message 6-39
Fuses 2-6, 5-2 Hoistway Heat Detectors Deactivated message 6-39
Fuses on the iBox 7-12 HOISTWAY LEARN ON message 6-39
Hoistway Limit Switches 3-4
G Hoistway Safety Switches 2-12
Gateway 7-8, 8-7 Hold voltage 2-38
Gear Reduction Ration
calculating 2-42
Generate default configuration file 8-20
Global Parameter Update, Reset Controller message 6-37
GOV SPEED SWITCH FLT message 6-38
GOV, Governor input 6-104, 9-10
GOVERNOR OPEN message 6-37
Governor open message 6-37

I IMP SW FLT
iBox 7-17-12 C DOOR BP message 6-39
control switches 7-11 H DOOR BP message 6-40
description 7-1 WRITE EN message 6-41
display menu tree 7-5 IMP Switch Fault - Car Door Bypass message 6-39
fuses 7-12 IMP Switch Fault - Emergency Stop message 6-40
keypad controls 7-3 IMP Switch Fault - Fault Bypass message 6-40
LCD display 7-2 IMP Switch Fault - H. Door Bypass message 6-40
LCD display, top line characters 7-3 IMP Switch Fault - Inspection DOWN message 6-40
Safety bypass jumper 7-12 IMP Switch Fault - Inspection Enable message 6-40
setting and verifying the IP address 7-9 IMP Switch Fault - Inspection message 6-40
status LEDs 7-10 IMP Switch Fault - Inspection UP message 6-40
status messages 7-11 IMP Switch Fault - LEARN message 6-40, 6-41
view and set parameters 7-4 IMP Switch Fault - None message 6-40
View/register calls 7-7 IMP Switch Fault - Write Enable message 6-41
viewing factory data 7-7 In Group, iBox status LED 7-10
viewing MAC addresses 7-7 INA, Car Panel (Hoistway) Access Enable switch 6-102, 9-7
viewing serial numbers 7-7 INCP, COP Inspection Station INSP/AUTO Switch 6-102, 9-7
viewing the Event log 7-7 INCT, Cartop Inspect Station INSP/AUTO Switch 6-102, 9-7
viewing version info 7-7 INCT, Inspection Cartop Enable switch input 2-13
iBox field connections 9-69-11 Independent service message 6-41
ICE-COP Board Diagnostics 6-4 Independent Svc message 6-41
ICE-CTP Cartop Processor Board Initial jerk parameter 4-12
diagnostics 6-80 initial parameter settings 2-16
Quick Reference 6-78 initial power up 2-8
ICE-EB Emergency Brake Board Quick Reference 6-82 INSFCNT BRK FDBK FLT message 6-41
ICE-FML Field Module Logic Board Quick Reference 6-83 INSFCNT MF FDBK FLT message 6-42
ICE-IEQ Earthquake Board Quick Reference 6-86 INSFCNT MF FORCNG FLT message 6-42
ICE-IMP Main Processor Board Quick Reference 6-88 Inspection message 6-41
ICE-IRB Relay Board Quick Reference 6-90 Inspection mode 2-8, 3-13-13
ICE-IRD Rear Door Board Quick Reference 6-93 Inspection operation
ICE-MIAC Multiple Input AC Board Quick Reference 6-95 checking cartop operation 2-47
ICE-MIAC-24V Multiple Input AC/DC Board 6-95 Inspection Operation message 6-41
ICE-MOR Multiple Output Relay Board Quick Reference 6-97 Inspection Overspeed Fault message 6-41
ICE-RG Rope Gripper Board Quick Reference 6-99 Inspection Overspeed Test 4-44, 4-46
ICE-SAF Safety Board Quick Reference 6-100 Inspection profile 4-13
ICE-SF Serial Fixtures Board Quick Reference 6-105 Inspection switch, iBox control 7-11
iControl Inspection, iBox status LED 7-10
cartop interconnections 1-5 Insufficient Brake Current Feedback Fault message 6-41
system interconnections 1-4 Insufficient Motor Field Feedback Fault message 6-42
iControl AC Specifications 9-2 Insufficient Motor Field Forcing Feedback Fault 6-42
iControl messages 6-136-70, 6-70 Insulation test 2-9
ICPD, COP Inspection Station DN Button input 6-102, 9-7 INV CNFG INPUT DCMS R message 6-43
ICPU, COP Inspection Station UP Button input 6-102, 9-7 INV CNFG INPUT DLMS R message 6-44
ICTD, Cartop Inspection Station DN Button input 6-102, 9-7 INV CNFG INPUT DPM_R message 6-44
ICTU, Cartop Inspection Station UP Button input 6-102, 9-7 INV INVTRY XCHK BALRQ message 6-44
iCue GUI 5-12, 5-14 INV INVTRY XCHK DCCOR message 6-45
iLand Landing System 3-2 INV INVTRY XCHK NMS R message 6-45
iLink Cartop Box INV INVTRY XCHK RD BD message 6-45
diagnostics 6-80 INV INVTRY XCHK RDOPT message 6-45
enclosure 3-3 INV INVTRY XCHK RG BD message 6-46
troubleshooting 6-80 INV INVTRY XCHK RGOPT message 6-46
IMP SW FAULT INV INVTRY XCHK TALRQ message 6-46
EM STOP message 6-40 INVALID CNFG BALRQ message 6-42
FLT BYP message 6-40 INVALID CNFG INPUT message 6-42
INSP DN message 6-40 INVALID CNFG TALRQ message 6-44
INSP EN message 6-40 Invalid Configuration BALRQ message 6-42
INSP message 6-40 Invalid Configuration Input CTEX message 6-42
LEARN message 6-40 Invalid Configuration Input DCAB message 6-42
TEST message 6-41 Invalid Configuration Input DCAT message 6-43
Index-7
Invalid Configuration Input DCMS message 6-43 windows and tabs 8-25
Invalid Configuration Input DCMS R message 6-43 working offline 8-23
Invalid Configuration Input DLAB message 6-43 working online 8-16
Invalid Configuration Input DLAT message 6-43 iView Button Bar 8-18
Invalid Configuration Input DLMS message 6-43 iView Logged Off message 6-47
Invalid Configuration Input DLMS R message 6-44 iView Logged On message 6-47
Invalid Configuration Input DPM message 6-44 iView Lost Connection message 6-47
Invalid Configuration Input DPM_R message 6-44 iView Menu Bar 8-17
Invalid Configuration Input message 6-42 iView Status Bar 8-18
Invalid Configuration Input Off message 6-42 iView Timed Out message 6-47
Invalid Configuration Inventory Cross Check BALRQ 6-44
Invalid Configuration Inventory Cross Check DCCOR 6-45 J
Invalid Configuration Inventory Cross Check NMS R 6-45 Jail Master Mode message 6-47
Invalid Configuration Inventory Cross Check RD Board 6-45 Jail Secure Mode message 6-47
Invalid Configuration Inventory Cross Check RDOPT 6-45 Jerk specification 9-2
Invalid Configuration Inventory Cross Check RG Board 6-46 Job prints 5-35, 6-97, 6-107
Invalid Configuration Inventory Cross Check RGOPT 6-46
Invalid Configuration Inventory Cross Check TALRQ 6-46 K
Invalid Configuration TALRQ message 6-44 Keypad controls, iBox 7-3
Invalid Destination, INVALID DESTINATION message 6-46
Invalid Front Door Position message 6-46
L
Invalid Input message 6-47
LAN connections 8-128-15
Invalid Rear Door Position message 6-47
connecting 8-14
INVLD CNFG INPUT CTEX message 6-42
creating 8-12
INVLD CNFG INPUT DCAB message 6-42
deleting 8-15
INVLD CNFG INPUT DCAT message 6-43
editing 8-15
INVLD CNFG INPUT DCMS message 6-43
LAND SYS SENSOR FAULT message 6-48
INVLD CNFG INPUT DLAB message 6-43
Landing system
INVLD CNFG INPUT DLAT message 6-43
Verifying position encoder resolution 3-10
INVLD CNFG INPUT DLMS message 6-43
Landing System Sensor Fault message 6-48
INVLD CNFG INPUT DPM message 6-44
Layouts, iView screen layouts 8-30
INVLD FRONT DOOR PSTN message 6-46
LCD display, iBox 7-2, 7-3
INVLD REAR DOOR PSTN message 6-47
LCD Fault message 6-48
IO Map Compare Fault message 6-47
Learn encoder 2-22
IO Map Compare Fault Off message 6-47
Learn or Enter Motor or Encoder Data 2-22
IO Map Compare Long Term Fault message 6-47
LEARN SW TIMED OUT message 6-48
IO MAP COMPARE LT FLT message 6-47
Learn Switch Timed Out Fault message 6-48
IO Map Toggle Compare Fault message 6-47
Learn switch, iBox control 7-11
IO Map Toggle Compare Fault Off message 6-47
Learn U/DNT1-5 and U/DETS Positions message 6-48
IO MAP TOGLE COMP FLT message 6-47
Learn U/DNT1-5 and U/DETS Speeds message 6-48
IP address, pinging 5-11
LEARN U/DTS POSITIONS message 6-48
IP address, setting and verifying on the ibox 7-9
LEARN U/DTS SPEEDS message 6-48
Isolated Platform Load Weigher 4-30
LEARNING EMPTY LOAD message 6-48
iView 8-40
Learning empty load values message 6-48
configuration tabs 8-25, 8-31
LEARNING FULL LOAD message 6-48
connections 2-14
Learning full load values message 6-48
creating a configuration file 8-21
Learning the
diagnostic tabs 8-25, 8-31
Building floor heights 4-2
docking and undocking windows 8-35
Counterweight 3-11
editing the virtual oscilloscope display 8-39
Empty and loaded car weights 4-32
Layouts 8-30
ETS and NTS Limit Switches 4-8
pinning and unpinning windows 8-33
Load Weights 4-29
printing screens 8-38
Learning the Safety Configuration 2-19
resizing windows 8-34
Level Down Sensor 4-4
saving parameters to a configuration file 8-21
Level Up Sensor 4-4
Send command 8-20
Leveling Accuracy specification 9-2
sending parameters to the controller 8-20
Leveling distance parameter 4-13
setting parameters 8-19
Leveling Overspeed Test 4-46
setup tabs 8-25
Leveling speed parameter 4-13
View menu contents 8-26

Leveling speed, adjusting for final stop 4-26 MCE Loadweigher-Isolated Platform 3-5
Light load anti-nuisance 4-29 MCE System hub 5-4
Light Load Antinuisance message 6-48 MD, Motor Drive relay indicator 9-11
Light load threshold 4-30, 4-32 MDRD, Motor Drive Redundancy indicator 9-11
LIMIT SW CHKSUM FAULT message 6-49 Menu Bar 8-17
LIMIT SW LEARN FAULT message 6-49 Menu tree, iBox LCD display 7-5
Limit Switches Checksum Fault message 6-49 MF FORCING TIMED OUT message 6-51
Limit Switches Learn Fault message 6-49 MF1, MF2, DC power to motor field 9-12
Load calibration on message 6-49 Minimum Floor to Floor Time specification 9-2
Load learn process activated message 6-49 Mode of Operation 5-13
Load learn process deactivated message 6-49 Motion Start Fault message 6-50
Load Weigher Motion stopped due to IO toggle test message 6-50
Cross Head Deflection 1-3 MOTION STOPPED-IO TST message 6-50
Isolated Platform 1-3 MOTOR CNTR PROOF FLT message 6-51
Load weigher Motor Contactor Driver Proofing Fault message 6-51
Crosshead deflection 4-29 Motor Contactor Proofing Fault message 6-51
Empty load threshold 4-30 Motor Contactor Status test point, description 9-4
Heavy load threshold 4-30 Motor Current Limiting 4-14
Isolated platform 4-30 Motor Field Forcing Timed Out message 6-51
Light load threshold 4-30 Motor insulation 2-9
Overload threshold 4-30 Motor Limit Protection Timer Elapsed message 6-51
Rope tension 4-29 MOTOR LIMIT TIMED OUT message 6-51
Load Weigher (Raw) test point, description 9-4 Motor Limit Timed Out message 6-51
Load Weigher Adjustment 4-29 MOTOR LMT TIMED OUT 2 message 6-51
Load Weigher Balanced test point, description 9-4 Motor nameplate data 2-22
Load Weigher Feedback test point, description 9-4 Motor Noise 4-15
Load Weigher Sensor Adjustment 4-16 Motor Overload Protection, verifying 2-47
Load Weigher Signal test point, description 9-4 Motor Triac active indicator 9-11
Loading parameters from a Configuration file 8-22 MOTR CNTR DRV PRF FLT message 6-51
Lobby Peak Mode message 6-49 MR HEAT DETECTORS message 6-50
Local Area Network 8-12 MR INSP. DISABLED message 6-50
LOCKOUT 2-25 MR STOP SWITCH OPEN message 6-50
Locks/Contacts Connections, iBox 6-104, 9-10 MRD, Motor Redundancy indicator 9-11
LOSS OF POS/SPD IND message 6-49 Multiple Input AC Board Quick Reference 6-95
Loss of Position or Speed Indicators message 6-49 Multiple Output Relay Board Quick Reference 6-97
Low roll jerk parameter 4-12
N
M Network Info 5-13
MAC ADDRESS ERROR message 6-49 Node Control 5-13
Mac Address Error message 6-49 Normal and Emergency Terminal Switch Position Tests 4-52
MAC addresses Normal rate limited stop, adjusting for final stop 4-25
viewing on iBox 7-7 Normal Terminal Slowdown Limit (NTS) 4-8
Mach Rm Insp message 6-50 Normal Terminal Switch Overspeed Tests 4-51
Machine Rm Inspection message 6-50 Nudging Front, NUDGING FRONT message 6-51
Machine Room Heat Detectors Activated message 6-50 Nudging Operation message 6-51
Machine Room Heat Detectors Deactivated message 6-50 Nudging Rear, NUDGING REAR message 6-51
Machine Room Inspection Disabled message 6-50 Number of Cars in Group specification 9-2
Machine Room Inspection Enabled message 6-50 Number of Stops specification 9-2
Machine Room Inspection Operation message 6-50
Machine Room Inspection switch 7-11 O
Machine Room Inspection, running on 2-392-47, 3-9 Online help, accessing 8-24
Machine Room Stop Switch Open message 6-50 Orange cables 5-22
Magnetek Oscilloscope
Clear faults 2-24 editing displays 8-39
Keypad overview 2-24 OTHER CARS ALT FIRE message 6-51
Status indicators 2-25 Other Cars Alternate Fire Sensor Recall message 6-51
Magnetek AC Drive Parameters Quick Reference 9-28, 9-35 OTHER CARS MAIN FIRE message 6-52
MAIN FLOOR SMOKE message 6-50 Other Cars Main Fire Sensor Recall message 6-52
Main Floor Smoke Sensor Recall message 6-50 Over Current Power Threshold test point, description 9-4
Main Processor Board Quick Reference 6-88 Over Current test point, description 9-4
Index-9
Over Current Threshold test point, description 9-4 Power Transfer Input Deactivated message 6-54
Overload threshold 4-30, 4-31 Power Transfer, POWER TRANSFER message 6-54
Overloaded car detection 4-29 Power Up Position Synchronization Required at Terminal
Overshoot correction, Contract speed runs 4-14 message 6-54
Overshoot, adjusting for 4-7 PowerBack R6 Regenerative Drive
Overspeed 1 Parameters Quick Reference 9-27
description of 4-53 Preparing for Final Adjustments 3-11
Overspeed 2 counterweight balancing 3-12
description of 4-53 door operator 3-11
empty car tests 3-13
P run testing 3-11, 3-12
PARAM CHNG-RESET CAR message 6-37 Pre-Run Status test point, description 9-5
Parameter adjustment Pre-start Door Lock Fault message 6-54
using iView 8-19 Pre-Start Sequence 4-344-39
using the iBox 7-4 diagrams 4-35
Parameter entry screens 8-19 parameters 4-34
Parameters, Load from Configuration file 8-22 Pretorque (Raw) test point, description 9-5
Parameters, Save to File 8-21 Pretorque Command test point, description 9-5
Passenger Operation, Passenger message 6-52 Pretorque Gain, adjusting 4-17
Pattern (Command) test point, description 9-4 Pretorque option 4-17
Pattern (Directional) test point, description 9-4 Pretorque Position Compensation 4-17
Pattern (Phase) test point, description 9-5 PRI FIRE SWITCH BYP message 6-54
Pattern (Raw) test point, description 9-5 PRI FIRE SWITCH ON message 6-54
Pattern (Region) test point, description 9-5 Primary Fire Switch Bypass message 6-54
Pattern (Slew Limited) test point, description 9-5 Primary Fire Switch On message 6-54
Pattern Filtered test point, description 9-4 Printing screens in iView 8-38
Pattern Interpolated test point, description 9-5
Peripheral hub 5-4 Q
Photo Eye Antinuisance message 6-52 QPRAM Device Error message 6-54
Pick voltage 2-36, 2-38 Quadrature Pulse Sequence 3-10
Pinging an IP address 5-11 Quadrature Pulse Voltages 3-10
pinning and unpinning windows in iView 8-33
PM gearless machine, synchronize with AC drive 2-10, 2-18 R
Position Bit test point, description 9-5 R DPM OPEN-GS CLOSED message 6-56
Position Cartop Offset Fault message 6-52 R DR CLS FLT REC FAIL message 6-55
Position encoder resolution R6 Regenerative AC drive parameters 9-27
verifying 3-10 RB resistor, adjusting 2-9
Position iBox Connections 6-101, 9-6 REAR DOB BYPASSED message 6-55
Position Location Error Fault message 6-52 Rear Door Board Quick Reference 6-93
Position Margin 4-53 REAR DOOR CLOSE FAULT message 6-55
POSITION QUAD FAULT message 6-52 Rear Door Close Fault message 6-55
Position Quadrature Fault message 6-52 Rear Door Close Fault Recovery Failure message 6-55
Position Quadrature Reversed Fault message 6-52 Rear Door Close Time-out message 6-55
Position Speed Deviation Fault message 6-53 Rear Door Contact Fault message 6-55
Position Speed Threshold Fault message 6-53 REAR DOOR CONTCT FLT message 6-55
POSITION SYNC-FLOOR message 6-53 Rear Door Open Button Bypassed message 6-55
Position Synchronization Fault message 6-53 Rear Door Open Fault message 6-56
Position Synchronization Required at Floor message 6-53 Rear Door Open Time-out message 6-56
Position Synchronization Required at Terminal message 6-53 REAR DOORS STOPPED message 6-55, 6-56
Position Synchronized at Floor message 6-53 Rear Doors Stopped message 6-55, 6-56
Position Synchronized at Terminal message 6-53 Rear DPM Open - GS Closed message 6-56
POSITION SYNC-TERMINAL message 6-53 REAR HALL DOB BYP message 6-56
POSITN QUAD RVRSD FLT message 6-52 Rear Hall Door Open Button Bypassed message 6-56
POSITN SPEED DVTN FLT message 6-53 REAR PHOTO EYE BYP message 6-56
POSTN CARTP OFFST FLT message 6-52 Rear Photo Eye Bypassed message 6-56
POSTN LCTN ERROR FLT message 6-52 REAR PHOTO EYE FAIL message 6-57
POSTN SPD THRSHLD FLT message 6-53 Rear Photo Eye Failure message 6-57
Power bus verification 5-3 REAR SAFE EDGE BYP message 6-57
Power line fluctuation 2-3 Rear Safe Edge Bypassed message 6-57
Power Transfer Input Activated message 6-54
Index-10 Manual # 42-02-2223

REAR SAFE EDGE FAIL message 6-57 Safety B Fault Bypass Switch Timed Out message 6-59
Rear Safe Edge Failure message 6-57 Safety B Fault Deactivated message 6-59
Receive Sys Params message 6-57 SAFETY B FAULT message 6-59
Register a car call 4-4 Safety B Inspection Leveling Overspeed Fault message 6-59
Relay Board Quick Reference 6-90 Safety B Inspection Overspeed Fault 6-60
Relay output selection 5-35, 6-97, 6-107 Safety B Safety Bypass Jumper Timed Out message 6-60
Relevel, iBox status LED 7-10 Safety B SIB Device Fault message 6-60
Relevel, verifying 4-5 Safety B SIB Device Fault Off message 6-60
Releveling 4-28 Safety B UETS Level 2 Speed Fault message 6-60
Reset EQ board 3-6 Safety B, iBox status LED 7-10
Reset Rope Gripper 2-13 Safety Board Quick Reference 6-100
resizing windows in iView 8-34 Safety Bypass Jumper 6-3
RESTRICTED message 6-57 Safety Bypass Jumper On message 6-60
Restricted message 6-57 Safety Bypass Jumper on the iBox 7-12
RET CAM PROTECTIN FLT message 6-57 Safety Bypass Jumper Time Out message 6-60
RETIRING CAM DLK FLT message 6-57 Safety C String Open message 6-60
Retiring Cam Door Lock Fault Activated message 6-57 Safety C String Open Off message 6-60
Retiring Cam Door Lock Fault Deactivated message 6-57 Safety Configuration Checksum Fault message 6-61
Retiring Cam Door Lock Fault message 6-57 Safety Configuration Inventory Cross Check Fault 6-61
Retiring Cam Protection Fault Activated message 6-57 Safety Configuration Learn Fault message 6-61
Retiring Cam Protection Fault Deactivated message 6-57 Safety Configuration Mismatch message 6-61
Retiring Cam Protection Fault message 6-57 Safety Configuration, learning the 2-19
RFI, Radio Frequency Radiation 2-3 Safety Connections, iBox 9-11
RFI/EMI noise, reducing 2-9 Safety H String Open message 6-61
Ride quality, adjusting 4-29 Safety H String Open Off message 6-61
Ring and String circuit 3-6 Safety Inventory Checksum Fault message 6-61
Rollback adjustment, Speed pick delay 4-6 Safety Inventory Comparison Fault message 6-61
Rollback, controlling 4-16 Safety Inventory Creation Fault message 6-62
Rope Gripper 2-13 Safety Inventory Learn Fault message 6-62
Rope Gripper Board Quick Reference 6-99 Safety OK, iBox status LED 7-10
Rope Gripper Bypass 2-13 Safety String 2-12
Rope Gripper Reset 2-13 Safety String Bypass Jumper, troubleshooting 6-3
Rope Gripper Wiring 2-13 Safety String Closed message 6-62
Rope Stretch Releveling 4-28 Safety String Open message 6-62
Rope Tension Load Weigher 4-29 Safety Tests 4-414-54
Rough Acceleration or Deceleration 4-15 Car/Counterweight Buffer 4-45
Run testing, preparing for final adjustments 3-12 Car/Counterweight Safety 4-43
Run the motor 2-22, 2-25 Contract Overspeed 4-44
Run, iBox status LED 7-10 Electrical Governor 4-44
RX-, Cartop Link input 6-102, 9-7 Emergency Brake - Unintended Motion for Machine
RX+, Cartop Link input 6-102, 9-7 Brake 4-47
Emergency Brake - Unintended Motion for Rope Gripper
S 4-46
Sabbath Operation Activated message 6-58 Emergency Terminal Switch Overspeed 4-52
Sabbath Operation Deactivated message 6-58 Inspection Overspeed 4-44
Sabbath Operation, SABBATH OPERATION message 6-58 Leveling Overspeed Test 4-46
SAFC, Safety Cartop input 9-11 Normal and Emergency Terminal Switch Position 4-52
Safety 3-9 Normal Terminal Switch Overspeed 4-51
Safety A Contract Overspeed Fault message 6-58 SAFH, Safety Hoistway input 9-11
Safety A IMP Configuration Mismatch message 6-58 Saving parameters to a configuration file 8-21
Safety A Inspection Leveling Overspeed Fault message 6-58 SC/ION output selection 5-35, 6-97, 6-107
Safety A Inspection Overspeed Fault message 6-58 SC-HCDA-ISO Serial Hall Call Driver Isolation Board Quick
Safety A SIB Device Fault message 6-58 Reference 6-106
Safety A SIB Device Fault Off message 6-58 SC-HCN Serial Hall Call Node Board Quick Reference 6-106
Safety A UETS Level 2 Speed Fault message 6-59 SC-ION boards 5-33, 6-107
Safety A Unintended Motion Fault message 6-59, 6-60 SC-ION Serial Control I/O Board Quick Reference 6-107
Safety A, iBox status LED 7-10 SCOP BUSS n COMM FAULT message 6-65
Safety B Contract Overspeed Fault message 6-59 SCOP BUSS n INVENTORY FLT message 6-66
Safety B DETS Level 2 Speed Fault message 6-59 SCR Current Sensor Offset Status test point, description 9-5
Safety B Fault Activated message 6-59 SCR Intg Offset Status test point, description 9-5
Index-11
SEC FIRE SWITCH ON message 6-65 SPA DETS L2 SPEED FLT message 6-58
Second Level 5-33 SPA DETS Level 2 Speed Fault message 6-58
Secondary Fire Switch On message 6-65 SPA IOS FAULT message 6-58
Sending parameter settings to the controller 8-20 SPA LOS FAULT message 6-58
Serial bus, wiring 5-19 SPA SIB DEVICE FAULT message 6-60
Serial Control I/O Board Quick Reference 6-107 SPA Spare Event n (n = 1 to 8) message 6-66
Serial COP 3-6, 5-36 SPA UETS L2 SPD FLT message 6-59
description of 5-36 SPA UNTD MOTION FLT 6-59
diagnostics 6-75 Spares Connections, iBox 9-11
installing 5-38 SPB COS FLT message 6-59
specifications 5-38 SPB DETS L2 SPEED FLT message 6-59
Serial COP Bus n Comm Fault message 6-65 SPB IOS FAULT message 6-60
Serial COP Bus n Inventory Fault message 6-66 SPB LOS FAULT message 6-59
Serial Driver 5-22 SPB SIB DEVICE FAULT message 6-58
Serial Fixture Addresses 5-20 SPB UETS L2 SPD FLT message 6-60
Serial Fixtures Board Quick Reference 6-105 SPB UNTD MOTION FLT 6-60
Serial Hall Call Driver 5-17 Specifications 9-2
Serial Hall Call Driver Isolation Board Quick Reference 6-106 Specifications, iControl AC specifications 9-2
Serial Hall Call Driver Testing 5-31 Speed Bit test point, description 9-5
Serial Hall Call Node Board Quick Reference 6-106 Speed Feedback test point, description 9-5
Serial Hall Call option 5-175-33 Speed Feedback, verifying 2-41, 2-43
Serial Hall Call System 3-6 Speed pick delay 4-6, 4-18
Bus Voltages 5-17 adjusting 3-13
Serial number, viewing on iBox 7-7 speed profiles, adjusting 4-12
Serial to TCP/IP 5-22 Speed Reference, setting 2-41, 2-43
Serial-to-Ethernet converters 5-22 speed variance, up vs. down 2-42
Set Time/Date 7-7 Standard profile 4-13
Setting PC IP Addresses 5-5 Status Bar 8-18
Setting the date and time in iView 8-38 Status display, iBox LEDs 7-10
SFTY CONFIG CHKSM FLT message 6-61 Status messages on the iBox LCD display 7-11
SFTY CONFIG LEARN FLT message 6-61 Stuck Car Panel Inspection Input message 6-67
SFTY CONFIG MISMATCH message 6-61 Stuck Cartop Inspection Input message 6-67
SFTY INVTRY CHKSUM FLT message 6-61 STUCK CP INSP. INPUT message 6-67
SFTY INVTRY COMPARE FLT message 6-61 STUCK CT INSP. INPUT message 6-67
SFTY VCTR XCHK FLT message 6-61 STUCK IN. INPUT FLT message 6-67
Sheave Brake Drop Fault message 6-66 Stuck Inspection Input Fault message 6-67
SHEAVE BRAKE DROP FLT message 6-66 Sub-address jumper 5-21
Sheave Brake Pick Fault message 6-66 Subnet Mask 7-8, 8-7
SHEAVE BRAKE PICK FLT message 6-66 Sufficient Field Status test point, description 9-5
SHLD, Tach Signal input 6-101, 9-6 Swing Operation Activated message 6-67
Shorts to ground 5-2 Swing Operation Deactivated message 6-67
Shuttle Service Activated message 6-66 Swing Operation message 6-67
Shuttle Service Deactivated message 6-66 Synthetic Signal test point, description 9-5
SHUTTLE SERVICE OFF message 6-66 Sys Comm, iBox status LED 7-10
SHUTTLE SERVICE ON message message 6-66 System 12 SCR Drive
Silent Mode Activated message 6-66 auto offset calibration 2-29
Silent Mode Deactivated message 6-66 initial settings 2-29
Single Channel QUAD Fault message 6-66 System control switches on the iBox 7-11
SNG CHANNEL QUAD FLT message 6-66 System I/O Troubleshooting 5-23
Softkeys, iBox controls 7-3 System Options 5-1??
SOFTWARE RECALL ON message 6-66 Serial COP 5-36??
Software Recall Switch Activated message 6-66 Serial Hall Calls 5-17??
Software Test Points 9-2 SYSTEM SYNC message 6-66, 6-67
SP 1, Spare input 1 6-104, 9-10
SP1 D, Optional input 9-11
SP2 D, Optional Brake Pick switch input 9-11
SP2, Optional input 9-11
SPA COS FAULT message 6-58
Index-12 Manual # 42-02-2223

T Quick Reference 6-106
Tach Error Fault message 6-67 SC-HCN Serial Hall Call Node Board Quick Reference 6-
Tach Error Lower Limit test point, description 9-6 106
Tach Error tripping threshold adjustment 4-39 SC-ION Serial Control I/O Board Quick Reference 6-107
Tach Error Upper Limit test point, description 9-6 Serial Hall Call (and I/O) 5-23
Tach Failure, TACH FAILURE message 6-67 Tools 6-2
Tachometer iBox Connections 6-101, 9-6 using the Safety String Bypass Jumper 6-3
Tachometer Signal test point, description 9-6 TS, Tach Signal input 6-101, 9-6
TB, Brake Triac active indicator 9-10 TX-, Cartop Link input 6-102, 9-7
TC, Tach Signal input 6-101, 9-6 TX+, Cartop Link input 6-102, 9-7
TCP/IP 5-22
TCP/IP Addresses 8-4 U
setting on the iBox 7-8 UETS, Up Emergency Terminal Limit switch input 6-103, 9-8
Temporary Cartop Wiring 2-13 ULM, Up Leveling Marker Sensor input 6-102, 9-7
Temporary CTS Relay Bypass 2-13 Unintended Motion Fault message 6-68
TERMINAL LEARN ON message 6-67 UNINTENDED MOTION FLT message 6-59
TERMINAL SYNC FAULT message 6-68 UNT1, Up Slowdown Limit switch #1 input 6-103, 9-8
Terminal synchronization 4-3 UNT2, Up Slowdown Limit switch #2 input 6-103, 9-8
Terminal Synchronization Fault message 6-68 UNT3, Up Slowdown Limit switch #3 input 6-103, 9-8
Test Mode message or Test message 6-68 UNT4, Up Slowdown Limit switch #4 input 6-103, 9-8
Test point signal descriptions 9-29-6 UNT5, Up Slowdown Limit switch #5 input 6-103, 9-8
Test switch, iBox control 7-11 UNTD, Up Normal Limit Direction switch input 6-103, 9-8
THIS CAR ALT FIRE message 6-68 UP DIR LIMIT OPEN message 6-68
This Car Alternate Fire Sensor Recall message 6-68 Up Direction Limit Open message 6-68
THIS CAR MAIN FIRE message 6-68 Up Emergency Terminal Switch Position Fault message 6-69
This Car Main Fire Sensor Recall message 6-68 Up Emergency Terminal Switch Shutdown message 6-69
Time, setting 8-38 UP ETS POSITION FAULT message 6-69
TM, Motor Triac active indicator 9-11 UP ETS SHUTDOWN message 6-69
Torqmax Display 2-20, 2-24 Up Normal Terminal Switch n Level 1 Speed Fault 6-69
TORQMAX Drive 3-13 Up Normal Terminal Switch n Level 2 Speed Fault 6-70
adjusting for motor current limiting 4-14 Up Normal Terminal Switch n Position Fault message 6-70
Auto-tuning for induction motors 2-44 UP NTSn L1 SPEED FLT message 6-69
fine tuning 4-10 UP NTSn L2 SPEED FLT message 6-70
Synchronizing PM gearless machines 2-10, 2-18 UP NTSn POSITION FLT message 6-70
verifying car direction 2-39 Up switch, iBox control 7-11
TORQMAX Drive Parameters Quick Reference 9-23 Up, iBox status LED 7-10
TORQMAX Drive, verifying parameters 2-23 up/down speed difference, adjusting for 4-10
Torqmax F5 drive 2-20 Upgrade Options 8-43
Traveling cable 2-5 User code accessing an invalid logical indicator (internal
Troubleshooting event) message 6-70
Circuit boards 6-74?? USER DEF EVENT FAULT message 6-70
ICE-COP board diagnostics 6-75 User Defined Event n Off message 6-70
ICE-CTP Cartop Processor Board diagnostics 6-80 User Defined Event n On message 6-70
ICE-CTP Cartop Processor Board Quick Reference 6-78 User Defined Event Fault message 6-70
ICE-EB Emergency Brake Board Quick Reference 6-82
ICE-FML Field Module Logic Board Quick Ref 6-83 V
ICE-IEQ Earthquake Board Quick Reference 6-86 VE-, Velocity Encoder input 6-101, 9-7
ICE-IMP Main Processor Board Quick Reference 6-88 VE+, Velocity Encoder input 6-101, 9-7
ICE-IRB Relay Board Quick Reference 6-90 Vector Checksum Fault 6-70
ICE-IRD Rear Door Board Quick Reference 6-93 Vector Comparison Fault 6-70
ICE-MIAC Multiple Input AC Board Quick Ref 6-95 Vector Creation Fault 6-70
ICE-MIAC-24V Multiple Input Board Quick Ref 6-95 Vector Learn Fault 6-70
ICE-MOR Multiple Output Relay Board Quick Ref 6-97 Velocity Encoder
ICE-RG Rope Gripper Board Quick Reference 6-99 Connections 2-10, 6-101, 9-7
ICE-SAF Safety Board Quick Reference 6-100 connections 2-10
ICE-SF Serial Fixtures Board Quick Reference 6-105 encoder cables 2-11
iControl messages 6-136-70 wiring 2-10
iLink 6-80 verify releveling 4-5
removing & replacing circuit boards 6-73 verifying brake current resistance 2-9
SC-HCDA-ISO Serial Hall Call Driver Isolation Board Verifying Correction and Stop 4-3
Index-13
verifying Motor Overload Protection 2-47
verifying Speed feedback 2-41, 2-43
Version Info, viewing on iBox 7-7
View and set parameters on the iBox 7-4
View factory data on iBox 7-7
View menu
contents 8-26
View/register calls using iBox 7-7
Voltage decay time, adjusting for final stop 4-25, 4-27
W
Watchdog 5-14
Watchdog Ordered Control Stop Before Reset message 6-70
Watchdog Ordered Emergency Stop Before Reset 6-70
Weakening delay parameter 4-19
Weakening voltage 2-36
wiring
the serial hall call fixtures 5-19
Velocity Encoder 2-10
Wiring the Brake 2-9
Wiring the Hoist Motor 2-9
Working offline, editing a configuration file 8-23
Write Enable switch, iBox control 7-11
Write permission 5-13
Write Privilege 8-20, 8-31
Write privilege
acquiring 2-14, 2-16
OK 2-14, 2-16
Write privilege timeout 5-13
Z
Z-, Velocity Encoder input 6-101, 9-7
Z+, Velocity Encoder input 6-101, 9-7
Index-14 Manual # 42-02-2223

Icontrol AC Rel 3 4 42-02-2223 B5

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Icontrol AC Rel 3 4 42-02-2223 B5

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Icontrol AC Rel 3 4 42-02-2223 B5

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Motion Control Engineering, Inc.

11380 White Rock Road

voice 916 463 9200

Manual # 42-02-2223, Rev B5, July 2015

Warning and Disclaimer

Safety and Other Symbol Meanings

Section 2. Construction Mode

Section 4. Final Adjustment

Section 5. System Options

Section 8. Using iView

AC flux vector drive

Standard cabinet dimensions:

Measurements are approximate

Markers: wiring knock-out

1-2 Manual # 42-02-2223

Load weighers (optional)

iLink cartop box

iLand Compact landing system

System Interconnect Diagrams

SYSTEM: Hall calls, Parking, Special operating modes

Cartop Cartop Cartop

1-4 Manual # 42-02-2223

Figure 1.4 Car Control Interconnection

Field Outputs Outputs

Fixture Data Serial Fixtures

Serial Hall Calls

Figure 1.5 Cartop Interconnection

iLAND LANDING SYSTEM

iLINK CARTOP BOX Position Encoder

Field Outputs Outputs Sensor Board Landing Zone

Figure 1.6 Central Dispatcher (iCentral) Interconnection

Hall Calls To Cars

Figure 1.7 Local/Dispatcher (Comm-connect) Interconnections

iView iMonitor or iReport

Hall Calls To Cars

1-6 Manual # 42-02-2223

Table 1.1 Installation Specifications

1-8 Manual # 42-02-2223

Before You Begin

2-2 Manual # 42-02-2223

Machine Room Preparation

Ethernet and Internet Considerations

Table 2.1 System, LAN, & 3=PC TCP/IP Addresses

Group IP, Primary System/Serial

System all 192.168.192.201-202 1-20 192.168.192.001-020 192.168.192.211-214

*192.168.191.101 is typically used for the iView PC.

2-4 Manual # 42-02-2223

1. Mount cabinets securely to the machine room floor.

2-6 Manual # 42-02-2223

Main Line Power and Wiring the Controller

Initial Controller Power Up

2-8 Manual # 42-02-2223

AC Hoist Motor, Brake, and Velocity Encoder

Checking the Hoist Motor

Wiring the Hoist Motor to the Controller

Verifying Brake Current Resistance

5. If necessary, adjust RB resistance by loosening and sliding the center-tap up or down.

Wiring the Brake

Velocity Encoder Installation and Wiring